JP2022073399A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suppress the deterioration of reliability.SOLUTION: Performance control means executes a first notification to notify the outside that a game state is a specific state using a predetermined notification member when receiving the information regarding the start of the specific state, and terminates the first notification when receiving the information regarding the termination of the specific state to execute a second notification different from the first notification using a predetermined notification member. When the performance control means does not receive the information regarding the termination of the specific state after a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which information transmission by transmission means becomes impossible, the first notification continues even after the specific state is terminated. The continued first notification continues even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, and is terminated on the basis of the ball entry into a start port after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 182

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

In recent years, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a setting change function in order to make the playability more diverse. In such a gaming machine, for example, setting information such as a hit probability can be set to any of a plurality of settings by a setting-related operation by the hall manager (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-54945

However, when a new function is added to the gaming machine, there is a possibility that a new fraudulent act that abuses it may be performed, and there is a concern that the reliability of the gaming machine may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in reliability.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. The action and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

In the invention according to claim 1, in order to achieve the above-mentioned object,
A game board is provided in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed, and a game ball enters a starting port provided in the game area to execute a symbol-variable game, and a big hit in the symbol-variable game. In a gaming machine in which a jackpot game can be executed by deriving the result, and the symbol variation game can be executed by setting a predetermined set value for the game when the power is turned on.
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game, an effect control means for controlling the progress of the effect, and
A transmission means for transmitting information from the main control means to the staging control means, and
Equipped with
The main control means starts a specific state in which the set value can be determined or confirmed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and ends the specific state when the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
When starting the specific state, information regarding the start of the specific state is transmitted from the main control means to the staging control means through the transmission means.
When the specific state is terminated, information regarding the termination of the specific state is transmitted from the main control means to the staging control means through the transmission means.
Upon receiving the information regarding the start of the specific state, the staging control means executes the first notification to the outside to notify the outside of the specific state by using the predetermined notification member, and receives the information regarding the end of the specific state. The first notification is terminated, and a second notification different from the first notification is executed using a predetermined notification member.
When the staging control means cannot receive the information regarding the end of the specific state due to a transmission cutoff situation in which the information transmission by the transmission means is disabled, the first notification is performed even after the specific state is completed. Is to continue,
The continuous first notification is characterized in that it continues even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved and ends based on the entry of the ball into the start port after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved.

In the above configuration, when the effect control means cannot receive the information regarding the end of the specific state due to the transmission cutoff situation in which the information transmission by the transmission means becomes impossible, the first notification is sent even after the end of the specific state. Since the continuous first notification is continued even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, whether or not the transmission cutoff status is resolved if the transmission cutoff status is illegally generated in the specific state. Regardless of this, the traces will remain, and it will be possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities. Further, since the first notification is terminated based on the entry of the ball into the starting port after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the transmission cutoff status has already been resolved. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine (see, for example, paragraphs 3074 to 3105, FIGS. 274 and 275).

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in reliability.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a staging operation unit is in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front and upper, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. be. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory diagram of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in a clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing which cut at the shear line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same portion as (a) in the conventional door frame. (C) is a table comparing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate in the present embodiment product and the conventional product. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and bottom. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit in a state where the staging operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the moving end upward, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the staging operation unit in a state where is moved to an ascending position. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit in a state where the staging operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the moving end downward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the staging operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the staging operation unit unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detection bodies in the staging operation unit of the staging operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of a plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the staging operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is sectional drawing which cut in the Wu line in FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the oo line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state where the outer layer of two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is a transparent outer layer in (a) while leaving the inner layer as it is. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state of. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the staging operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which enlarges and shows the vicinity of a tank rail in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of the 2nd Embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in the cross section. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the right rear. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the left rear. (A) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of an external terminal board, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 114 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (A) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of (a). ) Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a seen perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from behind after being disassembled. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the cake line. FIG. 119 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) behind the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a). It is a sectional view. FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of the sea line. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from behind after being disassembled. (A) is a perspective view of the spherical path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the spherical path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elimination of the ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of a linear fraudulent tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is a front view of the game board which made the center accessory etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring routing from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner. (A) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel plate and obstacle nails, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 148 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 shows the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled from the back in FIG. 148. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate viewed from the rear and disassembled. (A) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as viewed from the rear. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back lower front decoration body of the back lower front staging unit and the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear staging unit are moving to the ascending position in the back unit, respectively. The back-up front decoration body of the back-up front effect unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, and the back-up-back decoration body of the back-up back effect unit has moved to the upper side of the back-bottom front decoration body. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back bottom rear decoration body of the back bottom rear staging unit is moving to the lower side of the back bottom front decoration body. In the state of FIG. 155, the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front staging unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back-up and back-effect unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-down and back-effect unit is raised and is in contact with the back-up and back-decoration body. It is a front view of the game board which shows. In the state of FIG. 157, the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front staging unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. The back-up front decoration unit in the back unit is moving to the descending position, and the back-up rear decoration unit is moving behind the back-up front decoration unit. The back lower front decoration of the front staging unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and the back lower rear decoration of the back lower back production unit rises behind the back lower front decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with the decoration body after the back-up. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a front view of the game board of the 2nd Embodiment which shows the state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of a game panel, and the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed is shown. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the front right plate of the center and the ball guiding unit viewed from the front in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is a figure. (A) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164. It is a cross-sectional view cut in FIG. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the starter line in FIG. 164. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 viewed from the front left. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 167. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 173. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control unit following FIG. 174. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect pre-determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a lottery table (A) at a low probability, a lottery table (B) at a high probability, a big hit symbol determination table (C), an immediate short hit symbol determination table (D), and a small hit symbol determination table (E). .. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the variation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol stop process (step S284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the relief number counting process (step S394). It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of a game state. This is a concrete example of the production until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a specific example of the effect when the ball enters the second starting port during the execution of the count effect. This is a concrete example of the production until the lottery result becomes an immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the count suppression period. It is a time chart which shows the immediate short hit symbol invalid period. It is a time chart which shows the time of the combined use of the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of the RTC production. It is a time chart which shows the progress of the effect before and after the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is a time chart which shows the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is a time chart which shows the effect progress when the start condition of RTC effect is satisfied after the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is a time chart showing the progress of the production before and after the immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the production progress when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before it becomes an immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the production progress when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the immediate short hit. It is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating the operation at the time of power-on for executing RAM clear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the history display which can be displayed during the period when the setting of a setting value is changed and the display confirmation of a setting value is performed. It is a time chart which shows the behavior related to a normal symbol at the time of power-on. It is a time chart which shows the change of the gaming state when the RAM clear operation is performed in the time saving state. It is a time chart which shows the change of the gaming state when the RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of the symbol variation which the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state. This is a modified example of the RAM clear condition showing the operation at the time of turning on the power to execute the RAM clear. It is a time chart which shows the change of the gaming state when the power supply is restored after the power supply in the main control board is cut off. It is a time chart which shows the change of the gaming state when the power supply is restored and the setting key ON signal is input after the power supply in the main control board is cut off. It is a time chart which shows the effect progress in the case where the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol change which becomes an immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the effect progress in the case where the weak game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol change which becomes an immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the effect progress when a strong game stop state occurs during execution of a symbol change which becomes an immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the effect progress in the case where the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol variation which the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state. It is a time chart which shows the effect progress when the weak game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol variation which the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state. It is a time chart which shows the effect progress when the strong game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol variation which the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times in a low probability state. It is a lottery table and a design determination table of a modification. It is a time chart which shows the immediate short hit time in the control of a low probability time saving state B. It is a time chart which shows the immediate short hit time in the control of the low probability time saving state A of 100 times started with the big hit C as a trigger. It is a block diagram which shows the connection between a pachinko machine and an external device. It shows the situation when the pachinko machine transitions from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and further transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state B. It shows the situation when the pachinko machine transitions from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C, and further transitions to the new low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state C. It is a front view which shows the function display unit. It shows the situation when the pachinko machine transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state A via a big hit, and further transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state A. It is a time chart showing the progress of the production when the power is turned on. Various tables showing a symbol determination table (A) at the time of normal hit in a modified example and a list (B) of opening / closing patterns of variable winning openings. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state in the modification. The lottery table (A) at the time of low probability, the lottery table (B) at the time of high probability, the big hit symbol determination table (C), the immediate short hit symbol determination table (D), and the small hit symbol determination table (E) in the modified example. Various tables to show. Various tables showing the immediate short hit symbol determination table (A) in the non-time reduction state and the immediate short hit symbol determination table (B) in the non-time reduction state in the modified example. Various types showing the lottery table (A) at the time of low probability, the lottery table (B) at the time of high probability, the jackpot symbol determination table (C) at the non-time saving state, and the jackpot symbol determination table (D) at the time reduction state in the modified example. table. In the modified example, the symbol determination table (A) at the time of normal hit, the list of opening / closing patterns of the variable winning opening (B), the immediate short hit symbol determination table (C) in the non-time reduction state, and the immediate short hit symbol determination in the time reduction state. Various tables showing the table (D). (A) An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state when the specified immediate short hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and (b) When the specified immediate short hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of a game state. It is a time chart which shows the change of the game state when the variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be executed at the same time. This is a specific example of the effect when there is no variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol. This is a specific example of the effect when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol. It is a time chart which shows the change of the game state when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed. This is a specific example of the effect when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the door frame top unit and the staging operation unit which can be attached to and detached from the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination target of the ID code. It is explanatory drawing which shows the grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in a door frame. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the suggestion effect performed as the effect during the change of a symbol. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the suggestion effect which is executed as the effect during change of a symbol when there is a part which ID code does not match with respect to a game board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the button effect A during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the button effect B during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the button effect C during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the effect operation unit is not operated in the button effect B during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the squeeze prevention display is executed after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case of erasing the entanglement prevention display after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the execution of the simulated rainbow effect is restricted. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the light emission confirmation of the LED is performed at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which attached the rainbow single decoration part to the game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rainbow single decoration part. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the simulated rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow single decoration part is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rainbow single decoration part of another example. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed at the time of the initial position error of the front decoration body on the back side. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed when the situation that the effect image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized in the effect display device occurs. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed at the time of the occurrence of the 1st to 3rd abnormalities. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the 1st to 3rd abnormalities occur during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the annular decoration part. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a rainbow effect using a ring decoration part. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line connection is maintained during the setting confirmation state. Time indicating the behavior of the pachinko machine when winning a prize to various starting ports is detected after the command line is reconnected after the command line is reconnected in an abnormal situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a chart. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state is completed in the situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line connection is maintained during the setting confirmation state. A time chart showing the behavior of pachinko machines when winning a prize at various start ports is detected after the command line is reconnected after the command line is reconnected after the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. be. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the setting confirmation state is terminated after the command line is reconnected during the setting confirmation state in the situation where the command line connection is cut off at the start of the setting confirmation state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state is completed in the situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It shows the history display that can be displayed during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is not connected. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line is reconnected while the door frame is open in the situation where the frame decoration member is not connected after the connection of the command line is cut off. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the command line is reconnected before opening the main body frame in the situation where the frame decoration member is not connected after the connection of the command line is cut off. A time chart showing the behavior of pachinko machines when the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the frame decoration member is not connected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends. be.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the ascending position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the ascending position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4 and the main body are formed by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame and the hinge member 60 below the outer frame. The hinge under-frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is performed by an operation of a player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first large winning opening 2006 for granting (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, and the lower right unit 2400 and the back unit according to the game state that changes by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, the back top rear production unit 3500, the back bottom rear production unit 3600, etc. , Can entertain the player.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 is increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side is further formed. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to the outside. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, in the outer frame right assembly 20, the outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a certain width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 is increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the lateral fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is attached to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook hook member 24 and the lower hook hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. A flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hook piece portion 25b in the front-rear direction. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is mounted on the mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 has an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. It is equipped with a mechanism 44.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and is removed from the position toward the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as wide as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface moves backward. It is provided with a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or on the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extend back and forth. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (the curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to communicate with each other through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is slanted upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the effect sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a locking member 52 and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a that is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b behind the bearing groove 51c by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion posterior to the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. It is provided with a hinge pin 60c under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the horizontal portion 60a up and down. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape with the upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the member 43 behind the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca is gradually narrowed, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It includes a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 after the handle mounted to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 to launch a game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) that is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the front entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the ball passage port 101g for the upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that penetrate the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. It can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211.

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the portion extending vertically is formed. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending up and down in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112 with the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hooking member 116 and the hooking member 116 are provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b which penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear pieces that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a rear piece on the left side mounted on the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a rear piece on the right side mounted on the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the portion of the insertion hole penetrating the front and rear on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. , Is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the flange member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged and rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b in a state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is installed.

In this door frame lower hinge member 125, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. Is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a) as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the rear. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state rotated by 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at the portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at the portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation in the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It is equipped with 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably mounted on the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. In the second cam member 135, the lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees with respect to the respective rotation axes. are doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state where the shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked to the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

The cylinder lock 130 is in a state in which the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece portion. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. In addition to being attached to the right portion, the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated from a normal state in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction at an angle of 90 degrees, respectively, by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, since the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the distance in the left-right direction between the rotation center of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from a normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are mounted so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees, Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is located at any rotation position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected by. The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked in a good manner.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 (rotation transmission member 133) with respect to the axis of the cylinder body 131. Since the shaft core of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the door.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, since the second arm 137 is connected to the first arm 136 and the portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 which are separated from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees, the second arm 137 is connected to each other. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, so that the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape on the surface, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the lock unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 that is open and the front cover 141 that is open in the front and rear while closing the rear end of the front cover 141. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are rear-covered 142 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing rear unit 240 And the portion of the ball ejection taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144, which is below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 141b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis core side, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted to the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and is on the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move downward of the operation transmission unit 242b. Along with this, the operating plate 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by a spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when the ball striking port 142a in the rear cover 142 is viewed from the rear. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2004 or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens toward the rear on the lower right side of the front view of the ball passage 150a and the penetrating ball passage 150a and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b and.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the foul ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower ends are rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the person in charge of the game hall, or the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the full tank of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f that can be contacted (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the actuating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the downstream end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It is provided with a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 is a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To mount the glass unit 160 on the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit mounting member 163 mounted on the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body portion 171 having a predetermined outer periphery and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, which will be described later, an out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper plate 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disk-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and a handle 195 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urging in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b extending outward radially at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two extending in an arc shape around a rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even by turning the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is mounted on the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative boards 184, one in the center, three with a certain interval in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am doing it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. When the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, a set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the front handle lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decorative substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of the 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the handle 195 is being rotated, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. The handle cover decorative board 293 is provided with an annular board cover 294 that covers the decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylinder portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a toward the front. The inner circumference of the cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c extending forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to penetrate through the middle wall portion 291b and the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (here, three) ridges 291d, which are projected inward from the ridge and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f protruding forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It is provided with an opening 291h penetrating in the lower part of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape having an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portions 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction with an interval of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g, the U-shaped guide portion is formed. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and has a size in the range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and an annular base portion 292a extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portion 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 from the center on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 sets can be controlled by a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short time. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a steering wheel front lens 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outer side of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety that the hand (finger) is thrust into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side thereof. Can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 via the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch opening 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 through the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for driving the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented production can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily changed by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting a driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visually closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since a handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, a handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where the player is present, which can have a strong impact on the player and attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the game is played against the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291). When the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player is entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is generated by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air inside the enclosure 624 by the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transferred to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening portion 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the finger of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , It is possible to surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the operation amount of the steering wheel operation, entertain the player, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By cooling the inside of the unit 290 and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 or The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blade portions 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism are not damaged, making it possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and the damage to the handle unit 180 makes it unsuitable for players. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile, so that the handle of a conventional pachinko machine is used. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to make it easy to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h penetrating are provided in a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and a plurality of handle covers 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c at the front end. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be operated by grasping it by hand in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, or the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only a finger, or the outer ring. The steering wheel unit can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile by the portion 195c, can be operated by hooking a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b, or can be operated so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as picking the inside and the outside of the 290 with a finger and capable of driving a variety of game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by the fingers so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form of extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the upward pressure on the game area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be made relatively large. The large gaming area 5a can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing and attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c to the front can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a is not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is driven, so that only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201, a plate base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on the plate and projects forward, the dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and the ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It is equipped with.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the lower plate main body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 251 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the staging operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. The unit is provided with a relay board unit 330.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 can be projected upward from the staging operation unit cover unit 310, and is attached to the staging operation unit unit 350 provided with the staging operation unit 301 and the staging operation unit base 315 to perform the staging operation. The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and the staging output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward output of the staging operation unit 350 by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided. There is.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the staging operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the staging operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the staging operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 73). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is submerged below the ball lending operation unit 220.

In the state where the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feeding port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) to the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50A is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. 50B is a cross-sectional view showing the main portion of the door frame by cutting the same portion as in (a). It is sectional drawing which shows the main part, (c) is the table which compared the number of the game ball stored in the lower plate in this Example product and the conventional product. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the staging operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d faces the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 closes in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is extended diagonally to the left front. It is tilted to. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the left side wall of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball After the removal, the game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower plate ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though there is a sufficient area in the lower plate 202 where the game ball B can be stored. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Further, the plate base unit 210 has a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate lending operation unit 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-drilling unit (not shown) and a pre-dish ball pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-dish ball pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. The speaker port 211b to which the punching metal is attached on the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the center of the left and right sides of the front view and extends to the rear in a tubular shape, and the lower plate. A notch 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion extending in a tubular shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is equipped with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and the upper plate 201 The game ball B inside is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of the present embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guide portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper plate 201 by the ball removal guide path 241c to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (the left portion of the lower plate 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50A, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guide portion 213 forms the inner wall on the left side facing the inner wall on the right side where the ball removal guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c formed in a cylindrical shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the inner wall on the left side (ball guiding portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (rear end of the lower plate 202) at the portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. There is a distance (gap) that can be distributed. As a result, when the game ball B circulating from the upper plate 201 to the ball pulling guide portion 241c comes into contact with the ball guide portion 213 from the right side, the game ball B is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide portion 213. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. That is, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) in the lower plate 202.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), since the lower plate ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as the conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, it is guided by the ball removal guide path 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall on the left side of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while bouncing to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b in the lower plate 202. Instead, it will be stored in the right area in the lower plate 202 provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of the game ball B (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 50 (b)) is concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202, and the right side of the lower plate 202 is stored. When the game ball B concentrated in the area blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B is not discharged from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side, so that the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 will operate and it will be determined that the lower plate 202 is full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the game ball B that has been distributed through the ball pulling guiding portion 241c is guided to the left region in the lower plate 202. can do. Further, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) or the upper plate ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) through between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the mouth 211c and the rear end of the lower plate 202. The game ball B discharged to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower plate 202, and the game ball B can be stored in the entire lower plate 202. Therefore, even though there is a sufficient area in the lower plate 202 where the game ball B can be stored, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

As a proof of the above-mentioned effects, the inventors of the present application have stored the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product in the lower plate 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated. The number of game balls B was counted. The counting of the game balls B was performed 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50 (c), the lower plate 202 (the product of the present embodiment) of the present embodiment has a larger number of stored game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that the game ball B could be stored about 40% more than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Precision plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted backward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part near the right end is closed is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, a staging operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of the staging operation unit 300 is mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the rented game ball B and return them, adjust the volume, and adjust the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has transparency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball removal button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and the character "ball" is given on the upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the staging display device 1600. The light amount adjusting button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjusting button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the staging operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the staging display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. The loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light will be changed, and it will take time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 and the rear base 241 which are attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the part where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and is open toward the front. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving port downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end of the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed in the position. The ball feeding taxiway 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extraction portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates on the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact with the door.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the actuating receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The withdrawal button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the countersunk ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the working rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact with the ball pulling member 143 can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided into the lower plate ball supply port 211c from the notch portion 211d through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively, separated from each other to the left and right. The left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

A plate left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so as to become wider in the vertical direction toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes a staging operation unit mounting portion to which the staging operation unit 300 is mounted. .. The staging operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to completely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has transparency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate left decorative body 271 can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative board 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has transparency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decoration 276 and has transparency. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. It is possible to form a step raised on the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 side with the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger by using the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and bottom. be. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and FIG. 55 (b) is the effect operation from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the staging operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit in a state where the staging operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The staging operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the staging operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303. In the staging operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the staging operation unit 300.

The staging operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape. The operation unit base 315 to be attached and the effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 adjusts the staging operation unit 350 having the staging operation unit 301, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the staging operation unit 350, and the protrusion output of the staging operation unit 350. It is equipped with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The staging operation unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move upward and backward from the upper surface of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The staging operation unit cover unit 310 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The staging operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the staging operation unit 300 (around the staging operation unit 350) at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is equipped with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the staging operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape having a diameter of 216 mm.

The staging operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

In the staging operation unit cover unit 310, at least the unit upper cover 312 has translucency, and can be light-emitting decorated by light emission of a plurality of LEDs of the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the dish left decorative body 271 and the dish right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the staging operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper portion is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the staging operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The staging operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, on the main body 315a, a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the staging operation unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the substrate base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body unit 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the staging operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the staging operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit top cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 (front decorative substrate 321 and rear decorative substrate 322), a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative substrate 364, and an operation button. The connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The staging operation unit 350 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The staging operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the staging operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The staging operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparently formed. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the staging operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about ½ of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the staging operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inside having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detector 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be decorated with light emission in a state of being.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) with the upper surface or the side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparently formed. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from a plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a protrusion from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shaft 362 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper end of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the staging operation unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the staging operation unit 301 (staging operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the staging operation unit 301. Further, the vibration of the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of stages of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the staging operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the staging operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the staging operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The staging operation unit 350 is supported by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit top cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 can be seen as one sphere. When the staging operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the staging operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the staging operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the staging operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the staging operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the staging operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the player can be more entertained.

In the above, the button main body 351 is made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower side may be difficult to see through the button main body 351 and may be opaque or translucent. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351 so that the appearance of the staging operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Staging operation unit elevating mechanism]
The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the staging operation unit unit 350. The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the staging operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns arranged symmetrically, the lower end of which is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and the upper end of which extends upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. The guide shaft 362 and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of elevating springs 365 having a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted therein and urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It has a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, which are attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft projects upward. The spur gear-shaped lift gear 368, which is engaged with the lift drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lift mechanism base 361, is rotated by the spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 and the driven gear 369. A lift cam drive gear member 370, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. It includes a member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and is attached to the pressing detection sensor 373 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is equipped with a projectile output detection sensor 375 that detects the projectile output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascent and descent of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 has an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by abutting the lower protrusion portion on the upper protrusion portion of the gear cover 372. can.

The decorative substrate 364 in the button has a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface thereof as full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and is notched at two facing points, and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and a first cam 371b. The second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, and the third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (directing operation unit unit 350) urged upward by the elevating spring 365. Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protrusion portion into contact with the lower end of the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the staging operation unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the staging operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the staging operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the staging operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the staging operation unit 350 lowers the staging operation unit 350 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 causes the button base 354. 354d of the detection piece can be detected, and the pressing operation of the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, the elevating cam member 371. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the unexpected output adjusting mechanism 380.

The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the staging operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The staging operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the staging operation unit unit 350 (the staging operation unit 301) with respect to the staging operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button to emit light.

In the normal state of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55A). See). In this normal state, the staging operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the staging operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit top cover 312 in the staging operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the staging operation unit 350 coincide with each other, and the staging operation unit cover unit 310. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the descending position), it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c Together, the button base 354 rises, and the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the press detection sensor 373, the press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the effect operation unit 350 is raised by the protrusion output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

When the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55B, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the third of the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, in the state where the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire staging operation unit 350 (staging operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the staging operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in this raised position, the staging operation unit 350 causes the elevating spring 365. It moves downward against the urging force of the button base 354 and comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the staging operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

To return the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the staging operation unit 350 to the descending position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 was moved downward by the extruding output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. It is in a state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also applied. It becomes weak and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and the damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the staging operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is set to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 a clock in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved to the third cam 371e by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Will move upward along. Then, when the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position above the descending position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (staging operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2004 or the like. By making the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 different (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. can.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button body 351 (staging operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the staging operation unit 350 upward, so that the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward (the momentum (pressing operation unit 303)). The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjustment screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer circumference, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjustment screw. It is provided with an elevating spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365.

The protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the bump output adjustment drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the base main body 361a and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower adjustment screws 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending back and forth, a screw hole 385b that penetrates up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The guide shaft 362 penetrates the elevating spring lower holding member 385 at the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

The protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 moves the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 becomes smaller (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the staging operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward. And, the urging force for urging the staging operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. Thereby, the protrusion output of the staging operation unit 350 can be adjusted upward by the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating spring lower holding member by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being further compressed, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 from being damaged.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 projects the staging operation unit 350 so as to come into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, according to the gaming state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the button body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the staging operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and be damaged at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion output of the staging operation unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the lift spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the elevating spring 365 at an early stage. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of staging operation unit]
Next, the operation of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative substrate of the effect operation unit, the decorative substrate outside the button, and the decorative substrate inside the button in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the staging operation unit is in the raised position. The staging operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a staging operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contacting or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state where the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the staging operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical staging operation unit 300. This makes it easier for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the staging operation unit 301.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the staging operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the staging operation unit 300, the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (staging operation unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The staging operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative substrate 355 and the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, centering on the button inner decorative substrate 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button are arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The staging operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect such that light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 are emitted. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges.

In the normal state of the staging operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 (staging operation unit 350) is in a descending position where the upper surface thereof coincides with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image urging the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effect, and the like. Then, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give an operation feeling to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted by the player. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image urging the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a voice, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) up and down. It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 becomes the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 to reach the ascending position (FIG. FIG. 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351 so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of interest.

After that, the process shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit top cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed by the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player by the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output. May suggest to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the movement range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 that projects upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (staging operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion output of the button body 351 so that the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 allows the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 projecting upward and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. When it is detected that the button body 351 is approaching, the button body 351 (staging operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like suggests the player's expectation for the game. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong protrusion output by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect of performing a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the bump output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect such that the protruding button body 351 is touched may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contacted. Further, at this time, it is desirable to strengthen the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation) can be made difficult. The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button is raised and lowered. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion upward of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the staging operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the elevating spring 365. The urging force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the staging operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the staging operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present a production and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers and the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), and a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect it in multiple stages and utilize it for the production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers and the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers and the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and the game. By dividing the stage into the stage where the person's fingers etc. are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the staging operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the staging operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the descending position, and the elevating spring lower holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56A, the staging operation unit 350 is set to the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type effects, it is possible to entertain the players with various effects and make the players bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the staging operation unit 300, an annular (combining two arcs) outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 for the staging operation unit is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer periphery of the staging operation unit is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the staging operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the staging operation unit 350, a decorative board 364 in the button whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the descending position to the ascending position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 in the outer periphery of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, there is a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the staging operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the staging operation unit unit of the staging operation unit. FIG. 60 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the contact detection sensor main body and a plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the staging operation unit. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the staging operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body are changed. Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the static electricity of the contact detector right 390R. The capacitance is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation of a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , It is possible to further enjoy the player participation type staging in which the contact operation unit 302 is operated. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like on any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "switching by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "switching by another electronic circuit", and "movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement of the unit 270).

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the staging operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the staging operation unit 300. When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the staging operation unit 300 to project the staging operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the staging operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the staging operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the staging operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the staging operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, if the staging operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the staging operation unit 300 or the like, and the staging is performed with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the staging operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the player's fingers or the like are detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the movement of the staging operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the staging operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance is notified to the player, and the staging operation unit 300 or the like is moved backward only in the non-detection state of the second contact detection body 393b to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the staging operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is made into a star shape so as to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detection body 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, an expanded metal, a wire mesh, a metal wire, a plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the staging operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61B, the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the staging operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, so that the player does not detect the contact of the fingers or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the wooline in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. It is attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame left side base 421 and the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed above and below at regular intervals are mounted on the front surface. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed at regular intervals are mounted on the front surface. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and the upper and lower decorative boards 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LEDs 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of the electric wires of is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LEDs 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the two LEDs 423b). Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of the electric wires of is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The reflector 424 on the left side has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in the shape of a dish that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing from the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the reflector 424 on the left side, a mounting hole for mounting on the left side base 421 of the door frame is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A tubular holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in the shape of a dish that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing more is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the door frame left. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The tips of each of them are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The light guide member 427 on the left side has four light guide shafts 427a extending back and forth in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a. , Formed from a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed from a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the upper side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed from a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position slightly rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. (Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the light guide member 427 on the left side, and the light guide member 428 on the left side. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly displayed. It can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be difficult to understand, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 429a can be difficult to understand. The appearance of the light emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view which looked at the right side unit of a door frame from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame right side base 431 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed above and below at regular intervals are mounted on the front surface. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It is equipped with a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433. A right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate to the left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 with a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and is curved to the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the lower end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At the height of the decorative portion 441a) of the 441, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, that is, four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LEDs 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the two LEDs 432b). Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems are controlled, which are 3 systems for 1 set on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c which is divided into 2 sets.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and an LED. Two power lines (one is the ground line) that supply power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 sets, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 sets, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 sets, and 2 in the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c of the upper group of the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LEDs 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame can control only up to 24 systems, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame has the third LED 433c which is divided into two sets. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame has two power supplies for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with a through hole 434a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed from a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the tip surface is on the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Formed from a transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the tip surface is on the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig.). 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is luminescently decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It is molded in two colors with the two types of resins, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig.). 71 (a)). When molding the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and is the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a on the right side right side of the door frame is formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame in a radial pattern. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is luminescently decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the color of the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 is decorated on the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, forming a stand. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that the other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at some positions behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431 to emit light. It is fitted into the decorative hole 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be decorated with light emission. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the door frame in a tsuitate shape can be light-emittingly decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the front side first of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration body 435 on the front door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being decorated with light emission. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independent and luminescently decorated. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting effect having a higher effect.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. As a result, even if the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a is projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadow is projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 in front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and a door. A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. The side speaker (not shown), the top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451. It is provided with a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has a plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has a plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters, and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a portion rearward from the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit which shows in the transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the effect operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 455 on the top of the door frame, the decorative substrate 456 on the top left of the door frame, and the decorative substrate 457 on the right side of the door frame are arranged, these decorative substrates are arranged. By appropriately emitting light from the LED of the door window 101a, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button main body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. This pachinko machine can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can enhance the appeal to the player. It is possible to make it easy to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical staging operation unit 300, the staging operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) is located. And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the staging operation unit 301 to see the entire staging operation unit 301, and the staging operation unit 301 can be displayed. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 is to entertain the player participation type production. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-like pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since the member is different from the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the transmittance of light, and the like, the appearance can be greatly changed even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without incurring a cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multicolor molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which a circular or radial pattern is formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so that the decorative body has a desired shape like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the decoration of the polka dot pattern is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the circle of the polka dot pattern and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are respectively transmitted. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decorations. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the appearance is changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is wandering in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmission rates on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be relatively clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be obscured through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is made invisible from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the view of the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be obscured by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern depending on the shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) can be made on the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since it is equipped with the third LED 433c of 433 and the inner layer 3a is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmission rate than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the door frame is right. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be decorated by light emission, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be shown beautifully. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the interest of the player. More specifically, for example, if two-color molding is described as multicolor molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the game state, the player can be given a chance or change the driving operation (for example, "right-handed") due to the change in the decoration of the decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different between the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Since the impression (view) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner of the front view to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b having the central hub portion 195a extending outward, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other. It has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel (steering wheel) of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and the handle decorative substrate 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative board 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative boards 184, one in the center, three with a certain interval in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference and 2 on the lower side. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 72, these 12 LEDs 293a have two from the center on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 in the lower right and 2 in the lower right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

As described above, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can be used to illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative board 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish right decorative board 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, and the like. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided toward the front.

More specifically, the dish left decorative board 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for emitting the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative board 278 described later. (The figure is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece and 3 pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 422c, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a are mounted. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by 21 systems by the LED driver 423c, and the first LED 423a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. The LED driver 432d of the above is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece and 3 pieces. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LEDs 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 third LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, and the decoration on the right side of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on the front surfaces of each. The number of one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and the system (one point in FIG. 72). (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. This makes it easy to create LED lighting pattern data for performing a light emission effect.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, LEDs 455a, LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative board 457 on the right side of the door frame top is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, And the light from the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The player can be made to "haha" by the light emission effect that emits a spot light.

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative board 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative board 455 of the door frame top, the left decorative board of the door frame top. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated, or the light can be emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72 executes a spot emission effect on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is irradiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting with high brightness and brightness as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426a. Even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and the spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front end of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward (the front end that protrudes forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the light of the spot emission is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness makes it possible to direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, high-intensity spot light emission can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) for guiding the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the staging operation unit is provided. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit is divided into two, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are spaced on the middle circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative substrate 322, 4 are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining 6 pieces are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining 6 pieces are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

As shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 have three sets of two on the inner circumference, two on the inner circumference, and three on the middle circumference, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 73, and four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, on the middle circumference. The three are divided into three sets, one for each, and the nine on the outer circumference are divided into two sets, three each near both ends, for a total of seven sets. That is, in the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 and 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates in the staging operation unit 301 and light emission such that the light is concentrated in the center are emitted. It is possible to show the player a production and a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 101a facing the game area 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of one side and the other side in the left-right direction so that the protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction are different from each other. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. A decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted behind each of the 435s, and a decoration on the lower left side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and a second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make a surface-like light emitting decoration (surface emission), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from the front end (front end surface) of the door frame. Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be light-emitting decorated (spot emission) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light. The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescently decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame is luminescently decorated in a dot pattern on the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 can be luminescent and decorated in dots, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 432 on the side and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are separated from each other is symmetrical to each other, and in each case. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (at the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player various light emission effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emission effects with high effect, and the door window. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED422a, first LED423a, first LED432a, first LED433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are always turned on at the same time. By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make it difficult to see the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in a dot-like manner. Because of this, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a plane and partially emitting in dots, and it emits brightly in dots. The light emission effect can attract the player's attention strongly, and the light emission effect that emits spots in spots, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines, can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the right of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, the identification of various decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 74 and the like, using the door frame 3 as an example. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. A side upper decorative substrate 432, a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used for the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am doing it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board is reflected to the front side so that the decoration body and the like in the front can be brighter and decorated, and the front side (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate plate material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (shown by shading with different shades in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the characters "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The letters "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), attaching a sticker, applying a paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the staging operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b) is provided on the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decorative substrate having a similar shape. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected to the front side on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped at the time of assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare as many decorative boards as necessary, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unattractive by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative board, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Action effect of door frame]
According to the present embodiment, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion. Therefore, since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the desired portion. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 still has the contact detector 393. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired site is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection.

In this way, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more effect means (for example, movable decorative body, light emitting decorative body, effect display device, etc.) by the control means, more various effect can be given to the player by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the contact detector 393 is provided at each of the plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detector 393 provided at the desired part by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of channels that can be used for the production is relatively large. The number can be increased, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances the appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, a connection terminal is provided in advance on the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. Therefore, the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of handling the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed arrangement of the contact detectors 393 is touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the players touch the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and a player participation type production with high game characteristics can be achieved. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 that the player can press and operate. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of the patching metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the button main body can be detected via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350).

When the player's approach or contact with the staging operation unit 350 is detected by using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the staging operation unit elevating and lowering are detected. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, the effect is entertained by the player. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can function as a contact operation unit. Since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button main body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, the effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit unit 350 that is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of staging operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with a player-participatory staging, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button main body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in a state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, so that the button by the contact detector 352 can be increased. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press and operate is enlarged. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the player can approach or contact the staging operation unit unit 350 (button main body 351) by executing the player participation type staging. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the staging operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be hard to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decorative substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is provided on the staging operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of pressing operation, the contact detection body made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit It can be made that the 350 is not easily deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the staging operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the staging operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the staging operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player-participation-type production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same plate thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Further, in the staging operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the staging means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. It is provided so that a predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be achieved. It is possible to surely enjoy the effect output (via) through the operation unit unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the staging means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detection body 352 is in a state of covering the effect means, and the contact detection body 352 (effect operation unit unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can easily provide a staging operation unit 350, a staging means, etc. that exert such an action effect at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to move forward and backward in the vertical direction. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the player approaches the staging operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. When the player's approach or contact with the staging operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the staging operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the staging operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the staging operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player and the player is in contact with the staging operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect not found in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit unit 350 and to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the staging operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operation unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the staging operation unit 350 can be projected with various projecting outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of the staging by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to operate the staging. It is possible to entertain the production by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the protruding output of the staging operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the staging operation unit 350 with his or her fingers or the like, the staging operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes it strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous). It is possible to raise expectations for the situation and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 capable of a pressing operation, when a player participation type staging is executed, the player is made to press the staging operation unit 350 to perform a game. A player can participate in the person-participation-type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the staging operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) can press the staging unit 350 at any time. When the player-participation-type effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type can be obtained by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without guiding the start of execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the staging operation unit 350 is projected by using the drive motor. Therefore, the staging operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-mentioned effects can be more easily exerted.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the staging operation unit unit 350 is detected, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the staging operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a more diverse effect to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player can be brought into the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 with which the player of the staging operation unit 350 comes into contact changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the staging operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or makes contact. Since it is possible to capture the change in the capacitance of the detector 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the staging operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing / retreating (pressing) the staging operation unit 350 by the player, the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button middle decorative board are used. A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can be made to work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the staging operation unit 350, the staging is executed, so that the staging operation unit 350 can function like the staging operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of staging operations. Therefore, by executing a player-participation-type staging that enables the player to perform staging operations, various staging operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory staging, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the staging operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of thresholds of the capacitance for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit unit 350 in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, the staging operation unit 350 that allows the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detection body 352 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the staging operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor main body 358 are provided. Therefore, in the player participation type production, an operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and an operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the motivation of the player to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type staging, the player can be less likely to get bored by various operations using the staging operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the staging operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the staging operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, the staging operation unit 350 can be prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371 until the staging that moves the staging operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the staging operation unit 350 moving or shaking without permission, and the staging operation unit 350 makes the staging more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separated. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above-mentioned, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. 352 or contact detector 352 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 when the hand or the like is brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. The capacitance of the button changes, and the player side is executed because the player side is irradiated with light by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The light radiated to the button can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is used as the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type staging is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or the fingers or the like are approached or brought into contact with each other. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 different according to the distance from the button outer decorative board 355, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398 can be changed to show the player a wider variety of effects, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button are pressed. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398 changes, a game for the button body 351 or the surface member 396. The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be used as a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by thickening the vapor deposition film to have a metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). It changes, and due to the change, a predetermined effect is produced by an effect presenting means such as a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a button inner decorative substrate 364, a protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect display device 1600. A predetermined contact detection body 395 or the like (including a contact detection body 352, a contact detection body left 390L, a contact detection body right 390R, a contact detection body 393, a contact detection body 397, etc.) is provided with design. Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape of the above, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can be made to function as the staging operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can have a strong impact on the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly have an interest in the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351). It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the contact detector 395 or the like that detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, the effect is presented depending on the player at first glance. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation unit 301, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and make the player participation type production more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 395 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like is used. The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like comes into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) by dividing it into multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a designable one without forming the contact detector 395 or the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 or the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 or the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed because it is easy to clean.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design such as foil stamping is used, it is possible to prevent the player from wearing it at an early stage by touching it, and it is possible to improve the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes the player to feel uncomfortable, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. The contact detector 395 and the like can be formed by the corresponding material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 can be changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like close to or touches the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, and the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives an operation feeling. Can be added, and the operation using the button main body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the staging operation unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings the fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351 to bring the contact detector 352. When the entry into the detection area such as a finger is detected by (contact detection sensor main body 358), the game is played through the button main body 351 by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative board 355 outside the button and the multiple LEDs 364a of the decorative board 364 inside the button. Light emission effect that irradiates the person with light, effect that vibrates the player's fingers etc. that are in contact with (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and protrusions upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351. You can do it. At this time, the player is given effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351. Therefore, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, with the player's fingers or the like touching the button body 351 by appropriately moving the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detection body The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the button main body 351 is provided by the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine can be used. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily give effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is operably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It is equipped with a three-dimensional 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 has a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is equipped with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the shape of the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. It is provided with a connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a gaming board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming board mounting section 501c and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is exerted due to the folding habit. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is closer to the door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c for the outer frame of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 for the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the hitting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided at the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is located at the upper end of the tank rail 553, separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the left-right direction and leftward in the front view. The second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is equipped with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 91).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends back and forth at the right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence / absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence / absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout motor 584, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581 and whose rotary shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and has a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the width of the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball ejection passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is seen in the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side branch from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball ejection passage 580b. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 rotates between the guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are formed. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction of the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball-extracting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball-pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball-pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball-pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the pull-out passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pull-out movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, since the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects to the right from the right side of the front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and downwards from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward in the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

In the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side of the front view on the lower surface. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is open just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B discharged (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is released downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is low, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. The 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a closing spring 614, which is in force.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f. Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 551. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Will be.

Then, the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a moves. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 is normally arranged through the upper ball storage passage 600b and directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is in the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharging port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B (the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full. The player is informed that the tank is full) by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!"), And the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until it becomes.

When discharging the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the position of the lower end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction of the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball ejection passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball-pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a than the ball-pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of vertically extending slits, and is a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 in which the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621 in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of the 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit mounted on the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guidance portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It is provided with a 628 and a ball discharge port 629 for downwardly discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball ejection guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B ejected from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and the ejecting ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 has a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d has a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 provides a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board 1310 or the like of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrence against the unauthorized activity is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends up and down the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and door frame that protrudes forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the lock unit 650 is more than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is equipped with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 555, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at the position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 555. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in a front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. This overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

In the front view of the tank rail 553, the right end side (upstream side) communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lower toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions become one line toward the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the reaction force flows inside. By dispersing the pushed directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable staging unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the detour portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j having a height lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface overflows. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It is extended to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction, and are outside the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a length in the left-right direction longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes from the slanted rear end so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that has submerged under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from inside the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has the right end side in the front view from the position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, and the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the anteroposterior direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending in the lateral direction and the vertical direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 555 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped rearward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backwards.

The external terminal board 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 555 in the state of being assembled on the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 102. The left corner portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to being supplied from the island equipment, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest height among the upper edge of the outer circumference. It can be discharged to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and is also discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edges other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 beyond the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B in the detour passage 552g rolls). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B in the tank rail 553, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be in a line with respect to the width direction as the plurality of game balls B are directed toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552 g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed to the rear and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rails and the like]
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of the second embodiment is viewed from behind. FIG. 107 (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front, (c). Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in a cross section. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 555A and the like of the second embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A, and the tank rail 555 of the above embodiment. , The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other, and the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 555A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 555c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the center of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end side extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 555A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and at the uppermost side. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side, and ball biting is prevented from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 555A or the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. As a result, the electric wire (shown by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 555A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached becomes. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B abuts on the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be fully exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the sphere rectifying member 556A can rotate upward to fully exert the rectifying action, and the ball bites or the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the distribution speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A are used. Place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which the electric wire is connected, or place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arrangement of a tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), a terminal board, or the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rails and the like]
Subsequently, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the left rear. FIG. 113A is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 113B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. 114 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and FIG. 114 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail or the like of the third embodiment includes the tank rail or the like of the first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 555, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stopping member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of 557), and the same configuration as described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails and the like of the present embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend to the left and right of the payout base 551 and the ball tank 552 which is open to the left and right in a box shape and is open upward. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the portion and is open upward and extends to the left in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening at the bottom of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream) so that dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided in portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d opens downward and rearward of the tank rail 553 and extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B is present on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, the ball clogging generated at the site can be eliminated through the opening 553d. Further, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted through the opening 553d through the game ball B at the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is to the left of the ball tank 552, and closes the upper part of the predetermined range from the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 extending to the left at a substantially constant depth to the left. The second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the portion spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 in the tank rail 555 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. A ball rectifying member 556 provided at a portion between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 555, and the first rail cover 554. It is provided with a protective cover 559 that straddles the ball rectifying member 556 from the middle of the left-right direction and covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 halfway in the left-right direction.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. ..

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (a) and the like).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one stage, but when the stacked game balls B are reduced from the second stage to the first stage, the game balls B in the upper stage are changed. When trying to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may mesh with each other and become immobile (so-called ball jamming due to ball shavings). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is distributed in two upper and lower stages in the tank rail 553, the game ball B on the upper stage side comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a. By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the player from trying to overtake the lower game ball B. As a result, the game ball B on the lower stage side moves to the downstream side first, and the game ball B on the upper stage side moves to the rear side, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one stage. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper stage side presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and the game on the upper stage side due to its own weight. The ball B can be pressed downward, and the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a) can be swung in the vertical direction to promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper stage side to the lower stage side and the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion (a portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream) in 553.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side of the above, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of the portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the ball rectifying member and the ball rectifying member 556 so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends to the right of the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. In the guide plate portion 559d, the portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be guided to the left. Has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the inclination of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the rear surface of the payout base 551 so that the game ball B cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from the outside in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. To confirm the operation of the ball rectifying member 556, a thin rod is inserted into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to bring it into contact from below, or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is passed through the opening 553d and the operator's finger. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward with the like and lifting it through the game ball B.

Further, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B that has invaded the rear of the external terminal plate 558 to the left by the guide plate portion 559d and discharge it to the outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. ..

In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are formed of a transparent material, and the inside of the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Further, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Further, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dust or dirt adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in the present embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom. More specifically, when dust or dirt adheres to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the ball B is touched through the opening 553d and the game ball B inside is touched via the game ball B or the game ball B. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken, dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B and the like can be removed. Then, dust and dirt dropped from the game ball B and the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, since the portion where the front-rear direction of the tank rail 553 extends to the left at a substantially constant depth is provided behind the external terminal plate 558, the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558a. When the electric wire connected to the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the ball rectifying member 556 rotates upward even if the game ball B abuts on the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 due to the weight of the electric wire. There is a possibility that the ball rectifying member 556 cannot fully exert the rectifying action of the game ball B.

Further, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to the electric wire whose tip is stripped, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the electric wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to the 558a is insufficient, a short circuit may occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can rotate upward, and the rectifying action is fully exerted in the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, when an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal board 558 for some reason and the tip of the electric wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal board 558, the computer in the game hall provides necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit. You will not be able to receive it, and there will be an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has invaded the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body. It can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, and thus it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall controller) of the game hall can receive the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting error in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side surface side of the main body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559, the game ball B is after the main body frame 4. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as disconnection or short circuit by contacting various electric wires and wirings provided on the side.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119 (a) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is the substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. 123 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view cut along the cake line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) behind the door frame.

The substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the substrate unit 620 described above. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the substrate unit 620 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out ball passage 663 and the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guide unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and guides the game ball B to the right in the front view. The game ball B guided by the ball ejection guidance unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball ejection discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open forward. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging and the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, the downward guiding section 663c that guides the gaming ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying section 663b downward, and the lower guiding section 663c. It is open downward and has an out-ball discharge port 663d that discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharging receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving section 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball ejection receiving section 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved curve like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guide portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranking portion of the downward guide portion 663c. Since the portion of the downward guide portion 663c that is bent in a crank shape is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately abuts on the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and is distributed. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage by the lateral guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving unit 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to eject the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide unit 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 make it possible to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a and is driven into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting port 2005, and the first. The number of game balls B that have been accepted into the winning openings such as the large winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 and discharged from the game board 5, and which of the winning openings is accepted after being driven into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B that are received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a (number of shot balls). That is.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the playing state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is set to "payout within a predetermined period." Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. Since the game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, the game board 5 detects the "out ball". It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are used for many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the distribution of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the game. Since the person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. If the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example,). It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the space for the game board 5 to detect the ejected game ball B is secured. By providing a staging device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B is distributed through the vertical guide portion 665 b, so that the game ball B can be distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b that is meandering is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball ejection / discharging passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that it is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball ejection discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the ejected game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the discharged game ball B is less likely to be scattered from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game ball B can be easily collected.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since the game ball B driven into the area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 only by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The simple (simple) configuration can be made, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island equipment side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion (out receiving portion, bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps with the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in a substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the end of the opening is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts on the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket,) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) from the front of the island equipment. Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the island equipment side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the out-ball passage 663 is caused by electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opened downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the lower guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out ball rectifying portion 663b in the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and detects the main body portion 668a whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the main body portion 668a from the base end side and elastically deformable. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f, opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened on the lower surface of the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object (for example, the outer frame 2) shown by the alternate long and short dash line. There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like will open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside or inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that has been interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since it is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 flow, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). It is largely applied to the end side of the base unit 660), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 664 is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third embodiment of the board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and FIG. 127 (b) shows the board unit of (a) in the front left. It is a perspective view seen from. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 129 (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along a coco line in (a), and (c) is a processor line in (a). It is a cut sectional view, and FIG. 130 is a sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 129 (a).

131 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is different from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. The same components as those of the board unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the substrate unit 620 or the substrate unit 620A described above. The board unit 700 has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The substrate unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can be distributed and the first ball path 701, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 in which the game ball B can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 that detects the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and the game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. It includes a second ball sensor 704 that detects B, and a ball pulling passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 is distributed. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are opened upward, respectively, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect the game ball B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 in the game board 5 circulates in the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 has a general prize. The game ball B received in the opening 2001, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. ing. That is, the out ball is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, with respect to the winning openings (winning opening sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, and the second major winning opening 2007 of the game board 5. When fraudulent activity is performed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity against the winning opening. ..

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is attached to the front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 711. A power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface and a ball ejection passage 705 is provided between the rear base 712 and the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are provided. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the clogging of the ball path member 713 and the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. The frame relay board 716 is provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position to the right of the center of the lower peripheral wall portion in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 has the ball path member 713 accommodated therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 rotatably supports the security cover 714 around the axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705. Have. The ball-extracting passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely open to the rear. The ball pulling passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. The portion of the rear base 712 above the speaker box 623 in the ball-extracting passage 705 (the portion on the left end side of the front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides the game ball B backward, and then discharges the game ball B downward, and the second of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding unit 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b protrudes forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first discharge guide portion 712a opens toward the front. , The entrance of the second discharge induction unit 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guidance unit 712a and the second discharge guidance unit 712b are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide unit 712a and the second discharge guide unit 712b is open to the rear of the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball ejection passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located on the left side of the front base 711's elimination port 711b, and are on the left. They are arranged in order from the right to the right. The outlet of the ball ejection passage 705 has a large front end side and a small rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guidance unit 712a and the second discharge guidance unit 712b (FIG. 128 (b). ). That is, the outlet of the ball ejection passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to be lowered from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , The step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the upper right shelf portion 713d inclined so as to be lowered from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right. The rectifying wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the position separated to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e become higher toward the right and the upper right shelf. The lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right of the portion 713d, and the right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right. The upper wall portion 713h extending to the left from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713e extending to the left from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713j and from the left end of the lower wall portion upper 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The middle wall portion 713k that is exposed, the eaves portion 713l that extends downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k toward the left, and the lower shelf portion 713f are short and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower 713n extending to the left in parallel with the lower wall portion upper 713j from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m. The lower portion between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f in the lower wall portion lower 713n is cut out vertically with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, respectively, and a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, and a groove wall portion 713i. It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the upper wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion 713n back and forth.

Further, the ball path member 713 is notched in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall portion 713p. Has a notch 713q. Each notch 713q is provided so that when assembled to the substrate unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. Dust, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and the sensor accommodating the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. It is surrounded by the lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p and the front portion 713s, and is behind the sensor accommodating portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is accommodated. It has 713t and.

At 713s in front of the sensor accommodating portion and 713t after the sensor accommodating portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the portions between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. That is, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cable extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extends to the left from the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t to the left of the middle wall portion 713k. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion lower 713n, and the first ball guiding portion 713u projecting downward and opening rearward is provided. Have. When the first ball guide portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall portion 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge induction unit 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t). ) Is located below the inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. As a result, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located to the right of the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side faces downward and vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so that the left end side becomes narrower toward the left so that one game ball B can pass through. .. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B is distributed). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B and the like, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the elimination port 711b, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the elimination port 711b. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B bitten by the tool. You can eliminate the ball jam by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch portion 713q for clearing ball clogging and dropping dust and dirt downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. Is penetrated from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf portion 713f (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool is further inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 701). There is a risk that the game board 5 provided above may be cheated by extending upward from the ball path 702). Such insertion of an illegal tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, but there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d provided with the notch portion 713q.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extended downward. Even if the tip of the linear fraudulent tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it comes into contact with the obstructing rib 713o and the tip of the tip It can prevent movement and prevent further insertion of fraudulent tools (see Figure 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from executing an illegal act through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities.

In the parts on the right side of the middle wall part 713k in the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower wall on the lower side and the left and right sides thereof are not provided with the notch part 713q. Since it is closed by the upper right shelf part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutout part 713q of the corresponding part of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, and the part is not inserted. No fraudulent activity is committed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of notched portions 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dust and dirt are downwardly passed through the notch portion 713q. Can be discharged to (see FIG. 136). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor accommodating portion 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b are collected in the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall portion upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall portion 713k. As a result, dust and the like do not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 accommodated in the front 713s of the sensor accommodating portion and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating portion by a connector, and the wiring cable and the connector are connected. It protrudes to the left from 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left from the middle wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the sensor accommodating portion front 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting to the left from the middle wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, and a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The first ball path 701 is formed by the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guiding portion 713u, and the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712, and the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. Left wall part 713a, upper left shelf part 713b, step wall part 713c, upper right shelf part 713d, rectifying wall part 713e, lower shelf part 713f, right wall part 713g, groove wall part 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge induction unit 712b of the above.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a to be locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. The elimination port 711b is open when the rear end side is rotated so as to be positioned downward and made vertical. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the security cover 714 can close the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the security cover 714, a linear fraudulent tool can be inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or first ball path 711b) from the elimination port 711b. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. Can be done. This ball clogging clearing work is carried out in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the security cover 714, when the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is a contact-risk object (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is kept open with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , The security cover 714 is in contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, the contact risk object from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when the security cover 714 comes into contact with the body, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the contact risky object, and damage to the security cover 714 or the contact risk object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is open because the game ball B is rarely clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portions of the rear base 712 that are open to the rear on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712a. (Ii) The game ball B that has been distributed through the discharge guide unit 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711, a part of the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 is formed. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B that has fallen to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703, it passes through the first ball guide unit 713u, and then is discharged downward through the first discharge guide unit 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t, it is discharged downward through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712. Will be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and is discharged downward. The front side is the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 uses the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 in order to remove the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. It can be discharged downward through. The first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 705 of the base unit 710 are island equipment. It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) where the game ball B on the side is collected.

According to the base unit 710 in the substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q, dust is passed through the cutout portion 713q. Since dust and dirt can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game ball B and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be made to.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. By removing 5, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. Further, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with the notch portion 713q at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball jam occurs with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the notch portion 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated from the tool.

Further, since the elimination port 711b opened downward is provided in the lower portion of the lower shelf portion 713f below the rectifying wall portion 713e, and the security cover 714 for closing the elimination opening 711b is provided, the elimination port 711b is provided. In addition to being able to clear the ball clogging as described above, by closing the clearing port 711b with the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear fraudulent tool can be used from the clearing port 711b to the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it around the axis in the left-right direction on the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If the security cover 714 is to be closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. It is possible to make people notice that they have forgotten to close it, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward, they are linear. Even if the tip of the illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it can come into contact with the obstructing rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. It is possible to prevent further insertion of unauthorized tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from executing an illegal act through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since the complicated distribution route is configured, even if a linear fraudulent tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide unit 712a or the second discharge guide unit 712b, the intrusion is blocked by the complicated route. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the above, the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 detects the ejected game ball B. It is possible to secure space for the configuration, and by providing a staging device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the out ball is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball is distributed in the second ball path 702, the count number of the safe balls in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are distributed. By comparing with the count number of, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against fraudulent activity.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the game. Since the person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. If the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball pulling passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without the ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game ball B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In the above embodiment, the out ball circulates in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates in the second ball path 702, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is not limited to this. The safe ball may be distributed through the second ball path 702, respectively, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be the first ball path 701 and the second ball regardless of the safe ball and the out ball. Any one of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one that opens and closes the elimination port 711b by rotating the security cover 714 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. The one that discharges through one of the two ball paths is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it is provided with three or more ball paths in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any of the ball paths can be used. The game ball B released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the gaming board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. .. FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory view of wiring wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area in which the game ball is distributed and the obstacle nail. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, which grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B, A first starting port 2004, a second starting port 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a second large winning opening 2007 are provided. In the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a first large winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. The purpose is to entertain the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed through the two major winning openings 2007 and the like.

The game board 5 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160 and the like) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is further equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be used.

The effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. The gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B and the variable winning opening 2003 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. The first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. The first big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the opening 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is equipped with a second major winning opening 2007 capable of accepting the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. ..

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2004 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200. The 2300, the lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and having the second start port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a variable winning opening 2003, a first large winning opening 2006, and a second. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021 and a gate 2002 provided near the center of the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the vertical direction. The gate member 2600 and the like are provided.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a, and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is mounted on the rear wall of the back box 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. The back box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by the lock slider 3020 and the back board unit 3040 arranged behind the back box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 are provided. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back upper front staging unit 3300 provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the inside of the back box 3010. In the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided at the lower rear portion, and the back top rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (FIG. (Refer to 155 and the like), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in the front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 145 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed to have a thin plate thickness because it is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge by a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole penetrating the front and rear and a short elongated hole. It comprises a plurality of engaging steps 1114 and (see FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. Is.

In the panel plate 1110, the large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is the left side and the left side excluding the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through port 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 that is cut out upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion, and has a plurality of protruding pins into which the panel holder 1110 is inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and outside the holding step portion. Three engaging claws that are arranged and elastically engage with the engaging step 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step. It comprises a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each of the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5, and the player can play the game. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed in the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141, 143, 144 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is mounted on the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted). Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first large winning opening sensor 2525, and a second major winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2561, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522, a first major winning opening solenoid 2524, a second major winning opening solenoid 2563, a magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting value. It is equipped with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the center line between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the center line between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position centered on the distance dimension in the vertical direction thereof is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder to be rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a pressing operation unit is provided above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and on the upper left side of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left side of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged therein.

In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion slot, the other equipment is arranged in a row facing the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be set. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In addition, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions completely different from the function of turning on the setting key and the function of turning on the decision key can be realized only by a single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the decision key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are via openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, there is a "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch. As a wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is kept away from each other (separated from each other). At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. (That is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring pattern in which the signal of (1) is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f is formed. The wiring pattern with which the signal from is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting of the setting value will be briefly described, and then the case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In addition, as the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and the operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is used. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the setting key is turned ON. The setting change of the set value may be executed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Perform the opening work, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value increases by 1 from the value of 1 and reaches the maximum value of the set value of 6, the value returns to the initial value of the set value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the cylinder to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, simply turn off the setting key switch 1311a to determine the setting value and remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder. It becomes possible to improve workability.

The person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310 g, and switches from the state of turning on the setting change permission lamp 1311c to the state of turning off the setting value.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the setting value. To complete.

When confirming the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2. Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets the setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is directed clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set after the power of 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). It is necessary that the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is inserted into the switch, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and a normal probability from the time of change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, a jackpot symbol). The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition judgment table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the transition decision from the probability change time to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values are assigned to the various determination values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 8. In this example, setting values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the jackpot probabilities are set to be different for each, but all of them can be set while a plurality of setting values can be set. It is possible to set so that the set values are the same (the jackpot probability is the same). For example, while making it possible to set six setting values, it is possible to set in one step so that all the setting values become the setting value 1. In this way, when all the set values are set values 1, a state in which the set values can be changed occurs in the setting change state, and even if the set values are switched, the set values are set from the set value 1. It is only switched to 1 and the set value is not changed. Further, even if the set value is confirmed in the setting confirmation state, the set value 1 is always confirmed. Here, as the pachinko machine 1, there are a pachinko machine 1 that requires a change in the set value (change in the jackpot probability) and a pachinko machine 1 that does not require the change in the set value (change in the jackpot probability). By making it possible to make all the set values the same, the control program can be used in common regardless of whether or not the set values need to be changed. For pachinko machine 1 that does not require change of set value (change of jackpot probability), only one set value is set without making it possible to set six set values while leaving the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a and the like. It may be possible and the setting in one step may be achieved.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. It is not possible to do this), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160 and the like), and this detection signal is mainly transmitted via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but this setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position to the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. It will be a molded structure. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'can be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Detection from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "variation example (3) of decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 described later A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and a determination key is input based on these firing reference pulses. It may be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the emission reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a range-finding sensor capable of performing is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input. It may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the determination key is turned ON. While it can be determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "variation example (5) of the determination key"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "variation example (7) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned on by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the decision key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU1310a, the main control MPU1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the decision key ON signal, and turns off the signal. May be determined to be ON / OFF. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "a modification of the determination key (8)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. With a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error canceling switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker with the name of each button printed is affixed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation unit of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the press operation unit). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressing operation unit. A different type of switch may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error release switch, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are not routed close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'can be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on this signal. May be good. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. When it is done, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn off 1311a. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise.) Second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched and paid out in the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. Can be done. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding to the portion. It becomes a structure that is molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are not routed close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'may be used (a mode of the RAM clear switch (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn off 1311a. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder, turn OFF, and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise.) Second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port input of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that monitors and creates a command in the process, sends the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and receives this command. It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described in "Modification example (13) of the decision key." May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The input may be determined by the main control MPU 1310a based on these detection signals whether or not the determination key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has been transmitted to the main control board 1310 and received this command may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (16)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the main body frame 4 is still open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn it on again to set the key switch 1311a. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn it on again to set the key switch 1311a. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In addition to preparing for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch). 2 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. With a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the external shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (20)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. Whether or not the determination key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). 3 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2002 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first large winning opening sensor 2525, second major The main control MPU1310a to which the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate 2002 in order to turn on the decision key, or various winning openings. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The operation of the movable body (feature) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (feature) is controlled based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (role). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (24)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and the various winning openings and gates (gate 2002) provided in the game board 5 are used. When a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity to enter the ball is provided in the game board 5, the main control MPU1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and is based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (vibration sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (25)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to play a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio sensors for detecting fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring the game ball B by causing the various sensors of the various winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit unit 350 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). The mode of the unit (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is different. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by intruding a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, and when the cover body is configured to be open or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is relative to the base body. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body open / close switch can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as “a modification of the determination key (28)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern in which a key ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switching button 1311b. As a routing with the wiring pattern in which the signal from is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connector SMCN terminal (main control) of the setting change board 1311 is formed. The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the board 1310 is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring pattern in which the signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Was formed so that it would not be close to each other (separated from each other) with the wiring pattern to be transmitted, but the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch Of the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of 1311a is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , The connector of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the MSCN (connection between boards), and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. The other connector provided in 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "a modification of the determination key (29)").

Further, from the above-mentioned modified examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an embodiment selected and combined as appropriate may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery and the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of Probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, a game specification such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which a probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (degree of advantage) exists only in a single setting value in advance and the setting does not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not necessary at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since it is not necessary to use it at all, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be assigned as the following contents by design change by the software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of the object), lighting of the light emitter)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of the movable body (role)" is assigned and set as the setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (role) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for specifying "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, for each output port)") is assigned, and "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the setting value 6. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of (the accessory) and the lighting of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared, the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the setting mode for changing the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is "a modification example by a common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the state of waiting for the player, it is possible to give a variation to the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4. 4 is assigned, and the demo effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama style effect" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the demo effect setting that specifies "historical drama style effect, movable body (character)" as the setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "modification example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, you can increase or decrease the volume from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 for specifying "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is turned down (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is turned up), and the movement to the minimum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to the set value 6 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is increased (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and the movement to the maximum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of the error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that do not depend on it), and a pachinko machine that emits error notification sounds by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness can be increased or decreased from the default brightness for the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 3. A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". be). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitter to turn on, blink, and make gradation points of the light emitter. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the lamp changes from the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is not turned off, but the brightness of the lamp is low and the lamp can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) to the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to turn on, blink, and set the gradation point of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) due to the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). The embodiment may be described as "modification example (8) due to common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification example (30).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is set to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for specific areas, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the above-mentioned predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is used. The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (may be described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). be).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is used. The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (when described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one of the main control side timer interrupt processes described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a does not yet set the interrupt permission when the modification of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (occurrence of momentary power failure). The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned on by the key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation. Occasionally, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then sets interrupt permission and the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs a set value confirmation display process. The game progresses by setting the interruption permission. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of balls of the game ball B that has been counted is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is calculated by the base monitor 1310h. Display on. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modification of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. At the same time, when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310 g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification (30).

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the modification examples (1) to (8) by the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a lottery result of a normal symbol, a lottery result of a special symbol, and the like. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2002.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2004, and the first start. A first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B in the mouth 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the second start opening 2005. A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery results, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. And have.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2006 and the second special winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that display (number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 in which the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 and the set plate 1650 of the back unit 3000. Although the details of the effect display device 1600 will be described later, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of the set plate 1650 which is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010 (FIGS. 151 to 153). See). The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The staging display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. The gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B and the variable winning opening 2003 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. The first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. The first big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is equipped with a second major winning opening 2007 that can accept the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. ..

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction near the left end of the front view in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003 is located at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a and above the first starting port 2004. The first large winning opening 2006 is arranged in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom and directly above the variable winning opening 2003. The second big winning opening 2007 is arranged in the game area 5a slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom and close to the right end of the game basin 5a.

The first sub-out opening 2021 is arranged between the second big winning opening 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged to the right of the second starting port 2005.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2004 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit 2300, which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has the second start port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and the variable winning port 2003, the first. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 to the left of the center accessory 2500 near the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is provided with a gate member 2600 having a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 provided on the right side in the game area 5a and composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The lower right unit 2400, which will be described in detail later, is capable of accepting the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007, and has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second major winning opening 2007. It is provided with a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the large winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is received by the first starting port 2004 with a high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and delivers the game ball B to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Can be done. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends to the left of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes four general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning openings 2001 is open upward.

In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, four general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. The lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149 and the like) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 extending left and right over the entire width in the left-right direction, a pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and a pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403. It has a pseudo-out opening 2404 provided below the vicinity of the left end of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and the pseudo-out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 has a larger (wider) opening on the left and right than the second major winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the normally used large winning opening.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-winning opening 2402 so as to be openable and closable, and a pseudo-large winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 149 and the like). ) And. The pseudo-large winning door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower side extends in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is located to the right of the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo large winning opening 2402, and the second sub out port 2022 is located to the right of the second starting port 2005. They are placed next to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and most of the lower right rail 1004 is in the left-right direction. It is formed to a length that covers the upper part.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat plate-shaped base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 and projects forward from the base plate 2407 to form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. It has a possible partition 2410 and. The base plate 2407 and the partition portion 2410 are formed of a transparent material. The second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and the pseudo-out opening 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 is the base plate 2407. It is provided on the rear side. A pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 are provided inside the partition portion 2410.

The partition portion 2410 includes a bottom wall portion 2411 that extends to the left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, and a first standing wall portion 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall portion 2411. , The right inclined wall portion 2413 extending diagonally from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the lower left, and the right horizontal wall portion 2414 extending horizontally from the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412. The second vertical wall portion 2415, which is separated to the left from the right horizontal wall portion 2414 and extends upward from the portion at the same height as the lower end of the right horizontal wall portion 2414, and the second vertical wall portion 2415. The left inclined wall portion 2416 extending diagonally to the lower right from the portion having the same height as the upper end of the one standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, and the second from the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416. The left side wall part 2417 extending horizontally to the left of the standing wall part 2415, and the inclined wall part 2418 extending diagonally to the lower left from the left end of the left side wall part 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall part 2411. It has a third standing wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length approximately one game ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007. The distance between the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion of the left side wall portion 2417 between the second standing wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is arranged directly under the right side wall portion 2414, the left side wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and the portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is diagonally cut out with respect to the horizontally long rectangle. The shape is open toward the front. The pseudo out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to the portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third standing wall portion 2419 intersect.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is a flat plate-shaped lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the first vertical wall portion 2412, the right inclined wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. The front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, the left inclined wall portion 2416, and the left side wall portion 2417 is closed, and the front of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the extended flat plate-shaped lower right left decorative portion 2432, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and is provided in the shape of a downward arrow from the base plate 2407 to the front. It has a protruding lower right middle decorative portion 2433 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independent of each other. Further, it has a lower right decorative substrate 2434 in which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating are mounted on the front surface.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a translucent decorative seal on the front surface of each of the pseudo-large winning door 2405, the lower right right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433. Is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner in the game area 5a in a state where the game ball B cannot be distributed on the right side and the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Around the upper part of each of the right inclined wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left inclined wall portion 2416, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacles are present at the site. Nail N is planted. Further, the portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second large winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the dividing portion 2410 is a game. It is a space independent of the area 5a (pseudo game area 2010).

Further, in the lower right unit 2400, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right of the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418. The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. Also above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted at the site. It is set up.

Further, in the state where the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. In addition, the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through a transparent base plate 2407 or the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 inside the dividing portion 2410 (pseudo-game area 2010). Inside the partition portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 is formed so as to circulate.

In the lower right unit 2400, in the normal state, the pseudo-large winning door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo-large winning door 2405 closes the pseudo-large winning door 2402 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition portion 2410 (pseudo-game area 2010) passes in front of the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402, and passes through the front of the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405, and the bottom wall portion 2411. It flows upward, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third standing wall 2419, and opens forward at the site. It is accepted by the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned to the game area 5a, but is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008, so that the bottom wall portion 2411 is on the left. The game ball B, which has rolled toward and received in the pseudo-out port 2404, can make the player illusion that the game ball B has rolled the lower right rail 1004 and has been received in the out port 1008.

The pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005, and the first. (Ii) When the pseudo-large winning opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the upper end rotates so as to move forward around the lower side, and the upper end is located slightly above the lower end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the rear side is lowered. In this state, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. Then, when the game ball B flows down in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, it hits the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 protruding forward. It touches and is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo-large winning door 2405 and is accepted by the pseudo-large winning door 2402.

Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 extends to the left even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500 without being accepted by the second large winning opening 2007, it is pseudo. If the game ball B is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 while the large winning opening 2402 (pseudo large winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, the game ball B is also accepted by the pseudo large winning opening 2402. The player can be illusioned as if it were.

In addition, since it extends to the left directly below the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, it is accepted by the second large winning opening 2007 when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opening and closing. As if the game ball B, which was discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and was received in the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, was also received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, is detected by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged downward. The pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the player side even through the open pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By visually recognizing the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, the player can be illusioned as if the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large winning opening.

The pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and opening and closing the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 by counting the number of the game balls B. .. By opening and closing the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 according to the number of game balls B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to make it easier to make the illusion that the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large winning opening. can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the large winning opening normally used and extends long to the left and right, it is a conventional pachinko machine. If it has a big winning opening that you have never seen before, you can make the player illusion, give a strong impact to the player, and as a pachinko machine to play with the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected positively, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 are above the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 in which the left-right direction of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007. And a sloping wall 2418 is provided between the right side wall 2414 and the left side wall 2417 (right sloping wall 2413 and left sloping wall) that are separated by about half the distance in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 2007. (Between 2416), the game ball B is received by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. As a result, the plurality of game balls B accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed toward the pseudo-greater winning opening 2402, so that the game accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B than the ball B are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. FIG. 148 (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstacle nail, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 149 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 148 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 shows the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 148. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 148, in which only the center right front plate is disassembled in a state of being viewed from the rear and viewed from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The center accessory 2500 will be described in detail later, but has a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes the game ball B so as to be acceptable according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the first start. The first big prize that opens and closes the game ball B so that it can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005. It is equipped with a mouth 2006 and a second prize winning mouth 2007.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end portion protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 having a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so as to be accessible at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The warp outlet 2512, which is made capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 are left and right. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed toward the front. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8e-1. First Attacker Department]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker portion 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 of the center accessory 2500 corresponds to the variable winning opening door 2521 that closes the variable winning opening 2003 so as to be openable and closable, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002. It is equipped with a variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that is energized to operate the variable winning opening door 2521, and a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003. There is.

Further, the first attacker unit 2520 receives the first prize-winning door 2523, which closes the first prize-winning door 2006 so as to be openable, and the game ball B into the first start-up door 2004 and the second start-up door 2005. With the first prize opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 160 etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to operate the first prize opening door 2523. , The first large winning opening sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006 is provided.

Further, the first attacker portion 2520 includes a variable winning opening 2003, a first large winning opening 2006, and a transparent flat plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the left second guide passage 2532 (Fig.). See 137 etc.).

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a first attacker portion 2520 above the warp inlet 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006.

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, on the front side of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and near the substantially center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500. It opens to the left. Further, the first large winning opening 2006 opens upward just above the variable winning opening 2003 with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower end extends forward and backward, and by setting it in an upright state (normal state), the game ball B can be accepted for the variable winning opening 2003. Can be closed to. When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the game ball B can accept the variable winning opening 2003 (open state). ). When the variable winning opening 2003 is in the open state, the upper end side of the variable winning opening door 2521 is higher than the lower end side, and since it is inclined so as to be lower to the right, it flows down from above and is variable. The game ball B in contact with the upper surface of the winning opening door 2521 can be guided to the variable winning opening 2003 on the right side.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. Will be done.

The first prize-winning door 2523 has a flat plate shape that is inclined so as to be lowered to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In the normal state, the first prize-winning door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first prize-winning door 2006. In this state, the game ball B that has flowed down above the first prize-winning door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first prize-winning door 2523, and is distributed through the left second guide passage 2532. ..

When the first prize-winning door solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first prize-winning door 2523 retracts rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is moved to the first prize-winning door 2006. It can be in an acceptable state. The game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006 in this state flows down in front of the flange portion 2502 and is provided at a height portion between the first large winning opening 2006 and the variable winning opening 2003. After being detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the player is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 directly above the variable winning opening 2003. After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a left guide passage group 2530 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. There is. In other words, a left guide passage group 2530 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002. Therefore, when the left side of the center accessory 2500 is driven so that the game ball B circulates, the game ball B is formed so as to always pass through the left guide passage group 2530.

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided at a portion below the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and on the left side at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom with respect to the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 is about three times as high as the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game ball B in circulation can be visually recognized in a good state.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are separated by a passage wall 2533 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502.

The first major winning opening 2006 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, if it is desired to receive the game ball B in the first large winning opening 2006, it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a right guide passage group 2540 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The length of the right guide passage group 2540 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. The right guide passage group 2540 can visually recognize the game ball B in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 and the right first guide passage 2541 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of the right second guide passage 2542 and the right second guide passage. The entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated from each other to the left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance and then extends downward, and then extends downward from the front of the game panel 1100 at a position to the left of the directly below the entrance. After extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. Further, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower right while being lined up on the right side of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. are doing. That is, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so as to intersect each other on the left and right.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are on the right. It is formed so as to enter the guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is discharged to the side near the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guidance region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guide region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. The details will be described later, but since the game ball B that has entered the second guidance region 2712 is more likely to be received by the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, the right second guide passage 2542 will be used. When the game ball B is made to enter, it is more likely that it will be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 as compared with the case where the game ball B is made to enter the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a distribution detection sensor 2543 that can detect the game ball B circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, in a game situation in which the player is made to "hit right", when the number of game balls B detected by the distribution detection sensor 2543 is less than or equal to a predetermined number per hour, the game situation can be further enjoyed. In order to do so, it is possible to encourage "right-handed" or instruct the driving strength to avoid acceptance to the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. It becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (FIG. 147, etc.). See). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height of about half of the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker unit 2560 has a second large winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided in the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, the flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is from the right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502 and the lower portion of the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening 2553 extending back and forth through the flange portion 2502 at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a notch portion 2551a penetrating to the left and right near the upper portion. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided so that a gap of about 3 times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551.

The opening 2553 extends up and down over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. The opening 2553 has a constant distance from the peripheral wall 2501 on the side close to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2551, and the side closer to the right wall 2551 moves away from the right wall 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 to the right with a certain width, and the flange portion 2502. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends up and down so as to widen to the left as it goes downward.

When the opening 2553 is assembled on the game board 5, a part of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inserted from the rear. The plurality of obstacle nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are the specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described in detail later. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of ridge portions rear 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend to the left and right at intervals in the front-rear direction. The ridge rear 2554 is provided at a position corresponding to a plurality of ridge front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so as to be staggered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the ridge portion front 2555d and the ridge portion rear 2554.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a transparent flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2555 that covers the space from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and the translucency attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. It has a center right front plate seal 2556, and has (see FIG. 149 and the like). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540, and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 penetrates back and forth with a plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a in which the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (braided nail portions 2701) are accommodated, and one obstacle penetrates anteriorly and posteriorly. The second accommodating portion 2555b in which the head of the nail N is accommodated, the peeling hole 2555c penetrating the front and back at the part where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and the peeling hole 2555c that bulges rearward from the rear surface and extends to the left and right. It has a plurality of ridges in front of 2555d, which are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that the center accessory 2500 cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in a long hole shape forming a certain gap with respect to the peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N (braided nail portions 2701) that are accommodated. Has been done. In the present embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed in a size for accommodating the heads of two obstacle nails N, and the center of the first accommodating portion 2555a is different from the center of the obstruction nail N. (Eccentric). The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at locations corresponding to the respective obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later.

The gap between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b between the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N is within the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and further 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to keep it within the range of. If the gap is smaller than this range, the obstacle nail N may be affected when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, and the obstacle nail N may bend. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, which may increase the cost. Further, if the gap is larger than this range, the bending condition when the obstacle nail N is bent due to the impact due to the contact of the game ball B or the like exceeds the allowable range, and it is difficult to distribute the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk of becoming.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N housed in the first storage part 2555a and the second storage part 2555b, so that the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow and to specify it. The game ball B can be distributed in a stable state in the obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be exhibited. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the obstacle nail N on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the front side of the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. It is not possible to touch the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556. It is possible to make it easier to notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

In the release hole 2555c, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side in a state where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is inserted from the rear by the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel off) the center right front plate seal 2556 from the center right front plate 2555 by pulling the rolled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556. This makes it possible to improve workability such as reattachment work of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

Since the peel hole 2555c is provided in front of the triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closed wall portion 2566 when assembled on the game board 5, the peel hole 2555c is provided. It is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B is distributed through 2555c, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c and to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peel hole 2555c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peel hole 2555c.

The plurality of ridge portion front 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of ridge portion rear 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502. These ridge portion front 2555d are provided so as to be staggered in the vertical direction with respect to the ridge portion rear 2554. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the ridge portion front 2555d and the ridge portion rear 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second attacker part]
The second attacker portion 256 of the center accessory 2500 has a second large winning opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. And have. The right end of the second major winning opening 2007 is located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is the full width in the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right side of. The second prize opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the first sub-out port 2021, the right wall is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550.

In addition, the second attacker unit 2560 can open and close the second major winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007, and the second major winning opening 2007 by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. It was drawn by accepting the flat plate-shaped second big prize opening door 2562, which is closed to the left and is inclined to the left, and the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It has a second special winning opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second special winning opening door 2562.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 and above the second large winning opening door 2562, and the attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left and the second large winning opening 2007. On the left side of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, which extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 and can discharge the game ball B downward, and the ceiling wall of the attacker passage 2564, which protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a closed wall portion 2566 which constitutes a part and extends to the left from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends so as to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B and lower to the left, and the ceiling wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closed wall portion 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is composed of the second prize-winning door 2562. In this attacker passage 2564, the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502 is bulged forward and extends in the vertical direction, and is provided with a plurality of ridge portions rear 2564a provided at intervals in the left-right direction. , The part of the attacker passage 2564 in the lower right front plate 2572 of the center, which will be described later, bulges backward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to be staggered with the rear 2564a of the plurality of ridges. In front of a plurality of ridges (not shown), which are provided in the same direction. With the plurality of ridges in front of and after the ridges 2564a, the game ball B can be distributed to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction in the attacker passage 2564, and the distribution speed can be suppressed.

The right discharge passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The right discharge passage 2565 is provided with an outlet at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is composed of the attacker left wall portion 2568, and the left wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502 on the right side of the second prize opening door 2562, is higher than the right end of the second prize opening door 2562, and is slightly higher than the right end of the closed wall portion 2566. The attacker right wall part 2567 extending downward from the lower position and the position protruding forward from the flange part 2502 on the left side of the second prize opening door 2562 and lower than the left end of the second prize opening door 2562. Left and right between the attacker left wall portion 2568 extending downward from the right shelf portion 2568 extending downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 to the left and the right shelf portion 2569. It is provided in the center between the left shelf 2570 extending from the vicinity of the upper end of the attacker left wall 2568 to the right so as to form a gap, and the left shelf 2570 and the right shelf 2569. It has a middle wall portion 2571 and the like.

The second major winning opening 2007 is defined by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the left-right direction. That is, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the width in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the second large winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is slightly bent to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, and the game ball B cannot move to and from the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 are located above the lower ends of the attacker left wall portion 2568, respectively. A second large winning opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decoration portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5.

The second attacker portion 2560 is in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a closed transparent flat plate-shaped lower right front plate 2572 (see FIG. 137 etc.).

Under normal conditions, the front end of the second large winning opening door 2562 of the second attacker portion 2562 protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second large winning opening 2007. It is closed to. The second prize-winning door 2562, which closes the second prize-winning door 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and back, which makes it difficult to see when viewed from the front. , The state of opening and closing is difficult to understand.

In this normal state, the game ball B, which has been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has flowed down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700), has the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall. It will flow down from between the part 2551 and the second attacker part 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B that has flowed down along the right wall portion 2551 is likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that was not accepted by the first sub-out opening 2021 and flowed down onto the second prize opening door 2562 is inside the attacker passage 2564 while meandering in the front-rear direction by the plurality of ridges in front of and after the ridges 2564a. Will enter the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second prize opening door 2562, and will be returned to the game area 5a from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565.

The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and constitutes the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the movement of the game ball B is blocked between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, a region (pseudo-game region 2010) that cannot be entered from the right discharge passage 2565 or the game region 5a is formed on the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, the pseudo-game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570 in the second attacker unit 2560. 2010 is formed. In this pseudo-game area 2010, only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 is used. When the power is turned on, the second major winning opening door 2562 retracts, and the second major winning opening 2007 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted. At this time, the game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming unit 2550 to the second big winning opening 2007 are accepted by the second big winning opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561 after rolling the right shelf portion 2569 or the left shelf portion 2570, and is released into the lower pseudo game area 2010. Will be done. In this second attacker unit 2560, since the two second big winning opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if many game balls B are accepted by the second big winning opening 2007 in a short time, they are delayed. It can be detected without.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the first accommodating portion 2555a accommodating the heads of a plurality of obstruction nails N of each set nail portion 2701 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in the center right front plate 2555. The movement of the head of the obstacle nail N can be restricted, and the obstacle nail N is deformed by an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something. It is possible to suppress (bending). As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, and the game ball B can be distributed in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be achieved. Can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the center accessory 2500, the second large winning opening door 2562, which closes the second large winning opening 2007 so as to be openable and closable, has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and also has the second large winning opening. Since the second prize opening 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning door 2562 forward and backward, the second big winning door 2562 can be made difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the big prize opening 2007. As a result, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (pseudo-large winning opening door 2405) provided below the second large winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest can be made to be relatively conspicuous. Can be strongly attracted to, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be strongly illusioned as if it were a real large winning opening. Therefore, if a pachinko machine is equipped with a large winning opening that has never been seen before, it can give the player an illusion, give a strong impact to the player, and give the player a game. It is possible to facilitate the positive selection of the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be used, and it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion in which the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support unit 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further improved as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the staging display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the staging display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Subsequently, the gate member 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly below the central skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Further, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens to the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 in which a lottery of ordinary symbols for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 is performed by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. Have. In the present embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8 g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a and on the upstream side of the second major winning opening 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of set nail portions 2701 in which a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged adjacent to each other are set as one set, and the plurality of set nail portions 2701 are one game ball with each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow them to pass through B. In the present embodiment, the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided so that the portions (gap portions) between the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern, and the plurality of braided nails are arranged. The game ball B can be guided by the unit 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guidance region 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guidance region 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The induction region 2710 is composed of a first induction region 2711 and a second induction region 2712 provided on the right side of the first induction region 2711. The first guide region 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the portion on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552. The second guide region 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the portion on the right side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction bulges to the right. More specifically, in the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the arc, the straight line connecting the braided nail portions 2701 near the upper end portion and the lower end portion. On the other hand, the arcs formed by the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the inside of the arc are provided so as to be in contact with each other. That is, the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 extend in an arc shape, the portion extending vertically is reduced, and the game ball B is easily meandered in the left-right direction.

Further, the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are the braided nail portions located below between the two braided nail portions 2701 separated to the left and right. The 2701 is provided on the right side (far side from the center of the arc) from the center between the two upper nail portions 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712.

Further, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the gaps separated above and below the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged in an arc shape are formed. It is provided so that it is located upward toward the right column. In other words, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first lead region 2711 and the second lead region 2712, the two braided nail portions 2701 paired in the left-right direction are on the right side. The braided nail portion 2701 is arranged so as to be higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

In the guidance region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the game ball B can be guided downward with a feeling of meandering in the left-right direction by the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down as compared with the area where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general arrangement, and the flow time of the game ball B to a predetermined position (the flow time of the game ball B to a predetermined position ( Arrival time) can be delayed. Further, in the set nail portion 2701, by combining two obstacle nails N into one set, the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased as compared with the case where the set nail portion N is composed of one obstacle nail N, and the game can be played. The effect of delaying the fall of the ball B is enhanced.

In the guidance region 2710, since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the portion of the interval. It may end up. That is, the game ball B moves from the first lead region 2711 to the second lead region 2712, moves from the second lead region 2712 to the first lead region 2711, and moves from the first guide region 2711 to the left outer side. Or, it may move from the second induction region 2712 to the right outer side.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552, and is between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (second prize). It will flow down to the top of the door 2562 or inside the second prize-winning door 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide region 2711 is located between the specified obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is located behind the plurality of ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502. And, it will flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the plurality of ridges in front of 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second major winning opening door 2562 or in the second major winning opening 2007). ..

The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide region 2712 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and a center right front plate provided on the flange portion 2502 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551. It will flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the plurality of ridges in front of 2555d provided in 2555. Then, it will flow down to the first sub-out port 2021 or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second major winning opening door 2562 or in the second major winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, the game ball B circulates in the second guide region 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide region 2712 to the right outside, the first There is a possibility that it will be accepted by one sub-out port 2021. That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the probability that the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021 is higher in the right second guide passage 2542 than in the right first guide passage 2541. .. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when "right-handed", by hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the abutment portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustment. There is no such thing, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the braided nail portion is composed of only one obstacle nail N, a pair is formed with respect to the obstacle nail N in order to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. The other obstacle nail N becomes an obstacle nail N in all directions forming a gap around the obstacle nail N. That is, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming a gap in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction. Therefore, the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the induction probability of the game ball B by the guidance region 2710. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute the game ball B in a stable state. Further, when the obstacle nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so as to have a gap of a desired distance, which requires a great deal of labor for maintenance. Will be.

On the other hand, when the braided nail portion 2701 is configured by a plurality of fault nails N as in the present embodiment, the direction of the fault nail N adjacent to a certain fault nail N in the braided nail portion 2701 is set. Since the adjacent obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap, the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be only a part of the direction, and the gap can be formed. It is possible to reduce the number of obstacle nails N that are paired with the formation of. As a result, even if one of the obstacle nails N of the braided nail portion 2701 is bent, the portion of the gap affected is small, so that the change in the induction probability of the game ball B due to the induction region 2710 can be suppressed. Further, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, it is sufficient to adjust the gap with the obstacle nail N in some directions to be a desired distance, which is more suitable for maintenance as compared with the case of adjusting the gap in all directions. This time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted into the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and is accommodated. The braided nail portion 2701 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a so as to surround the periphery of their heads.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby limiting the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something, and the game ball. It is possible to reduce the flow of B from an unintended flow, and it is possible to distribute the game ball B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be sustained. It can be exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, whereby the obstruction nail N is deformed. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b accommodating the head of the obstacle nail N are attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556. Because it is closed by, the obstacle nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game ball B to either the first sub-out opening 2021 or the second major winning opening 2007. This function is an important function that influences the ball output rate. All nail adjustments are prohibited in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 and the center right front plate 2555 and the center are prevented from being removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100. Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is not possible to adjust the nails at all.

In the above embodiment, a plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are configured by two obstacle nails N, but the present invention is not limited to three. It may be configured by the above obstacle nail N. When the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, a plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a row, or arranged in a polygon such as a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, or a hexagon. Is also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is shown to be composed of two regions, the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, but the present invention is not limited to this. , One, or may be composed of three or more areas.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed. Therefore, for example, in the second attacker portion 2560 provided downstream, the first special symbol is used. If the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), the game is played. Even if a person tries to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B arrives at the timing when it becomes acceptable to the second big prize opening 2007, the game ball B gets into the second big winning opening 2007 at a desired timing by the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It can be difficult to reach it, and the timing of hitting the game ball B can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, since the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstacle nails N, the configuration is compared with the case of being composed of a synthetic resin member. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 and suppress an increase in the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.

[5-8h. Pseudo game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo-game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a and is an area in which only a specific game ball B can be distributed. Specifically, the area in which only the game ball B (so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) received in the second prize opening 2007 can be distributed is the pseudo game area 2010. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 includes a portion where the front surface of the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. Pseudo-large prize that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the nail N and the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a port 2402 and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, the pseudo-game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 as a reception port capable of receiving the game ball B, and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B. The configuration is similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 is formed by a game panel 1100, a partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and a second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is separated by a right shelf portion 2569, a left shelf portion 2570, and a middle wall portion 2571 of the second attacker portion 2560. The right end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall portion 2412 of the dividing portion 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second standing wall portion 2415 of the dividing portion 2410, the left side wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third standing wall portion 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410.

In the pseudo-game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker portion 2560 and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the portion.

The second big winning opening 2007 as a supply source of the game ball B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big winning opening door 2562. Since the second prize-winning door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, it is difficult for the player to see the second prize-winning door 2562. The pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the portion (partitioned portion 2410, the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the center accessory 2500, etc.) partitioned from the game area 5a becomes transparent. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100 as well as being formed, whether the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a for the player. It can be made to illusion.

The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo-game area 2010 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the second large winning opening 2007 provided above. In the present embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second large winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo large winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 opens toward the front, the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that can open and close the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is in a state in which the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is closed (normally). In the state of), the surface is turned forward, and the pseudo-large winning door 2405 is conspicuous from the player.

For this reason, when the player sees this pachinko machine 1, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, so he has seen it with conventional pachinko machines. It can be made to think that it has a big winning opening that does not exist, and it can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In the pseudo-game area 2010 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 makes the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 unable to accept the game ball B. It is closed. Further, in the normal state, since the second big prize opening 2007 is closed by the second big winning door 2562, the game is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second big winning door 2562. The ball B rolls to the left on the second prize-winning door 2562 and is discharged into the game area 5a through the right discharge passage 2565. Therefore, under the normal state, the game ball B does not circulate in the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, the second is according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc. When the large winning opening door 2562 is retracted, the game ball B can be accepted into the second large winning opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is received by the second big winning opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo-game area 2010 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a portion of the game panel 1100 exposed to the front. At this time, if the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 and bottoms out. After flowing down onto the wall 2411 and rolling to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, the third standing wall 2419 prevented further rolling to the left and headed forward at the site. The pseudo-out port 2404 that is open is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, it is discharged from the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received by the pseudo out port 2404 is provided to the player by the out port 1008. You can make the illusion that it is accepted by. This makes it possible to make the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, it is possible to make the illusion that the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 in the pseudo-game area 2010 is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the large winning opening in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player by not accepting the game ball B in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, since the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the second big winning opening 2007 is entered. Upon acceptance, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. As a result, even though the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the game ball B is paid out, so that the player can feel as if he / she got it, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo-large prize opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 that stands out from the front opens and closes, so that the player instantly notices that the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be accepted. Can be made. As a result, the game ball B can be driven (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Further, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened / closed as a kind of notice, or the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened / closed as one of the signals to instruct the player to "hit right". Since this pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be entered only when "right-handed", the player can easily understand it intuitively.

For this reason, for example, before the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed with a fluttering operation so that the player can perform "right-handed". .. This makes it easier for the "right-handed" game ball B to reach the second major winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, so that the player can be more entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Then, when the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 is also opened and closed during the "big hit" game in which the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, many game balls B are opened and closed in a short time through the second big winning opening 2007. It can be supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010, and many game balls B are distributed in the pseudo-game area 2010, so that the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. You can do it. At this time, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is accepted by the large pseudo-large winning opening 2402, which can greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be made to.

In the present embodiment, the left-right direction of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is formed larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007, but above the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the right side wall portion 2414, the left side wall portion 2417, and the left side wall portion 2417. A sloping wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right sloping wall portion 2413 and the left sloping wall portion 2416) is a pseudo-large winning opening. Accepted to 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is about half of the distance in the left-right direction of the second major winning opening 2007. Therefore, since the plurality of game balls B accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 are aggregated in a narrow range and head toward the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the game balls B accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game ball B or give a privilege to the player by accepting the game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 has an opening / closing pattern (for example, 337 beats, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, BGM, etc.) that cannot be seen in the large winning openings of conventional pachinko machines. It can be opened and closed by the tempo of the music, etc.) to entertain the player.

In addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. By making the windmill W exist in the pseudo-game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo-game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the left guide passage group 2530, the gate 2002, and the side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , Multiple obstacle nails N have been planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B can be collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. As a result, when the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 will circulate downward in a state of being close to the center accessory 2500, and will flow down to the left of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532. The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize-winning door 2523 and flows down. Then, the first big winning opening door 2523 is set according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. If the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while retreating, it is highly likely that the game ball B will be accepted into the first large winning opening 2006.

The game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball of the back unit 3000 is guided. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be collected directly above the gate 2002 at a portion below the variable winning opening 2003. As a result, when the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the gate 2002 can be passed with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B circulates downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined time. When the variable winning opening 2003 is in an acceptable state, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B distributed through the left second guide passage 2532 has a high probability of making a variable winning. Accepted in the mouth 2003. The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a wind turbine W are provided between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300 from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens to the left in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The wind turbine W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 near the center accessory 2500.

In the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W, the game ball B circulating on the right outside of the gate 2002 and the gate 2002 mainly flows down the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Arranged to do. Therefore, the game ball B circulating through the gate 2002 and the right outer side of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left outer side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is provided near the lower end of the center portion in the left-right direction of the center accessory 2500 from the warp outlet 2512 that is opened in the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the warp passage. It is supplied to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls in the left-right direction on the stage 2513 and is discharged so as to return into the game region 5a from either the central discharge portion 2513a or the side discharge portion 2513b.

Since the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided in the center of the game region 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the first starting port 2004, the game ball B released from the central discharge portion 2513a has a high probability of being first. Accepted at the start port 2004. The game ball B discharged from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a is received by the first starting port 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. Is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special symbol is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide unit 1003, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W has a high probability of being on the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged in two upper and lower stages along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the wind turbine W and has not flowed down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side flows down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W flows down onto the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls the shelf portion 2301 to the right, and then is placed on a plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. Flow down to.

The game ball B, which circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W and flows down to the upper side of a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction below the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the first starting port 2004) side and accepted by the first starting port 2004. Further, on the upper stage side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are diagonally arranged, a gap through which one game ball B can pass is provided, so that the gap may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. The game ball B that has not been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left portion of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B flowing down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally is left and right in the game area 5a due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is received by the out port 1008 without being received by the first starting port 2004, and is discharged from the game area 5a. Since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the lower side, there is a possibility that the game balls B will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. Above, it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming portion 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker portion 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. The space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 is provided with a specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is hit relatively strongly toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, abuts on the abutment portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the second guide passage on the right 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2543 and then moves downward from the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. It is released. Then, the game ball B passing through the right first guide passage 2541 enters the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and enters the first guide region 2711 in the left-right direction in the first guide region 2711. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has circulated through the first guide region 2711 abuts on the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

Since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first guide region 2711 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass between each other in the vertical direction, the gap is formed. The game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side (second lead area 2712) of the first lead area 2711 through the game ball B. The game ball B that has moved from the first guide region 2711 to the left outside flows down to the guide wall portion 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501. At this time, the flange portion 2502 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and the center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of ridge fronts 2555d, so that the flange portion 2502 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552. The game ball B that has moved from the first lead region 2711 to the right outside will circulate in the second guide region 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged downward from the side close to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B passing through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and enters the second guide region 2712 in the left-right direction in the second guide region 2712. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide region 2712 abuts on the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

Since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the second guide region 2712 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass between each other in the vertical direction, the gap is formed. The game ball B may move to the left outer side (first lead region 2711) or the right outer side of the second lead region 2712 through the game ball B. The game ball B that has moved from the second lead region 2712 to the left outer side circulates in the first guide region 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide region 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and is between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. Flow down to the site. At this time, the flange portion 2502 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and the center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of ridge fronts 2555d, so that the flange portion 2502 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second induction region 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged to the outside of the game region 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is suppressed in the distribution speed of the game ball B and has the same height as the site where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general gauge arrangement. It will be delayed and flow down.

The game ball B, which circulated through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021, is a second attacker portion from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. Enter the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second prize opening 2007 of 2560. Under normal conditions, the second prize opening door 2562 moves forward and closes the second prize opening 2007 unacceptably. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 moves forward and closes the second prize opening door 2562. After rolling to the left on the upper surface of the door, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In the attacker passage 2564, the game ball B meanders in the front-rear direction but rolls to the left due to the rear 2564a of the ridge portion of the flange portion 2502 and the front of the ridge portion of the lower right front plate 2572 of the center.

The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left side wall portion 2417). do. Then, with a certain probability, it is accepted by the second starting port 2005, which is always open upward in the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although it is lower than the acceptance probability to the second starting port 2005, it is accepted to the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B discharged from the right discharge passage 2565 and not accepted by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 rolls diagonally to the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 256 has the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, and the first (Ii) If the second prize-winning door 2562 retracts according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it will be accepted into the second prize-winning door 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by any of the two second big winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B supplied from the second large winning opening 2007 into the pseudo-game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo-game area 2010. Then, when the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405, it flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411 through the front of the pseudo-grand winning opening door 2405 and along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is accepted by the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When the game ball B is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result or the second special symbol of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. When the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the lottery result, there is a high probability that the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 will come into contact with the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 and be accepted into the rear pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Will be. The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

As an effect using the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.). When the second grand prize opening 2007 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 opens the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 for directing. At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second big winning opening 2007, the degree to which the pseudo big winning opening 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when a lot of pseudo-large winning openings 2402 pick up the game ball B, it is put into a high probability state (so-called probabilistic state) after "big hit". On the contrary, when there are many omissions in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal non-probability change state) is reached after a "big hit". Furthermore, it is also possible to suggest a probability setting (generally, 6 steps of settings 1 to 6) depending on such a state of omission.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in a normal state, there is only a possibility that the game ball B is accepted by the second starting port 2005 to which the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is opened. Since there is no possibility of passing through or being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B is distributed to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 and the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in the second starting port 2005. In the lottery result, the special variable time for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol to the player is set longer in the lottery result of the second special symbol than in the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. , The number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Further, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of the game balls B to be paid out is one. For this reason, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and even if it is accepted in the second starting port 2005, it is a privilege. Since the number of game balls B paid out is one, it is possible to make it easier for the player to drive the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007, a privilege that many game balls B are paid out is given. In order to enable the acceptance of the game ball B into the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are made to accept the game ball B, and they are used. It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol that can be accepted.

For this reason as well, under normal conditions, the game is such that the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2004. The driving operation of the ball B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first starting port 2004 It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the game.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, a "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as a lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, since the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes, the game ball B is driven so that the game ball B is accepted into the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007. The operation can be enjoyed, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 can be increased.

Specifically, when the first large winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the driving operation (“right-handed”) can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When driving the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a right guide passage group 2540 composed of a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a specific obstacle. A guide region 2710 including a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage to be circulated facilitates acceptance into the second sub-out port 2022. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), and the player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B. Can be entertained.

In addition, since the second major winning opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left-right direction than the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007 can be used in a shorter time at first glance to the player. It is possible to recognize that it is possible to accept many game balls B. As a result, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the grand prize opening 2007 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 provided with the pseudo big winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning opening 2007. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that is received by the general winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a general winning opening sensor 3001 that is received by the first starting opening 2004 and is behind the game panel 1100. It is equipped with a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the guided game ball B. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is mounted on the rear wall of the back box 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. The back box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by the lock slider 3020 and the back board unit 3040 arranged behind the back box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 are provided. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back upper front staging unit 3300 provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the inside of the back box 3010. In the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided at the lower rear portion, and the back top rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (FIG. (Refer to 155 and the like), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit from the back. FIG. 152 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. FIG. 153 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 153 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear.

The back unit 3000 is provided behind the box-shaped back box 3010 opened forward, the back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and the back box rear unit 3030. It includes a back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of the 3010. The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by the lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) provided on the lower side of the opening 3010a. The mounting surface portion 3010b to be mounted, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the upper side in the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the mounting surface portion 3010b are provided on the lower side near the center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is slidably attached to the left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangle having an aspect ratio of 3: 4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed so that the left-right direction is substantially the same as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the back box rear unit 3030 is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear while the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left in the rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in the rear view with the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted in the lock mechanism portion 3010d, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1652 from moving backward. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear surface around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. Is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010 g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back substrate unit 3040 is locked.

The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from the rear. The back box rear unit 3030 is attached to the rear surface of the staging display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined staging image, the set plate 1650 to which the staging display device 1600 is attached to the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the set plate 1650. It is composed of a peripheral control unit 1500 and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The staging display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a quadrangular shape having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that are separated from the upper side in the left-right direction and protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that is open to the front side toward the front. The liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and mounted from the front. In the present embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other in the front view. The set plate 1650 is transparently formed. As a result, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 is composed of a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160 and the like) having a peripheral control unit 1511 and an effect display control unit 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 containing the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper side of the peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly below the upper side of the set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, a region having a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is formed between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. It is formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 having an L-shaped front view and thin front and rear, and a panel relay board and a staging drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the vertically extending portion of the L-shape. Further, the substrate box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010 g of the back box 3010 at the tip of an L-shaped extending portion to the left and right.

The back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 so as to straddle the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled on the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back board unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the rear view. Further, the L-shaped left and right portions of the back substrate unit 3040 are located between the lower end behind the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

The back board unit 3040 releases the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b, and rotates the locking claw 3041b around the shaft portion 3041a so that the locking claw 3041b moves rearward. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the back box rear unit 3030 can be attached to and detached from the back box 3010 without removing it from the back box 3010.

In the present embodiment, an opening 3010a having a size capable of attaching a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010 so that the set plate 1650 can be attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch effect display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. Thereby, when the effect display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect is displayed. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, the staging display device 1600 having a different size can be attached by simply changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is also changed according to the model change, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even if the model is changed. , The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when the position of the effect display device 1600 is to be changed due to a design change or the like, only the set plate 1650 can be easily changed. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of design changes and the like.

In the above embodiment, a transparent set plate 1650 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a colored one such as colored transparent, colored opaque, or the like may be used. When the set plate 1650 is visible from the player side, it is desirable to use a translucent color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from being deteriorated because the inside of the island equipment can be seen from the player side or the light from the rear can be seen. In this case, in particular, by making the set plate 1650 black, even if the set plate 1650 is visible from the player side, the set plate 1650 can be made inconspicuous, so that the effect display device in the pachinko machine 1 can be made inconspicuous. The 1600 and other decorative objects can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004. , A magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting an illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160 and the like).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first major winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and the like. It has a discharge passage for receiving the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guiding the game ball B to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end portion, and then discharging the game ball B downward. There is.

[5-9c. Back front peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end in the back box 3010. When the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is assembled on the game board 5, the back front peripheral decorative body 3201 and the back front peripheral decorative body 3201 formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a are light-emittingly decorated. It is equipped with a back front peripheral decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo ring. The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed so as to have translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by light from an LED mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be decorated in a ring shape by the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, by illuminating and decorating the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be made to emit light in a ring shape, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

Further, since the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can independently emit and decorate the portions divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction by the plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral decoration substrate, the light rotates in the circumferential direction. The light emission effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

[5-9d. Back-up front staging unit]
Subsequently, the back-up front staging unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back-up front staging unit 3300 is provided at a position substantially the same as the back-front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the back box 3010. The back-up front staging unit 3300 is provided behind a rectangular back-up front decorative body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and a back-up front decorative body 3310, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. It includes an upper front decorative substrate (not shown) and a back upper front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back upper front decorative body 3310.

The back-up front decoration body 3310 is provided so that the sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and each is numbered by the LED on the back-up front decoration board. Is independently luminescent and can be decorated. The back-up front decorative body 3310 is formed to have a length in which the left-right direction crosses the front of the staging display device 1600.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 is attached so as to be able to move up and down, and can be raised and lowered by the back-up front raising and lowering unit. The back-up front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a range of substantially the same height as the height of the back-up front decorative body 3310. In the normal state, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is in the state of the ascending position moved to the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view, and is located at the upper part of the game area 5a. Most of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining part can be visually recognized through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. can.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal ascending position state to the back-up front elevating unit by the back-up front elevating unit. When the back-up front decoration body 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). In the lowered position, substantially the entire back-up front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to the back-up front staging unit 3300, the numbering of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be independently luminescent and decorated. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is decorated with light emission and stops the fluctuation. As a result, when the high-ranked banzuke is decorated with light emission, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, according to the back-up front decorative body 3310, the ranking of the light-emitting decorations suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) will occur in which the player is advantageous. can do. As a result, when the variable light emitting decoration of the plurality of rankings of the back-up front decorative body 3310 is started, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the fluctuation is stopped at the desired ranking. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the ascending position to the lowering position by the back upper front elevating unit, the back upper front decorative body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a and at the same time, the front surface of the staging display device 1600. Since the upper part is blocked, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back-up front decoration body 3310, and the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be focused on. As a result, the light emitting effect using the back-up front decorative body 3310 as described above can be surely shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, if the above light emitting effect is executed at the descending position rather than at the ascending position, the player can feel a premium feeling, so that the reliability of the suggestion of the degree of expectation by the light emitting effect can be increased. It can be made higher, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

[5-9e. Backside front staging unit]
Next, the back bottom front staging unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front staging unit 3400 is provided at the lower part in the back box 3010 behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200. The lower back front staging unit 3400 is provided behind the lower back front decorative body 3410, which is long in the left-right direction, and the lower back front decorative body 3410, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the lower back front decorative board (illustrated). (Omitted) and a lower back front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the lower back front decorative body 3410.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 is capable of light emission decoration by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back front decorative substrate. Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowermost lowering position and the highest ascending position by the lower back lower front elevating unit. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed to have a length in which the left-right direction crosses the front of the staging display device 1600.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can cover the long left and right base decorative body 3411, the central decorative body 3412 provided in the center in the left-right direction of the base decorative body 3411, and the central decorative body 3412 from the front. It has a front left decorative body and a front right decorative body 3414 provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 156 and the like).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the characters "Gourmet" are formed in a relief shape. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatably provided around an axis extending in the front-rear direction about the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to be movable so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 each have translucency. In the front left decorative body 3413, the characters "heaven" are formed in a relief shape. In the front right decorative body 3414, the characters "Noboru" are formed in a relief shape.

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are normally located in closed positions where they are in close contact with each other, and the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear is hidden from the front invisible. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from the normal state to open positions that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear can be visually recognized from the front through between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the under-back front staging unit 3400, in the normal state, the under-back front decorative body 3410 is located in the lowered position. Further, in the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in the closed positions, and the central decorative body 3412 is invisible from the front. When the back lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state is assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at a height slightly above the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. The upper end is located at a height slightly below the warp entrance 2511. A part of the underside front decoration body 3410 in this normal state is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be moved from the lower back position to the ascending position by the lower back lower front elevating unit. In the state where the lower back front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the upper back front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the ascending position is located at the center in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the first large winning opening 2006. Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 holds the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at an arbitrary position (height) between the descending position and the rising position. Can be moved.

According to the back bottom front effect unit 3400, when the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is moved upward from the descending position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks a part of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to attract the attention of the under-back front decoration body 3410.

Further, in the lower back front decorative body 3410, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear becomes visible (appears). ) Therefore, the appearance of the centerpiece 3412 can make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the lower back front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position to perform the central decoration. Rotating the centerpiece 3412 with the body 3412 appearing can make the player feel strongly that there must be something good, further raising the player's expectations. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3412 rotates. Can be entertained.

Further, in the lower back front staging unit 3400, the central decorative body 3412 appears due to the elevating and lowering of the lower back front decorative body 3410, the movement of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412. By appropriately combining the above, it is possible to show the player a variety of movable effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the under-back front effect unit 3400, in addition to the above-mentioned movable effect of the under-back front decorative body 3410, it is also possible to perform a light emitting effect by a plurality of LEDs on the under-back front decorative board, so that a wider variety of effects can be achieved. It can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

[5-9f. After-the-back production unit]
Next, the back-up post-effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 and behind the back-up front effect unit 3300. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided behind the back-up rear decoration body 3510 (see FIG. 155, etc.) which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-up rear decoration body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back-up rear decorative substrate (not shown) and a back-up rear elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-up rear decorative body 3510.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has translucency, and is capable of light emission decoration by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate. Further, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the ascending position most raised by the back-up rear elevating unit and the descending position most lowered. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decoration body 3510 is formed in a shape imitating the upper half of the winning cup, and the character "Yu" is formed in a relief shape in the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decoration body 3510 can form one large victory cup by abutting the back-down rear decoration body 3610 on the lower end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has substantially the same height as the back-up front decorative body 3310.

In the back-up rear effect unit 3500, in the normal state, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is located in the ascending position. In this state, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3310 in the ascending position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back-up rear effect unit 3500, when the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the descending position by the back-up rear elevating unit, the lower end of the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is substantially the height of the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is located in the area. When the decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the ascending position, it is located in front of the staging display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper front decorative body 3310 or the back lower front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back upper rear decorative body 3510, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back-up rear decoration unit 3500, by raising and lowering the back-up rear decoration body 3510, it can be made visible from the front, so that the appearance of the back-up rear decoration body 3510 may surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the back-up rear decorative body 3510 can form one large decoration by contacting the back-up rear decorative body 3610 with the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interests by making people think that a chance has arrived.

[5-9 g. After-the-back production unit]
Next, the back-down post-effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The under-back effect unit 3600 is provided behind the under-back effect unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The under-the-back effect unit 3600 is provided behind the under-back decorative body 3610 (see FIG. 155, etc.) which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a lower back decorative substrate (not shown) and a lower back elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the lower back decorative body 3610.

The lower back decoration body 3610 has translucency, and is capable of light emission decoration by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back decoration substrate. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the most lowered lowering position and the most raised rising position by the back lower rear elevating unit.

The lower back decoration body 3610 is formed in a shape imitating the lower half of the winning cup, and the letters "Prize" are formed in a relief shape in the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decoration body 3610 can form one large victory cup by abutting the back-up rear decoration body 3510 on the upper end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The lower back decorative body 3610 has substantially the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the under-back effect unit 3600, in the normal state, the under-back decorative body 3610 is located in the lowered position. In this state, the lower back decorative body 3610 is located behind the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the descending position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back lower rear effect unit 3600, when the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the ascending position by the back lower rear elevating unit, the upper end of the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is the lower end of the back upper rear decorative body 3510 in the ascending position. It is located at a height that is approximately in contact with. In the state where the decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lower back position, it is located in front of the staging display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper front decorative body 3310 or the back lower front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back lower rear decorative body 3610, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the under-the-back effect unit 3600, by raising and lowering the under-back decorative body 3610, the decorative body 3610 can be made visible from the front, so that the appearance of the under-back decorative body 3610 may surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can form one large decoration by abutting the back upper rear decorative body 3510, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player can have a strong impact. It is possible to suppress the decline in interests by making people think that a chance has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front staging unit and the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear staging unit are moved to the ascending positions in the back unit. .. In FIG. 155, the back bottom front decoration body of the back bottom front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back top rear decoration body of the back top rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back bottom front decoration body. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower back decorative body of the back lower rear staging unit is moving to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body. FIG. 156 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front staging unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears in the state of FIG. 155. It is a front view of a game board.

Further, in FIG. 157, the back-up and rear-rear decoration unit of the back-up and rear-effect unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-up and rear-effect unit and the back-up and rear-rear decoration are raised to raise the back-up and rear-decorative body. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being in contact with. FIG. 158 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front staging unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears in the state of FIG. 157. It is a front view of a game board. In FIG. 159, the back-up front decoration body of the back-up front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-up rear decoration body of the back-up rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the back-up front decoration body. The back-bottom front decoration unit rises and moves to the underside of the back-top front decoration unit, and the back-bottom front decoration unit rises and the back-bottom front decoration unit rises. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with the decoration body behind the back of the body.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 142, the game panel is passed through them. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind the 1100, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front decorative body 3310 of the back upper front directing unit 3300, and the back lower of the back lower front directing unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410, etc. can be satisfactorily visually recognized, and the staging image displayed on the staging display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is provided in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through a transparent game panel 1100, a center accessory 2500, or the like. Can be done. The back-up front decorative body 3310 of the back-up front effect unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the effect display device 1600, and the center in the vertical direction is located at an ascending position at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Most of them can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining parts can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 of the lower back front effect unit 3400 is located at a lower position near the lower end of the effect display device 1600 so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. A part can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The staging display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized within the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the square area between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 of the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 has a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, and the like perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects. Further, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform a movable effect as shown in FIGS. 154 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front staging unit 3400 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear staging unit 3600 are moved together to the ascending position. As a result, the lower back front decorative body 3410 crossing the effect display device 1600 moves upward so as to vertically traverse the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is attracted to the lower back front decorative body 3410. You can do it and make you think there is something good about it.

By the way, in FIG. 154, when only the lower back decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the lower back decorative body 3610 in the descending position becomes visible from the front, but the lower back decorative body 3610 is on the back upper side. Since it is formed so as to be paired with the rear decorative body 3510, if only the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be visually recognized, it looks halfway and unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a deteriorates. There is a fear. In addition, when the back-up and rear decorative body 3610 is visible, it is recognized by the player that it is combined with other decorative bodies due to its incomplete shape, and it is combined with the back-up and rear decorative body 3510, which will be described later. When the movable effect of is executed, the impact on the player is reduced, and there is a risk that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back lower front decorative body 3410, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be kept hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the back-up and rear decorative body 3610. It is possible to fully demonstrate the effect of the effect.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the lower back decoration body 3610 is moved together with the lower back front decoration body 3410 so that the back lower front decoration body 3410 is located forward. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the portion between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body 3410. Let me.

As a result, the front surface of the staging display device 1600 is substantially covered by the back upper rear decorative body 3510, the back lower front decorative body 3410, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610, which has a strong impact on the player. It can be given and it can make you strongly think that there is something good. In this state, the back-up rear decoration body 3510 and the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, which form one decoration (here, the winning cup), are separated from each other at the top and bottom. Since the under-back front decoration 3410 is located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the long winning cup is hidden by the under-back front decoration 3410, which makes the appearance unattractive. Can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed positions close to each other to the open positions separated from each other. Then, the central decorative body 3412 is visually displayed between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414. As a result, when the central decorative body 3412 newly appears in the lower back front decorative body 3410, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous to the player is generated. It can be strongly reminded, and it is possible to raise expectations for an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be gradually moved or may be repeatedly opened and closed. As a result, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are opened and the central decorative body 3412 appears, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs, and the advantageous gaming state can be determined. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed positions as shown in FIG. 155, and then as shown in FIG. 157. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the descending position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact with each other (coalescing). As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in the interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, which raises expectations for the advantageous gaming state and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous has been confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state is raised. Can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, as the first operation, the back lower front decorative body 3410 (back lower rear decorative body 3610) is moved to the ascending position, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the back-up front decoration body 3310 is moved to the descending position, and the back-up front decoration body 3510 is moved together with the back-up front decoration body 3310 to the back-up front decoration body 3310. It is moved to the rear, and the back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decoration body 3310, and the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the rear of the back lower front decoration body 3410 together with the back lower front decoration body 3410. You may move it to. Alternatively, the lower back decoration body 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the lower back decoration body 3610. Even with these, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is a lottery of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, and can entertain the player. In addition, a series of productions may proceed to the end or end in the middle, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, and may be completed in multiple stages. By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined with the light emitting effect, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, various effects can be used to make the player. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned movable effect is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 and the first. (Ii) Although the one to be executed according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous, the movable staging can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to input detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. The circuit, the RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error, and the game board 5 are divided. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly treated as being affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is performed without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hard random number with built-in main control") that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "circuit".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit, when the main control MPU1310a is reset, first, a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU1310a with one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various sensors to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2004, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2005. The mouth sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, and the game received in the first major winning opening 2006. The first big prize opening sensor 2525 for detecting the ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 are detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, etc. are the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the specified input port of.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are (without going through), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, that is, the main control. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the input circuit. On the other hand, each detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first major winning opening sensor 2525, the second major winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor uses the panel relay board. It is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the variable winning port solenoid 2522, first, is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. The drive signals to the large winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second winning opening solenoid 2563 are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the function display unit 1400. Status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is output without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that this launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when launching is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that reverses the launch permission logic when firing is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first major winning opening sensor 2525, the second major winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor. The non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the 664, while the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor are used. Detection of the game ball B by the 2401 and the gate sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the first big winning opening sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2525 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the first large winning opening sensor 2525 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. Further, since the game ball B launched in the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the detailed description of the main control MPU 1310a will be described later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cutout detection sensor 574 is paid out. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has a problem based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the firing timing control circuit, the firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is satisfied, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are connected based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching is not output toward the game area 5a, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that plays high-quality sound, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by this sound source IC. It has a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door side drive data for outputting the data, and door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The control data (display command) indicating the screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive board to the door frame 3 side or to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serially for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the bump output detection sensor 375 of the staging operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and is provided with a top center speaker, a top side speaker, etc. on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 controls to play sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Direction display control unit]
The staging display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the staging display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and an effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the staging display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the staging display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The staging display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the staging display control unit 1512 is input to the staging display device 1600, the staging display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the staging display device 1600 as the main scan. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is used as the basis for the drawing data. As the main scan, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and it can be driven strongly enough to rotate in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will be distributed through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532. The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize-winning door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B circulating through the left guide passage group 2530 is discharged above the gate 2002, and is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate. After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between 2002 and 2002, the gate 2002 is passed through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable winning opening The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided in the portion close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to distribute the left second guide passage 2532 than to distribute the left first guide passage 2531. It will be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 with a probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Is paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning opening 2003 is normally opened after the lapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed. Further, the number of pending lottery results of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number of pending cards is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

At the site of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down any of the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, and the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 that is open to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. ..

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2004.

When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", A lottery will be held for "time reduction (time reduction)", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.). If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time).

In the present embodiment, the first start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2004 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed, the first special The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending first special symbols lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting openings 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the first starting opening 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B discharged from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 has an entrance to the right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance with a space to the left from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. It is composed of a right second guide passage 2542 and an opening. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 (so-called right strike), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutment portion 1006 (right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker than the hit, there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the right second guide passage 2542. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 depending on the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B circulating through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guidance region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B circulating through the right second guide passage 2542 is a specific obstacle. It is released into the second lead region 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guidance region 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the portion of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 as compared with the normal region.

In the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide region 2710, and when it deviates from the second guide region 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below Will be accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the circulation of the right second guide passage 2542 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B is distributed in the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right-handed". There is. That is, at the time of "right-handed", the driving operation of rotating the handle 195 greatly is urged so that the game ball B is driven with a strength such that the game ball B abuts on the abutment portion 1006. This makes it easier to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by a relatively easy driving operation.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and is the second attacker. Enter the section 2560. Under normal conditions, the second major winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second major winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker are closed. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second prize-winning door 2562, rolls to the left on the second prize-winning door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Inclined wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the exit of the right discharge passage 2565, the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than that of the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B, which is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and is not received in the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022, flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418 and becomes inclined to the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally to the lower left along the line, is discharged to the left at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received by the out port 1008.

That is, under normal conditions, when the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (“right-handed”), only the second starting port 2005 has an opportunity to accept the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 (““ It is possible to give a premium feeling to "right-handed").

When the game balls B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 are received in the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and on the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit" , "Probability change (probability change)", "Time reduction (time reduction)", "Probability change time reduction hit", "Probability change time reduction no hit", "Second big hit", etc.) are drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. The lottery result of the second special symbol drawn during the non-time saving state is a predetermined time longer than the fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). It is suggested to the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state, both the fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are shortened as compared with the non-time saving state, and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn during the time saving state is shortened. Is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 10 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is mainly variable and displayed in the non-time reduction state, is set to a predetermined time shorter than the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is mainly variable display in the time reduction state, is the first special. The fluctuation time is shorter than the design.

In the present embodiment, the second start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, until the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn earlier is completed, the second special The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending second special symbols lottery results is limited to four for each of the second starting openings 2005, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in the second starting port 2005 is the special variation time of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting port 2004. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, so that the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. However, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is not executed frequently. , The player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, the first big prize is obtained by the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. The mouth 2006 and the second big winning mouth 2007 open and close in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be accepted.

When the first prize opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the first prize opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the left first prize opening 2006. (Ii) The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the guide passage 2532. Then, when the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big prize opening 2006 when the first big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201.

On the other hand, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, since the second major winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 is provided to the player. Can be driven so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. Is accepted into the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Will be done.

In this way, when the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, "small hit", the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes in between (for example, a small hit rush). At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and the game ball B can be accepted, the second big winning opening 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to take the timing to drive the game ball B. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to arouse the rewardingness of the game and entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. .. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit", after the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the second prize opening 2007, the game ball B is satisfied. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the closed state unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the "big hit", the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" or the second special symbol will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the staging image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("short time hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 After making the game ball B acceptable in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a probable change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, below the second major winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo-game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo-game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo-game area 2010, and when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. , The game ball B is accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo-out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo-large winning opening 2402 receives the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern when, for example, the second large winning opening 2007 allows the game ball B to be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "big hit" or the like. It will be acceptable. Since this pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided so as to be larger and more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, many game balls B received by the second major winning opening 2007 are placed in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By being accepted, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and entertain during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol) is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then by the combination of the lit LEDs. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each pattern sequence in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The picture rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous gaming state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) is generated according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

In addition, the time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottered special symbol. It is possible to perform a player-participation-type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the staging display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top rear effect unit 3500, the back bottom rear effect unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type staging in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the gaming board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. be. FIG. 163 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit disassembled in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 164 (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and FIG. 164 (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 165 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of the line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of the line in FIG. 164, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Saw line, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the starter line in FIG. 164. FIG. 166 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 164 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 viewed from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a part of the table unit 2000. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is provided with three general winning openings 2001. Further, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting port 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008. The second starting port 2005 is set to open and close according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the acceptance of the ball B. Further, in the game board 5A, a ball guidance unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the above differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second start port sensor, and the second start port sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced. It has been replaced with a normal winning opening sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560, and is a ball capable of guiding the game ball B circulating through the right guide passage group 2540. It has a guide unit 2580 and a flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guide unit 2580. ..

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating in a vertically long quadrangle in the flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and below the opening 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guidance unit 2580 is provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape extending downward from the entrance, then extending to the right, and then extending downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open in the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction when assembled on the game board 5A.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560 so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the area.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward just above the first sub-out port 2021. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. Since the game ball B passing through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guidance unit 2580 is distributed in the lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B is distributed to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation for entering the game ball B into the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when "right-handed", by hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the abutment portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustment. There is no such thing, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 2580 guides the game balls B circulating through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 separately in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guidance unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a for guiding the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541 and a second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. are doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guidance unit 2580 has an entrance opening toward the front near the upper end and an exit opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end. Further, the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b opens forward at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and the exit opens diagonally forward and downward at the lower end.

The ball guidance unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a open to the right and a second guide attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and open to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 provided with a passage 2580b and a flat plate-shaped passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guidance unit 2580 is transparently formed.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2581a extending in the front-rear direction and up and down, and protrudes to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals in which the game ball B can be distributed in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower side is alternately different in the upper and lower sides. Further, in the plurality of inclined portions 2581b, the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b at intervals so that the game ball B can be distributed. It is provided.

Further, the left passage member 2581 extends upward from the upper end portion of each inclined portion 2581b to the upper side inclined portion 2581b and above the upper inclined portion 2581b, and from the upper end portion of the standing wall portion 2581c to the upper side inclined portion 2581b. It has a top wall portion 2581d that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2581b on the upper side of the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2581b. ..

Further, the left passage member 2581 is a plurality of first protruding portions 2581e projecting to the right from a portion between the vertically separated inclined portions 2581b in the side wall portion 2581a, and the inclined portion 2581b in the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of first projecting piece portions 2581f protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first protruding portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2581b, and has a flat plate shape extending in parallel with the lower inclined portion 2581b and having a triangular shape having a tapered tip. It is formed. The first projecting piece portion 2581f extends vertically and its lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. .. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is located behind the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. are doing. Further, the lowermost top wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of the present embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and a plurality of positions that project to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protrusion 2582b. A plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided in one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e in between in the front-rear direction when assembled into the ball guidance unit 2580. In the first protrusion 2582b, the upstream side of the first protrusion 2581e protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first protrusion 2581e has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2581c. It protrudes to the left in the trapezoidal shape.

Further, the right passage member 2582 projects to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower, and is provided at intervals in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c which are formed. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals in which the game ball B can be distributed in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower side is alternately different in the upper and lower sides. Further, in the plurality of inclined portions 2582c, the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction at intervals so that the game ball B can flow from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c. It is provided.

Further, the right passage member 2582 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c to the upper side of the upper inclined portion 2582c with the standing wall portion 2582d extending upward from the upper end portion of each inclined portion 2582c, and from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to the upper side of the upper inclined portion 2582c. It has a top wall portion 2582e that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2582c on the upper side of the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d stands. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2582c. ..

Further, the right passage member 2582 has a plurality of second protruding portions 2582f protruding to the right from the portion between the inclined portions 2582c which are vertically separated from each other in the side wall portion 2582a, and the inclined portion 2582c in the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of second projecting pieces 2582g protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second projecting piece portion 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2582c, and has a flat plate shape extending in parallel with the lower inclined portion 2582c and a triangular shape having a tapered tip. Is formed in. The second projecting piece portion 2582g extends vertically and its lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is located behind the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. are doing. Further, the lowermost top wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of the present embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a plurality of positions that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. A plurality of second protrusions 2583b are provided in one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second protrusions 2582f in between in the front-rear direction when assembled into the ball guidance unit 2580. In the second protrusion 2583b, the upstream side of the second protrusion 2582f protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the second protrusion 2582f has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2582d. It protrudes to the left in the trapezoidal shape.

In the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guidance passage 2580a through the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540, it is moved backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. Roll towards. A first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left above the inclined portion 2581b, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protruding portion 2581e, and further guided to the left by the next first protruding portion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b along the vertical wall portion 2581c onto the lower inclined portion 2581b. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Even above the inclined portion 2581b, the first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first protrusion 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e. Then, it is further guided to the left by the next first protruding portion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first protruding piece portion 2581f on the front side and further flows down onto the inclined portion 2581b on the lower side, and exits from the first induction passage 2580a. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

Further, in the ball guidance unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guidance passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it is directed backward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll. In the second guide passage 2580b as well, the game ball B flows down while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction as in the above-mentioned first guide passage 2580a. More specifically, a second protruding portion 2582f projects from the left above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and the second passage closing plate 2583 from the right so as to be in front of and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. Two protrusions 2583b are projected. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protruding portion 2582f, and further guided to the left by the next second protruding portion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c along the vertical wall portion 2582d onto the lower inclined portion 2582c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Even above the inclined portion 2582c, the second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second protruding piece portion 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second protruding portion 2582f. Then, it is further guided to the left by the next second protruding portion 2583b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second protruding piece portion 2582g on the front side and further flows down onto the inclined portion 2582c on the lower side, and exits the second induction passage 2580b. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

As described above, according to the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B passing through the right guide passage group 2540 is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and then discharged downward. Therefore, the residence time (flow time) of the game ball B at the same height is lengthened as compared with the case where the game ball B is flowed down vertically or by a spiral passage. Can be done. As a result, the distribution speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is compared with the case where the game ball B is made to flow down by the spiral passage. However, since the movement of the game ball B is complicated, the movement of the game ball B, which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the left side surface faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B in the ball guidance unit 2580 can be seen in the front-rear direction by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to visually recognize the distribution while meandering in a good state, and it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. More specifically, for example, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 (for example, "" "Small hit" lottery), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker unit 2560 provided below the ball guidance unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted (for example). , Small hit rush), the player operates the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second big prize opening 2007 can be accepted. Will be done. At this time, even if an attempt is made to drive the game ball B at that timing, a ball guidance unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second major winning opening 2007. It is possible to make it difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B. As a result, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to arouse the rewardingness of the game and entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since a gap is formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the top wall portion 2582e, the first guide passage 2580a and the first guide passage 2580a and the first. (Ii) When a ball jam occurs inside the guide passage 2580b, the ball jam can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. Compared with the case where a passage is formed by using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed (deformation of the obstacle nail N) due to the flow of the game ball B, and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and covers the front from the vicinity of the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the center accessory 2500. It is attached to the front end on the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in the above. The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guidance unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 penetrates back and forth at the lower part, and has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a in which the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N are accommodated in each case, and a plurality of first accommodation portions 2590a penetrating the front and back and one obstacle nail N. It has a second accommodating portion 2590b in which the head is accommodating, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating the front and rear.

In the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is constant with respect to a peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of a plurality of accommodating (not shown, but in this embodiment, two or three) obstacle nails N. It is provided in the shape of a long hole forming a gap between the two. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. These first accommodating portions 2590a and second accommodating portions 2590b coincide with the respective obstacle nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. It is provided at the site.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N housed in the first storage part 2590a and the second storage part 2590b, so that the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, and at the same time, the game. The ball B can be distributed in a stable state, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in the mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peel hole 2590c is inserted with a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker attached. By pressing the seal forward from the rear by the rod-shaped member, a part of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel off) the seal from the center right front plate 2590 by pulling the rolled portion of the seal. This makes it possible to improve workability such as re-sticking work at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

Since this peeling hole 2590c is provided at the portion of the mounting boss, an attempt is made to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the portion where the game ball B is distributed through the peeling hole 2590c. However, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed.

If a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c can be suppressed, and the player can use it. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peel hole 2590c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peel hole 2590c.

Further, if a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 provides the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590a. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, it is not possible to touch the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a or the second accommodating portion 2590b from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, if a sticker is attached, if the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion 2590b is bent through the seal, the trace remains on the seal. It is possible to make it easier to notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The center right front plate 2555 of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the holding plate of the present invention, and the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 of the present embodiment are accommodating the present invention. 2555d in front of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 in the present embodiment corresponds to the ridge portion of the present invention, respectively.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a predetermined guidance area 2701 (first induction area) The game ball B can be guided with a predetermined probability along 2711 or the second guidance region 2712). In this specific obstacle nail group 2700, the two obstacle nails N are at least composed of a plurality of braided nail portions 2710 having a pair of braided nail portions 2710, and a game is played between the plurality of braided nail portions 2710. In order to provide a space through which the ball B can pass, in one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2710, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails N are adjacent to each other. Since the remaining obstacle nails N are not adjacent to each other, they are only responsible for forming a gap in a direction in which they are not adjacent to each other. That is, in the braided nail portion 2710, in one obstacle nail N, the direction in charge of forming the gap through which the game ball B can pass can be a part of the direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2710 is bent, the number of gaps affected by the number of gaps formed with the braided nail portion 2710 paired with the braided nail portion 2710. It is possible to suppress a large change in the flow of the game ball B, and it is possible to facilitate distribution of the game ball B in a desired intended flow path in a stable state.

At this time, the first accommodating portion 2555a of the center right front plate 2555 accommodates the front ends of the obstacle nails N of the plurality of braided nail portions 2710 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the center right front plate. The second accommodating portion 2555b of 2555 accommodates the front end of a single obstruction nail N constituting the specific obstruction nail group 2700. In the braided nail portion 2710, the front ends of the two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating portion 2555a, and the two obstacles planted close to each other. Since it is difficult for the nail N to bend in the direction in which they are close to each other, the obstacle nail N can be surrounded by the first accommodating portion 2555a in any direction by enclosing the parts in the direction in which they are not close to each other as a set. It can also be made difficult to bend. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail N planted independently is accommodated in the second accommodating portion 2555b, the obstruction nail N can be made difficult to bend by the second accommodating portion 2555b. For this reason, the obstacle nails N of the plurality of braided nails 2710 and the single obstacle nails N constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are used in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. Even if an impact acts on the obstacle nail N due to the contact of the game ball B, the contact of a tool, etc. during maintenance, etc., the front end of the obstacle nail N is the first accommodation portion. By abutting on the peripheral wall of 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b, further movement can be prevented and the (plural) obstacle nails N can be made difficult to bend, and a plurality of obstacle nails N (specific obstacle nail group 2700) can be prevented from bending. The flow of the game ball B can be maintained in the intended initial state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, the plurality of obstacle nails N constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be made difficult to bend by the plurality of first accommodation portions 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, so that the game ball B can be made difficult to bend. It can be stably distributed in the intended flow, and the game ball B can be maintained to be guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability, and the intended action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. It can be surely exhibited, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of a plurality of braided nail portions 2710 and a single obstacle nail N, the number of obstacle nails N planted can be relatively increased, and more. The game ball B can be brought into contact with the obstacle nail N of the above. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail N, it is possible to further suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B and change the distribution direction of the game ball B in various directions. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a plurality of protrusion front 2555d protruding rearward, and the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusion front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, whereby the game ball B is provided. Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B and change the distribution direction of the game ball B, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of movements of the game ball B, which is entertaining and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the 2555d in front of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 does not bend unlike the obstacle nail N, the flow of the game ball B by the plurality of 2555d in front of the ridge portion can be stably maintained, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to exert the performance expected by the manufacturer for a long time.

Further, since the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the ridge portion front 2555d, the obstacle nail that suppresses the distribution speed of the game ball B or changes the distribution direction by the ridge portion front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. Since the function similar to that of N can be exhibited and the front end of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the center right front plate 2555, the center right front plate 2555 is provided near the front end of the game area 5a. The center right front plate 2555 can be extended to a portion of the game area 5a where it is difficult to implant the obstacle nail N, and the protrusion portion front 2555d can be provided at the portion. As a result, a game ball is provided in front of the ridge portion 2555d instead of the obstacle nail N in a part where the obstacle nail N cannot be planted by the conventional pachinko machine or a part outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since B can be made to move in the same manner as the obstacle nail N, the movement of the game ball B can be entertained by the player in a wider range, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, a second big winning opening 2007 is provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 so that the game ball B can be opened and closed according to the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol). Since the game ball B can be brought into contact with many obstacle nails N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is possible to delay the distribution of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is a specific obstacle nail. When guided by the group 2700, the game ball B can be delayed and reached to reach the second major winning opening 2007 provided downstream as compared with the normal plurality of obstacle nails N, so that the second major It is possible to make it difficult to set the timing of driving the game ball B aiming at the winning opening 2007, and it is possible to give a desired degree of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B. At this time, as described above, since the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is made difficult to bend by the center right front plate 2555, the game ball B can be continuously guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability. The driving operation can be surely set to a desired difficulty level, and the driving operation difficulty level as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained for a long time. From such a thing, it is possible to arouse the player's motivation for the driving operation, to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B, and to accept the game ball B in the second major winning opening 2007. It is possible to give a sense of accomplishment by being able to suppress the decline in the interest of the player. Further, as described above, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can give a difficulty level to the driving operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, and the second By suppressing the opportunity of paying out by accepting the game ball B to the large winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have a gap between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b with the front end of the obstacle nail N accommodated in each, the temperature and humidity are increased. Even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to such a change in the environment, the change in the position between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b and the obstacle nail N due to the expansion and contraction can be absorbed by the gap. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts, it is possible to prevent the plurality of obstacle nails N from bending or the center right front plate 2555 being damaged due to resistance from the plurality of obstacle nails N. As a result, by enlarging the center right front plate 2555, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. The plate 2555 can be enlarged, and a plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a wide range in the game area 5a can be surely made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the second major winning opening 2007 downstream with a predetermined probability intended, and entertain the movement of the game ball B by the intended flow of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest and to stably maintain the flow of the game ball B by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time. For this large center right front plate 2555, for example, the height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area 5a, and the left and right widths are 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area 5a. The range can be mentioned.

Further, since the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 are provided with a gap between the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the gaming board. At the time of assembling, the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted can be easily inserted into the corresponding first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, and the pachinko can be easily assembled. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, since the center right front plate seal 2556 that closes the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are attached from the front. The obstacle nail N in which the front end is housed cannot be touched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, in this case, when the obstacle nail N whose front end is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556. Therefore, it is possible to easily notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower plate 202 through the ball removal guide path 241c of the plate unit base 211. From the right side near the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c that opens to the front of the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 for supplying the game ball B that cannot be stored in the upper plate 201 from the rear to the lower plate 202. The game ball B enters the storage passage 150e and rolls to the left side surface on the opposite side. On the left side surface on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, a ball guide portion 213 that is inclined so as to move to the other side toward the front is provided, so that the game ball from the ball pull-out taxiway 241c is provided. B will roll along the ball guide portion 213, and the game ball B will be easily rolled along the peripheral edge of the lower plate 202, which is a high portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 202, so that the game ball B is far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It can be rolled to the other portion in the left-right direction, and it is possible to prevent the supplied game ball B from immediately reaching the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. Therefore, since the game ball B can be rolled so as to orbit toward the lowest lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202, the game ball B can be rotated evenly in each direction centered on the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B can be stored, and the game ball B can be made difficult to be stored in the vicinity of the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. That is, it is possible to reduce that the vicinity of the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (ball removal taxiway 241c) is clogged by the game ball B at an early stage when the lower plate 202 has a margin for storing the game ball B. As many game balls B as possible can be stored even if the player does not level the lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequent execution of guidance for prompting the player to eject the game ball B in the lower plate 202 to the dollar box or the like when the player is in an advantageous gaming state such as a “big hit” game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the left side surface of the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is inclined so as to move to the other side toward the front as the ball guide portion 213, the lower plate ball of the storage passage 150e is inclined in the lower plate 202. Even if a plurality of game balls B are accumulated in front of the supply port 211c, it is possible to form a gap through which the game balls B can flow between the pool of the game balls B and the ball guiding portion 213. The game ball B that could not be stored in the upper plate 201 through the gap and was sent to the lower plate 202, the game ball B from the ball removal guide path 241c, and the like can be sent to the left portion of the lower plate 202. As many game balls B as possible can be stored in the plate 202.

Further, the center of the lower plate ball supply port 211c that opens toward the front of the storage passage 150e is positioned on the right side of the center of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202, so that the storage passage is located. Compared with the case where the center of the outlet of 150e in the left-right direction and the center of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a are aligned (see FIG. 50B), the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202 Since the area can be widened, it is possible to increase the number of stored game balls B when the game balls B are stored until the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is closed in the lower plate 202. .. Therefore, by combining with the action and effect of the ball guiding portion 213 as described above, as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower plate 202 without the player leveling the lower plate 202, as described above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to exert its action and effect.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 50B, even if the lower plate 202 has a margin for storing the game ball B, the vicinity of the lower plate ball supply port 211j is clogged by the game ball B, so that the lower plate 202 is lower. The game ball B cannot be supplied to the plate 202. As a result, even though the lower plate 202 still has a margin, the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned on, and the payout of the game ball B is stopped. Then, depending on the player, even though the lower plate 202 has a margin, the payout is stopped, which may cause distrust and reduce the interest. Or, even though the lower plate 202 has a margin, if the guidance such as opening the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b and moving the game ball B to the dollar box is executed, it feels annoying and reduces the interest. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, as many game balls B as possible are stored in the lower plate 202 to a state close to full even if the player does not even out. Therefore, when the lower plate 202 is viewed when the payout is stopped, it can be immediately recognized that the lower plate 202 has no room and is full, and the lower plate 202 does not give a feeling of resistance to the player. It is possible to open the ball extraction hole 202a and move it to the dollar box, and it is possible to recognize that many game balls B have been paid out, so that the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is stagnant in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 (so-called ball clogging occurs), the tank rail 553 By touching the game ball B that is jammed from the outside through any of the plurality of openings 553d penetrating in the bottom portion (main guide portion 553a) of the ball, the game ball B is broken and the ball jam is eliminated. Can be done. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be easily eliminated, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the discomfort given to the player due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the ball rectifying member 556 that can swing in the vertical direction is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 abuts on the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B are distributed in this state, the heights of the game balls B stacked vertically change, so that the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction due to the change in the height. When the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball rectifying member 556 tends to move to the downstream side faster than the lower game ball B. This can be prevented, and the game balls B can be moved downward so as to interrupt the row of the lower game balls B arranged in a row to prevent the game balls B from engaging with each other. Further, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so that the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked vertically can be broken. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B, reduce the interruption of the game due to the ball clogging as much as possible, and suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the interruption of the game.

Further, as described above, since the game ball B circulates in the tank rail 553, the game ball B can be hit from above to below by the ball rectifying member 556, so that the game ball B adheres to the game ball B by the hit. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and it is possible to vibrate the tank rail 553 to facilitate the discharge of dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 downward from the opening 553d. Therefore, since the dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to prevent the ball clogging caused by the dust and dirt and the like, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. can.

Further, since at least one of the plurality of openings 553d is provided below the portion where the ball rectifying member 556 is provided, dust, dust, etc. are caused at the portion below the ball rectifying member 556 in the tank rail 553. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to cause ball clogging and is more likely to exert the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a plurality of openings 553d having the above-mentioned effects are provided in the guiding direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553, even if the ball is clogged at any part in the tank rail 553. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of eliminating ball clogging through the opening 553d at the nearest position and reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the opening 553d is extended long in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, and the game ball rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553. It is possible to easily discharge dust, dust, etc. from B downward. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 as much as possible, and it is possible to facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the opening 553d is opened downward and backward, the opening has a size that allows contact from the outside while making it impossible for the game ball B to pass through and hindering rolling (distribution). The portion 553d can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect can be easily embodied.

Further, since the opening 553d is opened downward and backward, the internal game ball B can be easily visually recognized through the opening 553d only by looking from the rear without looking from below. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, the location where the ball clogging is occurring can be easily identified, so that the ball clogging can be easily eliminated, and the pachinko that surely exerts the above-mentioned action and effect. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since at least one opening 553d is provided in the portion of the tank rail 553 below the ball rectifying member 556, the tank rail 553 is filled with a plurality of game balls B from the outside. By touching the game ball B so as to push upward through the opening 553d, the ball rectifying member 556 can be pushed upward through the plurality of game balls B. At this time, by confirming the upward movement of the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball rectifying member 556 is in a swingable state, as described above by the ball rectifying member 556. It is possible to surely exert the alignment effect of the game ball B and suppress the ball clogging. Further, since the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed through the opening 553d, the workability at the time of maintenance can be improved and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is reduced. Can be made to.

Further, since the transparent protective cover 559 that covers the upper part of the tank rail 553 in a state where the ball rectifying member 556 can swing in the vertical direction is provided, the protective cover 559 causes dust and dirt to enter the tank rail 553 from above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent dust and the like from invading and can surely exhibit the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 555 is made transparent, the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, and the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed. can do. Further, since the inside of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged. From such a thing, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance, and it is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, by hitting the game ball B from above to below with the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to remove dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B, and the opening 553d makes it possible to remove the tank. Since the dust and dirt in the rail 553 can be discharged to the outside, the game ball B with as little dust and dirt as possible can be supplied to the payout device 580, and the dust and dirt in the payout device 580 can be supplied. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of problems caused by dust and dirt.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4, a plurality of game balls B are attached to the external terminal board 558558 to which the electric wire from which the coating on the tip is removed is connected from the rear. The stored ball tank 552 is provided adjacent to the right side, and the tank rail 553 that aligns and guides the game ball B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 is below and behind the external terminal board 558. A ball rectifying member 556 that swings up and down is provided on the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction at the portion of the above and is capable of collapsing the game balls B stacked on the upper part of the tank rail 553. Then, the game ball B can be guided outward in the left direction in front of and below the top plate portion 559c and the top plate portion 559c that cover a part of the upper part of the tank rail 553 and the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556. A protective cover 559 with a plate portion 559d is provided. As a result, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 is provided between the top plate portion 559c above the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 at a position lower than the top plate portion 559c, so that the external terminal is provided. An electric wire connected to the plate 558 and hanging backward can be bridged between the external terminal plate 558 and the top plate portion 559c like a bridge, and the game ball B can be bridged below the electric wire at the portion of the guide plate portion 559d. Can form a flowable gap. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 from the rear hangs down on the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the game ball is formed in the guide plate portion 559d between the top plate portion 559c and the external terminal plate 558. By making it possible to secure a gap in the height direction through which B can flow, the guidance of the game ball B to the left by the guide plate portion 559d is not obstructed by the electric wire, and the guidance of the protective cover 559 is not hindered. The plate portion 559d can guide the game ball B near the external terminal board 558 to the outside in the left direction away from the external terminal board 558, and the game ball B can be reliably removed from the rear of the external terminal board 558. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying in the vicinity of the external terminal board 558. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 is pulled out due to incomplete insertion of the electric wire into the external terminal board 558 or the electric wire being pulled backward for some reason, the electric wire is pulled out. Since the game ball B with which the tip of the electric wire comes into contact does not exist in the vicinity of the external terminal board 558, the tip of the electric wire does not come into contact with the game ball B, and a short circuit of the electric wire can be avoided. .. Then, by avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall controller) of the game hall can receive the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting error in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since at least a part above the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 555 is covered by the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 is external for some reason. Even if it comes off from the terminal plate 558, it is possible to prevent the tip of the electric wire pulled out by the top plate portion 559c from coming into contact with the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and the electric wire due to contact with the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a short circuit and achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, as described above, since the short circuit of the electric wire can be avoided, it is possible to surely receive the necessary information for the hall controller due to the short circuit of the electric wire and to prevent an error in the counting. Maintenance due to the occurrence of the error can be avoided, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Further, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 guides the game ball B to the outside in the left direction, even if the game ball B flows down on the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B Can be dropped to the outside in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and the gaming ball B can be prevented from falling to the rear side of the gaming machine. Therefore, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the electric wire hanging on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is caught and stays on the electric wire hanging on the rear side, or the game ball B is attached to the electric wire. There is no risk that the electric wire will come off from the external terminal board 558 due to contact, and the game ball B will stay on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or the electric wire will come off from the external terminal board 558. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects.

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one stage, but when the stacked game balls B are reduced from the second stage to the first stage, the game balls B in the upper stage are changed. When trying to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may mesh with each other and become immobile (so-called ball jamming due to ball shavings). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ball rectifying member 556 is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 abuts on the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B are distributed in this state, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, so that the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction due to the change in the height. When the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and it is prevented from trying to overtake the lower game ball B. This can be done, and the game balls B can be moved downward so as to interrupt behind the lower game balls B arranged in a row to prevent the game balls B from engaging with each other. Further, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so that the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked vertically can be broken. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B, and the tank rail 555 and the ball rectifying member 556 can align the game balls B stacked in the ball tank 552 and supply them to the payout device. The payout device 580 allows the game ball B to be paid out without delay.

Since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the electric wire hanging from the external terminal plate 558 abuts on the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, so that the ball rectifying member 556 It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from swinging in the vertical direction due to the contact of the electric wires. Therefore, even if the electric wire hangs down from the external terminal plate 558 above the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can swing in the vertical direction while being protected by the protective cover 559, so that the ball rectifying member 556 swings. The game balls B piled up by the movement can be surely collapsed, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, even if the game ball B flows down toward the ball rectifying member 556 for some reason, the top plate portion of the protective cover 559 The game ball B can be guided away from the external terminal board 558 and eliminated by the 559c before coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being unable to swing in the vertical direction due to the game ball B being placed on the ball rectifying member 556, and the game balls B stacked by the ball rectifying member 556 are collapsed to cause ball jamming. It can be prevented from occurring.

Further, since the tank rail 553 is extended in the left-right direction so as to pass behind the external terminal plate 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 is combined with the ball tank 552. The storage amount of the game ball B for payout in the above can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, when a player such as a "big hit" game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out is in an advantageous gaming state, there is no game ball B to be paid out (so-called ball out), which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a box-shaped back box having an opening 3010a penetrating back and forth behind the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a in the game board 5 is provided in front. 3000 is provided, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is directly attached to and detachably attached to the back box 3010 at the position of the opening 3010a of the back box 3000 when the size is the same as the opening 3010a. When it is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is detachably attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650. Therefore, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is backed through the set plate 1650. The staging display device 1600 can be attached to the box 3010. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is sized so that an effect display device having a size of 19 inches can be attached, and the set plate 1650 having a size of 19 inches corresponding to the opening 3010a has 15 inches. After the effect display device 1600 is attached, the set plate 1650 is fitted into the opening 3010a and attached to the back box 3010. As a result, the 15-inch effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650.

Therefore, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is changed due to a model change or a design change, the effect display device 1600 is attached by a set plate 1650 that matches the size of the effect display device 1600 without changing the back box 3010. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be used as it is, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to provide the staging display device 1600 having a size different from that of the conventional one while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the size of the staging display device 1600 is different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. Can easily attract the attention of the player by making it easy to make the pachinko machine 1 having a different appearance, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the back box 3010 has a box shape and the strength and rigidity of the back box 3010 are high, even if a large (heavy) effect display device 1600 is attached, it can be sufficiently supported, so that the effect display device can be sufficiently supported. The opening 3010a to which the 1600 is attached can be made as large as possible, and the largest (here, 19 inch) effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 (pachinko machine). .. In addition, due to model changes and design changes, there are various decorative bodies and staging devices in front of the staging display device 1600, such as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front staging unit 3300, the back bottom front staging unit 3400, and the back top rear staging unit. When the range that can be seen from the front is changed by providing the 3500 and the back bottom rear effect unit 3600, the effect display device 1600 (here, 15 inches) having the optimum size for the range is set on the set plate 1650. It can be attached to the back box 3010 via. Therefore, by using the set plate 1650, it is possible to attach the effect display device 1600 of various sizes, so that it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being provided with an unnecessarily large effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 arranged in the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, the position of the effect display device 1600 with respect to the back box 3010 may be changed due to a design change or the like. When changing, the position of the staging display device 1600 can be changed simply by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. The effect display device 1600 can be provided at a more effective position, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, so that the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a are used. The space can be closed by the set plate 1650. Therefore, in the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, dust, dirt, the game ball B, etc. enter the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems that cause interruption of the game, and it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from degrading the interest of the player, which makes the player enjoyable. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the set plate 1650 for attaching the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010 is transparent and has a flat plate shape, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, the effect display device is used. Through the space between the 1600 and the opening 3010a, the front to the rear or the rear to the front can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to check the inside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside, or to check the inside of the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, which makes maintenance easy. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side by making it simple.

Further, since the set plate 1650 has a flat plate shape, the space occupancy in the front-rear direction by the set plate 1650 can be reduced. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front directing unit 3300, and the back lower front as decorative bodies and staging devices that can easily secure a space for arranging It is possible to provide a staging unit 3400, a back-up post-effect unit 3500, and a back-down post-effect unit 3600, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, since the back box 3010 is provided behind the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front, the effect display device attached to the back box 3010 through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. The effect image produced by 1600 can be visually recognized, and the effect image can be entertained by the player. Further, since the pachinko machine 1 has a feeling similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine in which the effect image can be seen in the game area 5a, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine is given a sense of security by appearance. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, and the back lower rear effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high appeal to the player. Further, by the production by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, and the back lower rear effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010. Along with entertaining the player, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, the back top rear production unit 3500, and the back bottom rear production unit 3600 are produced. By appropriately combining the staging image of the staging display device 1600 with the staging image, a variety of staging can be shown to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the staging display device 1600 is detachably attached to the back box 3010, the staging display device 1600 can be easily removed from the back box 3010 when the staging display device 1600 fails, and it takes time and effort for maintenance. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game provided in the left-right direction in the ball guidance unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a of the game board 5A in which the game is played by the game ball B. Depending on the progress of the game (lottery result of the special symbol drawn) on the downstream side of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b where the ball B can flow and the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Since the second major winning opening 2007, which allows the game ball B to be accepted, is provided, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by lottery, the second major winning opening 2007 is provided. In order to allow the game ball B to be received by the large winning opening 2007, the player is hit with the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B circulates in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b. It can be inserted, and the game ball B can be driven (“right-handed”) aiming at the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a and the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b, and can be inserted into the game area 5a. Depending on whether or not the driven game ball B is guided by the desired first guide passage 2580a, which is easily accepted by the second prize opening 2007, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player's expectation. It is possible to suppress the decline in the taste of the aisle. Further, at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the player is asked to reach the second big winning opening 2007 so that the game ball B passing through the first guiding passage 2580a or the second guiding passage 2580b reaches the second big winning opening 2007. The driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Then, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, the side inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower is alternately provided, and a plurality of sides are provided in the vertical direction. The game ball is formed by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and the standing wall portion 2581c and the standing wall portion 2582d extending upward from the lower ends of the respective inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. B is guided downward in a zigzag manner in the front-rear direction, and the first protruding portion 2581e, the first protruding portion 2582b, and the first protruding portion 2582b protruding from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a above each inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. (Ii) A side wall portion 2581a at a portion between the second protruding portion 2583b of the protruding portion 2582f and the passage closing plate 2583, the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. The game ball B is guided in a meandering manner in the left-right direction by the first projecting piece portion 2581f and the second projecting piece portion 2582g protruding from the side wall portion 2582a. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state, so that the player can move the game ball B, which has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

At this time, the game ball B is moved from the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c to the left and right both outer sides by the side wall portions 2581a, the side wall portions 2582a, and the side wall portions 2583a provided on the left and right sides of the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. Can be regulated, and by the vertical wall portion 2581c and the vertical wall portion 2582d extending upward from the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c, the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c can be inclined downward. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball B moving to the portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c from falling outward in the front-rear direction, the game ball B is guided along the plurality of inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. And the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have a plurality of inclined portions 2581b and inclined portions 2582c that are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lowered, the inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portions are provided. When the game ball B guided in 2582c is viewed from the front, the flow speed is slower than that of the free flow, and the position of the game ball B in the front-rear direction is unclear. It is possible to make the game ball B appear to flow slowly against gravity, and it is possible to show the player the movement of the game ball B, which was not possible with conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

In this way, since the game ball B can be guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, it is compared with the case where the game ball B is freely flowed down. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball B can be relatively slowed (delayed). As a result, the staying time of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be lengthened, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a long time, and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, if the game ball B is made to flow down in a spiral shape as a guide passage, the game ball B flowing down in a spiral shape passes through the foremost part of the spiral shape many times, so that the flow speed of the game ball B It is easy to take the timing for. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily accept the game ball B into the second large winning opening 2007 on the downstream side at the time of "small hit" or the like, so that some players may perform a driving operation of the game ball B. I got bored early on, and there was a risk that my interest would decline. On the other hand, in the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, in the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Since the distribution speed is suppressed by swinging the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is delayed to the second major winning opening 2007 on the downstream side as compared with other areas in the game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult to take the timing of driving the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007, and it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation. As a result, the player can be motivated to perform the driving operation, the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the game ball B is accepted in the second prize opening 2007. It is possible to give a feeling and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 by the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b, the second big winning opening 2007 is reached. It is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B. As a result, it is difficult for the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b to accept the game balls B into the second major winning opening 2007. Therefore, by accepting the game balls B into the second major winning opening 2007, a predetermined number of game balls are accepted. It is possible to reduce the chance that B is paid out, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the game ball B is clogged in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b (when the ball clogging occurs), the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d of the left passage member 2581 as a communication portion are formed. A thin rod-shaped member is inserted from the outside through the gap between the two, and the gap between the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the top wall portion 2582e, and the game ball B is pierced to easily clear the clogging. Can be done. Therefore, even if a ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b during the game, it can be eliminated at an early stage, so that the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b are provided in the left-right direction, the game ball B guided in each of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can be shown to the player. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player drives the game ball B into the game area 5a in order to play a game, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a cause the game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a. , The game ball B flows down while making various movements, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the downstream end in the game area 5a is discharged from the out port 1008. In the game area 5a, the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005). Since the second big winning opening 2007 that opens and closes according to the above is provided, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B is accepted into the second big winning opening 2007. , The game ball B will be distributed in the pseudo-game area 2010 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in this pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making various movements due to these obstacle nails N, and reaches the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. The flowing game ball B is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 adjacent to the out port 1008. Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second major winning opening 2007 is provided in this pseudo-game area 2010, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 receives the game ball B according to the progress of the game. The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561.

As a result, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the game area 5a and the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making complicated movements due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B to the player and to make it difficult for the player to get bored. Further, since the out port 1008 of the game area 5a and the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player has an illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a. Can be made to. Furthermore, since the 2nd big prize opening door 2562 door of the 2nd big winning opening 2007 is supposed to move in the front-rear direction, the existence of the 2nd big winning opening door 2562 can be seen when viewed from the front (player). It can be made difficult, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (pseudo-large winning opening door 2405) that can be opened and closed can be relatively emphasized and conspicuous. Since the opening of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is made larger than that of the second major winning opening 2007, it is an illusion that the gaming ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 circulates in the game area 5a again. In addition to making the game area 5a, it is possible to give the illusion that a huge winning opening, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far, is provided, so that a strong impact can be given to the player and the game can be played. In addition to being able to strongly attract the attention of the player, the player can be strongly focused on the pseudo-game area 2010 regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010, and the appealing power to the player. It is possible to provide a high-quality pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the opening of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, many game balls B can be played in a short time. It is possible to make the player instantly recognize that it can be accepted, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and the game ball B to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of the game and suppress the decline in interest, and the pseudo-large prize opening 2402 provided in the pseudo-game area 2010 is a real large-scale prize provided in the game area 5a. It can make the player think that it is a mouth. Further, by accepting the game ball B to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, which is normally closed for the player, a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of the game ball B, the player is advantageous) to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state is generated, etc.), and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game.

For this reason, when the second major winning opening 2007 and the pseudo grand winning opening 2402 are opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be accepted, the second major winning opening 2007 is given to the player. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a aiming at, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the game ball B is received in the open second large winning opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B is provided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. Can flow down while making various movements to entertain the movement of the game ball B, and the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be accepted, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (No. 1). It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the two major winning openings 2007), and it is possible to entertain the player by accepting a large number of game balls B in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007, it is equipped with a huge large winning opening that has never been seen in pachinko machines for players. It is possible to misunderstand that the pachinko machine is as if it were, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest in the pachinko machine 1, and to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 opens and closes due to a "big hit" or the like, as described above, the second big winning opening opens due to the arrival of a chance for the player. It is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at 2007 (pseudo-large winning opening 2402), and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. At this time, since the game ball B circulating in the pseudo-game area 2010 is the one that has been accepted by the second prize opening 2007 and finished the game (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game). Even if it is accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the player is not given a privilege such as paying out the game ball B, and the increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is suppressed. Can be done. In addition, since the payout is made to all the game balls B received in the second big winning opening 2007, the payout is made to the player by accepting the game ball B into the pseudo big winning opening 2402. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Further, since all the game balls B received in the second big prize opening 2007 are paid out, the game balls B not accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 on the downstream side of the second big winning opening 2007. Since the payout is also made to the player, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the number of game balls B to be paid out is larger than the number of game balls B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It is possible to make the player feel like he / she has gained, and at the same time, he / she can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of his / her interest.

Further, the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed so that the game ball B can be accepted as a "big hit" or a notice that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state. As a result, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be opened and closed in a fluttering manner, which can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player, raise the expectation of the player for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest of the player. can. As this notice, for example, depending on the opening / closing speed, the number of opening / closing times, etc. of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to suggest the high or low degree of expectation that the gaming state will be advantageous. Alternatively, by opening and closing the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 with a rhythm such as 337 beats or a musical rhythm in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the high and low expectations and the game state after "big hit" (for example). , Time saving state, probable change state), etc. can also be suggested. In this way, by opening and closing the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, various effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Further, in a normal state, since the second big winning opening 2007 is closed and the game ball B cannot be accepted, even if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is provided. Since the game ball B cannot be distributed to the game area 2010, a premium feeling can be given to the distribution of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the second major winning opening is given according to the progress of the game. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player so that 2007 will be accepted.

Further, since the game ball B supplied from the second big winning opening 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 without returning to the game area 5a, the pseudo game area 2010 is a game. Since it is possible to make the player strongly think that it is a special area (premium area) independent of the area 5a, the player is strongly requested to distribute the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010. When the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opened and closed according to the progress of the game, the game ball B is actively aimed at the second large winning opening 2007 in order to distribute the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. It is possible to enter the game, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 and supplied in the pseudo game area 2010 is not received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the pseudo out port at the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. Since it is discharged from 2404, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo out port 2404 is similar to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, and it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo out port 2404 is the same as the out port 1008. As with the openable and closable second big winning opening 2007 provided in the game area 5a, the acceptance of the game ball B into the 2402 can be enjoyed without discomfort and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided adjacent to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, the first is It is possible to make it appear that the game ball B supplied from the two major winning openings 2007 to the pseudo-game area 2010 and not accepted by the pseudo-great winning opening 2402 is discharged from the out opening 1008.

Further, since the game ball B (so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561 and finished the game is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010, the pseudo game. In the area 2010, the game ball B that does not affect the game is used for the production. Therefore, for example, as compared with the effect device in which the pseudo game ball similar to the game ball B is enclosed, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for circulating the pseudo game ball for the effect, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can detect the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and the player can be more. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 is made visible to the player, the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) that has finished the game is distributed in the pseudo-game area 2010. Even so, since it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large winning opening, a game ball to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 that opens and closes according to the progress of the game. It is possible to strongly request the acceptance of B, and it is possible to entertain the driving of the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 (pseudo big winning opening 2402) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[11. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 172. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 167, and FIG. 169 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the setting change processing, the setting value confirmation display processing, and the error. The display process will be described.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit game or a small hit game, and a random number to determine an initial value for hit determination to be used to determine the initial value of this special random number. And, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to generate reach (reach loss) when the big hit game is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed in, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when a big hit game is generated. A symbol random number to be used for determining the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) to be derived and displayed, and a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number are prepared. ing. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to operate the variable winning opening door 2521 capable of inducing the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003, and a random number for determining whether or not to operate the ordinary symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

[11-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on processing described later, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is used. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various stored information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power down). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the sum value does not match, the main control MPU1310a incorporates the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. An ID code is extracted from the non-volatile RAM, and an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code. The mechanism is such that the derived fixed value is set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU1310a. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and a two-step security measure by the execution.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided with the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate 2002 at each predetermined interval, the variable winning opening door 2521 can be operated to guide the gaming ball B to the variable winning opening 2003. Cannot be generated.

[11-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, the information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased. Acts as a function of the RAM clear switch for. In this determination, the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who does this turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

In the determination in step S14, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU1310a, and is stored in the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value of 1 when deleting various information and a value of 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, in the main control MPU 1310a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turning it ON. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned on. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the signal of the setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when is turned ON, and the setting change or confirmation of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when the display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) can be received at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 boots in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). ) Is ready to receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , It is determined that various information will be deleted in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination of step S26, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum when it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of not 0 (step S29). .. This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S29, in the main control MPU1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as the backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 in the main control MPU1310a. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This routine is performed again by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 after turning it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The processing when the main control side power is turned on is started. The main control MPU1310a determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the above-mentioned determination in step S25. Moreover, assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the step described later is followed by the setting change process in step S37 described later. In the process of S38, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (hereinafter, "first RAM error"). How to cancel ").

As a method different from this first RAM error clearing method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing of this routine is started again. The main control MPU1310a determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key 1311a is not turned on and the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20B, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the above-mentioned determination in step S26. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information will be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. (Hereinafter, it will be described as "second RAM error clearing method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that the content stored in is abnormal (or unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error clearing method by the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process has been normally completed, the main control MPU1310a has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK-is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area will be cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, so that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU1310a is assumed that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and a predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the value is present, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, a predetermined setting value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, this setting change process is performed based on the signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, a setting changeover button for selecting and switching a set value. Works as a function of. Every time the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a The changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is operated from ON to OFF, and is stored in a predetermined area of RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. When it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the specified area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. And clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is an area dedicated to the set value in which the set value is stored, and an out port 1008, a first sub-out port 2021, and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2022 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area is the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the first sub out port 2021 counted in the ball number counting process described later. (2) The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the sub-out port 2022 is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a sum when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased. When the values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the taken out ID code is taken out. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on is performed, and this fixed value is used as the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random value. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment to be used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, "" It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer set value is set, the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is started until the time measured by the main control built-in WDT reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU1310a sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, the random numbers are latched in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a in order to update the special random numbers used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as acquisition, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract other values in one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is created as the transmission information by creating the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. be. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU1310a as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the non-winning random number update process is performed (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522, a first winning opening solenoid 2524, a second major winning opening solenoid 2563, a special monitor, and the like. The drive signal is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power supply cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not executed because the main control side power off processing is not executed, so the previous time. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power cutoff process on the main control side when the power is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, in the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When the setting can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of (such as), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when the setting value is decided to be changed, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to changing the set value. Since it is an important key that can confirm the set value, possession is permitted only to a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to 2 to 3 people. In this embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall or the like can delete (clear) the game backup information in the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent process is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the island equipment of the game hall is equipped. It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off from the main control side. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment). 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Although the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side timer described later is set. Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the game hall clerk staff member such as RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game can be obtained by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control board performs the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is the backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the check sum calculation result of step S28 and the check sum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the check sum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, until now. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power recovery, and the main control is performed. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, the determination in step S24 is performed. By repeating the game, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt enable is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter (such as information) from being updated. When the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power outage processing. By configuring it in two parts, a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all). , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built-in as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, information indicating the driving state of the first winning opening solenoid 2524, and driving of the second winning opening solenoid 2563. It is mainly composed of information indicating the state and information. Here, first, the information instructing the drive state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the information instructing the driving state of the first special winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second major winning opening solenoid are given to the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. The problem when the information indicating the drive state of 2563 is not included, that is, the problem when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50. The points will be explained.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 controls the second large winning opening solenoid 2563. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the second major winning opening 2007 is driven and opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of, the second major winning opening solenoid 2563 is driven by restoring to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. From the start, the second major winning opening 2007 will shift from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a big hit game is generated, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is transferred from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Which of the big hit games can be restored by displaying the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the received power-on state command. It is a round or cannot be displayed at all. That is, for example, a game ball enters the second major winning opening 2007 and is detected by the second major winning opening sensor 2561, and one count of the large winning openings telling the number of the game balls entered in the second major winning opening 2007. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the second major winning opening 2007 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the game ball can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the 4th round (4th round) of the big hit game, the drive of the 2nd big winning opening solenoid 2563 is stopped and the 2nd big winning opening 2007 opens and closes. Around the main control board 1310, the big winning opening 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state by the member (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the second big winning opening 2007) is issued. When the transmission is transmitted to the control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the big hit game, the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 is started to be driven and the second big winning opening 2007 is an opening / closing member. The main control board 1310 issues a large winning opening opening 5th display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the opening start of the 5th round of the 2nd major winning opening 2007). To the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state to display the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for informing the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the variable winning opening 2003 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player (for example, the variable winning opening 2003 is provided by the variable winning opening door 2521). While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the peripheral control board 1510 in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 to perform a variable winning. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the door 2521 is operated and the game ball B can be guided to the variable winning door 2003, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is moved to step S34. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the variable winning opening is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The drive of the solenoid 2522 is started and the variable winning opening door 2521 is operated in the opposite direction to shift to the state of closing the variable winning opening 2003.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 as a game state and a game state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 produces a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 and returned, a screen telling the player that the game is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the variable winning opening 2003 and that the game state is advantageous to the player. Cannot be displayed at all in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power outage has occurred, and the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In such a case, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is such that the gaming state is returned to the variable winning opening 2003 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Regardless of which player is, the player is not able to display the screen instructing the game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003). There was also the problem that if you played such a game, you wouldn't know.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on time. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a power stop or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the drive of the second major winning opening solenoid 2563 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the second major winning opening 2007 is closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is changed to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game (that is, how many rounds it is). Although it is not possible to display the screen showing A screen that tells you that you are in a state (for example, "It's a big hit. The second big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second big winning opening." Is displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600, and the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is instructed to enter the game ball into the second major winning opening 2007 after the power is restored. In the above-mentioned example, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, which is advantageous to the player. When the power is emitted and then the power is restored, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 can be started to be driven and the variable winning opening door 2521 can be operated to guide the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 as the return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that tells the player that the status is set (for example, a screen that tells the player that the variable winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the variable winning opening). The peripheral control board 1510 can display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is executed. Information instructing that when clearing, and the above-mentioned low when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which of the probabilistic time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine are shown. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs when a probability fluctuation occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the worker of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game will occur. In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it is played, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited, etc. Based on this, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which model is for the copyright of the same work. What type (maximum type, middle type, and Amadeji type) and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game occurs). It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or an ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[11-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 167 and 168.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 169 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, and a detection from the second start opening sensor 2401. Signal, detection signal from variable winning opening sensor 2526, detection signal from first major winning opening sensor 2524, detection signal from second major winning opening sensor 2561, detection signal from out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, And the detection signal from the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b. , The signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button, and the payer ACK from the payout control board 633 to inform that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Each signal is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is stored from the second start port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when the switch input processing is started in the state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing two readings in total, two readings for comparison and two readings for comparison over the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401, and the variable winning. Detection signal from mouth sensor 2526, detection signal from first prize opening sensor 2524, detection signal from second prize opening sensor 2561, out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 Detection signal, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a , The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that the payout control board 633 has normally received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later can be improved. can.

Following step S104, the main control MPU1310a performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU1310a, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. The main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a when it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is performed is not LOW. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the maximum value, and then the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the winning random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 168. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU1310a performs a ball number counting process (step S107). In this ball number counting process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input based on this input information, is discharged from the game board 5, and is distributed through the out ball passage 663. The game ball to be played (is driven into the game area 5a and is accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. The game ball discharged from the game board 5 is accepted into any of the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 without being accepted by any of the winning openings after being driven into the game area 5a. When the out sensor 664 detects the game ball discharged from the game board 5, the value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the total recovery ball counter, and the detection from the first ball sensor 703 is performed. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that is input to a signal and is received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 and flows through the first ball path 701, the out port 1008 , A game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, that is, a calculation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the out ball counter that counts the count of the number of balls of the so-called out ball is performed. A detection signal from the two-ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that is accepted by a winning opening such as, etc. and circulates in the second ball path 702, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, and the second starting Performs an operation of adding (incrementing) a value of 1 to the value of the safe ball counter that counts the count of the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, received in the winning openings such as the opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2007. .. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out sensor 664 is a game accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2007. Both the ball and the game ball accepted by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 are detected, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball collected by 2022 is detected, and the second ball sensor 704 is a winning opening such as a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2007. Detects the game ball accepted by.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the total collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, to the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, and the like. The total number of game balls accepted in the mouth and the game balls accepted in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is stored in the total collected ball counting area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. , The value of the out ball counter is stored in the out ball counting area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the total number of out balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the second sub out port 2022, and is a safe ball. The value of the counter is the total number of safe balls accepted in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. It is stored in the safe ball counting area in the specific area of. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls driven in is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the base calculation area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Further, in the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the total recovery ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2007. , Etc., every time the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings, the out openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10, a ball collection command for notifying that fact is created, and transmission information is created. Is stored in the output information storage area. In the main control MPU 1310a, each of the value of the recovery ball counter, the value of the out ball counter, and the value of the safe ball counter, which are the calculation results, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment), and further, the recovery ball. When the value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the counter, the out ball counter, or the safe ball counter, the values of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter overflow and become the value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the second major winning opening 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. In order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Self-check to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within the specified time. Create a command and send it to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process in step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, provided in the game board 5. For game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2007 (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). Based on this, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the information is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read-out main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to convey that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command,). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, the fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto””. It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initially set when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not a big hit game, the detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 2525 or the second big winning opening sensor 2561 is generated. When a game ball enters the first major winning opening 2006 or the second major winning opening 2007, etc., an abnormal winning opening is classified as an abnormal state and is classified as a winning abnormality. A display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting area is the general winning opening sensor 3001, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the first. The total number of game balls detected by the one starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, and the second large winning opening sensor 2561, that is, actually the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, If it is different from the total number of game balls accepted in the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, etc., the notification is displayed as an abnormal state. A winning abnormality display command to be classified is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the fraud detection, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of the abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame opening switch detects that, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input and the main body frame opening switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Is set in the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. Until it is started, it is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

Following step S113, the main control MPU1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined in advance whether or not to generate a game (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. Judgment (determines the hit type) whether or not it matches any of the hit type judgment values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2401. In the case of, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning). A mouth 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. When the output of the drive signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the second major winning opening 2007 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the 2-round indicator lamp of the round indicator is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. When the round is 15 times, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp so that the 15-round indicator lamp of the round indicator is lit, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and light the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU1310a performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with a 0th to 3rd section (4 sections), and a normal winning opening is provided in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning slot The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information in the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, respectively. It is shifted and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information storage is the first. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage will be empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is used as a reserved ball, and the function display unit 1400 is normal. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to light the hold display, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to operate the variable winning door 2521 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). If it is decided to operate by this decision, the variable winning opening door 2521 is operated to open the variable winning opening 2003, so that the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. It becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is performed as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning port solenoid 2522 is set so as to operate the variable winning port door 2521, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the device, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning the normal lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main pay ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, for example. When it is a big hit game, a drive signal is sent to the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 that open and close the opening and closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007. In addition to outputting and outputting a drive signal to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 that operates the variable winning opening door 2521 for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003, a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. , Small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, and other various information (game information) signals related to the game are sent to the payout control board 633. Output, output the launch permission signal set in the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, or the number of payouts for the total number of game balls driven (paid out prize) A lighting signal for outputting a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the total number of spheres, or displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g. Is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information is classified into various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands to be executed (for example, when a game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 2007 is detected, the large winning opening 1 corresponding to the large winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the second major winning opening sensor 2561 Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric function production, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands to be classified, various commands to be classified for testing, and various commands to be classified to others (for example, a prize ball based on a game ball in which the main control board 1310 has entered various winning openings provided in the game board 5). Every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Main prize ball number information output command, etc.) and various commands classified into specific history (for example, general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening) Every time the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10, a ball that informs that fact. Recovery command, setting change command to tell that the setting value has been changed, error display command to tell that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), main The ON operation command of the setting key that informs the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the control built-in RAM) is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. You can do it. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter are used. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main peripheral serial data in that order. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, then to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is supported. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

It should be noted that the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. When a ball recovery command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted. For each received ball collection command, there are winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first major winning opening 2006, second major winning opening 2007, etc. The number of balls of the game ball collected at the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information (counted value) stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). (That is, general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007, etc. Information) associated with the total number of game balls collected at the opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 and the updated date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted values (that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the variable winning opening 2003) are used. , 1st starting port 2004, 2nd starting port 2005, 1st big winning opening 2006, 2nd big winning opening 2007, etc. The ball collection information associated with the total number of balls of the gaming ball and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 stores the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the start date, and the ball recovery information is stored and held as the ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup processing is executed as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. At the time of turning on the power, which indicates the drive state of the variable winning port solenoid 2522, the first special winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second major winning opening solenoid 2563, which are the electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. The main control return destination command can be output to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 167 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. A command for returning to the main control when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. It sends commands to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output when the power is turned on, status, mode, and sum value. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 167 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It sends, then sends to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then outputs the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. Judgment counter Sends to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST machine). ) Etc.), and based on the game specification code, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[11-5. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIG. 167.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 170 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is a checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167. It is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, in the main control MPU 1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 168. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value whose setting can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to the value 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is set, the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power supply cutoff process is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. Judge that it is not.

In the determination of step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a is set in the counterclockwise direction from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it off, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the signal for turning on the decision key from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the determination key has not been operated, it returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated, the processes of step S218 and step S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is not operated. When the determination is made, the determination returns to the determination in step S216 again, and when the setting switching button is operated until the enter key is operated, the setting value is added and updated by one value each time the operation is performed, and the setting display 1310g is updated. If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the determination key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the decision key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the updated setting value is updated with respect to the setting value set in, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the area dedicated to the setting value in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a has an initial position (that is, a setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that the switch 1311a is returned to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the determination returns to the determination of step S226 again, and the determination of step S226 is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden for the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting value after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to the value 6. In the determination of step S233, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is normal in step S224. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the range is normal, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is the same as that in FIG. 169. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, the main control MPU1310a performs an error display process (step S240) when it is determined that the range is not normal, and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[11-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 171 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU1310a opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Is determined to be open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the signal of setting key ON, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such condition, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installed value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 170, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is used. It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is within the normal range from the set value 1 to the set value 6, and when it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is confirmed. Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing this, control is performed to switch to the specific history information display image for selecting and displaying the specific history information from the images displayed so far and to display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, whether the main control MPU1310a has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination of step S362, the main control MPU1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Set the OFF operation command of the setting key (step S368), and end this routine. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, the interrupt non-permission setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU1310a enters an infinite loop that performs error display processing (step S372) and subsequently clears the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[11-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 (FIG. 170). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171), and is a process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 172 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. While it is possible to tell that the launch is permitted, if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 167. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the process on the main control side power-on shown in FIG. 168. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the emission permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) that reverses the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 167. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU1310a recovers power in step S400 and then displays an error, which is the routine. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, it has already been shown in FIG. 171 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is terminated, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 169. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed to the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and is performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 (FIG. 170). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171 are started and ended, respectively, and the process enters an infinite loop as described above. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data as the peripheral control board. It is being sent to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the received date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of message images in white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. It is controlled to flow from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker of main body frame 4, etc.) by forcibly setting the maximum volume regardless of the volume. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command for transmitting another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[12. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on processing, FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing, and FIG. 175 is a payout control unit following FIG. 174. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 176 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 173 to 175 under the control of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination of step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout information (such as the PRDY signal output setting information), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the power cutoff process of the control unit is normally completed, and to 0 when the power cutoff process of the payout control unit is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information that is stored in the CR communication information storage area and in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase the payout information, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is. When it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for timing 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually uses the counter for determining the number of prize balls information. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is shown). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball gummy determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball gummy state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591. Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that do not match due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gadget judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery, etc. The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the power stop or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the mismatch counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process is performed. As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the signal logic state is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game ball, the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the time counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls this time. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. The ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and the display data is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball-out information, the corresponding ball-out information is dealt with. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 In, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, the port output process is performed in step S548, the port input process is performed in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other variable processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, the writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on time process shown in FIGS. 173 to 175.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 176 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 181. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 179 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510”) includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and Various I / O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 177. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 177 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a V blank signal input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the constant processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this staging operation unit monitoring process, in the staging operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressing detection provided in the staging operation unit 300. Rotation (rotation direction) of the contact operation unit 302 and Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the staging operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the contact operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the staging operation unit monitoring processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the luminance specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value constituting the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the luminance designation value, one luminance designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (off) to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. It is a value that can be set, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st luminance which is the maximum luminance from the 1st luminance designated value. It is possible to set one brightness specified value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the contact operation unit 302 is counteracted. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be low along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, there is a case in which the player (or the clerk of the game hall, etc.) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall, etc.) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness are obtained. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated with light. be. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance designated value in the other palette values. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the normal pallet value with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are directly irradiated as light, the palette is applied to a specific decorative board (LED that is dazzling to the player) that is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. The state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light can be visually recognized as the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. With respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of each, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights out)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually determines the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness is more effective), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one luminance specified value is set up to the luminance specified value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance specified value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark). It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship).

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (one frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 by the sound data output processing described later will occur. From various speakers such as 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness designation value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively, are set. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of pending numbers (0 to 4), and a variable pattern for instructing the start of variable effects such as variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols. Whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, or a large winning opening 1 count display command that is output each time a game ball is accepted in the first major winning opening 206 or the second major winning opening 2007. It analyzes which game state it is currently in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to the synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to the normal electric function effect, various commands classified as the notification display, various commands classified as the status display, various commands classified as related to the test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on a received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC is one screen that reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is selected. Read (extract) from the peripheral control ROM and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Sound effects are playing. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. ing.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds have passed since the change pattern command was received until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), the adjustment can be made by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. By operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate except for (until the elapse of seconds). It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, and this amplified production sound is serialized to audio data. It is designed to be output as.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. The volume flowing from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker, top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data. , Completely depends on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used. The maximum volume is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume that flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. It is amplified to the master volume value that becomes, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegality is made to the pachinko machine 1. To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and this composition is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound is generated as described above, although it does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. It is proceeding according to the schedule data.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After a lapse of a predetermined period, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is set as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set. (Set), the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 are made to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 is dealt with. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent activity, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is for the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker, this muted production sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period, and the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and so on. When the bass frame speaker of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the schedule data for sound generation until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from the place where it progressed according to.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume low, the sound effects such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem has occurred or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the staging sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 178 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit stationary processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177 is being executed. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this is as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB. -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing is completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 177. By setting the value 1 to the constant processing flag SP-FLG in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 177. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is the routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process. Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 177. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 177 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series while driving an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data to be performed, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5) or the like. ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided in the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various staging units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. By setting or acquiring the movable position, the movable position can be grasped.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the contact operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, or the door frame can be adjusted. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM are set in different areas and are set to SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 177, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sends the main peripheral serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. Is assigned the calculated sum value.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC inputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the data is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the CPU is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge is performed to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control board 1510 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. It can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 181 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. (Step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided in the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing it, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 177 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Game content]
Next, the game content by the game board 5 of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment.

In the game board 5 of the third embodiment, one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is set as the second starting opening 2005, and the first embodiment is performed. The second starting port 2005 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the form is used as the general winning opening 2001. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and it can be driven strongly enough to rotate in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, and the second starting port are the entrances where the game ball B can enter. One big winning opening 2006 is provided, and in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a second big winning opening 2007 is provided as an entrance where the game ball B can enter. Of these, regarding the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the upper part is always open and the game ball B can be accepted at all times, whereas the variable winning opening 2003 and the first large winning opening 2006 The second major winning opening 2007 is closed in a normal state, and is opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the game ball B can be accepted.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. Either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532. The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize-winning door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B circulating through the left guide passage group 2530 is discharged above the gate 2002, and is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate. After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between 2002 and 2002, the gate 2002 is passed through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable winning opening The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 0/100, and the other gaming states (high probability time saving). In the normal lottery in the state, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" is 100/100. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state, a variable prize is won after some peculiar situations (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, and low-probability time-saving state C are completed. Except for the situation where a part of the operation of opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 is continued by the opening door 2521), the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be extremely low, and the probability of shortening the time is high. In the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 is higher than in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state. Is set to.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided in the portion close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to distribute the left second guide passage 2532 than to distribute the left first guide passage 2531. It will be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 with a probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Is paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example,). 0.01-120 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning opening 2003 is normally opened after the lapse of the variable time. Further, in the time-saving state, the relatively short normal fluctuation time is selected at a higher rate than in the non-time-saving state. The time until the result is suggested (the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to the derivation of the lottery result: the normal fluctuation time) is shortened relatively. It has become. (For example, in the non-time saving state, the normal fluctuation time of 60 seconds is more likely to be selected than in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, the normal fluctuation time of 0.01 seconds is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. ).

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed. Further, the number of pending lottery results of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number of pending cards is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

At the site of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down any of the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, and the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 that is open to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. ..

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2004.

When the game balls B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and the first special symbol (for example, "off", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit", etc.) is drawn on the main control board 1310. Is done. If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "off", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). In the time-reduced state, the special fluctuation time, which is relatively short, is selected as the special fluctuation time of the first special symbol at a higher rate than in the non-time-reduced state. The period until the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested is relatively shortened (for example, as the special variation time of the first special symbol, a special variation time of 60 seconds can be selected in the non-time saving state. The sex is higher than in the time-saving state, and the special fluctuation time of 0.01 seconds is more likely to be selected in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, etc.).

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001, the second starting port 2005, or the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

As for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the upper part is always open, and the game ball B can be accepted at all times. However, for the first starting port 2004, the game ball B discharged into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted with a high probability, but for the second starting port 2005, the center There is no possibility that the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 into the game area 5a will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the first starting port 2004 with a higher probability than that of the second starting port 2005.

When the game balls B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 are received by the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example,) from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (for example). , 1) game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and on the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "off", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit" , Etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "off", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In the time-reduced state, the special fluctuation time, which is relatively short, is selected as the special fluctuation time of the second special symbol at a higher rate than in the non-time-reduced state. The period until the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested is relatively shortened (for example, as the special variation time of the second special symbol, a special variation time of 60 seconds can be selected in the non-time saving state. The sex is higher than in the time-saving state, and the special fluctuation time of 0.01 seconds is more likely to be selected in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, etc.).

In the present embodiment, in the order of acceptance to the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003, the first special symbol is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004, or the second. The second special symbol is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. That is, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004, and the lottery of the second special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. The suggestion of the result is made in the order of acceptance to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003.

The lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is suggested. If the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 during the period (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started, so that the special symbol drawn earlier cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed. The number of reserved first special symbol lottery results is limited to four for the first starting port 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2004. Also discards the lottery result of the first special symbol without holding it. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

Similarly, a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. If the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 before the result is suggested (special variation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. , The start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) drawn earlier is completed. The number of pending second special symbol lottery results is limited to four for the second starting opening 2005 and the variable winning opening 2003, and for more than that, the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2003, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

Under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is no possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning opening 2003. It is possible to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 has an entrance to the right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance with a space to the left from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. It is composed of a right second guide passage 2542 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 (so-called right strike), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutment portion 1006 (right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker than the hit, there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the right second guide passage 2542. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 depending on the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B circulating through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guidance region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B circulating through the right second guide passage 2542 is a specific obstacle. It is released into the second lead region 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guidance region 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the portion of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 as compared with the normal region.

In the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide region 2710, and when it deviates from the second guide region 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below Will be accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the circulation of the right second guide passage 2542 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B is distributed in the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right-handed". There is. That is, at the time of "right-handed", the driving operation of rotating the handle 195 greatly is urged so that the game ball B is driven with a strength such that the game ball B abuts on the abutment portion 1006. This makes it easier to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by a relatively easy driving operation.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not received in the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and is the second attacker portion. Enter 2560. Under normal conditions, the second major winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second major winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker are closed. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second prize-winning door 2562, rolls to the left on the second prize-winning door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A general start port 2001 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the general start port 2001, and an inclined wall portion of the lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the general start port 2001. 2418s are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the exit of the right discharge passage 2565, the general starting port 2001, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is accepted by the general starting port 2001 with a certain probability. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than that of the general start port 2001. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and not received in the general start port 2001 or the second sub-out port 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418 and is along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally to the lower left, is discharged to the left at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received by the out port 1008.

That is, under normal conditions, when the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (“right-handed”), there is an opportunity to receive the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning opening 2003. There is no. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 (““ It is possible to give a premium feeling to "right-handed").

As described above, the first big winning opening is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. The 2006 or second prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be accepted.

When the first prize opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the first prize opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the left first prize opening 2006. (Ii) The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the guide passage 2532. Then, when the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big prize opening 2006 when the first big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201.

On the other hand, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, since the second major winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 is provided to the player. Can be driven so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. Is accepted into the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Will be done.

In this way, when the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B as a big hit game. Either a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed after the open state is reached, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the second major winning opening 2007. When the condition is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the game ball B is in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 5 rounds for "5R jackpot" and 10 rounds for "10R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and the game ball B can be accepted, the second big winning opening 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to take the timing to drive the game ball B. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to arouse the rewardingness of the game and entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. .. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn will be higher ("probability change"), or the variable winning opening There is a "hit" that is changed ("short time hit") so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into 2003. For example, when the ordinary lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be "ordinary hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", it is closed by the variable winning door 2521. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003.

Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit", as a small hit game, the first big winning opening 2006 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes in between (for example, a small hit rush).

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "immediate short hit", the big hit game or the small hit game is not executed, and the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big prize is won. The mouth 2007 is not in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted, but thereafter, it is assumed that the time-saving state is maintained as an advantageous game state for a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, below the second major winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo-game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. , The game ball B is accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo-out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo-large winning opening 2402, for example, allows the game ball B to be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern when the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "big hit" or the like. It will be acceptable. Since this pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided so as to be larger and more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, many game balls B accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By doing so, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and entertain during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol) is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then by the combination of the lit LEDs. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each pattern sequence in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The picture rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "off", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, "short time" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

In addition, the time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottered special symbol. It is possible to perform a player participation type staging in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the staging display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top rear effect unit 3500, the back bottom rear effect unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type staging in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2004) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passing process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot control for controlling the jackpot game is performed. The process (step S240) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "big hit A", 10R A process of opening / closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the big hit game. Further, when the mode suggesting "big hit B" is executed, the process of opening / closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the 5R jackpot game, and the mode suggesting "big hit C" is obtained. A process of opening / closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the 10R big hit game.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S240), after the opening control of the second big winning opening 2007 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the special symbol is in a high-probability state, and when the 10R jackpot game based on the result of the lottery processing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is an aspect suggesting "big hit A" is completed. , Set at the end of the 5R jackpot game based on the mode suggesting "big hit B". Then, the high probability flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, when the next big hit occurs.

Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is reached, and the 10R big hit is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is an embodiment suggesting "big hit A" or "big hit C". It is set when the mode suggests "immediate short hits A to C" at the end of the game. Then, the time saving flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes “0”.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and suggests "big hit A" or "big hit C". When the 10R big hit game based on the above-mentioned aspect is ended, and when the aspect suggests "immediate short-time hits A to C", the number of continuations of the time-saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the big hit executing flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S236), and the small hit executing flag is set. If it is set, the small hit control process (step S239) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit". A process of opening / closing the first large winning opening 2006 is executed according to the small hit game.

If the small hit execution flag is not set, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is executed (step). S238). In this example, when the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and when the second special random number of the second special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter, the special symbol hold storage common to both is stored. It is configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order stored in the area and stored in the special symbol reservation storage area.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S231, the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 184. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this counter value. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is used as a counter value by the first special hold number counter and a counter by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the total value consisting of the values.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, the type of small hit if it is a small hit, and the type of immediate short hit if it is an immediate short hit , Large hit, small hit, or immediate short hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed. Is executed before the start of the variation display according to the start winning prize, and the staging pre-determination process is executed (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first hold storage. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 0)) for instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the staging pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in the above step S241 or the random number acquired in the later step S251, specifically, a special random number (first). By comparing special random numbers (special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), reach random numbers, and variable random numbers, it is possible to make big hits, small hits, immediate short hits, and big hits. If it is a big hit, it is a small hit type, if it is a small hit, it is a small hit type, if it is an immediate short hit, it is an immediate short hit type, and if it is a big hit, a small hit, or if it is not an immediate short hit, it is an effect display device. The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in 1600, or the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, the type of the small hit if it is a small hit, and the case of an immediate short hit The type of immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, and if it is not an immediate short hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (variable pattern). (Type), etc.), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number, second special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first reserved storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the setting are set, and in the effect pre-determination process relating to the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second start port passage process described later, The second special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the second special random number, the second reserved storage number (value of the second special hold count counter), and the second special symbol pre-judgment command (step S262). ).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 in which the start winning is generated are generated. In addition to the number of reserved storages stored in response to, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, a small hit, an immediate short hit, and if it is a big hit, a big hit Type, type of small hit if it is a small hit, type of immediate short hit if it is an immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, game executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not an immediate short hit Preliminary determination information such as whether to execute the reach effect as the effect or the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize. The peripheral control IC can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

Further, the reserved storage area has 1 to 8 storage areas corresponding to the total number of reserved storage areas of the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area, and the peripheral control IC receives a pre-determination command. The indicated pre-determination information is stored in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 7) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 7) storage area is received. Is stored, and when a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of variation display of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received, it responds to the received variation pattern command. The pre-judgment information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area is discarded, and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 8) storage area is used as the N-1th (N =). 2 to 8) Move to the third storage area (shift the prejudgment information stored in the reserved storage area). As a result, the pre-judgment information of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is memorized so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension for starting the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information. Become so.

At the time when the fluctuation display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the fluctuation display control is maintained even though the fluctuation display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S233, it is determined that the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2005, as shown in FIG. 186. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is determined to be "4" (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to the following steps S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S255 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is used as a counter value by the first special hold number counter and a counter by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the total value consisting of the values.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S251. Whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, the type of small hit if it is a small hit, and the type of immediate short hit if it is an immediate short hit , Large hit, small hit, or immediate short hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed. Is executed before the start of the variation display according to the start winning prize, and the staging pre-determination process is executed (step S255), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S255, the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 0)) for instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", and the game ball is set to the second starting port 2005. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball is set to "4". In addition, since it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the normal state during the time saving state, the first start is performed by continuing the period in which the second reserved storage number is the upper limit for a long time. Even if a game ball enters the mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005, it is suppressed that the player is in a disadvantageous state that the chance of a big hit lottery is not obtained.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S238). In the special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) stored in the RAM of the main control MPU1310a are read, and based on the read special random numbers, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the above special symbol is stopped is performed. Special symbol normal processing to be performed (step S280)
2. 2. Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped (step S281).
3. 3. The variation mode of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the special symbol on the staging display device 1600. Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process or the like for a variation mode of the effect display executed in response is performed.
4. Special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the above special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The special symbol display mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped is displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Special symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of symbols (step S284)

The special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 167).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing of step S301. As a variable display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special random number) in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter and the counter value of the second special hold number counter. Make a judgment as to whether or not. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the special symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S302, the special symbol stored in the special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The earliest of random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, special random number (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, variable random number). The random number stored in the storage area is read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, if the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and if it is the second special random number, the above is described. A random number related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol stored in each storage area of the special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped (special random number (special random number (special random number)) while counting down the second special hold number counter. The first special random number, the second special random number), the symbol random number (the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number), the reach random number, and the variable random number) are shifted in a first-in, first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

Specifically, the special symbol reservation storage area has eight storage areas 1 to 8, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 7) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 7) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 8) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 8) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

After that, as the process of step S305, if the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special random number is used, and if the read special random number is the second special random number, the second special random number is used. The hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, the small hit, and the immediate short hit, is performed. After that, when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process is terminated.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state) (step S311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high-probability time shown in FIG. 190 (A). If the lottery table is selected (step S312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S311), the lottery at the low probability shown in FIG. 190 (B). A table is selected (step S313), and the selected lottery table is compared with the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S314).

In the lottery table shown in FIGS. 190 (A) and 190 (B), when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time saving state (normal state)) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), A low-probability lottery table used when the game state is high-probability (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), and a high-probability lottery table used when the game state is high-probability I have. Then, in the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319, when the set value is 2, 1/309, and when the set value is 3. The first special random number was won with a jackpot probability of 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. Immediate short hit judgment indicating that the first special random number was won in the immediate short hit with the immediate short hit probability of 1/319, which matches the big hit judgment value indicating that and is the same in all of the set values 1 to 6. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value and match the deviation determination value indicating that the other first special random numbers are out of the above. Further, in the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319, when the set value is 2, 1/309, and when the set value is 3. The second special random number was won with a jackpot probability of 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that, and is the same as the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319 which is the same in all of the set values 1 to 6. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are out of the above. Further, the lottery table at the time of high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased 10 times as compared with the lottery table at the time of low probability.

In the above, the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number does not have a small hit determination value, whereas the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number does not have a small hit determination value. A judgment value is provided. As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, and in addition to being able to easily execute the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning in the variable winning opening 2003, the variable winning opening Since there is a possibility of winning a small hit by winning a start in 2003, the player can play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

Further, in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, an immediate short hit determination value is provided, whereas in the lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number, the immediate short hit determination value is provided. No hit judgment value is provided. As a result, it is difficult to accept the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 in the non-time saving state, and the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2004 has become the mainstream. Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short hit by winning a start to the first starting port 2004, it is possible to play the game with expectation even in a state where a disadvantageous game is performed in a non-time saving state. ..

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a big hit as a result of comparison between the lottery table and a special random number (a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing). When it is determined to be either a small hit or an immediate short hit (step S315), a hit flag (big hit flag, small hit) indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit. (Flag, immediate short hit flag) is set (step S316), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when none of the big hit, the small hit, and the immediate short hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is out of order, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table is used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table in the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reachable. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be out of reach as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317), the variation Is set to the reach flag indicating that the reach is reached, and the process is terminated (step S319).

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first changes the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 191. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the display is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the immediate short hit flag are set (step S321).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a has the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing and the jackpot time shown in FIG. 190 (C). By comparing with the symbol determination table of (step S322), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined. (Step S323).

specifically,
1. 1. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2007 (easy), and there is a high probability until the next big hit is reached after the big hit game is over. Big hit A to control the time saving state
2. 2. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2007 (easy), and there is a high probability until the next big hit is reached after the big hit game is over. Big hit B to control to non-time saving state
3. 3. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2007 (easy), and after the big hit game is over, a special symbol (first special symbol, first) (2) If the variable display of the special symbol) is not executed 100 times before the big hit, the time saving state is terminated. The big hit C controlled to the low probability time saving state A.
4. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2007 (easy), and after the big hit game is over, a special symbol (first special symbol, first) (2) If the variable display of the special symbol) does not become a big hit before it is executed 599 times, the time saving state is terminated. The big hit D that controls to the low probability time saving state A.
One of the four types of jackpots is decided.

In the symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot to be compared with the first symbol random number, the determination values are distributed to the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D. Specifically, the judgment value is distributed to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100) at a ratio of "big hit A: big hit B: big hit C: big hit D = 25: 25: 49: 1". Has been done. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is distributed to the jackpot A and the jackpot C, but the determination value is not distributed to the jackpot B and the jackpot D. Specifically, the determination value is distributed to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100) at a ratio of "big hit A: big hit C = 70: 30". Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of being determined as jackpot A is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. It was configured and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 was executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2004. In some cases, it is in an advantageous state for the player.

Further, when the type of the jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot is determined as the mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the jackpot A is decided, the jackpot A symbol is decided as the jackpot symbol, when the jackpot B is decided, the jackpot B symbol is decided as the jackpot symbol, and when the jackpot C is decided, the jackpot B symbol is decided. The jackpot C symbol is determined as the symbol, and when the jackpot D is determined, the jackpot D symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the immediate short hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will be the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit shown in FIG. 190 (D) (step S322), the type of immediate short hit is determined, and the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of immediate short hit. The mode (stop symbol of the special symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S323).

specifically,
1. 1. Low probability that the time saving state will end if there is no big hit before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 100 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. Immediate short hit A controlled to time saving state C
2. 2. Low probability that the time saving state will end if there is no big hit before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 40 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. Immediate short hit B controlled to time saving state C
3. 3. Low probability that the time saving state will end if the big hit is not achieved before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 20 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. Immediate short hit C controlled to time saving state C
One of the three types of immediate short hits is determined.

In the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit, which is compared with the first symbol random number, the determination values are distributed to immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, and immediate short hit C. Specifically, the judgment value is the ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10: 20: 70" to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100). It is sorted. On the other hand, since the immediate short hit is not won by the lottery based on the second special random number, the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number is the immediate short hit A and the immediate short hit B. The judgment value is not distributed to the short hit C. However, the immediate short hit is won by lottery based on the second special random number, and the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit, which is compared with the second symbol random number, is also the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short. The determination value may be distributed to the hit C at a ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10: 20: 70". Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after winning an immediate short hit by a lottery based on a special random number, the type of the immediate short hit is determined using the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the symbol random number. However, in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the special random number, the judgment value that becomes the immediate short hit A, the judgment value that becomes the immediate short hit B, and the judgment value that becomes the immediate short hit C are set. , When each determination value and the special symbol match, it may be decided to win the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C. That is, the type of immediate short hit may be determined only by a lottery based on a special random number.

Further, when the type of immediate short hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of immediate short hit is determined as the mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, it is determined to be an immediate short hit A symbol as an immediate short hit symbol, and if it is determined to be an immediate short hit B, it is determined to be an immediate short hit B symbol as an immediate short hit symbol. If it is determined and the immediate short hit C is determined, the immediate short hit C symbol is determined as the immediate short hit symbol.

Further, if the small hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) and a diagram read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in 190 (E) (step S322), the type of small hit is determined, and when the fluctuation control of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of small hit is stopped. The aspect (stop symbol of the special symbol) is determined (step S323).

specifically,
1. 1. A small hit game in which the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 2006 (easy) by executing the opening / closing pattern twice after opening the first big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms). Decide on a hit.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is distributed to the small hit. Specifically, a determination value is set in which one type of "small hit" is selected for all of the second symbol random numbers (for example, random numbers of 1 to 100). On the other hand, since the small hit is not won by the lottery based on the first special random number, the determination value is not distributed to the small hit in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit compared with the first symbol random number. However, a small hit may be won by a lottery based on the first special random number, and the determination value may be distributed to the small hit in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit to be compared with the first symbol random number. In addition, although only one type of small hit is set in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, multiple types of small hits with different opening times and opening times of the first big winning opening 2006 are set and compared with the symbol random numbers. One of a plurality of types of small hits may be determined by using the symbol determination table at the time of small hits.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is decided to be a small hit, it is decided to be a small hit symbol.

If none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the immediate short hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a missed symbol (step S324). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above lottery result (type of big hit, type of immediate short hit, small hit, reach) as the process of step S328. A judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that either disengagement or disengagement instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. (Step S328). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the jackpot A from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the jackpot A If the symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9") is determined and the jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B symbol (left, middle, and right) If the right decorative symbol is determined to be a combination that becomes the symbol of "579") and the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot C symbol (the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is among the symbols "0" to "9"). If the combination is determined to be the same even-numbered symbol and the jackpot D is determined, the jackpot D symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same even-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9". Combination) is decided. If the jackpot C and the jackpot D are determined, a common even-numbered symbol combination can be displayed, and at the stage when the symbol combination is displayed, it is not clearly shown to the player which hit is the jackpot D. I try to give a feeling of expectation to something and continue the game. If the immediate short hit A is determined, the immediate short hit A symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "549" symbols) is determined, and if the immediate short hit B is determined, the immediate short hit B is determined. Immediate short hit B symbol (combination where the left / middle / right decorative symbol is a symbol of "549") is decided, and if it is decided to be immediate short hit C, immediate short hit C symbol (left / middle / right) The combination in which the decorative symbol is the symbol of "549") is determined. When the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the common combination of "549" can be displayed, and at the stage when the symbol combination is displayed, which hit is used. It is not explicitly stated to the player, but the expectation that it is a more advantageous immediate short hit is given and the game is continued. If a small hit is determined, it is determined to be a small hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "135" symbols). In addition, when the reach out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach symbol (the combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" but different in the middle decorative symbol; reach; If it is decided to be an out-of-order symbol and an outlier is specified, a combination of out-of-order symbols (a combination of left, middle, and right decorative symbols in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different. The hit B symbol, the immediate short hit C symbol, and the small hit symbol are excluded), and the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect). The display is controlled to 1600. Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, even when the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the gaming state at that time is a gaming state other than the low probability non-short hit state. If it is (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), the process of setting the time saving flag and the time saving number counter corresponding to the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C is executed. Therefore, in the gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state, even if the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the immediate short hit A to C symbols (left, middle, right decorative symbols) Does not determine the combination that becomes the symbol of "549"), but determines the above-mentioned "out-of-reach symbol without reach".

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 192, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is set with the jackpot flag. (Step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of a big hit according to the type of the big hit and the game state determined in step S323 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S341), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit according to the type of the small hit and the game state determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and immediately. If the short hit flag is set (step S341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of immediate short hit according to the type of immediate short hit and the game state determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process is displayed. Select (step S342). If the reach flag is set (step S343), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S344), and all of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the immediate short flag, and the reach flag are set. If it is not done, that is, if it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S345).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started by the peripheral control board. A special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special indicator) of the function display unit 1400 by setting the variation pattern command to be notified to 1510. ) Is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU1310a compares the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Then, by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game increases.

Further, as will be described in detail later, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. At times, the specific variation pattern table is selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the specific variation pattern table is selected, the specific variation pattern (the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect described later) is determined. ing. Then, when the specific variation pattern is determined, the help mode L is executed only in the variation display of the special symbol in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). I try to perform a precursory effect.

Further, when the variation display control of the special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time reduction count counter in which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S371, as shown in FIG. 193. The fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 194, first steps S381. As the process of, display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the special symbol is stopped on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag and resets the time saving flag (step S384). As a result, when the variable display of the predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times according to various time saving states such as 100 times, 40 times, 20 times, etc.) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving is executed. The control (control in the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control (control in the normal state) is started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game is started. The jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot is being executed is set (step S388), and the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S389). ). In step S389, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of big hit in the big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time the round is executed in the jackpot control process (step S240), and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the specified number of rounds. Judge and control to end the jackpot game. When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the high probability flag is reset when the high probability flag is set, and the time reduction flag is set when the time reduction flag is set. Is reset, and if the counter value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0").

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (big hit A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command, jackpot D start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). .. As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. In this embodiment, a common effect (the effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. is the same) is set as the effect of the jackpot game according to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command. ing. Also, if the production of the jackpot game according to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command is to be a common production, the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command are set to the same command instead of being separate commands. You may leave it.

Further, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is specifically set in the second jackpot 2007 according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot control process (step S240). After opening / closing control (for example, the second big winning opening 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are won in the second big winning opening 2007, it is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2525. It is reset when the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 10 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot executing flag, the jackpot control process (step S240) is prevented from being executed in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol in the device and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

If the small hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game (step S387), and the small hit starts. A small hit execution flag indicating that the game is being executed is set (step S388), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set as the interval timer. Set (step S389). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S389, a small hit start command corresponding to the type of small hit is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is the first flag corresponding to the type of the small hit in the small hit control process (step S241) when the small hit game is finished. It is reset when the opening / closing control of the large winning opening 2006 (for example, the opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the first special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is repeated twice) is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S2341) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first special of the function display unit 1400. The variable display of the first special symbol on the symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

Further, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set and the immediate short hit flag is set (step S390), the high probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and the low probability non-time saving is not set. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step S391). Then, in the case of a low-probability non-time saving state, the time saving flag is set, and the number of times the time saving state is continued according to the type of immediate short time is set as the number of times the time saving state is continued (first special symbol and second). It is set in the time reduction counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol) (step S392). Specifically, if it is an immediate short hit A, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and if it is an immediate short hit B, "40" is set in the time reduction counter, and the immediate short hit C is used. In some cases, "20" is set in the time reduction counter. On the other hand, if the gaming state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state is a high-probability time-saving state, a high-probability non-time-saving state, or a low-probability non-time-saving state, the process of setting the time-saving flag or the time-saving number counter is not executed.

As described above, in the low probability state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the time reduction state is controlled based on the immediate short hit, whereas in the high probability state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the time is controlled immediately. It is not controlled to the time saving state based on the short hit. In this way, the purpose of "immediate short hit" is to relieve the disadvantageous game being performed in a low probability state, and in the short time state based on the immediate short hit, the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003. Since it is easy to accept B, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls held by the player.

Further, in the case of an immediate short hit in the time saving state, the already controlled time saving state is continued without being newly controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. In this way, the "immediate short hit" is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game being played in the non-short hit state, and in the state where it is already controlled in the short time state, it is newly changed to the immediate short hit. I try not to control the time saving state based on it. As another example, when the time saving state becomes an immediate short hit, the already controlled time saving state may be terminated and the time saving state may be newly controlled based on the immediate short hit. As another example, in the case of an immediate short hit, the remaining number of time reductions in the already controlled time reduction state is compared with the time reduction number in the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit. Then, it may be controlled to the one with the larger number of time reductions. Further, as another example, in the case of an immediate short hit, the number of time reductions applied to the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit is calculated with respect to the remaining number of time reductions required for the already controlled time reduction state. It may be controlled to add.

In addition, in the low probability state, when an immediate short hit is reached, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time reduction flag is set. However, regarding the timing of setting the time reduction flag, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It may be at the beginning or end of a fixed time, which is the time to maintain. Of these, when the time reduction flag is set at the start of the fixed time, the time reduction state is controlled based on the immediate short hit, and the state in which the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 is quickly set. Can be granted. In addition, when the time saving flag is set at the end of the fixed time, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short hit by using the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol. It is possible to specialize in the winning effect during the variable display of the special symbol before the stop of the immediate short hit symbol. When executing an effect of notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is set to a specific fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fixed time (for example, 1 second). ), Etc. can be exemplified.

In addition, when the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the immediate short hit or the miss is made, the big hit game or the small hit game is not executed, so that the waiting until the next special symbol variation display is started is started. The time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S392), and the process proceeds to step S393. In this embodiment, a common standby time is set in the interval timer when an immediate short hit or a miss occurs, but when an immediate short hit occurs, it is set to be longer than when the hit is missed. The waiting time may be set in the interval timer. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the hit is an immediate short hit, not a deviation, by the difference in the length of the waiting time. Further, when such a special waiting time is provided, the player may be made to recognize that the hit is an immediate short hit instead of a deviation within the special waiting time.

When the processes of steps S386 to S393 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to control in a time saving state by satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Step S394) is executed, and when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S395), this process is terminated.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the relief number counting process (step S394).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the initial value of the relief count counter, which is additionally counted according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state, to "0" after the power is turned on with the RAM clear. When the jackpot flag is set (step S3941), the count value of the relief count counter indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset and returned to the initial value "0" (step S3942). ).

Further, when the jackpot flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is not set and the state is a low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S3943). .. Then, in the low probability state, +1 is added to the count value of the relief count counter (step S3944), and when the count value of the relief count counter becomes "600" (step S3945), the time saving flag is set. At the same time, it is set in the time reduction counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state (step S3946). Specifically, when the count value of the relief count counter reaches "600", "700" is set in the time reduction counter. Although not shown, in some of the low-probability non-time saving states, +1 is not added to the count value of the relief count counter.

As described above, the relief count counter counts each time the change display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed, and when the change count of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the time is shortened. It is supposed to be controlled. Further, the relief count counter counts the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state regardless of whether it is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state. Further, in the main control board 1310, when the symbol determination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the number of changes of the special symbol by the relief count counter is counted up. On the other hand, the relief count counter does not count even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the high probability state is executed. In this way, the control of the time saving state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game being performed in the low probability state, and in the time saving state, the variable winning opening is used. Since the game ball B can be easily accepted into 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time reduction state is extremely high, so the time reduction is performed. In the state, the game can be played with expectation. In addition, 700 times as the number of time reductions is considered to be the number of times that the next "big hit" is not necessarily obtained even if the set value is 1/269, and even in the long-term time reduction state of 700 times. It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player and continue the game. For this reason, regarding the number of time reductions given by "controlling the time reduction state by satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol" using the relief number counter, the next "big hit" is likely to be obtained, but tension is reached. It is preferable to set the number of times so that the feeling is not completely eliminated (the number of times that there is a possibility that a big hit cannot be obtained at least 3% or more). In addition, the number of time reductions given by "controlling the time reduction state by satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol" using the relief number counter is the limit value of the relief number counter (the number of fluctuations practiced by the player). By setting the number of times to be equal to or greater than that, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to dispel the disappointment given to the player by the time the limit value of the relief number counter is reached.

Further, in the case of a big hit, the relief count counter is reset, whereas in the case of a small hit or an immediate short hit, the relief count counter is not reset. That is, unless it becomes a big hit, the counting of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is continued. In this way, the control of the time saving state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is aimed at relieving that the state in which the big hit game is not performed continues, and in the time saving state, the variable winning opening Since the game ball B can be easily accepted into 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time reduction state is extremely high, so the time reduction is performed. In the state, the game can be played with expectation.

The relief count counter is reset not only when a big hit occurs but also when the power is turned on with RAM clear. That is, when the set value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is built in a predetermined area of the RAM (the entire area of the RAM). Of these, the area excluding the specific area) is cleared, so that the relief count counter is reset. In this way, the relief count counter can be appropriately reset by the hall manager. On the other hand, if the set value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. However, after the power is turned on, the count is restarted from the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, in the variation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, when the immediate short hit occurs, the special symbol in the low probability state has priority over the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit. It is assumed that the time saving state is controlled based on the number of fluctuations of the above reaching 600 times. This is because the time saving state based on the immediate short hit is the time saving given until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, whereas the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. Based on this, the time reduction state is the time reduction grant until it reaches 700 times, and the time reduction grant that is advantageous to the player is prioritized. However, in the variation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit may be controlled.

[Transition of game state]
FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 196, the gaming states are roughly classified into a low-probability state and a high-probability state, and a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state. When the power is turned on, the gaming state is in a low-probability non-time saving state.

In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to be higher than in the low probability state. In addition, regarding the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, it is possible to make the transition when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit". The jackpot probability can also be changed by switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the small hit probability and the immediate short hit probability do not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, and do not change even when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched.

In the time saving state, it is set so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the non-time saving state. For example, when the ordinary lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be "ordinary hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", it is closed by the variable winning door 2521. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. As a result, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 in the non-time saving state. Therefore, the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 has become the mainstream. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so that the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the variable winning opening 2003 has become mainstream. There is. Further, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the non-time-saving state, so that the player can play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, regarding the transition from the non-time saving state to the time saving state, it is possible to make the transition when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "immediate short hit". If the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit", the game shifts to the time saving state after the big hit game is executed, whereas if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the time is shortened. It is different in that it shifts to a time-saving state without executing a jackpot game. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol does not become "big hit" or "immediate short hit", it is possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Is possible. In this example, after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, so that the non-time saving state is reached. It is possible to shift from the time saving state to the time saving state.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", it is controlled to a high probability time saving state after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the next "big hit". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", it is controlled to a high probability non-time saving state after the execution of the 5R big hit game until the next "big hit". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the low probability time saving state A is terminated at that point. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit D", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 599 times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, the low probability time saving state A is terminated at that point. Further, after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, the low probability non-time saving state is controlled, but when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped for the 600th time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times. Therefore, it is possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state (low probability time saving state B) again, and only the 600th special symbol variation display has a blank period in which the low probability non-time saving state occurs. It is possible to advance the game from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state B in a substantially continuous manner. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit B", the period for controlling the high-probability time-saving state or the high-probability non-time-saving state is until the next "big hit". Although it is set, for such a period, for example, it is set until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times, and before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times, the next "big hit" is set. It may be the number of times that the probability of obtaining is very high.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the game state is controlled after the small hit game is executed and before the small hit game. That is, the game state does not change when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "small hit". If the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the game state before the small hit game may be continuously controlled even during the small hit game. Even in this case, the game state does not change when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "small hit".

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the big hit game is not executed, and the variable display of the special symbol is controlled to the low probability time saving state C until the predetermined number of times is reached. Here, the predetermined number of times is 100 times when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit A", 40 times when the lottery result is "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". If, 20 times is set. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state C is terminated at that point.

In the above, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short-time hit". On the other hand, as game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, and low-probability time-saving state C, the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained. In the case of "immediate short hit", it is not always controlled to the low probability time saving state C, and the gaming state before the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" is maintained. In other words, for game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is set as the "immediate short-time symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit". ing. In this way, the "immediate short hit" is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game being played in the low probability non-time saving state, and the low probability time reduction triggered by the "immediate short hit". In the state C, since the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, the game can be played without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short-time hit", it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, but it is a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state. Is set as an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". Details will be described later.

In the above, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" in the low probability non-time saving state, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, but at least in the low probability state, the special symbol is controlled. Only when the lottery result is "immediate short hit", it suffices to control to the low probability time saving state C. That is, not only in the low-probability non-time-saving states, but also in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit", the low-probability time-saving states A to C already controlled. May be terminated and controlled to the low probability time saving state C. As another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit", the number of time-savings applied to the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C is The remaining number of times may be compared with the number of time reductions applied to the low-probability time reduction state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes an "immediate short hit", and the number of time reductions may be controlled to be larger. As another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit", the number of time-savings applied to the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C is It may be controlled to add the number of time reductions related to the low probability time reduction state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" with respect to the remaining number of times.

Further, in the above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be controlled to the low probability time reduction state C) differs depending on the type of immediate short hit. However, it suffices if the content of the low-probability time-saving state C differs depending on the type of immediate short-time hit. Specifically, depending on the type of immediate short hit, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning opening 2003 that can accept the game ball B when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" are different. Also, the opening time and the number of times of opening and the number of time reductions of the variable winning opening 2003 may be different.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbol of the special symbol is a unique immediate short that is different from other stop symbols. The hit symbol (which may be different for the immediate short hit A to C symbols) is stopped and displayed, and the immediate short hit symbol (“Immediate short hit symbol”) that is common as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol on the staging display device 1600. The symbol combination) of "549" is stopped and displayed. However, gaming states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and "immediate short-time symbol invalid period" In, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol (the symbol combination of "549") is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the symbol is off). The design) is to be stopped and displayed. In this way, gaming states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid" In the "period", when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 does not indicate that fact, so the "immediate short hit" is won. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, and to reduce the feeling of loss when "immediate short hit" is invalidated.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol does not become "big hit" or "immediate short hit", if the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied, the big hit game is not executed and the special symbol changes. Until the display reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Here, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state B is terminated at that point.

In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is additionally counted from the initial value "0" by using the above-mentioned relief count counter. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, only the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of changes of the special symbol is counted. Not set as "count suppression period". On the other hand, in the case of a low probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted regardless of whether it is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state. Further, when the big hit game is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit", the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, regarding the control of the low-probability time-saving state B by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, there are cases where a disadvantageous game is performed in the low-probability state and a big hit game is not performed. The purpose is to relieve the continuation, and in the low probability time saving state B, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls held so much. Can be done. In addition, 700 times is set as a predetermined number of times, and the probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the low probability time saving state B is very high. Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving state B, the game can be played with expectation.

In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted. However, in some of the low-probability non-time-saving states, the "count suppression period" is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is not counted. Details will be described later.

Further, in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is a big hit. It is supposed to be larger than the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until it becomes a big hit calculated from the probability (for example, 319 times if the big hit probability is 1/319). Therefore, after turning on the power with RAM clear or after executing the big hit game, there is a high probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. It has become.

Further, in this example, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset not only when the jackpot game is executed but also when the power is turned on with the RAM clear. That is, when the set value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is built in a predetermined area of the RAM (the entire area of the RAM). Of these, the area excluding the specific area) is cleared, so that the count of the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the relief count counter can be appropriately reset by the hall manager. On the other hand, if the set value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. However, after the power is turned on, the count is restarted from the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" in the fluctuation display where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. After the big hit game is executed, the game state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state A) corresponding to the type of big hit is controlled, and after the big hit game is executed, the low probability It is assumed that the time saving state B is not controlled.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "small hit" in the fluctuation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. Is controlled to the low probability time saving state B after the small hit game is executed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in the fluctuation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. Is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. This is because the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol becoming "immediate short-term hit" is given the time-saving until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state B due to the establishment of the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the time-saving grant until it reaches 700 times, and the time-saving grant that is advantageous to the player is prioritized. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in the variation display where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. Alternatively, the control may be performed in a low-probability non-time saving state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes an “immediate short hit”.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed, the effect display device 1600 is used to control the low probability time saving state B. , Notifies that the low probability time saving state B is started. For example, at the start of the low-probability time-saving state B, or in the variation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, it may be notified that the low-probability time-saving state B is started.

By the way, the time saving state is assumed to be terminated when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. In this example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, the variation display of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "immediate short-time hit". When it reaches the set specified number of times), it is supposed to shift to the low probability non-time saving state. In addition to this, for example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, an end lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state each time a variation display of a special symbol is performed. When the end of the time saving state is determined by the end lottery, or when the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "small hit" reaches a predetermined number of times, the end condition of the time saving state may be satisfied.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2002. In such a state display, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "small hit", at the same time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped (when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped). The "state display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is not emitted, and the "state display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is emitted at the end of the big hit game or the small hit game. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the "status display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is emitted at the same time when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize to the outside that the hit is a hit other than a big hit or a small hit.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off", the "status display LED corresponding to the time saving" is not emitted at the same time when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (when the out-of-order symbol is stopped). .. On the other hand, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state using the above-mentioned relief count counter (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Is added and counted from the initial value "0", and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. When executing the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 600 times in such a low probability state, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (when the out-of-order symbol is stopped) and at the same time, "in a short time". Since the "corresponding state display LED" is made to emit light, it is possible to easily recognize to the outside that it is not a normal deviation.

[Example of production related to time reduction control when the number of reliefs is reached]
In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. Is performing a predetermined effect toward the 600th variation display of the special symbol. Here, a specific example of the effect until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 197.

As shown in FIG. 197 (A), when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left / middle / right decorative symbol 1600a is variablely displayed until the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern command elapses, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in this order. do. As the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b, which is smaller than the decorative symbol and is inconspicuous, is executed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, 〇 and × are displayed in a variable manner as the identification symbol 1600b until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, and stop display is performed by either 〇 or ×. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, 〇 is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), and × is stopped and displayed when the lottery result is out of order. In addition to this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b is when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. 〇, if the lottery result is an immediate short hit or a miss, x may be displayed as a stop, and it may be difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short hit from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

Further, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol (state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is waiting) and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). It enables the variable display (waiting state). Specifically, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed with a circle in the lower left of the effect display device 1600 by the number of holds, and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is the number of holds. The amount of □ is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold is started, the hold displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are deleted. However, the reserved display 1600c and 1600d of the special symbol may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold until the variable display of the special symbol ends. ..

Further, in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current gaming state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time saving state, and "normal medium" corresponding to the low-probability non-time saving state is displayed.

In addition, as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 500th variation display of the special symbol, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, the variation display is stopped. At the upper part of the effect display device 1600, a count effect for notifying the number of times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state is executed. In this example, the relief notice image A of "500 fluctuations" corresponding to the 500th stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 is displayed. .. By executing the count effect in this way, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state approaches 600 times.

Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol 1600a in the effect display device 1600 is stopped by transmitting the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, but it is low. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probability state reaches 500, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, a relief count command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol confirmation command. This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the relief count command has been received, thereby storing the number of times the relief count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. By recognizing that and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is increased. It is possible to grasp how many times it is, and based on this grasped number of fluctuations, how many times the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is when the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a in the effect display device 1600 is stopped. It is possible to execute a count effect to notify. Further, the relief count command is not limited to the above-described mode from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and each time a symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. A different command may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving the relief count command 1, and receives the relief count command 2. It becomes possible to grasp how many times the special symbol has changed in the low-probability state, such as recognizing that the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low-probability state has reached 501 times. Will be possible.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (B) and 197 (C), as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the decorative symbol 1600a (decorative symbol 1600a ( Every time the variation display of the special symbol) is stopped, the stop display of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is stopped and displayed as a count effect. In this example, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 597th, the relief notice of "597" as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The symbol combination is selected and set, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol. This relief notice symbol combination can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect is executed (when the reach is out of reach), the above-mentioned reach is displayed. As a result of variable display, the out-of-reach symbol (combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; the out-of-reach symbol) is displayed once. Although it is displayed, it is subsequently changed and displayed as a symbol combination for relief notice such as "597". Further, from the 597th variation display of the special symbol, the "help mode" executed when the number of variation of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times is near at the upper part of the effect display device 1600. A relief notice image B indicating "Help is imminent!" Is displayed.

In addition, in the period before the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variation display in which the lottery result is excluded is executed as the variation display of the 600th special symbol. If there is a hold, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is a hold display of a special symbol indicating that the special symbol is on hold for executing the 600th variable display of the special symbol (FIG. 197). (Face hold) displayed at the lower left of (C) to (G) is displayed. As a result, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol is executed, and the "help mode" is set. The player can know in advance that he will rush.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (D) and 197 (E), when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 598th, the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. A combination of symbols for relief notice called "598" is selected and set as the stop symbol, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (F) and 197 (G), when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. A combination of symbols for relief notice called "599" is selected and set as the stop symbol, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (H) and 197 (I), when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th, the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. As the stop symbol, a symbol combination for relief notice of "600" is selected and set, and the stop display is performed instead of the normal stop symbol. Further, when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped for the 600th time, a relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Is displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600, indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times. are doing.

If the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit during the period from the time when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the 500th time to the 600th time (while the count effect is being executed) in the low probability state. , The counting effect is finished at the end of the variable display of the special symbol that became the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 197 (J), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled and a dedicated time-saving state is given. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state, the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 1300 until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed 700 times thereafter. (Until the number of times is reached), the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled, and the period for controlling such a low-probability time-saving state B (700 times special symbol variation display) is referred to as "help mode L". It is called. In the staging display device 1600, when the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped for the 600th time, the relief "Help mode L rushes !!" is notified so as to notify that the "help mode L" is entered. A confirmed image is displayed. In FIG. 197 (J), the face hold displayed in the lower left of FIGS. 197 (C) to (G) is moved / enlarged and displayed next to the character display "Help mode L rushed !!". So, it is clearly shown that the face hold corresponds to "help mode L".

As shown in FIG. 197 (K), if there is no reservation of the special symbol after entering the "help mode L", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not immediately started, and the effect display is displayed. At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed. In addition, the volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar changes the light amount level by operating the light amount button. Therefore, it is possible to change the memory display. Further, the volume level and the light amount level can be changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) and the non-variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol). In this way, after the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, if the special symbol is not held and the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the amount of light are not executed. By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed.

Further, after entering the "help mode L", the "help mode" indicating that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled as a state display indicating the current gaming state in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. The image being rescued "in L" is displayed. Further, in the low probability time saving state B, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning opening 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600. The arrow bar of "Left-handed!" Is displayed to instruct the fire to aim at. The rescued image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, and is not hidden (or is not hidden) in the volume adjustment bar or the light amount adjustment bar described above. It is continuously displayed at the display position (which does not overlap), so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat despite the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the above-mentioned relief notice image B "helping soon!" And the relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Continue to be displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed. These images can be displayed, and these images are continuously displayed at the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) in the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar described above, and the player is close to the low probability time saving state B. I try not to accidentally leave my seat.

As shown in FIG. 197 (L), after entering the "help mode L", there is no reservation of the special symbol, and the player enters various winning openings until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. When there is no ball, a demonstration effect (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the effect display device 1600. At the end of the demo production, a "depression prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescued image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demo production, and are continuously displayed at the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) in the above-mentioned demo production or the "depression prevention display". , The player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the above-mentioned relief notice image B "help is imminent!" And the relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Can be continuously displayed during the demo production, and these images can also be displayed during the demo production and "engagement". It is continuously displayed in the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) by the "prevention display", so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even though the low probability time saving state B is near. ..

As shown in FIG. 197 (M), when a ball is entered into various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 after entering the "help mode L", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed. To. If there is a ball entering various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 during the execution of the demo production, only the demo production is ended at that point, and the rescued image and the arrow bar are displayed continuously. ..

As shown in FIG. 197 (N), when the 700th decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) variation display is executed during the execution of the "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B ( When the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), the last decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) during the execution of "help mode L" in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600. A relief end image "Help last!" Is displayed to notify that the display is variable.

As shown in FIG. 197 (O), after the execution of the "help mode L", that is, after the 700th decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) variation display is stopped during the control of the low probability time saving state B (low probability state). After the change display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped for the 1300th time, the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the above is stopped. In the upper left portion of the device 1600, "normal" is displayed to notify that the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time saving state that has passed through the "help mode L". Further, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "help L: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that "help mode L" has been executed once. .. It should be noted that the lottery result is a "big hit" before the 700th variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is executed during the execution of the "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B. In the case of "", the low-probability time-saving state B is terminated and the game state shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the type of "big hit", so that the "help mode L" is terminated at that point.

(Restriction on counting effect when entering the second starting port)
As described above, the 500th to 600th special symbols are set before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 600 in the low probability state. As for the variable display of, every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped, a counting effect is executed to notify the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state. However, at the time of entering the ball at the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol (decorative symbol) is executed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize the entry. In addition, at the time when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. .. The limitation of the counting effect at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 will be described below.

In this example, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2005 are used as entry ports for the game ball B to enter. , The first big prize opening 2006 is provided. Of these, as for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, since the upper part is always in the open state, it is possible to enter any of them in the low probability non-time saving state. However, for the first starting port 2004, the game ball B discharged into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted with a high probability, but for the second starting port 2005, the center There is no possibility that the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 into the game area 5a will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will enter the first starting port 2004 with a higher probability than that of the second starting port 2005. Further, since the second starting port 2005 has the same shape as the general winning opening 2001 and is inconspicuous with respect to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 is purposely used in a low probability non-time saving state. There is no aim to enter the ball, and even if there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005, it is difficult to notice.

Further, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The variable display of the special symbol is executed in the order of entry into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005.

Further, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the effect display device 1600 is used. The variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is set to about 5 to 10 seconds (in the case of disengagement without reach). That is, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when a ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery for the first special symbol is missed, the first special symbol (decoration) is in an manner in which it is easy to recognize the entry. The variable display of the design) is being executed.

On the other hand, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is missed or a small hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, but the effect display device. It limits the execution of variable display of decorative symbols at 1600. Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to about 0.1 seconds (in the case of deviation without reach), which is extremely shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Further, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is output from the speaker, while the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. , The effect sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 is not output from the speaker. That is, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when a ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery for the second special symbol is missed or a small hit, it is difficult to recognize the entry. The variable display of the symbol is being executed. As a result, in the low-probability non-time saving state, it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005, and it becomes difficult to grasp the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state. In the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the staging display device 1600 is not restricted. , The output of the effect sound accompanying the variation with reach and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is executed as in the case of the first special symbol.

In this example, as described above, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the symbol confirmation command, thereby displaying the effect display device 1600. However, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the main control board 1310 is used separately from the symbol confirmation command. A rescue count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, by counting the number of times the relief count command is received, it is possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state, and the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 is displayed. When the fluctuation display is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state.

Here, in the low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the main rescue count command is used. A rescue count command A is transmitted from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief count counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, so that the number of changes in the first special symbol in the low probability state is the number of times. When the variation display of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, but when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the main control is performed as a relief count command. The relief count command B is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief count counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, so that the number of changes in the second special symbol in the low probability state is the number of times. However, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol is used. I try to cause a gap. That is, during the execution of the count effect, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the special symbol is notified by the number of changes of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 and the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510. The number of fluctuations in the symbol does not match. In this way, while the count effect is being executed, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased. Since this is not done, it becomes difficult to notice the entry into the second starting port 2005, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the actual number of changes in the special symbol from the counting effect.

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, but the number of times the relief count command B is received is counted by the count effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect. It is executed so as to add to the number of changes of the special symbol to be notified. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol fluctuation displays during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, and 580 times as a predetermined timing. The number of times is set to 596 times, and when these times are reached, the number of times the relief count command B is received for the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect (difference accumulated without addition). Is being executed to add. That is, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, the number of balls entered into the second starting port 2005 during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol is the "relief count". It corresponds to "the number of times the command B is received (difference accumulated without adding)", and the number of times is added to the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with expectation. The number of times the relief count command B is received may be calculated by calculating the difference, or a counter is provided to separately count only the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the value is set at each predetermined timing. It may be a method of referencing and clearing.

In the above, at a predetermined timing, when the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number of times, the relief count command B is received for the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the number of times the relief count command B has been received has reached a predetermined number of times. When it is determined by lottery that the number of times the relief count command B is received is added, or when a predetermined error or notification is resolved.

FIG. 198 is a specific example of the effect when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect.

As shown in FIG. 198 (A), as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is displayed from the 500th variation display of the special symbol. Every time the variation display is stopped, a counting effect is executed at the upper part of the effect display device 1600 to notify the number of times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state. In this example, the relief notice image A of "505 fluctuation" corresponding to the 505th stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 505 is displayed. .. If the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a), the holding display 1600d (second) of the second special symbol is placed at the lower part of the staging display device 1600. (A state in which the variable display of the special symbol is awaited) is displayed, but it is preferable that the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is displayed in a less conspicuous manner than the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the counting effect. Further, from the viewpoint of making it more difficult to notice the entry into the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the counting effect, the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIGS. 198 (B) and 198 (C), the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is displayed as the variation display of the 506th special symbol during the execution of the count effect. When executing, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed until 0.1 seconds elapse as the variation time of the second special symbol, and the state in which the decorative symbol 1600a is stopped is continuously displayed. There is. However, with respect to the identification symbol 1600b displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variation display is executed until 0.1 seconds have elapsed as the variation time of the second special symbol. When the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the execution is performed so as not to add to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 506th time (relief count counter = 506), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect remains "505 fluctuations" and does not change. There is a "1" variation in unadded (difference).

As shown in FIGS. 198 (D) and 198 (E), during the execution of the count effect, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is displayed as the variation display of the 507th special symbol. When it is executed, it is executed so as to add to the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped. That is, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 507th (relief count counter = 507), "506 fluctuations" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. Here, too, the state in which the unadded (difference) fluctuation of "1" exists is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 198 (F), when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is executed as the variation display of the 521st special symbol during the execution of the count effect. Is executed so as to add to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped. In this example, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 521st (relief count counter = 521), "519 fluctuation" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. .. That is, here, there is a state in which "2" of unadded (difference) fluctuations exist.

As shown in FIGS. 198 (G) and 198 (H), the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is displayed as the variation display of the 522nd special symbol during the execution of the count effect. When it is executed, an increase effect image "Increase chance!" Is displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600, indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is an increase chance. Then, during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 500 to 520th, the number of balls entered into the second starting port 2005 is two (unadded (unadded (unadded)). When the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, +2 is added to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 522nd (relief count counter = 522), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is displayed as "520 fluctuation + 2 fluctuation!". Therefore, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol matches, and the fluctuation of the unadded (difference) becomes "0".

As shown in FIGS. 198 (I) and 198 (J), as the 523rd variation display of the special symbol during the execution of the count effect, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is displayed. When it is executed, it is executed so as to add to the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped. That is, while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 523rd (relief count counter = 523), "523 fluctuations" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. ..

As described in detail above, in the 579th to 600th special symbol variation display during the execution of the count effect, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, the count effect is set in a low probability state. The stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating how many times the special symbol is changed is stopped and displayed. In such a period, even when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed, and the variation of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of times is not displayed. However, except when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief notice image B). It is set to stop and display with. For example, during the execution of the count effect, only the 598th special symbol variation display is the second special symbol variation display among the 579th to 600th special symbol variation displays, and the other special symbol variation displays. When is the variation display of the first special symbol, "597" → "599" as the stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state. "→" 600 "is set to stop and display, and the counting effect is advanced in a form excluding the 598th special symbol variation display (second special symbol variation display). If all of the 597th to 600th special symbol variation displays are the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the count effect, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is the number of times. The relief confirmation image as shown in FIG. 197 (J) is displayed in the 600th variation display of the special symbol without any stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the above. .. In such a case, another surprise that "help mode L" is suddenly started can be given to the player, and even if the counting effect is not executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest. can.

Further, as described above, during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) or the non-variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol), the volume button is operated to change the volume level or the light amount button is pressed. It is possible to change the light intensity level by operating it. In this regard, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped and the special symbol is not held, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed and the volume button or the light amount button is operated. In addition, the operation sound is output from the speaker. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is executed during the execution of the count effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed. However, when the volume button or light amount button is operated, the operation sound is restricted from being output from the speaker. As a result, when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is executed during the execution of the count effect, the game is played by the operation sound when the volume button or the light amount button is operated. The production sound inside is not disturbed. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on whether or not the operation sound is output from the speaker when the volume button or the light amount button is operated during the non-variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a. You can also do it.

In this example, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The variation display of each special symbol is executed in the order of entry into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. Specifically, the second starting port 2005 is arranged so as to enter a large amount of balls in a low probability non-time saving state. At this time, the ball enters the second starting port 2005 frequently, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is an extremely long time in the low probability non-time saving state. (For example, 180 seconds) is set. That is, since the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is not frequently executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the ball is entered into the first starting opening 2004 and the first The mainstream of the game is to execute the variable display of the special symbol. Then, in such a configuration, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the effect display device 1600 is restricted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. When the game is stopped, the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. In addition, the number of changes in the second special symbol that was not notified by the count effect is added to the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect. ing. As a result, the same effect as described above can be obtained. Then, after a special jackpot game (a jackpot that controls a non-time saving state after the jackpot game) or after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 fluctuations after the power is turned on), the second start port The fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the entry into the ball in 2005 is shortened so that the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is frequently executed. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), which makes it possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state, but a special jackpot game (big hit). After the game (a big hit that controls to a non-time saving state) or after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 fluctuations after the power is turned on), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times. (Relief count counter = 600) can be easily approached, and the game can be continued with expectation.

In the above, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is set to 0/100, and the other gaming states (high probability time saving state). , Low probability time saving state A, Low probability time saving state B, Low probability time saving state C) The probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery is set to 100/100. It is not limited, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 1/100, and the other gaming states (high probability). In the normal lottery in the time saving state, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" may be set to 100/100. .. In this case, the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 is slightly increased in the low probability non-time saving state, and the frequency of transmitting the relief count command B increases (accompanied by the entry into the second starting opening 2005). As described above, the relief count command B is sent not only when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, but also when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped due to the entry into the variable winning opening 2003). , The addition range in the effect of adding the number of times the relief count command B is received at a predetermined timing can be further increased, and the game entertainment can be further improved. Further, for a game ball B that may be accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 in a low probability non-time saving state, it is not always necessary to provide a second starting opening 2005 in which the upper side is always open, and the variable winning opening is variable. It is also possible to use only the relief count command B caused by the ball entering the mouth 2003 to add the number of times the ball is received at a predetermined timing.

Further, in the above, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 are provided in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2005 may be provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that a launch ball or the like that the player accidentally hits right in the normal time (low probability non-time saving state) may enter the variable winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2005. , The relief count command B is transmitted even when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped due to such a ball entry, and as described above, the number of times the relief count command B is received is added at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the same gaming effect as described above.

Further, in the above, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the deviation are caused. , It is desirable to make the player aware of the deviation as much as possible. In view of this point, it is desirable that the general data display provided in the game hall is configured so as to make it difficult for the player to see in the normal posture in which the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. .. For example, since a general data display provided in the game hall is located above the pachinko machine 1, the door frame top unit 450 of the pachinko machine 1 is decorated so that the upper side thereof cannot be seen through, and the game is played. It is preferable to design the amount of protrusion to the user side (front side) so as to block the line of sight of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and make it difficult to see the data display. If the door frame top unit 450 is projected to the extent that the data display is difficult to see, it may be difficult to operate the staff call button provided on a general data display. It is desirable to provide a staff member call button on the door frame 3 so that the operation signal can be transmitted to the data display through the external terminal board 558.

(Modification example)
Next, a modified example that is partially different from the above-mentioned production example will be described below. In the modified example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the low probability state is set to the relief count counter. It is the same in that it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), but it is the same as the relief count counter. On the other hand, it is possible to count not only when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner but also when the special symbol is displayed in a non-variable manner.

Even in the modified example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 is stopped by transmitting the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, but the probability state is low. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the above becomes 500 times, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the relief count command A is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol confirmation command. The relief count command A is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the relief count command A has been received, thereby storing the number of times the relief count command A has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. By recognizing that it has been done and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times, and so on. It is possible to grasp how many times the is, and based on this grasped number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased when the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. It is made feasible.

In the modified example, when a specific condition such as entering a winning opening (for example, general winning opening 2001) that does not execute the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, but the main control board 1310 does not execute the variable display. , The relief count counter is counting up. That is, in the modified example, since the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted by the relief count counter only when a specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to upload. At this time, the symbol confirmation command is not transmitted, but the relief count command B is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. This relief count command B is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a specific condition is satisfied while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received. I try to grasp whether it is the second time, but when a specific condition is satisfied, I try not to increase the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect, and cause a deviation from the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol. I am doing it. That is, during the execution of the count effect, when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 and the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510. And will not match. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect is counted. Since it does not increase, it becomes difficult to notice that the specific condition is satisfied, and it is difficult to grasp the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 from the count effect.

In the above, the specific condition is satisfied when the ball is entered into a winning opening (for example, general winning opening 2001) that does not execute the variable display of the special symbol, but other than this, it is related to the entry into the winning opening. Instead, a specific condition may be satisfied when it is determined by lottery to count up the relief count counter.

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, but the number of times the relief count command B is received is counted by the count effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect. It is executed so as to add to the number of changes of the special symbol to be notified. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol fluctuation displays during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, and 580 times as a predetermined timing. The number of times is set to 596 times, and when these times are reached, the number of times the relief count command B is received for the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect (difference accumulated without addition). Is being executed to add. That is, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol is "the number of times the relief count command B is received". It corresponds to "minutes (differences accumulated without addition)", and the number of times is added to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of changes in the special symbol notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with expectation. The number of times the relief count command B is received may be calculated by calculating the difference, or a counter is provided to separately count only the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the value is set at each predetermined timing. It may be a method of referencing and clearing.

In the above, at a predetermined timing, when the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number of times, the relief count command B is received for the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the number of times the relief count command B has been received has reached a predetermined number of times. When it is determined by lottery that the number of times the relief count command B is received is added, or when a predetermined error or notification is resolved.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief is made toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 558. Information about the number of changes in the special symbol by the number counter is output. Similarly, even when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the special symbol by the relief count counter is used toward the outside via the external terminal board 558. Information about the number of fluctuations is output. As a result, when the specific condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted up by the relief count counter, whereas the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. From the count effect, it is not possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310, but from the outside, the change of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. It is possible to grasp how many times it is. That is, the hall manager illegally tries to satisfy the specific condition by checking whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is abnormally increased. It is possible to monitor whether it has been damaged.

Further, when a special abnormality such as detection of a magnet or vibration occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the progress of the game is stopped. That is, when a special abnormality occurs, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not executed, and the main control board 1310 is used. The information before the occurrence of a special abnormality (the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief count counter in the main control board 1310) is retained without counting up the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief count counter in. .. Similarly, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a specific condition is satisfied, the number of changes in the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up before the special abnormality occurs. Information (the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310) is retained. As a result, when a special abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally counting up with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310.

[Example of production related to immediate short hit]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short-time hit", the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Here, a specific example of the production until the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit" will be described with reference to FIG. 199.

As shown in FIG. 199 (A), when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left / middle / right decorative symbol 1600a is variablely displayed until the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern command elapses, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in this order. do. As the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b, which is smaller than the decorative symbol and is inconspicuous, is executed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, 〇 and × are displayed in a variable manner as the identification symbol 1600b until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, and stop display is performed by either 〇 or ×. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, 〇 is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), and × is stopped and displayed when the lottery result is out of order. In addition to this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b is when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. 〇, if the lottery result is an immediate short hit or a miss, x may be displayed as a stop, and it may be difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short hit from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

Further, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol (state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is waiting) and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). It enables the variable display (waiting state). Specifically, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed with a circle in the lower left of the effect display device 1600 by the number of holds, and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is the number of holds. The amount of □ is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold is started, the hold displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are deleted. However, the reserved display 1600c and 1600d of the special symbol may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold until the variable display of the special symbol ends. ..

Further, in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current gaming state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time saving state, and "normal medium" corresponding to the low-probability non-time saving state is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 199 (B) and 199 (C), during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol), the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result is "immediate short hit". If there is a hold, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is a hold display of a special symbol suggesting that the lottery result is "immediate short hit" (FIG. 199 (B)). , (Face hold displayed at the lower left of (C)) is displayed. In addition, for the hold display of a special pattern, a comment in a balloon saying "Would you like to help?" Is displayed, making it easier to notice that the special pattern is on hold with the lottery result being "immediate short hit". .. As a result, in the period before the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is started, the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol is executed. You can know in advance that you will enter "help mode". Further, in this example, the holding display of the special symbol indicating that the special symbol is on hold for executing the 600th variation display of the special symbol described above (at the lower left of FIGS. 197 (C) to (G)). The displayed face hold) and the special picture hold display (displayed in the lower left of FIGS. 199 (B) and (C), which suggests that the lottery result is a hold of a special design that is an "immediate short hit". The common "face hold" image is used in (face hold), but is it intended to be "600th special symbol variation display" depending on the presence or absence of a balloon comment "Would you like to help?" It is possible to distinguish whether it is intended for "immediate short hit". If it is possible to more reliably distinguish between the one intended for "600th special symbol variation display" and the one intended for "immediate short hit", even though it is a reserved image with a common symbol. It is preferable to make the color patterns different, or to make the reserved images of patterns having different shapes from each other.

In this example, as a specific example of displaying a hold display of a special symbol suggesting that it is a hold of a special symbol that is an "immediate short hit", when the ball is entered into various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, By transmitting a pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the pre-judgment information (whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, an immediate short hit, or a big hit if it becomes a big hit. Type, type of small hit when it is a small hit, type of immediate short hit when it is an immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, and when it is not an immediate short hit, it is executed by the staging display device 1600. The reach effect is executed as the game effect, or the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is specified. Then, when it is specified that the immediate short hit will be made as the preliminary judgment information, when the hold display is displayed, the special symbol is displayed in the hold display of the special pattern, and the lottery result is the "immediate short hit". We are performing a look-ahead effect that suggests that it is on hold. Regarding the hold display of a special pattern, the pattern may be different depending on the type of immediate short hit. In addition, regarding the hold display of a special pattern, it is possible to display it not only when it is specified that an immediate short hit will occur, but also when it does not result in an immediate short hit, as pre-judgment information. Even if the hold display of the pattern is displayed, it may be possible to execute a ghost effect that does not result in an immediate short hit. Further, when it is specified that the immediate short hit is to be displayed as the preliminary determination information and the hold display of the special pattern is displayed, the hold display of the special picture may be immediately displayed on the staging display device 1600. After displaying a normal hold image (such as the above-mentioned "○" hold image) on the effect display device 1600, a predetermined change effect accompanied by voice, vibration, character image, etc. is performed at a predetermined timing, and such a change effect is performed. After that, the normal reserved image may be changed to the reserved display of a special pattern. In addition, if it is not specified as the pre-judgment information that an immediate short hit will occur, after displaying a normal hold image (such as the hold image of "○" mentioned above) once, voice, vibration, and character are displayed at a predetermined timing. A predetermined change effect accompanied by an image or the like may be performed, and after such a change effect, a normal hold image may be maintained (not changed to a hold display of a special pattern).

As described above, when it is specified that the immediate short hit will be made as the preliminary judgment information, it is suggested that the special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is held when the hold display is displayed. Although the look-ahead effect is executed, the look-ahead effect that suggests such an "immediate short hit" is restricted not to be executed for a part of the period. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times). During the period, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, but after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to such an immediate short hit, the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is restricted. .. Here, as a gaming state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C, an immediate short-time hit is obtained. In this case, it is set as an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C. That is, in the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short-hit is stopped, the lottery result may be "immediate short-hit", but the lottery result is "immediate short-hit". Therefore, it is not possible to control the low probability time saving state C again. In addition, when an immediate short hit is made during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the off symbol) is stopped and displayed. There is. In this respect, in this example, "immediate short hit" is suggested even when it is specified as the preliminary judgment information that the immediate short hit is to be performed after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit. By not executing the look-ahead effect, it is not possible to grasp that the immediate short hit is invalid during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss for the immediate short hit being invalid.

In addition, game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state set as the "immediate short-time symbol invalid period" that is not controlled by the low-probability time-saving state C (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low). In the probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C), the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is also executed for the hold of the first start port 2004, which will be displayed in a variable manner after the final variable display. It is restricted. For example, when the time is controlled to the low probability time saving state C of 100 times corresponding to the immediate short hit A, four game balls are set in the first starting port 2004 during the variation display of the special symbol of the final round (100th round). Is entered, and even if there is a hold of a special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit", "immediate short hit" is given to all holds that occurred during the final round of fluctuation display. The suggestive look-ahead effect is not executed. However, with regard to the hold of the first start port 2004, which will be variablely displayed after the final variable display, the variable display will be performed after the end of the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period". Although the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests "immediate short hit" is restricted, if the immediate short hit occurs after the end of the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period", the change display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400 will be displayed. , The immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol, and the immediate short hit symbol (combination of the symbols of "547") is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the effect display device 1600. ) Is to be stopped and displayed. As a result, during the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period", the pre-reading effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is not executed, but after the end of the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period", the normal game is performed. It is possible to make the player grasp the occurrence of the immediate short hit as in the case of the immediate short hit.

In the low-probability non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times). Although it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, it shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state after the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Then, after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit, after the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, when it is specified as the preliminary determination information that the immediate short hit is performed, "immediately". It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests "short hit". As a result, pay attention to whether or not the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is executed after the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped. Can be made to.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, when it is specified that an immediate short hit is to be made as advance judgment information, when the hold displays 1600c and 1600d are displayed, a special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is held. A special symbol in which the lottery result is "big hit" when the hold display 1600c, 1600d is displayed when it is specified that the big hit is to be performed as the preliminary judgment information as well as to execute the look-ahead effect suggesting that there is. We are performing a look-ahead effect that suggests that it is on hold. Then, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped, the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is restricted, while the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "big hit" is restricted. Not done. In this way, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped, the entire look-ahead effect is not restricted, and only the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is restricted. , It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 199 (D) and 199 (E), when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is executed, when the display is stopped, the decorative symbol 1600a is stopped as "547". ”(A specific symbol among the out-of-order symbols) is stopped and displayed, and the symbols attached to the numerical symbols are stopped and displayed so that they are the same symbol.

As shown in FIG. 199 (F), in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short-time hit", the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled and the time-saving is given. In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the lottery result is "immediate short-time hit", so that the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. The period for controlling such a low-probability time-saving state C is called "help mode S". In the staging display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is stopped, the "help mode S" is notified to enter the "help mode S". The relief confirmation image "S rush !!" is displayed. The predetermined number of times is 100 times when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A", 40 times when the lottery result is "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". Is set to 20 times.

As shown in FIG. 199 (G), if there is no reservation of the special symbol after entering the "help mode S", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not immediately started, and the effect display is displayed. At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed. In addition, the volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar changes the light amount level by operating the light amount button. Therefore, it is possible to change the memory display. Further, the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) and the non-variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol). In this way, after the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, if the special symbol is not held and the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the amount of light are not executed. By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed.

Further, after entering the "help mode S", the "help mode" indicating that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled as a state display indicating the current gaming state in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. The image being rescued "in S" is displayed. Further, in the low probability time saving state C, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning opening 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600. The arrow bar of "Left-handed!" Is displayed to instruct the fire to aim at. The rescued image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, and is not hidden (or is not hidden) in the volume adjustment bar or the light amount adjustment bar described above. It is continuously displayed at the display position (which does not overlap), so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat despite the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199 (H), after entering the "help mode S", there is no reservation of the special symbol, and the player enters various winning openings until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. When there is no ball, a demonstration effect (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the effect display device 1600. At the end of the demo production, a "depression prevention display (not shown)" is also executed to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned relief image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demo production, and are continuously displayed at the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) in the above-mentioned demo production or the "depression prevention display". , The player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199 (I), when a ball is entered into various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 after entering the "help mode S", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed. To. If there is a ball entering various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 during the execution of the demo production, only the demo production is ended at that point, and the rescued image and the arrow bar are displayed continuously. ..

As shown in FIG. 199 (J), when the "help mode S" is being executed, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the predetermined number of times (for example, when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A"). When the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) of the 100th time is executed, the variation of the last decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) during the execution of the "help mode S" in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. The relief end image "Help last!" Is displayed to notify that it is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 199 (K), 100 times after the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C (for example, when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A"). After the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) of the second time) is stopped, the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated and the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Displays "normal" to notify that the state has passed the "help mode S" and is in a low-probability non-time saving state. Further, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "help S: once" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that "help mode S" has been executed once. .. In addition, during the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the lottery result is ". In the case of "big hit", the low probability time saving state C is terminated and the game state is changed to the game state corresponding to the type of "big hit", so that the "help mode S" is terminated at that point. ..

[About the count suppression period]
In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the number of times (relief count counter = 600), it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, only the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of changes of the special symbol is counted. Not set as "count suppression period". On the other hand, in the low-probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted regardless of whether it is the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state. Is set as a "count suppression period" that is not subject to counting the number of changes in the special symbol. The count suppression period set as a part of the low-probability non-time saving state among such low-probability states will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a time chart showing a count suppression period.

First, in the count valid period, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. Is counted up and updated so as to approach the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, in the count suppression period, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state. Is not counted up, so it is updated so as not to approach the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

Further, there are a plurality of types of count suppression periods. Regarding the count suppression period A, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state. Is not counted up, and the relief count counter is maintained. Further, regarding the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief on the main control board 1310 is performed. The number of times counter is counted down and updated so as to move away from the relief number of times counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, the count suppression period B moves away from the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600 thereafter. Therefore, from the count suppression period A. Is also a disadvantageous period.

Further, in the count suppression period, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period in the low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period is satisfied and the count suppression period is generated. In this example, when it is decided to generate the count suppression period by lottery, the count suppression period is suddenly generated by not notifying that fact. Therefore, at the start of the count suppression period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the count suppression period has started. However, when it is decided by lottery to generate a count suppression period, a notification to that effect may be given. Further, in this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period, the start condition of the count suppression period is satisfied. In the probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period may be satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times).

Further, after the start of the count suppression period, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the count suppression period is satisfied, and the count suppression period is terminated. However, in addition to this, for example, after the start of the count suppression period, when it is determined by lottery to end the count suppression period, the end condition of the count suppression period may be satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 200, during the count valid period in the low-probability non-time saving state, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main control board 1310 The relief count counter is counting up. In this example, when the variation display A to C of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief count counter changes from 450 to 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count valid period in the low-probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the pachinko machine is passed through the external terminal unit 558. Information about the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the outside of 1. Specifically, a hall computer and an external information device provided in the island equipment of the game hall are connected via the external terminal portion 558. Further, the external display device is located at the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 and displays the game history such as information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and information on the number of big hits. In this example, when the variable display A to C of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is 450 →. It has changed from 451 to 452.

Further, in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the change pattern. When executing the effect to be performed, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the count suppression period A, which is started when the start condition of the count suppression period A is satisfied, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is not counted up, but the relief count counter is maintained. In this example, in the count suppression period A, when the fluctuation display D, E, etc. of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief count counter is maintained at 452. I have to.

Further, in the count suppression period A, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. are doing. In this example, when the variation display D, E, etc. of the special symbol is executed in the count suppression period A, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device and displayed on the external display device. The number of changes in the symbol changes from 453 to 454 → (+1 for each change).

Further, in the count suppression period A, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display D of the special symbol which is the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display E of the special symbol which is the variation display of the second and subsequent special symbols, and the like. And, different productions are performed. Here, in the count suppression period A, during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, the count valid period is executed when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. A common effect that is the same in terms of the background image and the variable display A to C of the special symbol in the above is executed. As described above, since the fact is not clearly notified at the start of the count suppression period A, it is difficult to recognize whether the count is valid or the count suppression period A, and the count is valid from the count valid period. It can also make it difficult to notice that a disadvantageous period has begun.

On the other hand, during the count suppression period A, during the execution of the variation display E of the special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, the count is suppressed when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. A pinch effect 1 (specific effect) suggesting that the period is A is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 1, a background image (a background image different from the variation display A to C of the special symbol during the count valid period) and a mini character suggesting that the count suppression period A is displayed, or a count suppression period is displayed. An effect such as outputting a voice or light emission suggesting that it is A is being executed. As described above, it can be inferred that the count suppression period A is the count suppression period A because it suggests that fact except for the first variation display of the special symbol. Further, by not executing the pinch effect 1 only during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol in the count suppression period A, it is possible to prevent the start of the count suppression period A from being noticed early. ..

In the above, the pinch effect 1 (specific effect) is not executed at the start of the count suppression period A (during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol), but the pinch is performed from the start of the count suppression period A. The effect 1 may be executed.

Next, in the count valid period when the end condition of the count suppression period A is satisfied and the count is valid, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main control is performed. The relief count counter on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variation display F to H of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief count counter changes from 453 to 454 to 455.

In addition, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, when the variable display F to H of the special symbol is executed during the count valid period, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the special symbol displayed on the external display device is displayed. The number of fluctuations has changed from 463 to 464 to 465.

Further, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, the normal production is performed.

Next, in the count suppression period B, which is started when the start condition of the count suppression period B is satisfied, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is counted down. In this example, in the count suppression period B, when the fluctuation display I of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down, and the relief count counter changes from 454 to (-1 for each fluctuation). It's changing.

Further, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. are doing. In this example, when the variation display I of the special symbol is executed in the count suppression period B, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the variation of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is output. The number of times has changed from 466 to (+1 for each change).

Further, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the effect corresponding to the change pattern is executed. When executing the effect corresponding to, the common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display F to H of the special symbol during the count valid period and the background image is executed. As described above, when the count suppression period B is executed, it is not clearly notified to that effect, so that it is difficult to recognize whether the count is the count valid period or the count suppression period B. Can also make it difficult to notice that a disadvantageous period is being executed.

Next, in the count valid period when the end condition of the count suppression period B is satisfied and the count is valid, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main control is performed. The relief count counter on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variation display J of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief count counter is changed to 443.

In addition, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, when the variation display J of the special symbol is executed during the count valid period, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device. Has changed to 476.

Further, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, the normal production is performed.

As described above, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device does not match the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 when the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B occurs. Will be. That is, even if the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is visually recognized, the number of fluctuations of the relief count counter is compared with the relief count counter = 600 which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. I can't figure out if there is one. Therefore, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is only a guideline for the relief count counter = 600 that is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and what number of fluctuations the relief count counter is. Can give fun to guess.

Further, in the count suppression period B, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed. For the count suppression period B, the low-probability non-time saving state after reaching the relief count counter = 600 is being controlled rather than the low-probability non-time saving state before reaching the relief count counter = 600. It is configured so that the execution rate is higher (the probability that the start condition is satisfied is higher). Here, the relief count counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, and when the relief count counter = 600 is reached in the low probability non-time saving state, the low probability It is controlled to the time saving state B. Then, in the low-probability time-saving state B, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed 700 times without becoming a big hit, the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled again, and the relief count counter can be counted up. In this respect, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief count counter = 600 and controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B, since the control of the low-probability time-saving state B has already been acquired once, the second time. It is more difficult to acquire the low-probability time-saving state B than the first time. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief count counter = 600 and controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B, by increasing the execution rate of the count suppression period B, the low-probability time-saving state B is lower than the first time. It becomes difficult to obtain the item, and excessive relief can be suppressed.

Further, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B can be forcibly terminated by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, in the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B, when the power is turned on with RAM clear after the power is turned off, the count is returned to the valid period. As a result, when the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B are generated and the player avoids the game, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B are terminated by the operation of the hall manager. By returning to the valid period of the count, it is possible to newly participate in the game with expectation.

[Immediate short hit symbol invalid period]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the immediate short-time hit occurs, the control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state C. Here, as a gaming state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C, an immediate short-time hit is obtained. In this case, it is set as an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C. Further, a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state is also set as an "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled by the low-probability time-saving state C when the immediate short-time hit occurs. The immediate short hit symbol invalid period set as a part of such a low-probability non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit symbol invalid period.

First, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the immediate short hit is reached, the control is performed to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the game state before the immediate short hit is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C, and the low probability non. I try to keep the time short.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of immediate short hit symbol invalid periods. Regarding the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the start condition is the same as that of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, and the end condition is different.

In addition, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when it is determined by lottery to generate the immediate short hit symbol invalid period in the low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is satisfied and immediately. A short hit symbol invalid period is generated. In this example, when it is determined by lottery to generate an immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is suddenly generated by not notifying that fact. Therefore, at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the immediate short hit symbol invalid period has started. However, when it is decided by the lottery that an immediate short hit symbol invalid period will occur, a notification to that effect may be given. Further, in this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it is determined by lottery to generate the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is satisfied, but other than this. Further, for example, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times), the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period may be satisfied.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) after the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A The end condition of is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is ended. On the other hand, after the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied and immediately. The short hit symbol invalid period B is terminated.

If an immediate short hit occurs during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, if an immediate short hit is made during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the off symbol) is stopped and displayed. There is. In this way, during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when the immediate short hit occurs, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 does not indicate that fact, so that the immediate short hit becomes invalid. It is possible to reduce the feeling of loss for things.

As shown in FIG. 201, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, the variation display A to C of the special symbol is executed every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. ing. During such an immediate short hit symbol validity period, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the case of the immediate short hit in the valid period of the immediate short hit symbol, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short hit is not obtained. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal portion 558. Then, the external display device displays information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, information on the number of big hits, information on the number of immediate short hits, and the like. In this way, by outputting the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol to the hall computer, the hall manager can know that the immediate short hit has occurred, and the immediate short hit symbol can be displayed to the external display device. By outputting the information regarding the stop of the player, the player can know that the short hit has been made immediately.

In addition, during the immediate short hit symbol validity period in the low probability non-time saving state, the effect display device 1600 is used every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display A to C of the special symbol is executed. In, when the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is executed, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, which is started when the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the special symbol changes each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. Display D, E, etc. are being executed. In such an immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol cannot be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the case of the immediate short hit symbol in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, even if the immediate short hit symbol is invalid during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, so that the immediate short hit is achieved. Since the hall manager cannot know this and does not output the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol to the external display device, the player cannot know that the immediate short hit has occurred.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display D of the special symbol which is the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation of the special symbol which is the variation display of the special symbol after the second time are displayed. A different effect is performed with the display E and the like. Here, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. Immediate short hits A common effect that is the same as the variable display A to C of the special symbol during the valid period of the symbol and the background image is executed. In this way, at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, since that fact is not clearly notified, it is necessary to recognize whether the immediate short hit symbol is valid or the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A. It is difficult to make it difficult to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short hit symbol validity period has started.

On the other hand, during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, during the execution of the variation display E of the special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. , The pinch effect 2 (invalidity effect) suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image (a background image different from the variation display A to C of the special symbol in the immediate short hit symbol valid period) and a mini character suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is displayed are displayed. Or, an effect such as outputting a voice or light emission suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is performed is executed. In this way, since the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A suggests that fact except for the first change display of the special symbol, it can be inferred that it is the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A. .. Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is noticed early by not executing the pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first change display of the special symbol. Can be prevented.

In the above, the pinch effect 2 (invalidation response effect) is not executed at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A (during the execution of the special symbol variation display D), but the immediate short hit symbol invalid period The pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of A.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol is invalid. Although the period A is terminated, in the variation display (for example, 4 variations) of the special symbol several times before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 immediately terminates. A count display indicating the number of remaining times of the variation display of the special symbol until the end of the short hit symbol invalid period A is displayed. As a result, the game can be continued with expectation until the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A ends.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, which is started when the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. F to H are being executed. During such an immediate short hit symbol validity period, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the case of the immediate short hit in the valid period of the immediate short hit symbol, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short hit is not obtained. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display F to H of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the variation pattern. When executing the effect to be performed, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, which is started when the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, the special symbol changes each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. Display I and the like are being executed. In such an immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol cannot be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the case of the immediate short hit symbol in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, even if the immediate short hit symbol is invalid during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, so that the immediate short hit is achieved. Since the hall manager cannot know this and does not output the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol to the external display device, the player cannot know that the immediate short hit has occurred.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display I of the special symbol which is the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation of the special symbol which is the variation display of the special symbol after the second time are displayed. The display and the display are different. Here, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, during the execution of the variation display I of the special symbol during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. Immediate short hits A common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display FG of the special symbol during the valid period of the symbol and the background image is executed. In this way, at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, since that fact is not clearly notified, it is necessary to recognize whether the immediate short hit symbol is valid or the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B. It is difficult to make it difficult to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short hit symbol validity period has started.

On the other hand, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed immediately. A pinch effect 2 (invalidity response effect) suggesting that the short hit symbol is invalid period B is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image (a background image different from the variation display A to C of the special symbol in the immediate short hit symbol valid period) and a mini character suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is displayed are displayed. Or, an effect such as outputting a voice or light emission suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is performed is executed. In this way, since the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B suggests that fact except for the first change display of the special symbol, it can be inferred that it is the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B. .. Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is noticed early by not executing the pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol. Can be prevented. The pinch effect 2 suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol is invalid period B is the same as the pinch effect 2 suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol is invalid period A, but the effect contents may be different. ..

In the above, the pinch effect 2 (invalidation response effect) is not executed at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B (during the execution of the special symbol variation display I), but the immediate short hit symbol invalid period The pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of B.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol is invalid. Although the period B is terminated, before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 executes the period B before the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A ends. The count display is not displayed. This is because the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, so that the end timing of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is set in advance. This is because it cannot be determined.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, which is started when the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. Running J. During such an immediate short hit symbol validity period, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the case of the immediate short hit in the valid period of the immediate short hit symbol, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short hit is not obtained. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display J of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 has an effect corresponding to the variation pattern. When executing, the normal production is executed.

As described above, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol is invalid. The winning symbol invalid period A is terminated, but when it is decided by lottery to terminate the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, it is immediate. The end condition of the short hit symbol invalid period A may be satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A may be forcibly terminated. In this example, in the variation display (for example, 4 variations) of the special symbol several times before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 has the immediate short hit symbol invalid period. The count display indicating the remaining number of times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol until the end of A is displayed, but when the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is forcibly terminated, the count display does not end. , Even if the count display is in the middle, it is forcibly terminated.

Further, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B can be forcibly terminated by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A or the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, if the power is turned on with RAM clear after the power is turned off, the immediate short hit symbol valid period is restored. ing. As a result, if the player avoids the game due to the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A or the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B occurring, the immediate short hit symbol is invalidated by the operation of the hall manager. It suffices to end the period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, and by returning to the immediate short hit symbol valid period, it is possible to newly participate in the game with expectation.

As described above, some of the low-probability non-time-saving states among the low-probability states are set as a "count suppression period" that is not subject to counting of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Then, among the count suppression periods, the count suppression period A is mainly when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state. The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is not counted up, but the relief count counter is maintained. In such a count suppression period A, an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C may occur at the same time even if the immediate short hit occurs. A case where such a count suppression period A and an immediate short hit symbol invalid period are used in combination will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a time chart showing the time when the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period are used together.

As shown in FIG. 202, since the immediate short hit symbol valid period is generated at the same time in the count valid period, the low probability time saving state is obtained when the immediate short hit occurs in such a count valid period. It is controlled by C.

Further, in the count suppression period A, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period A, when an immediate short hit occurs, the low probability non-time saving state is maintained as a gaming state before the immediate short hit, without controlling to the low probability time saving state C. There is. Here, among the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. At the same time, a common effect that is the same in terms of the background image and the variable display A to C of the special symbol during the count valid period is executed. On the other hand, during the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, during the execution of the variation display E of the special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is produced. At the time of execution, the pinch effect 2 (invalidity response effect) suggesting that the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period are executed is executed.

On the other hand, in the count suppression period B, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is not generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period B, when an immediate short hit occurs, the control is performed in the low probability time saving state C. Here, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the effect corresponding to the change pattern is executed. When executing the effect corresponding to the pattern, a common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display F to H of the special symbol during the count valid period and the background image is executed.

As described above, regarding the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the main control board 1310 The relief count counter in is counted down and updated so as to move away from the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, the count suppression period B moves away from the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600 thereafter. Therefore, from the count suppression period A. Is also a disadvantageous period. Then, if the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is generated at the same time in the count suppression period B, not only it becomes difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600, but also the immediate short hit is low. It is no longer controlled to the probability time saving state C, and the probability of obtaining the low probability time saving state (low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) becomes extremely low. In this respect, in this example, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous period from occurring by not generating the immediate short hit symbol invalid period at the same time in the count suppression period B.

[Priority of RTC production]
In this example, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to control the peripheral. The current calendar information and the current time information are set in the RAM of the IC. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, using such RTC (real-time clock) information, the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is performed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on. Apart from that, the RTC production is being executed. In this RTC effect, a dedicated effect different from the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed by the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission and the voice output. Therefore, it is possible to give a different enjoyment from the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern), and it can be expected that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 will be high.

The RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission and the voice output, and are used for the effect. The staging elements used are duplicated (at least partly duplicated). Here, since the RTC effect is executed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on, the execution timing of the RTC effect and the low probability time saving state B are controlled. The execution timing of the effect before and after the variation display of the symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) may overlap. Similarly, the execution timing of the effect before and after the immediate short hit, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, may overlap. In such a case, priority is given to the execution of the RTC effect, and some of the effects before and after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) and before and after the immediate short hit is restricted. I try to do it. Here, first, the RTC effect and the effect before and after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) will be described, and then the variation display of the special symbol will be 600 times (relief count counter = 600). A case where the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, and a case where the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) will be described. Then, after explaining the effect before and after the immediate short hit, when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the immediate short hit, or when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the immediate short hit. Will be explained.

FIG. 203 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC effect. As shown in FIG. 203, the RTC effect is not executed before t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, and the symbol variation effect (for example, 3 hours). The effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) is set to the normal effect state that can be executed. In the normal effect state, when the symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation A) is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed as the symbol variation effect. Then, in the symbol variation effect, the effect content such as the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice emission is set to the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the fluctuation pattern, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, the sound emission, and the like are executed.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, as a symbol variation effect, a variation display of a decorative symbol is executed, and an effect display suggesting a lottery result is executed. Further, with respect to the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate at predetermined timings in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the lottery result. Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit light at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the lottery result. Further, in the audio output, the BGM is output from the speaker during the effect display suggesting the lottery result.

Next, at t1, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the RTC effect state for executing the RTC effect is set. When t1 arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B, the execution of the symbol variation effect is restricted, and the RTC effect is preferentially executed. Then, in the RTC effect, the effect content for RTC is executed with respect to the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, the sound light emission, and the like. The RTC effect state continues to be executed from t1 when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied until a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses until t4 where the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, and t4. In, the RTC effect state is changed to the normal effect state.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 first executes an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) from t1 to t2 until the start of the RTC effect. The RTC countdown display starts at t1 without depending on the symbol change, and ends at t2 when 3 seconds have passed from t1 without depending on the symbol change. That is, the RTC countdown display is executed for 3 seconds from t1 to t2. Then, from t2 to tx, the RTC start display indicating the start of the RTC effect is executed. The RTC start display starts at t2 without depending on the symbol variation, is executed from t2 to t3 when 5 seconds have passed, and depends on the symbol variation, the symbol variation (symbol variation) is the first after t3. It is designed to end at the time of tx when D) starts. That is, the RTC start display is executed for a variable time of 5 seconds + α from t2 to tx. If there is a period in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after t3, the RTC start display is terminated after waiting for the symbol variation D to start after t3.

Then, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for RTC, which is not executed except for the RTC effect, from tx to t4 where the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied. As for the effect display for RTC, since the symbol variation (symbol variation D) is first started after t3, the symbol variation D is to be started as soon as possible after t3. You can play the game with motivation.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. On the other hand, of the RTC effect states t1 to t4, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect except for the period of t2 to t3, and the movable bodies A to C have a symbol variation effect (variation). The operation specified in the effect corresponding to the pattern) is being executed.

Further, in the lamp light emission, during the period from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC as the RTC effect is executed. .. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker with the execution of the RTC effect from t1 to t4.

(Restrictions on help mode L production)
FIG. 204 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). As shown in FIG. 204, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed. Has transitioned from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B at t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B is stopped. Further, before t5, the help mode L precursor effect state for executing the "help mode L precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode L" is imminent is set, whereas from t5. , The state has shifted to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed is executed. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is set until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. It is controlled, and the period for controlling to such a low-probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L". Then, the help mode L effect state is the time point of t6 when the 700th symbol variation X is stopped if the big hit is not obtained until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state B reaches 700 times. Then, in the case of a big hit, at the time of t6 when the symbol change that becomes the big hit is stopped, the low probability time saving state B is changed to the low probability non-time saving state, and the help mode L effect state is changed to the normal effect state. It is designed to move to.

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reached until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. The count effect of notifying how many times is executed is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L precursor effect". Further, after the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is started, the effect display device 1600 displays "in the help mode L" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled. The display corresponds to "help mode L production".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, a countdown is performed until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect for notifying how many times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state). ) Help mode L The effect display for the precursor is being executed. Then, after t5, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state B) is executed. Even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after t5, the effect for the help mode L is produced in that period. The display is continuously executed.

Further, for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode L precursor effect before t5 and the help mode L effect after t5, and the symbol variation effect (variation). The operation specified in the effect corresponding to the pattern) is being executed.

Further, in the lamp emission, before t5, the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is used as the emission pattern for the help mode L precursor due to the execution of the help mode L precursor effect. After t5, the light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode L with the execution of the help mode L effect. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker according to the execution of the help mode L precursor effect before t5, and the help mode L effect is output after t5. Along with the execution of, the BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). In this example, at t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the help mode L precursor effect state or the help mode L effect state. It is determined whether or not there is a help mode L precursor effect state or a normal effect state other than the help mode L effect state. In the above, the case where it is determined to be in the normal effect state at the time of t1 is described, and in the following, the case where it is determined to be the help mode L precursor effect state or the help mode L effect state at the time of t1 is described. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 205, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode L precursor effect state is set, the help mode L precursor effect state is changed to the RTC effect state. There is. Further, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the symbol variation B is executed. At the time of t5, which is the stop time of, the low-probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 counts down until the start of the help mode L effect at the time of t1 (for example, a count effect that notifies how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state). Help mode L The effect display for precursors is being executed, and from t1 to t5 when the symbol variation B in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). During that time, the effect display for the help mode L precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, since the control is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is displayed. Running. That is, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as the RTC effect are not executed between t1 and tx.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the effect display for RTC which is not executed except for the RTC effect. Is running. The effect display for the RTC is designed to start after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, an effect display for RTC is executed using the entire display area, and "during help mode L" indicating that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 even though the RTC start display is not executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. The operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, arrives. The RTC start operation of the moving bodies A to C being executed is continuously executed without ending. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp emission, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 are not executed from t1 to t3, but the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is set to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and continuously emits light in the light emission pattern for RTC until t4. That is, between t1 and t3, the game board 5 and the door are executed even though the effect display for the help mode L precursor and the effect display for the help mode L are executed on the effect display device 1600. The LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor or the light emission pattern for the help mode L. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker even though the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the staging display device 1600 from t1 to t3, and t4. Until then, the BGM for RTC is continuously output. That is, between t1 and t3, although the effect display for the help mode L precursor and the effect display for the help mode L are executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is performed from the speaker. The BGM for the L precursor and the BGM for the help mode L are not output.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, t5 is the time when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is stopped. When it arrives, the RTC start operation of the moving bodies A to C being executed is continuously executed without ending. As a result, the RTC start display on the staging display device 1600 is not executed between t1 and t2, but the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C are all executed without being terminated in the middle. , It is possible to notify the outside that the RTC effect is started, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC effect from being not recognized.

Further, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output. The staging elements used in the staging overlap (at least partly overlap). At this time, when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, if the help mode L precursor effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L precursor effect is described. While it is being executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L precursor effect, the lamp emission, and the voice output are restricted from being executed. That is, the execution of some of the staging elements used in the help mode L precursor staging is restricted. Similarly, after t1, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, arrives, the help mode L effect Although it is the timing to execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L effect, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L effect is executed. Execution of lamp emission and audio output is restricted. That is, the execution of some of the staging elements used in the help mode L staging is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output can be used in the RTC effect, so that they can be used toward the outside. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, the player pays the most attention to the effect display device 1600. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode L precursor effect display is displayed. Since the help mode L effect display is executed, it is not overlooked that the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) and is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. It is possible to prevent the control start of the low probability time saving state B from being unrecognized.

The movable bodies A to C described above include a movable body that the player can contact and a movable body that the player cannot contact. Specifically, the movable body A is the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and the movable body B is the back-bottom front effect unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these are movable. The body is inaccessible to the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is accessible to the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during the execution of the RTC effect so that each movable body operates. Here, with respect to the movable bodies A to C, whether or not they operate normally is monitored, but if an abnormality that does not operate normally occurs with respect to the movable body C, the movable body is mischievous by the player. There is a high possibility that C will not operate normally. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, the effect element used in the help mode L precursor effect or the help mode L effect as a penalty to the player. Of these, the period during which some of the executions are restricted is extended. That is, even after the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied at t4, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect is restricted. I have to. As a penalty to the player, the degree of restriction may be increased in a state where the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect is restricted. For example, during the execution of the RTC effect, the execution of the effect display of the effect display device 1600, which is not restricted as the help mode L precursor effect or the help mode L effect, may be restricted. .. In this way, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, a penalty is given to the player so that the player does not mischief the movable body C. I can work on it.

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). As shown in FIG. 206, when t1 at which the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, in the case of the help mode L effect state, the state shifts from the help mode L effect state to the RTC effect state. Further, when t1 at which the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, it is already controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state B) at the time of t1. However, between t1 and t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Further, between t2 and tx, the RTC start display indicating the start of the RTC effect is executed. Then, between tx and tx, from tx to t4 where the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, it is not executed except for the RTC effect. The effect display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for the RTC is designed to start after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the RTC countdown display, the RTC start display, and the effect display for RTC are executed using the entire display area, and the low probability time saving state B is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display the indicated "help mode L in progress".

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), The operation specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp light emission, during the period from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC as the RTC effect is executed. .. That is, between t1 and t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L is executed by the effect display device 1600, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is not emitting light in the emission pattern for help mode L. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker with the execution of the RTC effect from t1 to t4. That is, between t1 and t3, the BGM for the help mode L is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode L is executed by the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output. Therefore, the staging elements used in the staging are duplicated (at least a part of them are overlapped). At this time, when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, if the help mode L effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L effect is executed. On the other hand, the operations of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L effect, the lamp emission, and the voice output are restricted from being executed. That is, the execution of some of the staging elements used in the help mode L staging is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output can be used in the RTC effect, so that they can be used toward the outside. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is the help mode L. It is used in the production. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, the player pays the most attention to the effect display device 1600. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode L effect display is displayed. Since it is executed, it is not overlooked that the help mode L is being executed (during control of the low probability time saving state B), and the help mode L is being executed (during control of the low probability time saving state B). It is possible to prevent the fact from not being recognized.

(Restrictions on help mode S production)
FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the progress of the production before and after the immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 207, when the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit is executed, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state C at t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped. There is. Further, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, the help mode S is executed to execute the "help mode S precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode S" is entered. While the precursor effect state is set, from t5, the state shifts to the help mode S effect state in which the "help mode S effect" indicating that the "help mode S" is being executed is executed. In this example, by making an immediate short hit, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, and such a low-probability time-saving state C is used. The period of control is called "help mode S". Then, the help mode S effect state is the time when the change display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C reaches 20 to 100 times, and when the big hit is not obtained, the 20th to 100th symbol fluctuation X is stopped. If a big hit occurs at a certain t6, the low-probability time-saving state C shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state at the time of t6, which is the time when the symbol fluctuation that becomes the big hit is stopped, and the help mode S staging state. It is designed to shift to the normal production state.

In the above-mentioned effect example, as a symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) that becomes an immediate short hit, a variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and an effect display that stops at the stop symbol of the immediate short hit is executed. , Such a symbol variation effect that becomes an immediate short hit corresponds to "help mode S precursor effect". Further, after the control of the low-probability time-saving state C is started, the effect display device 1600 displays "during help mode S" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. The display corresponds to "help mode S production".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is executed as the symbol variation effect. Then, after t5, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state C) is executed. Even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after t5, the effect for the help mode S is performed in that period. The display is continuously executed.

Further, for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode S effect after t5, and the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. are doing.

Further, in the lamp light emission, before t5, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 with the execution of the help mode S precursor staging during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit. The LED is set to emit light in the light emitting pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after t5, the light is emitted in the light emitting pattern for the help mode S with the execution of the help mode S effect. Further, in the voice output, the BGM for the help mode S precursor is output from the speaker in accordance with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit before t5. Then, after t5, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode S effect.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the immediate short hit. In this example, at t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the help mode S precursor effect state or the help mode S effect state. It is determined whether or not there is a help mode S precursor effect state or a normal effect state other than the help mode S effect state. In the above, the case where it is determined to be in the normal effect state at the time of t1 is described, and in the following, the case where it is determined to be the help mode S precursor effect state or the help mode S effect state at the time of t1 is described. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 208, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode S precursor effect state is set, the help mode S precursor effect state is changed to the RTC effect state. There is. Further, when the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit is executed, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the low probability time saving state C at the time of t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at the time of t1, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is being executed as the symbol variation effect, and from t1 when the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is stopped. Until a certain t5, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, since the control is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C) is displayed. Running. That is, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as the RTC effect are not executed between t1 and tx.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, the effect display for RTC which is not executed except for the RTC effect. Is running. The effect display for the RTC is designed to start after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, an effect display for RTC is executed using the entire display area, and "during help mode S" indicating that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 even though the RTC start display is not executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 that starts the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit, it is designated by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern). The operation to be performed is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit is stopped, arrives, the RTC start operation of the moving bodies A to C being executed is performed. I try to continue running without quitting. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp emission, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 are not executed from t1 to t3, but the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is set to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and continuously emits light in the light emission pattern for RTC until t4. That is, between t1 and t3, the game board 5 and the door are executed even though the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are executed on the effect display device 1600. The LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor or the light emission pattern for the help mode S. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker even though the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the staging display device 1600 from t1 to t3, and t4. Until then, the BGM for RTC is continuously output. That is, between t1 and t3, the help mode is performed from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are executed on the effect display device 1600. The BGM for the S precursor and the BGM for the help mode S are not output.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit, arrives, the RTC of the moving bodies A to C being executed The start operation is continuously executed without ending. As a result, the RTC start display on the staging display device 1600 is not executed between t1 and t2, but the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C are all executed without being terminated in the middle. , It is possible to notify the outside that the RTC effect is started, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC effect from being not recognized.

Further, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output. The staging elements used in the staging overlap (at least partly overlap). At this time, when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, if the help mode S precursor effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode S precursor effect is described. While it is being executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output used in the help mode S precursor staging are restricted from being executed. That is, the execution of some of the staging elements used in the help mode S precursor staging is restricted. Similarly, when t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is stopped arrives after t1, it is the timing to execute the help mode S effect, but it is used in the help mode S effect. While the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S effect, the lamp emission, and the sound output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the staging elements used in the help mode S staging is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output can be used in the RTC effect, so that they can be used toward the outside. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, the player pays the most attention to the effect display device 1600. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode S precursor effect display is displayed. Since the help mode S effect display is executed, the control to the low probability time saving state C is not overlooked due to the immediate short hit, and the control start of the low probability time saving state C is prevented from being recognized. be able to.

The movable bodies A to C described above include a movable body that the player can contact and a movable body that the player cannot contact. Specifically, the movable body A is the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and the movable body B is the back-bottom front effect unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these are movable. The body is inaccessible to the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is accessible to the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, with respect to the movable bodies A to C, whether or not they operate normally is monitored, but if an abnormality that does not operate normally occurs with respect to the movable body C, the movable body is mischievous by the player. There is a high possibility that C will not operate normally. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, the effect element used in the help mode S precursor effect or the help mode S effect as a penalty to the player. Of these, the period during which some of the executions are restricted is extended. That is, even after the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied at t4, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect is restricted. I have to. As a penalty to the player, the degree of restriction may be increased in a state where the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect is restricted. For example, during the execution of the RTC effect, the execution of the effect display of the effect display device 1600, which is not restricted as the help mode S precursor effect or the help mode S effect, may be restricted. .. In this way, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, a penalty is given to the player so that the player does not mischief the movable body C. I can work on it.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 209, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode S effect state is reached, the help mode S effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Further, when t1 at which the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the control is already performed in the low probability time saving state C.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) at the time of t1. However, between t1 and t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Further, between t2 and tx, the RTC start display indicating the start of the RTC effect is executed. Then, between tx and tx, from tx to t4 where the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, it is not executed except for the RTC effect. The effect display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for the RTC is designed to start after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the RTC countdown display, the RTC start display, and the effect display for RTC are executed using the entire display area, and the low probability time saving state C is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display the indicated "help mode S in progress".

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low probability time saving state C), The operation specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp light emission, during the period from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC as the RTC effect is executed. .. That is, between t1 and t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S is executed by the effect display device 1600, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is not emitting light in the emission pattern for help mode S. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker with the execution of the RTC effect from t1 to t4. That is, between t1 and t3, the BGM for the help mode S is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode S is executed by the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output. Therefore, the staging elements used in the staging are duplicated (at least a part of them are overlapped). At this time, when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, if the help mode S effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode S effect is executed. On the other hand, the operations of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S effect, the lamp emission, and the voice output are restricted from being executed. That is, the execution of some of the staging elements used in the help mode S staging is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the voice output can be used in the RTC effect, so that they can be used toward the outside. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low probability time saving state C), from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is the help mode S. It is used in the production. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, the player pays the most attention to the effect display device 1600. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode S effect display is displayed. Since it is executed, it is not overlooked that the help mode S is being executed (during control of the low probability time saving state C), and the help mode S is being executed (during control of the low probability time saving state C). It is possible to prevent the fact from not being recognized.

(Restriction of help mode L precursor effect)
As described with reference to FIG. 204, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed. At the time of t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low-probability non-time-saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving state B. Further, before t5, the help mode L precursor effect state for executing the "help mode L precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode L" is imminent is set, whereas from t5. , The state has shifted to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed is executed. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is set until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. It is controlled, and the period for controlling to such a low-probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L".

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reached until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. The count effect of notifying how many times is executed is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L precursor effect". Regarding such a count effect, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief count counter when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the low probability state, and the information regarding the relief count counter from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 (relief count command). ) Is transmitted so that the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state, and the probability is low when the variation display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped. A counting effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the state. That is, the counting effect is executed as an effect determined by the peripheral control board 1510, separately from the effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control board 1310.

In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the main control is executed when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed. As the variation pattern determined by the substrate 1310, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. Here, when the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state has not reached 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed, the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 is a normal variation. The pattern is determined, and the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is not determined. Then, when the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed only in the symbol variation B that reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). By executing the non-help mode L precursor effect, it is possible to know in advance that the “help mode L” controlled by the low probability time saving state B is executed.

It should be noted that, as the "help mode L precursor effect", when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed when the above count effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (help mode L precursor effect) is executed, so that the low probability time saving state B is controlled. While it is possible to know in advance that "help mode L" will be executed, if the normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect, the fluctuation pattern will be used. It is not possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled by the low probability time saving state B is executed by executing the corresponding effect (the effect that is not the help mode L precursor effect). In this example, the above-mentioned count effect is not executed as the "help mode L precursor effect", but the above-mentioned count is performed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined. You may perform the production. Further, in this example, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. However, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state may be any symbol fluctuation before reaching 600 times (relief count counter = 600), for example, a plurality of symbol fluctuations (for example, 579 to 600 times). It may be possible to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect over 500 to 600 times).

Further, in this example, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) for the help mode L precursor effect is executed. ) Is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 as a specific fluctuation pattern execution button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for determining. The specific fluctuation pattern execution button may be an operation unit provided in a place that cannot be operated or visually recognized by the player, in addition to the power switch 630a related to power-on, and may be a rotary switch type operation unit or pressed. An example is a switch-type operation unit, or a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, if it is a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the administrator, it is possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, when the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. Help mode L The fluctuation pattern for the precursory effect is determined. On the other hand, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, Help mode L The normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the fluctuation pattern for the precursory effect. That is, when the hall manager executes the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) depending on whether or not the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to select whether or not to determine the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. In this way, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. , Help mode L Help mode L corresponding to the variation pattern for precursor effect The help mode L is being executed in the next symbol variation C without executing the precursor effect (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). Since the help mode L effect indicating that the case is suddenly executed, it is possible to give a strong impact that the time is shortened without hitting.

During the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), the variation for the help mode L effect is determined as the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 when the symbol variation is executed. The pattern is determined. That is, after the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is started, the variation pattern for the help mode L effect is determined in the symbol variation until the variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B reaches 700 times. The fluctuation pattern for this help mode L effect is determined while the help mode L is being executed (during control of the low probability time saving state B) regardless of whether or not the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. I try to do it. That is, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, before and after the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the transition to the low probability time saving state B is performed. Also, the help mode L precursor effect is executed before, and the help mode L effect is executed after shifting to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the transition to the low probability time saving state B shifts to the low probability time saving state B before and after the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). The help mode L effect is not executed before the help mode L effect is executed, and the help mode L effect is executed after the transition to the low probability time saving state B. In this way, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L precursor effect is not executed before the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state is reached. Since the help mode L effect is suddenly executed after shifting to B, it is possible to give a strong impact that the time is shortened without hitting.

Further, even when the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on and the power is turned on with the RAM clear, a specific fluctuation pattern different from that of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the power switch 630a is executed. If the button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, the help mode L variation for the precursor effect is executed. Does not determine the pattern (determines the normal fluctuation pattern). That is, only by whether or not the hall manager turns on the power with RAM clear, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, Help mode L Since it does not change whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the precursor effect, when the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on as necessary to execute the symbol variation B. , Help mode L It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for the precursory effect.

In the above, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on. At that time, whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is different, but it may be configured as follows. Specifically, if a big hit (big hit game) has already been obtained after the power is turned on, and then the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that 600. When the symbol variation B that reaches the number of times (relief count counter = 600) is executed, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined. On the other hand, if the big hit (big hit game) is not obtained after the power is turned on and the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the 600 times (relief count). When the symbol variation B reaching the counter = 600) is executed, the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. That is, depending on whether or not a big hit (big hit game) has already been obtained before the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the 600 times (relief count counter =). When executing the symbol variation B reaching 600), it is different whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. In such a configuration, as a consideration for the already obtained big hit (big hit game), it is possible to execute the help mode L precursor effect before shifting to the low probability time saving state B, and help. Mode L can entertain the precursory effect.

Further, in the above, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. In addition, although the normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect, it may be configured as follows. Specifically, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) after the power is turned on, the low-probability non-time-saving state shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B. However, in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined before the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. In contrast to the fact that there is no such thing (determines a normal fluctuation pattern), in the low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the second time after the power is turned on, before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. Help mode L The fluctuation pattern for the precursory effect is determined. That is, depending on whether or not it is the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, it helps when executing the symbol variation B before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. Mode L Whether or not to determine the fluctuation pattern for the precursory effect is different. In such a configuration, it is already known that the low-probability non-time-saving state can be changed to the low-probability time-saving state B in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on. In the low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the second time after the power is turned on, the effect is produced by newly executing the help mode L precursor effect before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. It is possible to prevent it from becoming monotonous.

[Reset of relief count counter]
In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is incremented and counted from the initial value "0" by using the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. With respect to such a relief count counter, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset when the power is turned on with the RAM cleared or when the jackpot game is executed. However, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state is directly related to whether or not the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is performed, whether or not to reset the count of the relief count counter. It is preferable that the hall manager can select the power on when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with RAM clear. In this example, a configuration that enables whether or not to reset the count of the relief count counter when the power is turned on will be described below.

In this example, a relief maintenance button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for resetting the count of the relief count counter when the power is turned on, is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The relief maintenance button may be an operation unit provided in a place that cannot be operated or visually recognized by the player, in addition to the power switch 630a related to power-on, and may be a rotary switch type operation unit or a push switch type. An example is the operation unit of the above, or a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (thin bar, etc.) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, if it is a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the administrator, it is possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. That is, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the relief maintenance button, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. In this way, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained, so that the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B The number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state until the transition to is displayed is small, whereas the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state when the rescue maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on. Since the count of (relief count counter) is reset, it is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and the hall manager is required to perform the hall. You can choose whether or not to reset according to the environment.

FIG. 210 is a list of RAM clear conditions showing an operation at power-on for executing RAM clear. In this example, when the power is turned on (when the power switch 630a is operated), the RAM clear operation for operating the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed, and the setting change operation for turning on the setting key switch 1311a (RAM clear switch). When the setting change operation of turning on the 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a) is performed, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, and the game state is initialized. (Set to low probability non-time saving state). Further, the set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and when the setting change operation is performed, the set value already set (power cutoff before turning on the power). The time setting value) can be changed. Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and the relief maintenance button is pressed when the power is turned on. The count can be maintained when operated.

As shown in FIG. 210, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. .. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value of the set value is not changed or the confirmation display is not performed, and the set value already set (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Further, the initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in blue from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The game state has been cleared. The set value and the number of reliefs are maintained." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the already set value. , It is designed to count from the continuation when the power is cut off.

As for the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is turned off, the information about the effect being executed is lost when the power is turned off, and the subsequent effect after the power is turned on. The state is executed in the initial state, and the effect state is restored after waiting for a command related to the effect to be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value of the set value is not changed or the confirmation display is not performed, and the set value already set (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Further, the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in yellow from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The game status and the number of reliefs have been cleared. The set value is maintained." From the speaker. Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the already set value. , It is designed to count from the initial value "0".

On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is being operated during the setting change operation, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting of the setting value can be changed, and when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. The value increases by 1 each time, and when the maximum value of 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial value of 1, and the value can be increased by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Regarding the initialization of the game state, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is the input timing. ) Is running. At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the setting value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in green from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The set value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The number of reliefs is maintained." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the power supply is used for counting the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state while enabling the setting change of the set value. It is designed to count from the continuation at the time of interruption.

If the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting of the setting value can be changed, and when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. The value increases by 1 each time, and when the maximum value of 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial value of 1, and the value can be increased by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a). The signal is being executed at the input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the setting value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in white from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The set value has been changed and the game status and the number of reliefs have been cleared." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, the setting change of the set value is possible, and the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is initially set. It is designed to count from the value "0".

Further, as described above in detail, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is turned off. In this case, an error message is displayed to inform that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When such a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is caused by turning on the specific abnormality flag, shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1, and performing a setting change operation when the power is turned on again. You can unlock it and proceed with the game. Specifically, when the setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. While initializing the game state, it is possible to change the setting of the set value. When changing the setting of the set value, the value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the setting value 1 of the minimum value which is the initial value is temporarily set, and when the setting value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the value is increased by 1. It is possible to return to the set value 1 which is the initial value and increase the value by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a). The signal is being executed at the input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the setting value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the above, when the setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the probability is low regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. The count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the state is reset. This is because when a RAM error occurs, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, and there is a possibility that the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is also abnormal. Therefore, by resetting the count, the fairness of the game can be maintained. When the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the power is turned on without a setting change operation, the specific abnormality flag remains ON without canceling the RAM error. There is.

In this example, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the set value already set is maintained and the probability is low. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the setting value is changed. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, when the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the already set value. The count for the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) is counted from the initial value "0", whereas when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, the setting value is changed. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". That is, when the power is turned on, the hall manager determines whether or not the setting of the set value is changed and whether or not the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. The operation unit may be operated, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment. For example, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on at the start of business of the hall, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained, so that the low probability non-time saving state is low. The fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state until the transition to the probability time reduction state B can be performed a small number of times, and the player is expected to shift to the low probability time reduction state B as soon as the hall is opened. Can be done. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on at the start of business in the hall, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, so that the low probability non-time saving state is reached. It is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low-probability state from to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the player's expectation is that the hall does not move to the low-probability time-saving state B immediately after the opening of the hall. Does not increase quickly.

Regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the power switch 630a is operated without turning on the normal power-on (RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a), which is not a RAM clear operation or setting change operation. (Only) is performed, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is not executed, and the game state is changed to the state when the power is cut off based on the backup created when the power is turned off. I am returning. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value of the set value is not changed or the confirmation display is not performed, and the set value already set (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are colored purple from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be OFF until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The game state has been restored. The set value and the number of reliefs are maintained." Therefore, in the case of normal power-on, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off while maintaining the set value already set. However, the game state is also restored to the state when the power is cut off. Regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the setting value confirmation display is performed. Except that the setting value confirmation display is performed when the setting confirmation operation is performed. It is the same as when the power is turned on normally.

Further, in this example, when the gaming state is initialized, the notification mode for notifying the outside is different depending on whether the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. There is. As a result, for example, even if the hall manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on and maintains the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, it is external to the outside. The notification mode makes it possible to notice the mistake and prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In the above, the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even when the relief maintenance button is not provided, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted when the power is turned on. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the hall manager can select whether to maintain or not according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, for example, when the RAM clear operation is performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the set value already set. The count for (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, but when the setting change operation for turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed, the setting of the set value can be changed. On the other hand, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, only when the hall manager performs the RAM clear operation instead of the setting change operation, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be maintained without being reset, and the hall manager can maintain the count. Can be tailored to your needs.

In addition, even if the relief maintenance button is not provided, if the hall manager wants to maintain the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned on, the hall manager has some kind of operation unit. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the above is operated. Specifically, the operation unit may be an ON operation of the setting key switch 1311a as a setting change operation. In such a configuration, when the setting change operation of turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed when the power is turned on, the special symbol changes in the low probability state while enabling the setting change of the set value. The count for the number of times (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas when the RAM clear operation without turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed, the set value already set. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, if the hall manager does not turn on the setting key switch 1311a when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state will be reset, and the hall manager will reset the count. It is possible to prevent the count from being maintained unintentionally.

If the relief maintenance button is provided, the hall administrator can select from four patterns depending on whether the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is operated or the relief maintenance button is operated. However, in the case of a configuration without a relief maintenance button, it is only necessary to operate the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation, and the hall administrator has only two patterns. Cannot be executed selectively. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with the relief maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated on the hall side may be provided to increase the patterns that the hall manager can select.

In this example, the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be. Then, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbol is stopped. Further, in the case of a big hit, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Then, after the jackpot symbol is stopped, the jackpot game is executed, but the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset when the jackpot symbol is stopped before the start of the jackpot game. .. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on thereafter, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is performed. Since the RAM clear is executed to initialize the variable state (make the variable state not displayed), the variable display of the special symbol being executed is not restored when the power is turned on. Also, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot before the jackpot game is executed, and the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on thereafter, the main Executes RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the control MPU 1310a, and initializes the fluctuation state (makes it a state where the fluctuation is not displayed), so it returns to the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the big hit being executed. There is nothing to do, and the big hit game scheduled after that is not executed.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state is initialized. At that time, the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the running jackpot is initialized, and while maintaining the set value already set, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is the power supply. While counting from the continuation at the time of shutoff, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation at the time of power-on, when the game state is initialized, the special symbol changes based on the running jackpot. While the display is initialized and the setting of the set value can be changed, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, when the game state is initialized, the game state is initialized. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is the initial value while initializing the variation display of the special symbol based on the running jackpot and maintaining the set value already set. While counting from "0", if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the power is turned on, when the game state is initialized, the variation display of the special symbol based on the running jackpot is displayed. Is initialized to enable the setting of the set value to be changed, and the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". That is, the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the big hit, and when the power is turned on after that (at the time of RAM clear operation, setting change operation), when the game state is initialized, it is being executed. Although the variation display of the special symbol based on the jackpot is initialized, it depends on whether you want to change the setting of the set value and whether you want to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. The hall manager may operate a predetermined operation unit, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

Further, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the number of times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but for example, if a configuration that initializes all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clear processing of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is added, it is special. Since the RAM clear processing is performed during the symbol variation display, even the count of the special symbol variation count (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the probability is low in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. It may be difficult to confirm that the time saving state B is entered. In this respect, in this example, even if a big hit is made and the special symbol change display based on the big hit is executed until the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is based on the big hit. Executed when the game state is initialized by turning off the power while executing the variable display of the special symbol and then operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed). While initializing the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the big hit in the middle, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, and the pachinko machine 1 In the manufacturing process of the above, it becomes possible to display the variation of the special symbol again, and it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Further, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, when it is desired to confirm various effects when shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B, even if the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low-probability state is the 600th. During the fluctuation display that reaches or immediately before that, the power is turned off regardless of whether it is a big hit, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed). By doing so, while initializing the fluctuation display of the special symbol being executed, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, and pachinko. In the manufacturing process of the machine 1, it becomes possible to display the variation of the special symbol for the 600th time again, and it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of the effect of the process of shifting to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, when initializing the variable display of the special symbol being executed, the information regarding various stored holdings (holding the lottery result of the first special symbol, holding the lottery result of the second special symbol) is also initially set. When confirming the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B and confirming the production of the process of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, the worker can confirm the first special symbol and the second special. It is possible to select which of the symbols to be executed and execute the fluctuation display reaching the 600th time or the fluctuation display immediately before that at an arbitrary timing, and the degree of freedom of the confirmation work can be increased. Further, this work can be repeatedly executed by operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed), and the degree of freedom of the confirmation work can be increased in this respect as well.

In the above, the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even when the relief maintenance button is not provided, the variation display of the special symbol reaching 600 times or the variation display of the special symbol based on the jackpot is being executed. The hall manager decides whether or not to maintain the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned off and the power is turned on after that (RAM clear operation, setting change operation). Is preferably configured so that it can be selected according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall administrator performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief) is erased while the fluctuation display being executed is erased. By maintaining the count of the number counter) without resetting, it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In this example, when the power is cut off during the control of the time saving state and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on after that, when the variation display during execution is initialized. , While maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas the setting is changed when the power is turned on. When the relief maintenance button is operated during operation, when initializing the fluctuation display during execution, the time saving state is initialized to the low probability non-time saving state, and the setting value can be changed while the low probability. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during the control of the time saving state and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on after that, when the variation display during execution is initialized, the time saving state is started. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state is counted from the initial value "0" while initializing to the low-probability non-time saving state and maintaining the set value already set. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the power is turned on, when the variation display during execution is initialized, the time saving state is initialized to the low probability non-time saving state, and the set value is set. While making it possible to change the setting of, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". In other words, when the power is turned off during the control of the time saving state and the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed), when the variation display during execution is initialized, the probability is low from the time saving state. Although it is initialized to the time saving state, the hall manager determines whether or not to change the setting of the set value and whether or not to maintain the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. The operation unit may be operated, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

In the above, in the case of a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped, and the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset when the big hit symbol is stopped. However, as another example, only in the case of a big hit, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is not when the big hit symbol is stopped, but in the big hit game. It may be reset at the end of (for example, when the ending period set after the end of the final round has elapsed). That is, in the case of a miss or a small hit, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbol is stopped, but in the case of a big hit, the low probability state is reached. Regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the above, the timing of resetting may be delayed until the end of the subsequent big hit game, not when the special symbol is stopped. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game and the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on thereafter, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is initially used. Since the game state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state) so as to erase the big hit game by executing the RAM clear to be changed, the big hit game that is being executed is not returned.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the game is being executed when the game state is initialized. While initializing the jackpot game and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas the power supply is used. When the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation at the time of input, the running jackpot game is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the setting value can be changed while the low probability state is set. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the running jackpot game is executed when the game state is initialized. While initializing and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0", whereas the power is turned on. If the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation at the time, when the game state is initialized, the running jackpot game is initialized, and the setting value can be changed while in the low probability state. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) is counted from the initial value of "0". That is, the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game, and when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed), the running jackpot game is initialized when the game state is initialized. However, if the hall manager operates a predetermined operation unit depending on whether or not the setting of the set value is changed and whether or not the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Often, the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

Further, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the number of times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but if a configuration that initializes all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clear processing of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is added, it is a big hit. Since the RAM clear processing is performed during the game, even the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the low probability time saving state B is performed in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. It may be difficult to confirm the transition to. In this regard, if a big hit occurs and a big hit game occurs before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, and then the power is turned on. By operating the relief maintenance button at the time (RAM clear operation, setting change operation), when the game state is initialized, the special symbol changes in the low probability state while initializing the running jackpot game. The count for the number of times (relief number counter) can be counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, and it is possible to easily confirm that the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the low probability time saving state B in the manufacturing process.

In the above, the rescue maintenance button is provided, but for example, even when the rescue maintenance button is not provided, the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game, and the power is turned on thereafter (when the RAM clear operation is performed). In the setting change operation), the hall manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state according to the hall environment. preferable. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state while erasing the jackpot game is By maintaining the count without resetting it, it can meet the needs of the hall manager.

Further, as described in detail above, in the effect display device 1600, as the "help mode L precursor effect", the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. A count effect is executed to notify the number of fluctuations of. Regarding the current count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in such a low probability state, whether or not the hall manager resets the count even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is other than 500 to 600 times. In order to confirm whether or not the setting value is changed, the setting value is displayed even during the period when the setting value is changed and the setting value is displayed so that the hall manager can confirm it. In the following, the history display to be displayed during the period when the setting of the setting value is changed and the display of the setting value is confirmed will be described.

FIG. 211 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period in which the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. In this example, it is shown that the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, and the setting of the set value is changed. When the setting change operation is performed, the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) can be changed.

FIGS. 211 (A) and 211 (B) show the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting value is changed, and FIG. 211 (A) shows the setting change of the setting value is started. It is a display screen immediately after, and a message image "setting is being changed" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a guidance image (operation image showing the staging operation unit 310) for switching to the history display is displayed below it. To. FIG. 211 (B) is a history display image switched from the display screen of FIG. 211 (A) when the effect operation unit 310 is operated.

In FIG. 211 (B), the first history display unit that can confirm the history of the past 12 times line by line is displayed on one screen, and the “date and time information” based on the RTC information and the above-mentioned fluctuation of the special symbol are displayed. "Information about the game state" whether or not the game state including the display and the jackpot game has been initialized, "Information about the set value" indicating the current set value, "Information about the count value of the relief count counter", " "Work information such as RAM clear operation and setting change operation" is recorded in order from the left. This information is stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so that it will not be erased even if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed. That is, in the display of FIGS. 211 (A) and 211 (B), various information stored in the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. It is an effect image generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, in FIG. 211 (B), the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display unit is a display related to the current setting change operation, and is ". The information "changing" is recorded in the "information about the set value", and is updated when the set value is confirmed. Further, a guidance image (operation image showing the staging operation unit 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. 211 (A) is displayed at the lower left of the first history display unit, and is displayed at the lower right of the first history display unit. Is highlighted with the current "information about the count value of the relief count counter".

There are two current "information about the count value of the relief count counter", "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM" and "number of fluctuations after big hit", and "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM" has a relief maintenance button. When the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed without the operation and the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, the total number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. In addition, in "Number of fluctuations after big hit", when the big hit game is executed in the progress of the game and the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, the number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. Will be done. That is, when the big hit game is not executed in the progress of the game, the "number of fluctuations after the big hit" is displayed as zero, and the numerical value is recorded only in the "number of fluctuations after the RAM is cleared". In addition, the example of FIG. 211 (B) shows the case where the big hit game is executed in the progress process of the game, and "412" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations after the big hit", and "after the RAM is cleared". Only "2995" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations", and the hall manager can recognize the count value of the relief count counter by "412" which is the "number of fluctuations after the big hit".

In this example, since the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, RAM clear is executed when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. The count value of the relief count counter will be reset to the initial value. That is, before the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, the hall manager determines the count value of the relief count counter (count value before initialization) by "412" which is the "number of fluctuations after the big hit". ) Can be recognized. Then, after recognizing the count value of the relief count counter (count value before initialization), if it is desired to maintain the count value of the relief count counter, the setting change operation is not terminated (setting key switch). The power may be turned off (without turning off the 1311a), and the relief maintenance button may be operated when the power is turned on thereafter to maintain the count value of the relief count counter.

FIG. 211 (C) shows the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting change operation is completed, and the history display image is continuously displayed from the display screen of FIG. 211 (B). Further, the display screen of FIG. 211 (C) shall be displayed from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the history display screen is deleted. Further, in FIG. 211 (C), the setting is changed in the "information about the set value" in the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display unit. Since the set value is fixed by the end of the operation, the fixed value (“4” in this example) is updated and displayed. Further, this example shows a case where the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, and the RAM is cleared when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. Is executed, and the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, so that the "number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM" and "number of fluctuations after the big hit" are updated to the initial values of zero. Is displayed. The date and time information may also be updated and displayed when the setting change operation is completed.

If the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the count value of the relief count counter is performed while the RAM is cleared when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. For the "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM" and "number of fluctuations after big hit", the values displayed during the setting change operation ("2995" for "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM", "412") is continuously displayed in "Number of fluctuations after big hit" without being updated.

As described above, during the period when the setting value setting is changed and the setting value display is confirmed, the hall management messenger performs an arbitrary operation to change the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief count counter). The current count for the above can be confirmed, and the hall manager can determine whether or not to reset the count value of the relief count counter without inadvertently leaking to the surroundings. In other words, if the hall manager wants to reset the count value of the relief count counter, the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on after the power is turned off. ) Can be reset, and if the hall administrator does not want to reset the count value of the relief count counter, the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, and the relief maintenance button is operated in a low probability state. The count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) may be maintained.

Further, in the second history display unit, in addition to the above, for example, the number of times the special symbol is changed to the low probability time saving state B by reaching 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, Etc. may be displayed.

Further, during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed, the launch control for launching the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 cannot be performed. This is the current count (setting value setting change and setting value) for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state during the period when the setting value setting change and the setting value display confirmation are performed. (Count at the start of display confirmation) is displayed, but if the game ball B can be launched from the ball launcher 540 during such a period, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. Occasionally, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted up, causing a deviation from the count being displayed. In this regard, during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed, the launch control for launching the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 cannot be performed, so that the display is displayed. The hall manager can accurately grasp the current count without any deviation from the count.

(Regarding the handling of ordinary symbols when the power is turned on)
In this example, it is set so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 in the time saving state as compared with the non-time saving state. However, regarding the state in which the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, it may be executed across the timing of the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, and the time-saving state is changed to the non-time-saving state. Immediately after that, there is a possibility that the state in which the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 continues. Similarly, even in the case of a specification that initializes only the time saving state by the administrator operation and returns it to the low probability non-time saving state, immediately after returning to the low probability non-time saving state, the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 If the state in which acceptance is easy continues, the state does not correspond to the game state, and a sense of incongruity occurs. Therefore, when the time saving state is initialized by the administrator operation and returned to the low probability non-time saving state, it is preferable to simultaneously delete the state in which the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. On the other hand, it is preferable to make it possible to maintain the count for the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of the special symbol in the low probability state. In this way, the configuration that enables the time saving state to be initialized and returned to the low probability non-time saving state while maintaining the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state will be described below. do.

In the time saving state, it is set so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the non-time saving state. For example, when the ordinary lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be "ordinary hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", it is closed by the variable winning door 2521. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. As a result, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 in the non-time saving state. Therefore, the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 has become the mainstream. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so that the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the variable winning opening 2003 has become mainstream. There is. Further, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the non-time-saving state, so that the player can play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times ( By reaching the relief count counter = 600), it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. Here, in the time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A), it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time saving state, so that the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is often displayed. It can be executed, and the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be advanced quickly. As a result, in the time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state easily reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), and the low probability time saving state B is controlled. It is possible to shorten the period until.

Specifically, when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) is 0/100, and the time saving state (high probability). In the normal lottery in the probability time saving state, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" is 100/100. However, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" may be set higher in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. For example, in the normal lottery in the non-time-saving state, 1/100. However, in the normal lottery in a time-saving state, it may be 99/100.

Further, when the normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 executes the variable display of the normal symbol based on the lottery result of the lottered normal symbol, and suggests the lottery result of the normal symbol. In addition to the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600 may also perform the variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, the normal hit symbol corresponding to the "normal hit" is stopped and displayed, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is "missing". In this case, when the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped, the normal loss symbol corresponding to the "loss" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time reduction state and 0.01 seconds in the time reduction state. That is, in the time-saving state, it is possible to frequently execute the variable display of the normal symbol.

Further, when the normal hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, the variable winning opening 2003 closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 10 seconds). In this state, the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. In this example, when the normal hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing pattern is executed for 0.5 seconds as the time when the variable winning opening 2003 is opened and once as the number of times, and the normal hit symbol is displayed in the time saving state. When the stop display is displayed, the opening / closing pattern is executed for 1.5 seconds as the time for the variable winning opening 2003 to be in the open state and twice as the number of times. The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is determined depending on whether the gaming state at the timing of stopping and displaying the normal hit symbol is the non-time saving state or the time saving state. For example, even if the normal symbol is in the non-time saving state at the start of the variable display, the time is changed from the non-time saving state to the time saving state during the normal symbol variation display, and the normal symbol is in the non-time saving state when the stop display is performed. Executes the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 in the time saving state, and even if it is in the time saving state at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, it shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state during the variation display of the normal symbol. If the normal hit symbol is in the non-time saving state when the stop display is displayed, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 in the non-time saving state is executed. As a result, regarding the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003, for example, the situation where the variable winning opening 2003 opens / closes with an advantageous opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern in the time saving state) despite the transition to the non-time saving state is prevented as much as possible. It is possible to open and close the variable winning opening 2003 so as not to cause a sense of discomfort according to the game state.

Further, if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the variation display of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the variation display of the normal symbol ends and the variation display of the previous normal symbol ends. It is put on hold until it is done (until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed). In addition, the number of pending lottery of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

FIG. 212 is a time chart showing behavior related to a normal symbol when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 212 (A), after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is cut off, the normal power-on (RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) that is not a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is not turned on. When the power switch 630a is operated only), the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the game state is powered based on the backup created when the power is turned off. It is restored to the state at the time of interruption. That is, when the power is cut off in the time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and then the normal power is turned on, the gaming state is changed. It is designed to return to the time-saving state when the power is cut off.

In addition, when the normal power is turned on after the power is cut off (power cut), the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the backup created when the power is turned off is used. Based on this, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained when the power is cut off. That is, in the case of normal power-on, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. For example, if the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is 105 at the time of power off, the count is maintained at the time of the subsequent normal power-on, and after the normal power-on. By stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is incremented by +1 and updated to 106 times. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is supposed to be controlled to the probability time reduction state B, but for example, when the normal power is turned on at the start of business of the hall, the gaming state is returned to the state when the power is cut off, and in the low probability state. Since the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) is maintained, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the transition to the low probability time saving state B can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B as soon as the hall is open.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed when the normal power is turned on thereafter, so that the power is cut off. Based on the backup that is sometimes created, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is restarted from the continuation when the power is turned off. Further, when the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is being executed when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed when the power is turned on normally thereafter. Therefore, based on the backup created when the power is cut off, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is restarted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if there is a hold of a normal symbol when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is not executed when the power is turned on after that, so it is created when the power is turned off. Based on the backup that is being done, the number of reserved symbols when the power is turned off is restored. Therefore, when the power is turned on normally, the gaming state is returned to the state when the power is cut off, and the behavior related to the normal symbol is also returned to the state when the power is cut off.

Further, with respect to the sound output from the effect display device 1600, the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the speaker, the effect control is executed according to the game state. For example, during the period of controlling the low-probability time-saving states A to C, the staging control corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Then, when the normal power is turned on after the power is cut off, the behavior related to the game state and the normal symbol is restored from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be OFF until the predetermined period elapses. The restart control for notifying that the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained is executed. Specifically, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit purple light, and the effect display device 1600 "returns to the game state. The image "The number of rescues is maintained." Is output, and the voice "The game state has been restored. The number of rescues is maintained." Is output from the speaker.

FIG. 212 (B) shows a case where the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is turned off. In FIG. 212 (C), when the power is turned on after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is turned off, the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. Explains the case where there is. As described above in detail, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, whereas the RAM clear operation is performed. At times, when the relief maintenance button is operated, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. That is, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the relief maintenance button, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. The count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area (specific area different from the set value) of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a. Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the count can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 212 (B), when the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after turning off the power switch 630a and shutting off the power, it is built in the main control MPU 1310a. RAM is initialized RAM clear is executed, and the game state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). That is, when the power is cut off in the time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and then the RAM clear operation is performed, the gaming state is low. It is designed to be initialized to the probability non-time saving state.

Further, when the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off (power cutoff), the RAM (including the second specific area) built in the main control MPU 1310a is initialized. The RAM is cleared, and the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. The game state is initialized and the count is reset at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. For example, if the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is 105 at the time of power cutoff, the relief maintenance button is not operated during the subsequent RAM clear operation, so that the initial value is obtained. By resetting the count to "0", and then stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is increased by +1 and the count starts from 1 time. I am doing it. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), so that it is low. It is supposed to be controlled to the probability time reduction state B, but for example, when the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button at the start of business of the hall, the game state is initialized and the low probability state is set. Since the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in is reset, it is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. , The low-probability time-saving state B does not shift to the low-probability time-saving state B from the opening of the hall, and the expectations of the players do not rise quickly.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is executed at the time of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is not operated thereafter. , The fluctuation display of the normal symbol that was being executed when the power was turned off is erased so that the mode before the power is turned off is not restored. Further, when the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is being executed when the power is cut off, the RAM that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is performed when the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button thereafter. Clearing is executed, and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 that was being executed when the power is cut off is erased so as not to return to the mode before the power is cut off. In addition, if there is a hold of the normal symbol when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is executed at the time of the RAM clear operation without operating the relief maintenance button thereafter, and the power is supplied. The number of ordinary symbols held at the time of shut-off is erased so that the mode before the power is shut off is not restored. Therefore, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is not operated, the game state is initialized and the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, which is related to the normal symbol. As for the behavior, the state when the power is cut off is erased.

Further, with respect to the sound output from the effect display device 1600, the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the speaker, the effect control is executed according to the game state. For example, during the period of controlling the low-probability time-saving states A to C, the staging control corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. When the RAM clear operation without operating the relief maintenance button is performed after the power is cut off, it is related to the game state and the normal symbol from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until the predetermined period elapses. The erasure control 1 for notifying that the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the behavior and the low probability state has been erased is executed. Specifically, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light, and the effect display device 1600 "clears the game state and the number of reliefs". The image "I did it." Is output, and the sound "The game status and the number of reliefs have been cleared." Is output from the speaker.

As shown in FIG. 212 (C), when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after turning off the power switch 630a to shut off the power. RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized (set to the low probability non-time saving state). That is, when the power is cut off in the time saving state (for example, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and then the RAM clear operation is performed, the gaming state is low. It is designed to be initialized to the probability non-time saving state. The initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

Further, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off (power cutoff), the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is executed, but the RAM is executed. The second specific area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is turned off, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is the count when the power is turned off. Is maintained. That is, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. For example, if the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is 105 at the time of power cutoff, the count is maintained during the subsequent RAM clear operation for operating the relief maintenance button. By stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol after the RAM clear operation that operates the relief maintenance button, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is incremented by +1 and updated to 106 times. .. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is supposed to be controlled to the probability time reduction state B. For example, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button at the start of business of the hall, the game state is initialized, but the probability state is low. Since the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in is maintained, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the transition to the low probability time saving state B can be small. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B as soon as the hall is open.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is executed at the time of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated thereafter. , The fluctuation display of the normal symbol that was being executed when the power was turned off is erased so that the mode before the power is turned off is not restored. Further, when the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is being executed when the power is cut off, the RAM that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of the RAM clear operation for operating the relief maintenance button thereafter. Clearing is executed, and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 that was being executed when the power is cut off is erased so as not to return to the mode before the power is cut off. In addition, if there is a hold of the normal symbol when the power is turned off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is executed at the time of the RAM clear operation for operating the relief maintenance button thereafter, and the power is supplied. The number of ordinary symbols held at the time of shut-off is erased so that the mode before the power is shut off is not restored. Therefore, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated, the game state is initialized, and the state when the power is cut off is also erased for the behavior related to the normal symbol.

Further, with respect to the sound output from the effect display device 1600, the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the speaker, the effect control is executed according to the game state. For example, during the period of controlling the low-probability time-saving states A to C, the staging control corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. When the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, it is related to the game state and the normal symbol from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until the predetermined period elapses. The erasure control 2 is executed to eliminate the behavior of the erasure and to keep the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. Specifically, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light, and the effect display device 1600 "clears the game state. The image "The number of rescues is maintained." Is output, and the voice "The game state has been cleared. The number of rescues is maintained." Is output from the speaker.

In this example, when the normal power is turned on after the power is cut off, the game state is returned to the state when the power is cut off, and the behavior related to the normal symbol is also returned to the state when the power is turned off. ing. On the other hand, when the RAM clear operation is performed regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated after the power is cut off, the game state is initialized and the behavior related to the normal symbol is also performed. The state when the power is cut off is erased. As a result, regarding the behavior related to the normal symbol, the advantageous behavior (for example, the variable winning opening 2003 opens and closes in the opening / closing pattern in the time saving state) is obtained even though the gaming state is initialized and the state shifts to the non-time saving state. It is possible to prevent the situation of continuing, and it is possible to execute the behavior related to the normal symbol so that there is no discomfort according to the game state.

Further, in this example, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) when the game state is initialized. ) Is maintained. On the other hand, when the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is obtained when the game state is initialized. The count is being reset. That is, after the power is cut off, when the RAM is cleared, the behavior related to the normal symbol being executed is initialized when the game state is initialized, but it is a low probability whether or not the setting of the set value is changed. Depending on whether or not the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the state is to be maintained, the hall manager may operate a predetermined operation unit, and the hall manager selectively executes the operation according to the hall environment. can do.

Further, in this example, when the RAM clear operation is performed, when the gaming state is initialized, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset depending on whether the count is maintained or reset. , The notification mode to notify the outside is different. As a result, for example, even if the hall manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on and maintains the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, it is external to the outside. The notification mode makes it possible to notice the mistake and prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In this example, when the RAM clear operation is performed regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated after the power is cut off, the game state is initialized and the behavior related to the normal symbol is performed. Also, the state when the power is turned off is erased, but after the power is turned off, the game state is initialized if the setting change operation is performed regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated. At the same time, the behavior related to the normal symbol is the same in that the state when the power is cut off is erased. However, it is different in that the set value that has already been set is maintained at the time of the RAM clear operation, whereas the setting of the set value can be changed at the time of the setting change operation.

Further, in this example, when the RAM clear operation is performed regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated after the power is cut off, the game state is initialized and the behavior related to the normal symbol is performed. Also, the state when the power is cut off is deleted, but as described above, when the game state is initialized, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the big hit game that are being executed when the power is turned off are also deleted. Therefore, it does not return to the variable display of the special symbol or the jackpot game during the execution.

(RAM clear in low probability time saving state)
In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), so that it is low. It is supposed to be controlled to the probability time saving state B. For example, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is prepared to be close to 600 (relief count counter = 600) before the opening of the hall, after the opening of the hall , The variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability state from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B can be performed a small number of times, and the hall shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B as soon as possible. You can expect the player to do that. On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is prepared to be far from 600 (relief count counter = 600) before the opening of the hall, after the opening of the hall , It is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and it is possible to shift to the low probability time saving state B early from the opening of the hall. There is no such thing as the player's expectations rising quickly. However, before the opening of the hall, at the stage of preparing the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state C. In that case, if the hall is opened in the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state C, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state proceeds too advantageously. Therefore, when the hall shifts from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state C before the opening of the hall, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state is counted. It is preferable to be able to initialize the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state C to return to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the above. In this way, while maintaining the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state, the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state C are initialized to return to the low-probability non-time-saving state. The possible configurations are described below.

FIG. 213 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the RAM clear operation is performed during the time saving state. FIG. 213 (A) describes a case where the RAM clear operation is performed during the low-probability time-saving state C, and FIG. 213 (B) shows a case where the RAM clear operation is performed during the low-probability time-saving state A. 213 (C) describes the case where the RAM clear operation is performed during the low probability time saving state B. In this example, every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed, the relief count counter is counted up when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 213 (A), in the symbol variation C in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 353rd time (relief count counter = 353), the immediate short hit occurs and the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Shifts from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C, and controls to the low-probability time-saving state C after the stop display of the immediate short-time hit symbol. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. During that time, it is supposed to be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, when the symbol variation Z in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the low probability time saving state C is low. It shifts to the probability time saving state B, and after the stop display of the symbol variation Z, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

Further, as an external device, an external information device for transmitting game information to the player is provided above the pachinko machine 1. Here, the external device displays the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit, but for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief count counter is counted up when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. Similar to the above, the count is increased when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and the count is reset when the jackpot is used, just as the count of the relief count counter is reset when the jackpot is triggered. Therefore, when the control is performed in the low probability state triggered by the big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device matches the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. Will be done. In such a case, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600) by visually recognizing whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600 times. ) Is reached, and it can be determined whether or not the state B shifts to the low probability time saving state B.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, information about the game can be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer via the external output terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 according to the progress of the game. The external device is, for example, an external information device installed above each pachinko machine 1 in a hall computer or island facility that controls information in a game hall, and is based on information transmitted via an external output terminal 558a. The number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the information of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped, the player can monitor whether or not an illegal game is played, and the player can be informed about the history of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, It is possible to provide information on the number of big hits for each day, information on the number of changes in the symbol up to each big hit, information on the number of prize balls at each big hit, information on the number of continuations of time-saving fluctuations, etc.) in a numerical or graphed manner. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the transition to a special gaming state such as the low-probability time-saving state B or the low-probability time-saving state C controlled by the above-mentioned new embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is transferred to the special gaming state via the external output terminal 558a. , Information on these special gaming states is to be appropriately transmitted to external devices.

As will be described in detail later, the external output terminal 558ad outputs, for example, a symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol to the external device. The main control board 1310 described above sends a symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and counts up the relief count counter described above, but the external output terminal 558ad is used. The symbol confirmation signal output via the system is external every time the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, including when the symbol confirmation command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and when the relief count counter described above is not counted up. It is output to the device. The symbol confirmation signal is an electric signal that is output for a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, it is an electric signal that is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the special symbol continuously fluctuates, the symbol confirmation signal can be reliably input to the external device, and the special symbol is displayed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The number of fluctuations (so-called number of starts) can be managed appropriately.

Then, in the symbol variation D in the low probability time saving state C, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 354th time (relief count counter = 354), but after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the power is cut off. After that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, and the game state is executed. Is initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). That is, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state C and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state is initialized to the low-probability non-time-saving state. ing. The initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

Further, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specification of the RAM is executed. The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is turned off, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. There is. That is, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. Here, in the symbol variation E'after initializing to the low probability non-time saving state, since the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is 354 times, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is counted up. The fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is set to be the 355th time (relief count counter = 355). In this way, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state C and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state While maintaining the count, the low-probability time-saving state C can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the low-probability non-time-saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C at the stage of preparing the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state before the opening of the hall. By performing the RAM clear operation while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the low-probability time-saving state C can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the number of changes in the special symbol in the low-probability state (relief). The count of the count counter) can be maintained without resetting, which makes it easier for the hall manager to operate in the preparation stage.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. During that time, it is supposed to be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, when the symbol variation Z'where the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed, the low-probability non-time saving state is started. It shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B, and after the stop display of the symbol variation Z'is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Further, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is mainly controlled when the power is turned off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the MPU 1310a, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to "0" which is the initial value). That is, when the power is cut off, the external device displays 354 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, but after that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. Is displayed on the external device as 0 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device is changed in the low probability state. It will not match the count of the number of times (relief count counter). For example, when the stop display of the symbol variation Z'where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, 246 times is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol on the external device. In such a case, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) just by visually recognizing the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, and the low probability time saving state is reached. It is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to B. Therefore, even though the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is displayed as 246 times on the external device, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). After the stop display, it can be made to appear as if the state suddenly changed from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Further, as described above in detail, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the staging display device 1600 is displayed until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 500 to 600 times (relief count counter = 500 to 600) in the low probability state. At the time of stopping, a counting effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Such a count effect is restricted so as not to be executed due to the symbol variation in the low-probability time-saving state C, and in the low-probability time-saving state C, the time-saving effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C is executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state C and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state C is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. However, in the symbol fluctuation in the low probability non-time saving state, it is possible to execute the count effect. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state. By executing the count effect until the number reaches 500 to 600 times (relief count counter = 500 to 600), the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is the number of times during the execution of the count effect. You will be able to determine if there is one.

As shown in FIG. 213 (B), when the jackpot D is reached, the low probability time saving state A is controlled after the stop display of the jackpot D symbol. Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the special symbol continues from the low-probability time-saving state A. Until the fluctuation display reaches 700 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, when the symbol variation Z in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed during the control of the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is low. It shifts to the probability time saving state B, and after the stop display of the symbol variation Z, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

Further, regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset when the big hit is triggered, so that the external device is controlled to the low probability time saving state A when the big hit D is used as a trigger. The number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed in is the same as the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. In such a case, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600) by visually recognizing whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600 times. ) Is reached, and it can be determined whether or not the state B shifts to the low probability time saving state B.

Then, in the symbol variation D in the low probability time saving state A, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 354th time (relief count counter = 354), but after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the power is cut off. After that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, and the game state is executed. Is initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). That is, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state A and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state is initialized to the low-probability non-time-saving state. ing. The initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

Further, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specification of the RAM is executed. The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is turned off, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. There is. That is, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. Here, in the symbol variation E'after initializing to the low probability non-time saving state, since the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is 354 times, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is counted up. The fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is set to be the 355th time (relief count counter = 355). In this way, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state A and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state While maintaining the count, the low-probability time-saving state A can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the low-probability non-time-saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving state A at the stage of preparing the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state before the opening of the hall. By performing the RAM clear operation while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the low-probability time-saving state A can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the number of changes in the special symbol in the low-probability state (relief). The count of the count counter) can be maintained without resetting, which makes it easier for the hall manager to operate in the preparation stage.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. During that time, it is supposed to be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, when the symbol variation Z'where the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed, the low-probability non-time saving state is started. It shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B, and after the stop display of the symbol variation Z'is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Further, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is mainly controlled when the power is turned off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the MPU 1310a, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to "0" which is the initial value). That is, when the power is cut off, the external device displays 354 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, but after that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. Is displayed on the external device as 0 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device is changed in the low probability state. It will not match the count of the number of times (relief count counter). For example, when the stop display of the symbol variation Z'where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, 246 times is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol on the external device. In such a case, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) just by visually recognizing the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, and the low probability time saving state is reached. It is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to B. Therefore, even though the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is displayed as 246 times on the external device, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). After the stop display, it can be made to appear as if the state suddenly changed from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Further, as described above in detail, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the staging display device 1600 is displayed until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 500 to 600 times (relief count counter = 500 to 600) in the low probability state. At the time of stopping, a counting effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Such a count effect is restricted so as not to be executed due to the symbol variation in the low-probability time-saving state A, and in the low-probability time-saving state A, the time-saving effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state A is executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state A and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state A is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. However, in the symbol fluctuation in the low probability non-time saving state, it is possible to execute the count effect. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state. By executing the count effect until the number reaches 500 to 600 times (relief count counter = 500 to 600), the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is the number of times during the execution of the count effect. You will be able to determine if there is one.

As shown in FIG. 213 (C), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 times during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability non-time-saving state is returned. That is, when the symbol variation Z in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 is executed during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state B shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the symbol variation Z After the stop display of, it is controlled to a low probability non-time saving state.

As for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter), the count is reset with the big hit as an opportunity, so that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state becomes 600 times (relief count counter = 600). At that point, the count has not been reset. Therefore, after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled, but the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled. Regarding the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the probability state, the count is continued for the already counted 600 times. Further, regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the count is not reset when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). Therefore, during the control of the low-probability time saving state B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device coincides with the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state. For example, during the control of the probability time saving state B, when the symbol variation Z in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state becomes 1400 (relief count counter = 1400). The number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device is 1400.

Then, in the symbol variation D in the low probability time saving state B, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 900th time (relief count counter = 900), but after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the power is cut off. After that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, and the game state is executed. Is initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). That is, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the gaming state is initialized to the low-probability non-time-saving state. ing. The initialization of the gaming state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

Further, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specification of the RAM is executed. The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is turned off, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. There is. That is, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. Here, in the symbol variation E'after initializing to the low probability non-time saving state, since the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is 900 times, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is counted up. The fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is set to be the 901st (relief count counter = 901). In this way, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state While maintaining the count, the low-probability time-saving state B can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the hall is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B before the opening of the hall, the low-probability time-saving state B is initially set by performing the RAM clear operation while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off. It can be returned to the low-probability non-time saving state, and the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state can be maintained without resetting, and the hall manager is in the preparation stage. It can be made easier to operate.

If the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. However, since the count for the relief count counter is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 after the transition from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non-time saving state. Even if the number of times is reached, the count of the relief count counter is 1500 times at that time. In this way, when the low-probability time-saving state B is changed to the low-probability non-time-saving state, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times during the control of the low-probability non-time-saving state. Since the relief count counter = 600 and the relief count counter = 1500, there is no transition from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. That is, even when the symbol variation Z'in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times is executed during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B It is controlled to a low-probability non-time saving state continuously even after the stop display of the symbol variation Z'without shifting to.

In the above configuration, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and the low-probability non-time-saving state B is performed. Since the count for the relief count counter is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, the number of changes in the special symbol in the low-probability state is 600 after the transition from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Even if the number of times is reached, the relief count counter is not set to 600, and the low-probability non-time-saving state does not shift to the low-probability time-saving state B. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized to the low-probability non-time-saving state. As for the count for the return and relief count counter, since the count is reset, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times after shifting from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non-time saving state. In addition, the number of relief counters is 600, and the low-probability non-time-saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving state B. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the low probability time saving state B and the RAM clear operation is performed after that, the player does not know whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, for example. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times after the opening of the hall.

Further, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is mainly controlled when the power is turned off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the MPU 1310a, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to "0" which is the initial value). That is, when the power is cut off, the external device displays 900 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, but after that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. Is displayed on the external device as 0 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device is changed in the low probability state. It will not match the count of the number of times (relief count counter). For example, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. After shifting to the low-probability non-time saving state, when the stop display of the symbol fluctuation Z'where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, the relief count counter = 1500, but the special symbol is displayed on the external device. As the number of fluctuations, 600 times is displayed. In such a case, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is displayed on the external device as 600 times, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times after shifting to the low probability non-time saving state. After the stop display of the fluctuation Z', it seems as if the low-probability non-time-saving state shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B, but in reality, the relief count counter = 1500, and the low-probability time-saving state B shifts. Never. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B only by visually recognizing the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device.

Further, as described above in detail, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the staging display device 1600 is displayed until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 500 to 600 times (relief count counter = 500 to 600) in the low probability state. At the time of stopping, a counting effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Here, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. However, there is no transition to the low-probability time-saving state B after that, and the symbol variation in the low-probability non-time-saving state is restricted so that the count effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. However, there is a possibility of shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B after that, and it is possible to execute the count effect in the symbol fluctuation in the low-probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the count of the relief count counter is not known, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability time saving state B is set. It is not possible to determine whether or not to shift, but if the count effect is executed during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, it will be low when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times. It becomes possible to determine that the probability time reduction state B will be entered.

In this example, the case where the power is cut off in any of the low-probability time saving states A to C and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button is described, but the relief maintenance is performed during the RAM clear operation. When the button is not operated, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Further, when the power is cut off in any of the low-probability time-saving states A to C and then the RAM clear operation is performed, at least the RAM clear operation is predetermined regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated. It is preferable that the initial effect display after the time (combination of decorative patterns displayed on the effect display device 1600, background image, etc.) and the light emission patterns of various lamps are the same. As a result, after the opening of the hall, whether or not the hall manager has operated the relief maintenance button, that is, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted depending on the initial effect display. The player cannot determine whether or not the reset has been performed.

In addition, since there is no player within a predetermined time from the RAM clear operation (before the start of business), the mode according to the type of RAM clear operation (whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated) for the hall manager is used. It may be notified. For example, when the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in yellow as a notification mode to notify the outside. The light is emitted, the image "The game state and the number of reliefs have been cleared" is output to the effect display device 1600, and the sound "The game state and the number of reliefs have been cleared" is output from the speaker. There is. On the other hand, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in blue as a notification mode to notify the outside. The light is turned on, and the image "The game state has been cleared. The number of reliefs has been maintained." Is output to the effect display device 1600, and the speaker "Cleared the game state. The number of reliefs has been maintained." The voice "." Is output.

(Delay in the start time of the low-probability time-saving state B due to the RAM clear operation: When counting against the relief count counter at the start of fluctuation)
In the above, every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed, the relief count counter is counted up when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. However, as a modification, the fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted. Each time the display is executed, the relief count counter may be configured to count up at the start of the change of the special symbol. In such a configuration, at the start of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state, the relief count counter is counted up and the relief count counter = 600, and after the stop display of the symbol variation is performed. In, it is supposed to be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, the timing at which the relief count counter is counted up and the relief count counter = 600 is different from the timing at which the low probability time saving state B is entered. Then, when the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state and the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the special symbol variation in the low probability state is performed. While the count of the number of symbol fluctuations (relief count counter) is maintained, the symbol variation that was being executed when the power was turned off is erased, but the special symbol variation display in the low probability state that is executed thereafter is 601. In the symbol variation that reaches the number of times, the low-probability time-saving state B is not controlled, and the start timing of the low-probability time-saving state B is delayed. Such a configuration will be described below.

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state. FIG. 214 (A) describes a case where the RAM clear operation is not performed and a case where the RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state. FIG. 214 (B) describes in detail the case where the RAM clear operation is not performed during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state, and FIG. 214 (C) shows the low. The details of the case where the RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol in the stochastic state reaches 600 times are described. In this example, every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed, the relief count counter is counted up at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is performed 600 times. After the stop display of the symbol change reaching (relief count counter = 600), the control is performed to the low probability time saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 214 (A), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation of the special symbol Until the display reaches 700 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. In this example, during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter is counted up to the relief count counter = 600 at the start of the symbol variation D in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times. In that case, after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the low-probability non-time-saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving state B.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214 (B), when the symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times is started during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the symbol variation D is started. At the start, the relief count counter is counted up so that the relief count counter = 600. Then, the symbol variation D is stopped and displayed, and when the fixed time t (fixed stop time) of the stopped symbol has elapsed, the relief count counter is referred to, and the relief count counter = 600, and the low probability time saving state B starts. When it is determined that the timing is reached, the low-probability time-saving state B flag indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled is turned ON, and the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled. Then, if there is no hold when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol elapses after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the symbol variation A1 during the control of the low probability time saving state B is started after waiting for the start winning prize. I try to do it. If there is a hold when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the symbol variation A1 during the control of the low probability time saving state B is immediately set when the fixed time t has elapsed. I'm trying to get started.

Further, as an external device, an external information device for transmitting game information to the player is provided above the pachinko machine 1. Here, the external device displays the number of changes in the special symbol after the big hit, but for the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief count counter is counted up at the start of the change in the special symbol. On the other hand, the count is increased when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and the count is reset when the big hit is used, just like the count of the relief count counter is reset when the big hit is used. Therefore, in the case of controlling to the low probability state triggered by the big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It will match the count of the relief count counter). In such a case, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600) by visually recognizing whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600 times. ) Is reached, and it can be determined whether or not the state B shifts to the low probability time saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 214 (A), at the start of the symbol variation D in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600, the relief count counter is counted up and the relief count counter becomes 600. If the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is performed. The RAM clear is executed to initialize the game state (set to the low probability non-time saving state). In this example, since the gaming state when the power is cut off is a low-probability non-time saving state, there is no change in the gaming state when the RAM clear operation is subsequently performed while operating the relief maintenance button. Further, when the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D and the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after that, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is performed. It is executed, and the symbol variation D that was being executed when the power is cut off is erased so as not to return to the mode before the power is cut off. It should be noted that the initialization of the game state and the erasure of the symbol variation are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

Further, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button after the power is cut off, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, but the second specification of the RAM is executed. The area is not initialized, and based on the backup created when the power is turned off, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. There is. That is, in the case of the RAM clear operation in which the relief maintenance button is operated, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. Here, at the start of the symbol variation E after the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is 600 times, so that the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is used. On the other hand, the count is increased, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is set to the 601st time (relief count counter = 601). Then, after the stop display of the symbol variation E, the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is assumed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214 (C), when the symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times is started during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the symbol variation D is started. At the start, the relief count counter is counted up so that the relief count counter = 600. Then, when the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, it is built in the main control MPU 1310a. Since the RAM clear that initializes the RAM is executed, the symbol variation D that was being executed when the power was cut off is erased, and the hold is not stored. However, as for the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the relief count counter = 600 when the power is cut off is maintained. Then, the symbol variation E is started after waiting for the start winning, but at the start, the relief count counter is counted up and the relief count counter = 601. Then, the symbol variation E is stopped and displayed, and when the fixed time t (fixed stop time) of the stopped symbol has elapsed, the relief count counter is referred to, and the low probability time saving state is obtained even though the relief count counter = 601. When it is determined that B is not being controlled, the low-probability time-saving state B flag indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled is set to ON, and the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled. That is, originally, the end time of the symbol change of the relief count counter = 600 is the start timing of the low probability time saving state B, and at the end time of the symbol change of the relief count counter = 601, the low probability time saving state B is set unless it is a hit. Although it should be controlled, if it is determined that such a low-probability time-saving state B is not being controlled, the low-probability time-saving state B flag indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled is set to ON, and the low probability time-saving state B is set. It is controlled to the probability time saving state B. Then, if there is no hold when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol elapses after the stop display of the symbol variation E, the symbol variation A1 during the control of the low probability time saving state B is started after waiting for the start winning prize. I try to do it. If there is a hold when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the stop display of the symbol variation E, the symbol variation A1 during the control of the low probability time saving state B is immediately set when the fixed time t has elapsed. I'm trying to get started.

As described above, when the power supply is not shut off during the execution of the symbol variation D in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 in the low probability state, the low probability time saving state B is performed after the stop display of the symbol variation D. However, if the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the power is turned off. Since the symbol variation D that was being executed is deleted, the timing of shifting to the low probability time saving state B is lost. Therefore, if the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the special in the low probability state is performed at the start of the subsequent symbol variation E. The variation display of the symbol is set to the 601st time (relief count counter = 601), and after the stop display of the symbol variation E, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state B. That is, originally, after the stop display of the symbol variation D in which the relief count counter = 600, the state should shift to the low probability time saving state B, but the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D, and then the relief maintenance button is displayed. When the RAM clear operation is performed while operating, the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B at the delayed timing after the stop display of the symbol variation E at which the relief count counter = 601 thereafter. ..

By the way, before the opening of the hall, at the stage of preparing the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter), the symbol change D in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times starts. If this is done, after the stop display of the symbol variation D, the process shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the hall is opened in a seemingly advantageous state in the low-probability time-saving state B. In this regard, in this example, the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 in the low probability state, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. It can be maintained in a low-probability non-time-saving state, and it does not shift to the low-probability time-saving state B, and it does not seem to be an advantageous state at first glance. Further, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the count was maintained without being reset, but was delayed after the stop display of the symbol variation E in which the subsequent relief count counter = 601. At the timing, it is possible to shift to the low probability time saving state B. In this way, before the opening of the hall, the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol fluctuation D in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 in the low probability state, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. By doing so, after the opening of the hall, the low-probability non-time-saving state does not seem to be an advantageous state at first glance, but the special symbol in the low-probability state from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. It is possible to expect the player to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B as soon as the opening of the hall is started, because the fluctuation display of is only required a small number of times (once).

Further, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is mainly controlled when the power is turned off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the MPU 1310a, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is initialized (set to "0" which is the initial value). That is, when the power is cut off, the external device displays 600 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, but after that, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the relief maintenance button. Is displayed on the external device as 0 times as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted for the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device. Will not match. For example, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, one time is displayed as the number of changes in the special symbol on the external device during the execution of the symbol change E in which the relief count counter = 601 thereafter. Has been done. In such a case, whether or not to shift to the low probability time saving state B after the stop display of the symbol variation E in which the relief count counter = 601 is obtained only by visually recognizing the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device. Cannot be determined. Therefore, even though the number of changes of the special symbol is displayed once on the external device, suddenly, after the stop display of the symbol fluctuation E at the relief count counter = 601 is performed, the low probability is changed from the non-time saving state to the low probability. It can be made to appear as if the time saving state B has been entered.

Further, as described above in detail, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the staging display device 1600 is displayed until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 500 to 600 times (relief count counter = 500 to 600) in the low probability state. At the time of stopping, a counting effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Here, if the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol variation D in which the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 in the low probability state, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the relief maintenance button, then After the stop display of the symbol variation E in which the relief count counter = 601 is displayed, the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B, but the symbol variation E is restricted so that the count effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state. However, there is a possibility of shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B after that, and it is possible to execute the count effect in the symbol fluctuation in the low-probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, the count of the relief count counter is not known, and after the stop display of the symbol variation E in which the relief count counter = 601 is displayed, the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B. Although it is not possible to determine whether or not the symbol variation E does not execute the count effect, it is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability time saving state B even by the count effect.

(Maintaining the relief count counter when a RAM error occurs (modification example))
In the above, when a RAM error has occurred, the RAM error is caused by turning on the specific abnormality flag, shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1, and performing a setting change operation when turning on the power again. You can unlock it and proceed with the game. When such a RAM error occurs, if the setting change operation is performed, the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state (regardless of whether the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation ( The count of the relief count counter) is reset, but as a modification, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state depends on whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. May be configured to allow maintenance. Such a configuration will be described below.

FIG. 215 is a modified example of the RAM clearing condition showing an operation at the time of turning on the power for executing the RAM clearing. If the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the relief maintenance button is pressed during the setting change operation. The case where the operation is not performed is as described with reference to FIG. 210.

Details have been described above, but when it is determined that there is an error in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. Displays an error indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When such a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is caused by turning on the specific abnormality flag, shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1, and performing a setting change operation when the power is turned on again. You can unlock it and proceed with the game. Specifically, when the setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. While initializing the game state, it is possible to change the setting of the set value. When changing the setting of the set value, the value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the setting value 1 of the minimum value which is the initial value is temporarily set, and when the setting value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the value is increased by 1. It is possible to return to the set value 1 which is the initial value and increase the value by 1 again. When the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the power is turned on without a setting change operation, the specific abnormality flag remains ON without canceling the RAM error. There is.

Here, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is displayed. As for the count, the count is maintained. Regarding the initialization of the game state, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is the input timing. ) Is running. At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the setting value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are colored orange from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs a voice from the speaker saying "Because an abnormality was detected, the set value was changed and the game state was cleared. The number of reliefs is maintained." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the special symbol in the low probability state can be changed while the setting value can be changed. The count for the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted. Is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but the count is reset. Regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a). The signal is being executed at the input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the setting value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in red from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light, and the speaker outputs a voice saying, "Because an abnormality was detected, the set value was changed and the game status was cleared. The number of reliefs was also cleared." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the special symbol in the low probability state can be changed while the setting value can be changed. The count for the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of is counted from the initial value "0".

In this example, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the setting value can be changed and the setting value can be changed in a low probability state. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. That is, if it is desired to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state when a RAM error occurs, the hall administrator should perform the RAM error cancellation (setting change operation). It is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager by operating a predetermined operation unit (relief maintenance button). For example, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted. Since the above is maintained, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B can be performed in a small number of times, and the low probability can be obtained immediately after the RAM error is cleared. The player can be expected to shift to the time saving state B.

Further, in this example, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the setting value can be changed with a low probability. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas when the relief maintenance button is not operated, the setting value can be changed. , The count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". That is, when the RAM error is cleared (when the setting is changed), the hall manager determines the predetermined operation unit (relief) depending on whether or not the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. The maintenance button) may be operated, and the hall manager can selectively execute from two patterns according to the hall environment. For example, if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted. Since resetting, it is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state is promptly after the RAM error is cleared. There is no transition to B, and the player's expectations do not rise prematurely.

Further, in this example, when the RAM error is cleared, the notification mode for notifying the outside is different depending on whether the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. .. As a result, for example, the hall administrator mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the RAM error is cleared (when the setting is changed), and the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Even if this is the case, the error can be noticed by the notification mode notified to the outside, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In the case where the relief maintenance button is provided, the hall administrator selectively executes the relief maintenance button from the two patterns depending on whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated when the RAM error is cleared (when the setting is changed). On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not provided, only the setting change operation is performed when the RAM error is cleared, and the hall administrator can execute only one pattern. .. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with the relief maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated on the hall side may be provided to increase the patterns that the hall manager can select.

[Reset of the relief count counter in the event of an illegal power failure]
In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), so that it is low. The configuration is such that the probability time reduction state B is controlled. However, in such a configuration, there is a risk that the relief count counter will be fraudulent. As an illegal method, for example, an illegal board (so-called hanging board) capable of illegally counting up to the relief count counter is connected to the main control board 1310, and an illegal value (for example, for example) is given to the relief count counter contrary to the original game. It is conceivable to store an invalid value close to 600). Further, such an unauthorized board may be connected by using any of a plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by a connector. For example, a predetermined wiring may be separated from the main control board 1310 and the predetermined wiring may be separated from the main control board 1310. It is conceivable that the illegal board is relayed to the wiring and connected to the main control board 1310.

Further, in this example, in order to prevent such fraud, the ON / OFF operation status of the power switch 630a and the connection status of all wirings or specific wirings among the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by the connector. When the power switch 630a is ON, an abnormality (plugging / unplugging) occurs in the connection status of the wirings, so that the count value of the relief count counter is initialized.

As a specific configuration, for example, a power supply path from the power supply to the storage area (RAM) in which the count value of the relief count counter in the main control board 1310 is stored is connected to a plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310. The wiring (all wiring or specific wiring) that we are monitoring is set to pass through the connector part and circuit pattern, and even though the power switch 630a is not turned off (not turned off), they are not turned off. When it detects a power drop when at least a part of the power supply path is cut off, it is determined that at least a part of the power supply path is cut off illegally, and a relief count counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310. The count value of is initialized. As a result, even if an illegal board (so-called hanging board) capable of illegally counting up the relief count counter is connected to the main control board 1310, even if the count value of the relief count counter is rewritten to an invalid value. The value can be forcibly cleared, and it is possible to prevent the hall side from being damaged by fraudulent acts. In this example, the timing for initializing the count value of the relief count counter is when the unauthorized interruption of the power supply path is resolved, that is, when the reconnection of the wiring to be monitored is confirmed, and it is intentionally incorrect. It allows you to complete the act and leave evidence of the misconduct.

Further, if it is possible to monitor the connection / disconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 with the power switch 630a turned on (while not being turned off) as in this example, the power is not necessarily applied. It is not necessary to configure it to cover a part of the supply path, and as another example, at least all the wirings of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by the connector while the power switch 630a is ON, or a specific wiring. The connection status (whether connected or not connected) is monitored, the improper insertion / removal of these wirings is determined, and the count value of the relief count counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is initialized. You may try to do it. Even in such a case, the same anti-fraud effect as described above can be obtained.

In addition, it is preferable that such fraudulent acts can be detected on the hall side as soon as possible, and a configuration capable of appropriately discovering such fraudulent acts and further enhancing deterrence against fraud will be described. In the following, for convenience of explanation, a plurality of wirings connecting the power supply path from the power supply to the storage area (RAM) in which the count value of the relief count of the main control board 1310 is stored are connected to the main control board 1310. Of these, the wiring to be monitored (all wiring or specific wiring) should be routed through the connector part or circuit pattern, and even though the power switch 630a is not turned off, at least one of those power supply paths. When a power drop is detected when the unit is cut off, it is determined that at least a part of the power supply path is illegally cut off, and the count value of the relief count counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is initialized. The implementation configuration of "to do" will be mainly described including its detailed aspects.

FIG. 216 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the power supply is restored after the power supply in the main control board 1310 is cut off. In FIG. 216 (A), after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power supply in the main control board 1310 is normally cut off, the power supply is performed in a normal mode by turning on the power normally (turning on the power switch 630a). The case of recovery will be described, and in FIG. 216 (B), after the power supply in the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, the wiring is reconnected (the power switch 630a remains on). The case where the power supply is restored in an abnormal manner due to (not changed) is described.

In this example, the main control board 1310 is supplied with electric power from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and the wiring used for the power supply is defined as "specific wiring" and is subject to the above-mentioned monitoring. In addition, the main control board 1310 monitors the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 630a, and turns off the power switch 630a when a power decrease (voltage decrease, etc.) with respect to the main control board 1310 is detected. Caused a power reduction for the main control board 1310 (whether the power for the main control board 1310 was cut off) or a power reduction for the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a (for the main control board 1310). It is possible to judge whether the power is cut off). Specifically, in this example, when the power switch 630a is not turned off, the main control board 1310 is disconnected from the specific wiring connected by the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. The power to the main control board 1310 is cut off, and then the power to the main control board 1310 is restored by reconnecting the specific wiring (the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off and restored by inserting and removing the specific wiring). Occurs). Regarding the insertion and removal of such wiring, after the above-mentioned specific wiring is removed, an illegal board (so-called hanging board) capable of illegally counting up to the relief count counter via the specific wiring is used in the main control board 1310. There is a possibility that it is a fraudulent act of being connected and storing (rewriting) an illegal value (for example, an illegal value close to 600) in the relief count counter contrary to the original game.

As shown in FIG. 216 (A), when the power switch 630a is turned off and the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off during the control in the low probability non-time saving state, no wiring is disconnected. At that time, the illegal power supply flag described later is not turned on (maintained at OFF). Then, the state of the illegal power supply flag is determined when the power is restored by the normal power-on (only the operation of the power switch 630a without turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f or the setting key switch 1311a) that does not include the RAM clear operation or the like. , When the illegal power flag is OFF, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a is not executed, and the game state at the time of power cut is changed based on the backup created at the time of power cut. Holds (RAM information is held by a given backup power source). Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is also stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and is created when the power is cut off. Based on the backup, it keeps the count when the power is cut off. Here, in the symbol fluctuation started after the normal power is turned on, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is held at 105 times, so the count is increased with respect to the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff. However, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is set to the 106th time (relief count counter = 106). In this way, when the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is increased by the subsequent normal power-on. The count is maintained, and the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) can be continued. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 216 (A), when the power switch 630a is turned off and the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off, the administrator notification described later is sent by the normal power-on thereafter. Not running.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 216 (B), when the power to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a during the control in the low probability non-time saving state (with respect to the main control board 1310). When the power is reduced), an illegal power supply flag (due to the OFF operation of the power supply switch 630a) is used as a flag for memorizing that the wiring connected between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 is disconnected at that time. A flag that stores the fact that the power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off) is set to ON. Then, the state of the illegal power supply flag is determined when the power is restored, such as when the wiring between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 is reconnected, and if the illegal power supply flag is ON, it is created when the power supply is cut off. While maintaining the game state when the power is cut off based on the backup, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is initialized. That is, although the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is held in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a by a predetermined backup power supply, this example. Then, only the count for the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of the special symbol held in the second specific area of the RAM is initialized (reset) by a process different from the normal RAM clear. The reset of the relief count is executed immediately based on the fact that the illegal power supply flag is ON at the timing when the power is restored, regardless of whether the relief maintenance button is operated at the time when the power is restored. It is supposed to be reset. In this way, after the power supply in the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, the power supply is abnormal due to the reconnection of the wiring (the power switch 630a remains ON and does not change). When the power is restored in the mode, when the power is restored, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0".

As described above, in this example, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is managed by the main control board 1310, and the power supply is supplied to such a main control board 1310. If the power is cut off without turning off the switch 630a, it is determined that the power was cut off illegally, and when the power is restored after that, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state I try to reset the count. Further, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of power recovery. As a result, when it is detected that the power supply is illegally cut off from the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, the number of changes in the special symbol (number of reliefs) in the low probability state after the power is restored. The count for the counter) does not proceed from the illegal count, and the illegal deterrent for the main control board 1310 can be exerted.

Further, in this example, when the illegal power supply flag is ON when the power is restored, the administrator notifies to the outside that the power is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a. I am doing it. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 blink in red from the timing when the power is restored until the specific administrator operation is performed. The speaker outputs the voice "The number of reliefs has been cleared because an abnormality related to the power supply has been detected." Here, regarding the administrator notification, as a specific administrator operation, for example, a portion arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator (a portion that cannot be operated by the player). It is possible to end it by operating. As a result, for a person who illegally shuts off the power, the administrator notification cannot be easily terminated, and the notification to the hall administrator can be ensured. Further, regarding the state in which the illegal power flag is ON, it is turned OFF at the timing when a specific administrator operation is performed, but the power switch 630a may be continuously turned ON even after the specific administrator operation. You may leave the fact that the power was cut off illegally as a history without turning it off.

In this example, when the illegal power supply flag is ON when the power is restored, the gaming state is maintained, whereas the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted. Only the count is reset, but as another example, if the illegal power supply flag is ON when the power is restored, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a. , In addition to counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter), the gaming state may also be initialized (set to a low probability non-time saving state). As a result, when it is detected that the power supply is illegally cut off from the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, the game is played in a gaming state advantageous to the fraudster after the power is restored. Is not progressing, and it is possible to exert a deterrent force against fraud against the main control board 1310.

In the description of FIG. 216 (A), when the power switch 630a is turned off to cut off the power to the main control board 1310, the administrator notification described later is not executed by the normal power-on thereafter. However, instead of this, even if the power is turned on normally, the administrator will be notified that the power has been turned on normally, and the operation of the hall administrator will be used. Instead, the administrator notification may be terminated when a predetermined period has elapsed. In such a case, for example, when a normal power is turned on, the game board 5 or the door frame 3 is notified to the outside from the timing when the power is restored until a predetermined period elapses. The LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the above is made to emit purple light, and the speaker outputs the voice "The game state has been restored. The number of reliefs is maintained.", And the power is cut off illegally. It is preferable to be able to differentiate from the case where it is done.

Further, in this example, the reset of the relief count is immediately executed based on the fact that the illegal power supply flag is ON at the timing when the power is restored, but as another example, the count value of the relief counter is used. As the timing of initialization, after the unauthorized interruption of the power supply path is resolved, the hall administrator performs a predetermined clear operation (such as a switch for the administrator provided on the back surface of the gaming machine that cannot be touched by the player or the fraudster). Operation) may be performed.

[Initialization of set value and reset of relief count counter when an invalid setting key is input]
In this example, as an operation when the power is turned on, a setting confirmation operation for turning on the power switch 630a while the setting key switch 1311a is ON is performed, so that the set value can be confirmed. Specifically, the power switch 630a is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned on. When the power switch 630a is turned on, the setting key ON signal is input to the main control board 1310, enabling confirmation of the set value. However, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that the confirmation of the set value may be fraudulent while the power switch 630a is left on without being turned off. As an illegal method, for example, as in the above example, the unauthorized board is connected to the main control board 1310, and when the unauthorized board is connected, the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off / restored, and the unauthorized board is used. There is a possibility that the setting confirmation operation is illegally executed by illegally inputting the setting key ON signal to the main control board 1310. In addition, at the time of these frauds, the value of the relief count counter described above may be rewritten to the fraudulent value together with the confirmation of the set value. Separately from this, the main control board 1300 is malfunctioned by irradiating an illegal radio wave or the like without using the setting key, the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off / restored, and the setting key ON signal is mainly used. There is a possibility that the setting confirmation operation is illegally executed by illegally inputting to the control board 1310.

In order to prevent such fraud, in this example, as described in the above-mentioned [Reset of the relief count counter at the time of an illegal power failure], ON / of the power switch 630a when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off. The OFF is monitored to prevent unauthorized confirmation of the set value. That is, a case where the set value can be confirmed without any operation related to ON / OFF of the power switch 630a is regarded as an illegal act, and in such a case, it is built in the main control board 1310. The setting value stored in the first specific area of the RAM is forcibly initialized to be changed to the most unfavorable setting value, and the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is used. The count value stored in is also initialized. It is preferable that such fraudulent acts can be detected on the hall side, and a configuration capable of appropriately discovering such fraudulent acts and further enhancing the deterrence against fraud will be described below. It should be noted that a part of the configuration described below includes the same configuration as the above-described embodiment of [Resetting the relief count counter in the event of an illegal power failure], and a part of the description will be omitted.

In this example, the main control board 1310 is supplied with electric power from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, as in the above-described embodiment of [Resetting the relief count counter in the event of an illegal power failure]. The wiring used for supply is specified as a specific wiring and is subject to the above-mentioned monitoring. In addition, the main control board 1310 monitors the ON / OFF of the power switch 630a, and when a power decrease for the main control board 1310 is detected, the power switch 630a is turned off to reduce the power for the main control board 1310. (Whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off) or whether the power to the main control board 1310 was reduced without turning off the power switch 630a (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off). It makes it possible to judge. Specifically, when the power switch 630a is not turned off, the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by disconnecting the specific wiring connected between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. After that, the power to the main control board 1310 is restored by reconnecting the specific wiring (the power is cut off and restored to the main control board 1310 by inserting and removing the specific wiring). Regarding the insertion / removal of such a specific wiring, there is a possibility of an illegal confirmation of the above-mentioned set value or an illegal act in which an illegal value is stored in the relief count counter.

Further, in this example, even if the insertion / removal of a specific wiring is not detected, there is a possibility that the power supply may be abnormally operated by irradiating an illegal radio wave or the like. , A special circuit configuration that can detect a power drop (voltage drop) for the main control board 1310 is provided, and in combination with monitoring the ON / OFF of the power switch 630a, the power supply does not depend on the insertion and removal of specific wiring. By turning off the switch 630a, the power to the main control board 1310 was reduced (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off), or the power to the main control board 1310 was reduced without turning off the power switch 630a (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off). It is also possible to determine whether the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off. Specifically, when the power to the main control board 1310 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value in a situation where the power switch 630a is not turned off, the power required to start the main control board 1310 is cut off, and then the main control is performed. When the electric power for the board 1310 becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value, the electric power required for starting the main control board 1310 is restored. If the power to the main control board 1310 is equal to or less than the predetermined value when the power switch 630a is not turned off, the possibility of illegal confirmation of the above-mentioned set value and the invalid value are stored in the relief count counter. It may be a fraudulent activity.

FIG. 217 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the power supply in the main control board 1310 is cut off, the power supply is restored, and the setting key ON signal is input. In FIG. 217 (A), after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power supply in the main control board 1310 is normally cut off, the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored by turning on the power switch 630a. In FIG. 217 (B), the power supply in the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, and then an illegal radio wave or reconnection of a specific wiring is performed. (The power switch 630a remains ON and has not changed). The case where the setting key ON signal is input at the time of power recovery is described.

As shown in FIG. 217 (A), there is no possibility of any abnormality when the power switch 630a is turned off and the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off during the control in the low probability non-time saving state. Therefore, at that time, the illegal power supply flag described later is not turned on (maintained at OFF). Then, the state of the illegal power supply flag is determined when the power is restored by the regular setting confirmation operation of turning on the power switch 630a while turning on the setting key switch 1311a, and if the illegal power supply flag is OFF, the setting has already been made. The set value is displayed on the display unit on the main control board 1310, and the administrator can confirm the set value.

Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored. When the setting key ON signal is input and the unauthorized power supply flag is OFF, the count when the power is cut off can be maintained. Further, the game state is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored, the setting key ON signal is input, and when the illegal power supply flag is OFF, the illegal power supply flag is OFF. The game state is maintained when the power is cut off. That is, since processing such as RAM clear is not performed during the setting confirmation operation, the relief count counter at the time of power cutoff is 105 times, and in the symbol fluctuation started after the setting confirmation operation is performed, the power is turned off. It counts up with respect to the relief count counter so that the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state becomes the 106th time (relief count counter = 106). In this way, when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief) in the low probability state when the power is restored through the setting confirmation operation thereafter. The count of the number counter) can be maintained. Further, when the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, and then the normal setting confirmation operation is performed by turning on the power normally, the special setting in the gaming state or the low probability state is performed. The count of the number of fluctuations of the symbol (relief count counter) is maintained, and the administrator can confirm the default setting value. The period during which the set value can be confirmed is terminated by turning off the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, in this example, the setting key ON signal is input when the power to the main control board 1310 is restored, and when the illegal power supply flag is OFF, the setting value can be confirmed as the administrator notification 1. The fact that it is a period is notified to the outside. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 from the timing when the power is restored until the setting confirmation operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. The LED is turned off and the speaker outputs the voice "Checking the set value." Then, from the timing when it is determined that the setting confirmation operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses, as described above in detail, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are used. The mounted LED is made to emit green light, and the speaker outputs the voice "The set value has been confirmed. The number of reliefs is maintained."

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off without turning off the power switch 630a during the control in the low probability non-time saving state (power reduction to the main control board 1310). At that time, for example, an illegal power supply flag (main control) is used as a flag to store that the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off regardless of the OFF operation of the power switch 630a. A flag for storing the history of illegally irradiating the board 1310 with electric power or disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310) is set to ON. Then, even if an attempt is made to confirm the setting by inputting a signal of the setting key ON when the power is restored, if the illegal power supply flag is ON, the main control MPU1310a is in the same situation as the setting confirmation operation. The RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in is executed, and the game state is initialized (set to the low probability non-time saving state).

Further, even if the signal of the setting key ON is input when the power is restored, if the illegal power supply flag is ON, the setting value 1 which is the minimum value which is the initial value is forcibly initialized. Further, in such a case, unlike the normal setting change operation, it is impossible to change the setting from the minimum setting value 1 which is the initial value.

Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored. When the setting key ON signal is input and the illegal power flag is ON, the count at the time of power cutoff is reset. Specifically, the count at the time of power cutoff is reset regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned relief maintenance button is operated when the power is restored. The count is reset at the timing when the RAM is cleared. Here, when the power is restored while the setting key switch 1311a is ON, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state after the end of the game stop state is the initial value. It is designed to count from a certain "0".

Regarding the initialization of the game state, the forced change to the set value 1 of the minimum value, and the reset of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the illegal power supply flag is set when the power is restored. It is executed immediately based on the fact that it is ON.

In addition, when the power is restored, the setting key ON signal is input, and if the illegal power supply flag is ON, the forced game stop flag that controls the game stop state in which the game cannot be played is set at that time. It is turned on to generate a game stop state. In such a game stop state, even if the ball enters the starting opening, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the prize ball is not paid out. As for the game stopped state, as a specific administrator operation, for example, a portion arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator (a portion that cannot be operated by the player). By operating it, it is possible to turn off the forced game stop flag and end it. That is, after the game stop state occurs, unless a specific administrator operation is performed, the person who illegally shuts off the power (the person who illegally inputs the signal of setting key ON) is special in the low probability state. It is possible to make it impossible to advance the count for the number of fluctuations of the symbol (relief count counter).

In this example, the set value is managed by the main control board 1310 (setting change board 1311). In the above, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are separate boards, but the functions of the setting change board 1311 such as the setting key switch 1311a and the display unit may be mounted on the main control board 1310. good. When the power of the main control board 1310 is cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, it is determined that the power is cut off illegally, and when the power is restored, the setting key is turned on. When is entered, it is determined that an attempt was made to confirm the set value illegally, and the set value is forcibly initialized to the minimum set value 1 which is the initial value. Further, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of power recovery. As a result, if it is detected that the setting key ON signal has been input when the power is restored after the power is illegally cut off from the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, After the power is restored, the set value is not confirmed, and the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state does not proceed from the advantageous count, and the main control board 1310 It can exert a deterrent power against fraud.

Further, in this example, the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored, and when the illegal power supply flag is ON, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a. , The game state is also initialized (set to low probability non-time saving state). As a result, if it is detected that the setting key ON signal has been input when the power is restored after the power is illegally cut off from the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, After the power is restored, the game does not proceed in an advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to exert an illegal deterrent to the main control board 1310.

Further, when the power is restored, the setting key ON signal is input, and when the illegal power supply flag is ON, the power is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a as the administrator notification 2. It is designed to notify the outside that there is a possibility of trying to confirm the set value illegally. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 blink strongly in red from the timing when the power is restored until the specific administrator operation is performed. The speaker outputs the voice "The game status and the set value have been cleared because an abnormality related to the power supply and the set value has been detected. The number of reliefs has also been cleared." Here, regarding the administrator notification 2, as a specific administrator operation, for example, a portion arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator (a portion that cannot be operated by the player). ) Can be operated to terminate the game. As a result, for a person who illegally shuts off the power and tries to confirm the set value illegally, the administrator notification 2 cannot be easily terminated, and the notification to the hall administrator is ensured. Can be done. Further, regarding the state in which the illegal power flag is ON, it is turned OFF at the timing when a specific administrator operation is performed, but the power switch 630a may be continuously turned ON even after the specific administrator operation. You may leave the fact that the power was cut off illegally as a history without turning it off.

Further, in this example, the above-mentioned initialization of the game state, forced change to the set value 1 of the minimum value, and reset of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state are performed at the timing when the power is restored. It was decided to execute immediately based on the fact that the illegal power supply flag is ON, but as another example, the above-mentioned initialization of the game state, forced change to the set value 1 of the minimum value, and change of the special symbol in the low probability state The timing for resetting the number of times (relief number counter) may be when a specific administrator operation for resolving the game stop state described above is performed.

[Returning after a game stop state occurs]
In this example, in the case of an immediate short hit, the symbol variation that becomes the immediate short hit is executed, and after the stop display of the immediate short hit symbol is performed, the control is performed to the low probability time saving state C. Further, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), it is low. After the stop display of the symbol fluctuation when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the control is performed to the low probability time saving state B. During the execution of such a symbol change that is an immediate short hit, or during the execution of the symbol change in which the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, some abnormality is detected and the game is played. When a game stop state occurs, it is necessary for the hall manager to temporarily shut off the power and then turn it on again, which makes it possible to restart the game after the power is turned on. However, whether or not to return to the symbol fluctuation during execution when the game stop state occurs after the power is turned on depends on the type of the game stop state. Such a configuration will be described below.

First, the main control board 1310 detects whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, but when detecting the abnormality, it is determined whether the abnormality is a minor abnormality or a severe abnormality. Deciding. Then, when a slight abnormality is detected, the weak game stop flag that controls the weak game stop state, which makes it impossible to play the game and can return to the running game when the abnormality occurs, is turned on. And, a weak game stop state is generated. On the other hand, when a serious abnormality is detected, the strong game stop flag that controls the weak game stop state in which the game cannot be played and the game cannot be returned to the running game when the abnormality occurs is turned ON. And, a strong game stop state is generated.

In this example, when the magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, or by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 If the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor that detects the vibration applied to the magnetism, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by magnetism or vibration. When weak magnetism is detected or weak vibration is detected, there is a possibility that magnetism or vibration that is not involved in fraudulent activity is detected, and it is judged that a slight abnormality has occurred, and the weak game is stopped. The flag is ON. Further, when the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected, there is a possibility that the main body frame 4 is only opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the work of the hall manager, but the back side of the pachinko machine 1 There is a possibility that the player is trying to cheat on the main control board 1310 or the like provided in the machine, and it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and the weak game stop flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when strong magnetism is detected or strong vibration is detected, it is highly possible that magnetism or vibration related to fraudulent activity has been detected. Therefore, it is judged that a serious abnormality has occurred and the strong game is stopped. The flag is ON. In addition, if ON / OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is detected even though the power is being supplied, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as changing or confirming the set value is being performed. Since it is high, it is judged that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the strong game stop flag is set to ON.

(When a game stop state occurs during the execution of a symbol change that is an immediate short hit)
FIG. 218 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol change which is an immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 218, when the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit is executed, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state C at the time of tx when the symbol variation B is stopped. There is. Further, before tx, while the symbol change B, which is an immediate short hit, is being executed, the "help mode S precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode S" is entered is executed, whereas the "help mode S precursor effect" is executed. From tx, "help mode S effect" indicating that "help mode S" is being executed is being executed. In this example, by making an immediate short hit, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, and such a low-probability time-saving state C is used. The period of control is called "help mode S". Then, the help mode S effect is low at the time when the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C reaches 20 to 100 times, and when the big hit is not obtained, the 20th to 100th symbol variation is stopped. At the same time as shifting from the probability time saving state C to the low probability non-time saving state, the help mode S effect is returned to the normal effect.

In the above-mentioned effect example, as a symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) that becomes an immediate short hit, a variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and an effect display that stops at the stop symbol of the immediate short hit is executed. , Such a symbol variation effect that becomes an immediate short hit corresponds to "help mode S precursor effect". Further, after the control of the low-probability time-saving state C is started, the effect display device 1600 displays "during help mode S" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. The display corresponds to "help mode S production".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is executed as the symbol variation effect during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit before tx. Then, after tx, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state C) is executed. Even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after tx, the effect for the help mode S is performed in that period. The display is continuously executed.

Further, for the movable body (for example, the above-mentioned movable bodies A to C), the movable body is not used in the help mode S precursor effect before tx and the help mode S effect after tx. The operation specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is being executed.

Further, in the lamp light emission, before tx, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit. The LED is set to emit light in the light emitting pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after tx, the light is emitted in the light emitting pattern for the help mode S with the execution of the help mode S effect. Further, in the voice output, the BGM for the help mode S precursor is output from the speaker in accordance with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit before tx. Then, after tx, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode S effect.

FIG. 219 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol change which is an immediate short hit. In this example, a case where a slight abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310 and it is determined that the weak game stop flag is turned ON at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit will be described. There is.

As shown in FIG. 219, when it is determined that the weak game stop flag is turned ON at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol change B which is an immediate short hit, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the weak game stop state. Has moved to. In this weak game stop state, the game cannot be played, and the game stop notification 1 for notifying the outside that the weak game stop state has occurred is executed.

Specifically, when the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is being executed at the time of t1, the immediate short hit being executed at the time of t1 from t1 to t2 when the power is cut off. The symbol change B is interrupted. In addition to the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, at the time of t1, the variation display of the special symbol, the hold of the special symbol, the change display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, and the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal hit symbol When the opening / closing pattern is executed and the game ball B is being paid out, the variable display of the special symbol being executed at the time of t1 from t1 to t2, the holding of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, All of the holding of the normal symbol, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal winning symbol, and the payout of the game ball B are suspended. As a result, it is impossible to advance the game in the weak game stop state between t1 and t2.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, as the weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the effect display for the game stop notification 1 is executed instead of the effect display for the help mode S precursor. ing. In such a game stop notification 1, for example, the display "Please wait for the confirmation of the staff" is executed.

Further, for the movable body, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the game stop notification 1 is used instead of the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern). (For example, an operation that is not executed except for the game stop notification 1) is being executed. Further, in the lamp light emission, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor. The LED is set to emit light with a light emission pattern for the game stop notification 1 (for example, weakly blinking in red), and in the voice output, a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. Along with this, instead of the BGM for the help mode S precursor, the voice for the game stop notification 1 (for example, the voice "Please wait for the confirmation of the staff") is output from the speaker.

Then, after the weak game stop state occurs, it is necessary for the hall manager to shut off the power at t2, the hall manager to perform the confirmation work, and to turn on the power again at t3. The weak game stop flag is turned off at t3 when the power is turned on again, and the weak game stop state is restored to the low probability non-time saving state. In this example, after the occurrence of the weak game stop state, when the power is turned on again at t3, the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is restored to the state when the weak game stop state occurs. However, the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the voice output are not restored to the state when the weak game stop state occurs, and until the stop display of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is performed. It controls from a weak game stop state to a peculiar state at the time of return.

Specifically, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, the symbol change B which is an immediate short hit during the interruption at the time of t1 is restarted. Further, after the restart of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state C at the time of tx when the symbol variation B is stopped. In addition, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, the change display of the special symbol suspended at the time of t1, the hold of the special symbol, the change display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, and the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal hit symbol The opening / closing pattern and the payout of the game ball B are also restarted.

As described above, hall management in which a slight abnormality is detected during the execution of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, and when a weak game stop state occurs, the power is temporarily shut off and then turned on again. Although the work of the person is required, after the power is turned on, the symbol change B, which is an immediate short hit, is restarted. In this way, although fraudulent activity is suspected for minor abnormalities, there is a high possibility that it is not fraudulent activity. This allows the player to resume the game without penalizing the player.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the warning display 1 is executed at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again. In such a warning display 1, for example, the display "Please stop the act suspected of fraud" is executed. Further, since the warning display 1 was a minor abnormality, it should be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and specific management by the hall manager as in the warning display 2 described later. It is designed to finish without the need for human operation. Then, after the warning display 1 is executed, the apology effect display is executed. In such an apology effect display, for example, the display "Please wait for a while until the help mode S. Please enjoy the rare operation as an apology." Is executed. In this example, when the weak game stop state occurs, the symbol change that is an immediate short hit is being executed, or the symbol change is being executed with a hold that is an immediate short hit. As an apology for interrupting the production related to those symbol fluctuations, we are trying to execute an apology production that is not performed otherwise. In such an apology effect, rare movements (movements that are rarely performed during a game) are performed by using a movable body or lamp light emission.

Further, for the movable body, a predetermined period has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again, and the apology effect display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by waiting until the apology effect display is started on the effect display device 1600. After the start, as an apology operation, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely executed during the game) is executed. Further, regarding the lamp light emission, a predetermined period has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again, and the apology effect display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by waiting until the apology effect display is started on the effect display device 1600. After the start, as an apology operation, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely executed during the game) is executed. It should be noted that the apology operation is to be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, and when the apology operation is completed, tx, which is a stop of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, has arrived. If not, the movable body operates and the lamp emits light until tx arrives. On the other hand, when tx, which is the stoppage of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit at the end of the apology operation, has arrived, the operation of the movable body and the lamp light emission are not waited for.

As for the voice output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until tx, which is the stop time of the symbol fluctuation B which is an immediate short hit, arrives, the voice for the apology effect is not output and waits. There is. In this way, while the apology operation is executed for the movable body and the lamp light emission, by not performing the apology operation for the voice output, it is possible to make the surroundings inconspicuous, and the player during the game is playing. It can be executed as an apology action for.

Then, after the restart of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit, and after tx when the symbol variation B is stopped, the weak game stop state does not occur during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit. The production is proceeding as in the case. That is, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) after tx. Further, as for the movable body, the movable body is not used in the help mode S effect after tx, and the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. Further, in the lamp light emission, after tx, the light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode S with the execution of the help mode S effect. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode S effect after the tx.

FIG. 220 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol change which is an immediate short hit. In this example, a case where a serious abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310 and it is determined that the strong game stop flag is turned ON at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit will be described. There is.

As shown in FIG. 220, when it is determined that the strong game stop flag is turned ON at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol change B which is an immediate short hit, the strong game stop state is changed from the low probability non-time saving state. Has moved to. In this strong game stop state, the game cannot be played, and the game stop notification 2 for notifying the outside that the strong game stop state has occurred is executed.

Specifically, when the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is being executed at the time of t1, the immediate short hit being executed at the time of t1 from t1 to t2 when the power is cut off. The symbol change B is interrupted. In addition to the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, at the time of t1, the variation display of the special symbol, the hold of the special symbol, the change display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, and the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal hit symbol When the opening / closing pattern is executed and the game ball B is being paid out, the variable display of the special symbol being executed at the time of t1 from t1 to t2, the holding of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, All of the holding of the normal symbol, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal winning symbol, and the payout of the game ball B are suspended. As a result, it is impossible to advance the game in the strong game stop state between t1 and t2.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the effect display for the game stop notification 2 is executed instead of the effect display for the help mode S precursor. ing. In such a game stop notification 2, for example, the display "This is a malicious abnormality. Please reset the game." Is executed.

Further, for the movable body, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the game stop notification 2 is used instead of the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern). (For example, an operation that is not executed except for the game stop notification 2) is being executed. Further, in the lamp light emission, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor. The LED is set to emit light in a light emitting pattern for the game stop notification 2 (for example, strongly blinking in red). Further, in the voice output, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the voice for the game stop notification 2 (for example, "malicious") is used from the speaker instead of the BGM for the help mode S precursor. It is an abnormal situation. Please reset the game. ") Is output.

Then, after the strong game stop state occurs, when the hall manager shuts off the power at t2 and turns on the power again at t3, the RAM clear operation to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key A setting change operation for turning on the switch 1311a (may be a setting changing operation for turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a) is required. Regarding the strong game stop flag, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, it is not turned off, and the strong game stop state is continued until a specific administrator operation is performed at the time of the subsequent t4. ing. That is, since the strong game is stopped between t3 and t4, it is impossible to play the game, and after t4, the game returns to the state where the game can be played.

In this example, after the occurrence of the strong game stop state, when the power is turned on again at t3, the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, except that the strong game stop state flag is ON. , RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized (set to the low probability non-time saving state). Further, the set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and when the setting change operation is performed, the set value already set (power cutoff before turning on the power). The time setting value) can be changed. Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but the strong game stop state occurs. Later, when the power is turned on again at the time of t3, if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, the count is reset.

In the above, the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when a specific administrator operation is performed at the time of t4 after the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation. In addition, when the game state is initialized, the state when the strong game stop state occurs is erased, so that the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp emission, and the voice are deleted. The output does not return to the state when the strong game stop state occurred. Further, from t3 to t4 when the strong game stop state is resolved, the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the voice output are controlled to the peculiar state when the strong game stop state occurs. There is.

Specifically, at the time of t3 when the power was turned on again, the symbol change B, which was interrupted at the time of t1 and became an immediate short hit, was not restarted and was made non-variable, and a specific administrator operation was performed. At the time of t4, the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit that is interrupted at the time of t1 is deleted, and after t4, when there is a new start prize at the time of t5, a new symbol variation is started. It makes it possible. In addition, at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the change display of the special symbol suspended at the time of t1, the hold of the special symbol, the change display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, and the variable by the normal hit symbol The opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 2003 and the payout of the game ball B are also deleted.

As described above, when a serious abnormality is detected during the execution of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, and a strong game stop state occurs, when the power is temporarily turned off and then turned on again, It is necessary for the hall manager to perform the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation, but after the power is turned on, the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is erased. In this way, since there is a high possibility that a serious abnormality is a fraudulent act, the game can be restarted after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the symbol being executed when the weak game stop state occurs. It does not return to fluctuations and gives the player a penalty.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the warning display 2 is executed at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again. In such a warning display 2, for example, the display "Illegal, so reset everything." Is executed. In addition, since the warning display 2 was a serious abnormality, it should be continuously displayed until a specific administrator operation is performed at the time of t4, and the warning display 2 should be terminated at the time of t4. There is. Here, as a specific administrator operation, for example, it is possible to operate a portion (a portion that cannot be operated by the player) arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator. It is needed. As a result, even if the power is turned off and then turned on again after the strong game stop state occurs, the cheating person cannot easily end the warning display 2 and notifies the hall manager. Can be ensured. Further, when the above-mentioned weak game stop state occurs, the apology effect is executed after the execution of the warning display 1, but after the execution of the warning effect 2 of this example, a serious abnormality is detected. , Do not perform such an apology production.

Further, the movable body is set to stand by from t3 when the power is turned on again until a new start prize is given at the time of t5. Regarding lamp light emission, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are used as warning light emission from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Is set to emit light with a light emission pattern for warning light emission (for example, it blinks strongly in red). Note that the warning light emission does not end at t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and the power is turned on again. Even if a specific administrator operation is performed early after t3, the warning light is always emitted until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. As a result, for the fraudster, even if a specific administrator operation is performed early after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning light cannot be terminated and the hall administrator is surely notified. Can be something like that.

Similarly, regarding the voice output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, as a warning sound, the voice for the warning sound from the speaker (for example, "Reset all because it was illegal". I'm trying to output the voice). It should be noted that the warning sound does not end at the time of t4 when the specific administrator operation is performed, and even if the specific administrator operation is performed early after t3 when the power is turned on again, it is predetermined. Until the period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the warning sound is always continued. As a result, for the fraudster, even if a specific administrator operation is performed early after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning sound cannot be terminated and the hall administrator is surely notified. Can be anything.

Then, at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the state is returned from the strong game stop state to the low probability non-time saving state, and after t4, when there is a new start prize at the time of t5, a new start prize is given. Although it is possible to start the symbol variation, the normal effect is executed during the control of such a low-probability non-time saving state. That is, with respect to the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output, the normal effect corresponding to the low probability non-time saving state is executed during the execution of the symbol variation.

In this example, when a slight abnormality is detected in the main control board 1310 during the execution of the symbol change that is an immediate short hit, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the weak game stop state, but the weakness When a serious abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310 in the game stop state, the state shifts from the weak game stop state to the strong game stop state. That is, in the weak game stop state, when a serious abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310, the weak game stop flag is turned off, the strong game stop flag is turned on, and the strong game stop state is given priority to occur. ing. As a result, if a fraudulent act that detects a serious abnormality is performed after the weak game stop state is generated, the weak game stop state is changed to the strong game stop state. Therefore, such a fraudulent act Never miss it. In addition, when the game is changed from the weak game stop state to the strong game stop state, the game can be restarted after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the symbol change that is being executed when the weak game stop state occurs is restored. A penalty can be given to the player without doing anything.

(When the game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol change in which the change display of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state)
FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the game stop state has not occurred during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. As shown in FIG. 221, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, at the time of tx when the symbol variation B is stopped. , The low-probability non-time saving state is shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. Further, before tx, it is suggested that the "help mode L" is entered during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. While the "help mode L precursor effect" is executed, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed is executed from tx. In this example, when the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times, and the low probability time saving state B is set. It is controlled, and the period for controlling to such a low-probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L". Then, in the help mode L effect, the low-probability time-saving state B is performed at the time when the 700th symbol change is stopped if the big hit is not obtained until the variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B reaches 700 times. In addition to shifting to a low-probability non-time saving state, the help mode L effect is returned to the normal effect.

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reached until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. The count effect of notifying how many times is executed is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L precursor effect". Further, after the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is started, the effect display device 1600 displays "in the help mode L" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled. The display corresponds to "help mode L production".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before tx, a countdown is performed until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect for notifying how many times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state). ) Help mode L The effect display for the precursor is being executed. Then, after tx, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state B) is executed. Even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after tx, the effect for the help mode L is produced in that period. The display is continuously executed.

Further, for the movable body (for example, the above-mentioned movable bodies A to C), the movable body is not used in the help mode L precursor effect before tx and the help mode L effect after tx. The operation specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is being executed.

Further, in the lamp emission, before tx, the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is used for the help mode L precursor due to the execution of the help mode L precursor effect. After tx, the light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode L with the execution of the help mode L effect. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode L precursor effect before the tx, and the help mode L effect is output after the tx. Along with the execution of, the BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker.

FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. In this example, at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the main control board 1310 detects a slight abnormality. The case where it is determined that the weak game stop flag is turned ON is described.

As shown in FIG. 222, it is said that the weak game stop flag is turned ON at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. If it is determined, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the weak game stop state. In this weak game stop state, the game cannot be played, and the game stop notification 1 for notifying the outside that the weak game stop state has occurred is executed.

Specifically, at the time of t1, if the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is being executed, the power is cut off from t1. Until t2, the symbol change B being executed at the time of t1 is interrupted. In addition to the symbol variation B, at the time of t1, the variation display of the special symbol, the hold of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, the execution of the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal hit symbol, When the payout of the game ball B is in progress, from t1 to t2, the variable display of the special symbol being executed at the time of t1, the holding of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, the holding of the normal symbol, Both the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 and the payout of the game ball B based on the normal hit symbol are interrupted. As a result, it is impossible to advance the game in the weak game stop state between t1 and t2.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, as the weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the effect display for the game stop notification 1 is executed instead of the effect display for the help mode L precursor. ing. In such a game stop notification 1, for example, the display "Please wait for the confirmation of the staff" is executed.

Further, for the movable body, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the game stop notification 1 is used instead of the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern). (For example, an operation that is not executed except for the game stop notification 1) is being executed. Further, in the lamp light emission, as a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor. The LED is set to emit light with a light emission pattern for the game stop notification 1 (for example, weakly blinking in red), and in the voice output, a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2. Along with this, instead of the BGM for the help mode L precursor, the voice for the game stop notification 1 (for example, the voice "Please wait for the confirmation of the staff") is output from the speaker.

Then, after the weak game stop state occurs, it is necessary for the hall manager to shut off the power at t2, the hall manager to perform the confirmation work, and to turn on the power again at t3. The weak game stop flag is turned off at t3 when the power is turned on again, and the weak game stop state is restored to the low probability non-time saving state. In this example, for the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) when the power is turned on again at the time of t3 after the occurrence of the weak game stop state. Has returned to the state when the weak game stop state occurred, but the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output did not return to the state when the weak game stop state occurred. Until the stop display of the symbol variation B, the weak game is controlled from the stopped state to the peculiar state at the time of returning.

Specifically, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, the symbol fluctuation B interrupted at the time of t1 (the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600)). ) Is restarted. Further, after the symbol variation B is restarted, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state B at the time of tx when the symbol variation B is stopped. In addition, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, the change display of the special symbol suspended at the time of t1, the hold of the special symbol, the change display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, and the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal hit symbol The opening / closing pattern and the payout of the game ball B are also restarted.

As described above, when a slight abnormality is detected and a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. Requires the work of the hall manager to temporarily shut off the power and then turn on the power again, but after the power is turned on, the symbol variation B is restarted. In this way, although fraudulent activity is suspected for minor abnormalities, there is a high possibility that it is not fraudulent activity. This allows the player to resume the game without penalizing the player.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the warning display 1 is executed at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again. In such a warning display 1, for example, the display "Please stop the act suspected of fraud" is executed. Further, since the warning display 1 was a minor abnormality, it should be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and specific management by the hall manager as in the warning display 2 described later. It is designed to finish without the need for human operation. Then, after the warning display 1 is executed, the apology effect display is executed. In such an apology effect display, for example, the display "Please wait for a while until the help mode L. Please enjoy the rare operation as an apology." Is executed. In this example, when the weak game stop state occurs, the change display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), and the symbol change is being executed, or the special in the low probability state. If the symbol variation is being executed with the symbol variation display reaching 600 times (relief count counter = 600), as an apology for interrupting the production related to those symbol variations, otherwise. I try to perform an apology effect that I never do. In such an apology effect, rare movements (movements that are rarely performed during a game) are performed by using a movable body or lamp light emission.

Further, for the movable body, a predetermined period has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again, and the apology effect display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by waiting until the apology effect display is started on the effect display device 1600. After the start, as an apology operation, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely executed during the game) is executed. Further, regarding the lamp light emission, a predetermined period has elapsed from t3 when the power is turned on again, and the apology effect display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by waiting until the apology effect display is started on the effect display device 1600. After the start, as an apology operation, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely executed during the game) is executed. The apology operation should be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, and when the apology operation is completed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed 600 times (relief count counter = 600). ) Is not reached when tx is stopped, the movement of the movable body and the lamp light emission are waited until tx arrives. On the other hand, when tx, which is the time when the symbol variation B is stopped, has arrived at the time when the apology operation is completed, the operation of the movable body and the lamp light emission are not waited for.

As for the voice output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until tx arrives when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is stopped. In the meantime, I try to stand by without outputting the sound for apology production. In this way, while the apology operation is executed for the movable body and the lamp light emission, by not performing the apology operation for the voice output, it is possible to make the surroundings inconspicuous, and the player during the game is playing. It can be executed as an apology action for.

Then, after restarting the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the symbol variation B is executed after tx when the symbol variation B is stopped. The production is proceeding in the same way as when the weak game stop state has not occurred. That is, in the effect display device 1600, after tx, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state B) is executed. Further, as for the movable body, the movable body is not used in the help mode L effect after tx, and the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. Further, in the lamp light emission, after tx, the light emission pattern for the help mode L is emitted according to the execution of the help mode L effect. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode L effect after the tx.

FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the strong game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. In this example, the main control board 1310 detects a serious abnormality at t1 during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. The case where it is determined that the strong game stop flag is turned ON is described.

As shown in FIG. 223, it is said that the strong game stop flag is turned ON at the time of t1 during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. If it is determined, the state has shifted from the low-probability non-time saving state to the strong game stop state. In this strong game stop state, the game cannot be played, and the game stop notification 2 for notifying the outside that the strong game stop state has occurred is executed.

Specifically, at the time of t1, if the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is being executed, the power is cut off from t1. Until t2, the symbol change B being executed at the time of t1 is interrupted. In addition to the symbol variation B, at the time of t1, the variation display of the special symbol, the hold of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, the execution of the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 by the normal hit symbol, When the payout of the game ball B is in progress, from t1 to t2, the variable display of the special symbol being executed at the time of t1, the holding of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, the holding of the normal symbol, Both the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 and the payout of the game ball B based on the normal hit symbol are interrupted. As a result, it is impossible to advance the game in the strong game stop state between t1 and t2.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the effect display for the game stop notification 2 is executed instead of the effect display for the help mode L precursor. ing. In such a game stop notification 2, for example, the display "This is a malicious abnormality. Please reset the game." Is executed.

Further, for the movable body, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the game stop notification 2 is used instead of the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern). (For example, an operation that is not executed except for the game stop notification 2) is being executed. Further, in the lamp light emission, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 instead of the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor. The LED is set to emit light in a light emitting pattern for the game stop notification 2 (for example, strongly blinking in red). Further, in the voice output, as the strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, the voice for the game stop notification 2 (for example, "malicious") is used from the speaker instead of the BGM for the help mode L precursor. It is an abnormal situation. Please reset the game. ") Is output.

Then, after the strong game stop state occurs, when the hall manager shuts off the power at t2 and turns on the power again at t3, the RAM clear operation to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key A setting change operation for turning on the switch 1311a (may be a setting changing operation for turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a) is required. Regarding the strong game stop flag, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, it is not turned off, and the strong game stop state is continued until a specific administrator operation is performed at the time of the subsequent t4. ing. That is, since the strong game is stopped between t3 and t4, it is impossible to play the game, and after t4, the game returns to the state where the game can be played.

In this example, after the occurrence of the strong game stop state, when the power is turned on again at t3, the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, except that the strong game stop state flag is ON. , RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the gaming state is initialized (set to the low probability non-time saving state). Further, the set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and when the setting change operation is performed, the set value already set (power cutoff before turning on the power). The time setting value) can be changed. Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, but the strong game stop state occurs. Later, when the power is turned on again at the time of t3, if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, the count is reset.

In the above, the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when a specific administrator operation is performed at the time of t4 after the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation. In addition, when the game state is initialized, the state when the strong game stop state occurs is deleted, so that the change display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). B, the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output do not return to the state when the strong game stop state occurs. Further, from t3 to t4 when the strong game stop state is resolved, the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the voice output are controlled to the peculiar state when the strong game stop state occurs. There is.

Specifically, at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again, the symbol fluctuation B interrupted at the time of t1 (the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600)). ) Is not restarted, it is made non-variable, the symbol variation B suspended at the time of t1 is deleted at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and after t4, it is newly added at the time of t5. It is possible to start a new symbol change when there is a good start prize. In addition, at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the change display of the special symbol suspended at the time of t1, the hold of the special symbol, the change display of the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol, and the variable by the normal hit symbol The opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 2003 and the payout of the game ball B are also deleted.

As described above, when a serious abnormality is detected and a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. Requires the hall administrator's work of performing a RAM clear operation and a setting change operation when the power is once turned off and then turned on again, but after the power is turned on, the symbol variation B is erased. I am doing it. In this way, since there is a high possibility that a serious abnormality is a fraudulent act, the game can be restarted after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the symbol being executed when the strong game stop state occurs. It does not return to fluctuations and gives the player a penalty.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the warning display 2 is executed at the time of t3 when the power is turned on again. In such a warning display 2, for example, the display "Illegal, so reset everything." Is executed. In addition, since the warning display 2 was a serious abnormality, it should be continuously displayed until a specific administrator operation is performed at the time of t4, and the warning display 2 should be terminated at the time of t4. There is. Here, as a specific administrator operation, for example, it is possible to operate a portion (a portion that cannot be operated by the player) arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator. It is needed. As a result, even if the power is turned off and then turned on again after the strong game stop state occurs, the cheating person cannot easily end the warning display 2 and notifies the hall manager. Can be ensured. Further, when the above-mentioned weak game stop state occurs, the apology effect is executed after the execution of the warning display 1, but after the execution of the warning effect 2 of this example, a serious abnormality is detected. , Do not perform such an apology production.

Further, the movable body is set to stand by from t3 when the power is turned on again until a new start prize is given at the time of t5. Regarding lamp light emission, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are used as warning light emission from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Is set to emit light with a light emission pattern for warning light emission (for example, it blinks strongly in red). Note that the warning light emission does not end at t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and the power is turned on again. Even if a specific administrator operation is performed early after t3, the warning light is always emitted until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. As a result, for the fraudster, even if a specific administrator operation is performed early after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning light cannot be terminated and the hall administrator is surely notified. Can be something like that.

Similarly, regarding the voice output, from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, as a warning sound, the voice for the warning sound from the speaker (for example, "Reset all because it was illegal". I'm trying to output the voice). It should be noted that the warning sound does not end at the time of t4 when the specific administrator operation is performed, and even if the specific administrator operation is performed early after t3 when the power is turned on again, it is predetermined. Until the period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the warning sound is always continued. As a result, for the fraudster, even if a specific administrator operation is performed early after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning sound cannot be terminated and the hall administrator is surely notified. Can be anything.

Then, at the time of t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the state is returned from the strong game stop state to the low probability non-time saving state, and after t4, when there is a new start prize at the time of t5, a new start prize is given. It is possible to start the symbol fluctuation, but the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is the initial value because the count is reset at the time of t4. The count is increased with respect to "0", and the normal effect is executed during the control of such a low-probability non-time saving state. That is, with respect to the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output, the normal effect corresponding to the low probability non-time saving state is executed during the execution of the symbol variation.

In this example, when a minor abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310 during the execution of the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the probability is not low. It has shifted from the time-saving state to the weak game stop state, but when a serious abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310 in the weak game stop state, it shifts from the weak game stop state to the strong game stop state. ing. That is, in the weak game stop state, when a serious abnormality is detected by the main control board 1310, the weak game stop flag is turned off, the strong game stop flag is turned on, and the strong game stop state is given priority to occur. ing. As a result, if a fraudulent act that detects a serious abnormality is performed after the weak game stop state is generated, the weak game stop state is changed to the strong game stop state. Therefore, such a fraudulent act Never miss it. In addition, when the game is changed from the weak game stop state to the strong game stop state, the game can be restarted after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the symbol change that is being executed when the weak game stop state occurs is restored. A penalty can be given to the player without doing anything.

[Restoration of time-saving staging at the time of power failure]
In the above, the low-probability time-saving states A to C are set as the low-probability time-saving states. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the next "big hit". In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief). If the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit. Nevertheless, the low probability time saving state B is controlled until the number of subsequent changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (700 times in this example). If the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the big hit game is not executed, and the number of changes of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (20 to 100 times in this example) after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. ) Is reached, the low probability time saving state C is controlled.

Further, during the period of controlling the low-probability time-saving states A to C, the effect corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Specifically, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state A, a "time-saving effect" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled is executed. For example, the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. "During a short game" is displayed in. Further, as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state B, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the help mode L is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state B) is executed, for example, the above. As shown in the effect example, "Help mode L is in progress" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C, the "help mode S effect" indicating that the help mode S is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state C) is executed, for example, the above. As shown in the effect example, "Help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to this, in "Time saving effect", "Help mode L effect", and "Help mode S effect", background images and mini characters peculiar to each effect are displayed, and voice and light emission are output. It is possible.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (when the power is cut off), the type of low-probability time-saving state during execution is stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when the power is turned on again, before the power is cut off. A command corresponding to the type of low-probability state being executed is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, after the power is turned on again, the effect corresponding to the time saving state executed before the power failure is restored, and even after the power is turned on again, any of the low probability time saving states A to C You can know if it is controlled by. Specifically, when the "time saving effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state A at the time of power failure, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state A is performed when the power is turned on again. Is transmitted toward the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the command is executed so as to return to the "time saving effect". Further, when the "help mode L effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state B at the time of power failure, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state B is performed when the power is turned on again. Is transmitted toward the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the command is executed so as to return to the "help mode L effect". Further, when the "help mode S effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C at the time of power failure, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state C is performed when the power is turned on again. Is transmitted toward the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the command is executed so as to return to the "help mode S effect".

In addition, when the "help mode S effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C among the low probability time saving states A to C at the time of power failure, after the power is turned on again, the power is turned on again. It is executed so as to return to the "help mode S effect", but when the "help mode S effect" is restored, a part of the "help mode S effect" is executed so as not to return. ing. For example, during the execution of the "help mode S effect", as shown in the above effect example, "help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the "help mode S effect" is restored, the "help mode S" is restricted from being displayed, while the background image and mini characters peculiar to the effect are displayed, and the sound and light emission are output. I'm trying to get back to what I'm doing. This is because the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C is as small as 20 to 100 times, and the game is compared with the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B. A game that is disadvantageous to the person is being performed. In this regard, when the "help mode S effect" is restored, the effect display device 1600 is restricted from displaying "help mode S in progress", so that the control of the low probability time saving state C is restored. It becomes difficult to grasp, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of dissatisfaction with the disadvantageous game in the low probability time saving state C.

In addition, after the power is turned on again, it is executed so as to return to the effect corresponding to the time saving state that was executed before the power failure, but before returning to the effect corresponding to the time saving state, In the staging display device 1600, a common return image (in this example, the display of the arrow bar of "left-handed!" And the message display of "return in a short time") is displayed for a predetermined period. There is. In other words, when returning to any of the "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect" as the effect corresponding to the time saving state, a common return image is temporarily displayed. Therefore, at that time, it is not possible to grasp which production will be returned. In this way, at the time when the common return image is temporarily displayed, whether the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled, or the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. Since it is not possible to grasp, the game is started as soon as possible in order to return to any of the "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect" and to know which time saving state it is. Can be motivated. As for the timing to return to any of "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect", after displaying the common return image, the next special symbol variation display starts. It is preferable that the timing is set. It should be noted that this common return image is not displayed after the power is turned off and the power is turned on in a state other than the time saving state.

Further, as described above in detail, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is turned off. In this case, an error message is displayed to inform that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). Then, at the time of power interruption, the effect corresponding to the time reduction state is being executed, and if such a RAM error occurs after the power is turned on again, the time reduction executed before the power interruption is performed. It is executed so as not to return to the production corresponding to the state. This may have caused a RAM error when the power was turned on by illegally shifting the game state before the power failure, and if such a RAM error occurs, it is executed before the power failure. By giving the player a penalty of not returning to the production corresponding to the time saving state and not notifying which time saving state it is, working to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting the playing state. Can be done.

[Handling of immediate short hits during time reduction control]
In the above, when an immediate short hit occurs in the time saving state, the already controlled time saving state is continued without being newly controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, but as a modification. , In the time saving state, if the immediate short hit is reached, it can be executed in the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the already controlled time saving state and the new time saving state based on the immediate short hit. The number of variations of the special symbol may be compared with the number of times, and the subsequent game progress mode may be determined according to the comparison result. Specifically, the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new time saving state based on the immediate short hit is larger than the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the already controlled time saving state. In many cases, a control for switching from an already controlled time saving state to a new time saving state based on an immediate short hit can be exemplified. An example of such a modification will be described below.

FIG. 224 is a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modified example. As shown in FIG. 224 (A), the lottery table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value, as shown in FIG. 190 (A). Is different, a judgment other than the immediate short hit judgment value in the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the low probability lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number. The values (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as those in FIG. 190 (A). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the lottery table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value. Unlike B), the immediate short hit judgment value in the low-probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the low-probability lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number. The determination values other than the above (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as those in FIG. 190 (B). As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003, and in addition to being able to easily execute the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the variable winning opening 2003, the variable winning opening Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short hit by winning a start in 2003, even if an advantageous game is being played in a time-saving state, the game can be played with further expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (D), the determination values are distributed to the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C in the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit to be compared with the second symbol random number. In that respect, unlike FIG. 190 (D), the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number is the same as that of FIG. 190 (D). That is, after winning the immediate short hit by the lottery based on the second special random number, the type of the immediate short hit (immediate short hit A, using the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number). Either immediate short hit B or immediate short hit C) is determined. Regarding the symbol determination table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 224 (C) and the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in FIG. 224 (E), the symbol determination table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 190 (C) and the figure. It is the same as the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in 190 (E). Further, in the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number, the second symbol random number (for example, 1 to 100) is used in the same as the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number. Random numbers), the determination values are distributed at a ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10: 20: 70". In addition, the ratio of the judgment value distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number and the ratio of the judgment value distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number. And may be made different.

In this example, the low-probability time-saving states A to C are set as the low-probability time-saving states. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times. There is. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit D", the low probability time saving state A is controlled until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R big hit game. In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief). If the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) without a big hit before reaching the number counter = 600), the big hit game is not executed. After that, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (700 times in this example), the control is performed in the low probability time saving state B. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the immediate short hit) even though the big hit game is not executed. It is controlled to the low probability time saving state C until it reaches 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) according to the type of the winning symbol. The number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is 100 times when it is "immediate short-time hit A" and 40 times when it is "immediate short-time hit B". In the case of "immediate short hit C", 20 times is set.

FIG. 225 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit time during control of the low probability time saving state B. First, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if an immediate short-time hit occurs, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving based on the immediate short-time hit. The number of times of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the state C is compared. Then, when the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger than the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. Controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped (enables the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C). Further, when the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is discarded, and the execution is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C. It is controlled to newly count the number of possible variations of the special symbol (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the immediate short hit symbol). That is, when the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state rather than the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. The period is to be extended. On the other hand, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is larger than the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. Maintains the low-probability time-saving state B without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped, and for the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. The low-probability time-saving state B is controlled to continue (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalidated). In this way, when an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the player selects and executes the low-probability time-saving state with the larger number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol. It is possible to execute an advantageous state for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and it is possible to continue the game with expectation.

As shown in FIG. 225, when the variation display of the Nth special symbol shows "immediate short hit A" during the control of the low probability time saving state B, "700-N <100" (N =). When the switching condition (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled like this. That is, if "immediate short hit A" is obtained during the execution of the 601 to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is started after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit A" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is set after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 601 to 700th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit A" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if "immediate short-time hit B" is obtained in the Nth change display of the special symbol, "700-N <40" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). Controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped when the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol variation display has already been executed) is satisfied. There is. That is, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 661st to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is started after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 660th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is set after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 660th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit B" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 661st to 700th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit B" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if "immediate short-time hit C" is obtained in the Nth change display of the special symbol, "700-N <20" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). Controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped when the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol variation display has already been executed) is satisfied. There is. That is, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the execution of the 681th to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is started after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 680th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is set after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 680th variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit C" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 681th to 700th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit C" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Next, the staging progress before and after the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state B will be described. In this example, among the 601 to 700th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the Nth special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z) becomes "immediate short hit A". An example of controlling to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped is described.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. It is set as an invalid period. Then, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid, the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is maintained when the "immediate short hit A" is obtained. Since the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is not extended, it is set as the infeasible period of the extension acquisition effect described later. In addition, during the period when the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B) is performed. Running.

Further, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol after the 681th time during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. Is set as. Then, during the period in which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached, and the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Since the period for controlling the state is extended, it is set as a feasible period for the extension acquisition effect described later. Further, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B) is performed. In addition to the execution, the effect display device 1600 executes "extension chance display" indicating that the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified as an effect display in which a message image related to the extension (a message image "If the character X appears, the time may be shortened ...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Not shown). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", attention is paid to whether or not the extension acquisition effect described later is executed, and it is possible to enjoy whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, among the variation displays of the special symbols after the 681th time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when the symbol variation Z, which is the variation display of the Nth special symbol, is being executed, an immediate short hit occurs. , "Extended acquisition effect" is executed, and after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped, it is controlled to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C, and the period of controlling to the low probability state is extended. Here, the "extended acquisition effect" is a success pattern (low probability time reduction) in which a display is performed to incite whether or not the character X appears from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600, and the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600. An effect that succeeds in extending the period for controlling the state) and a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that fails to extend the period for controlling the low probability time saving state). ) Is performed (not shown). In addition, while the symbol variation Z is being executed, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect, and an "extended acquisition effect" for notifying whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended is executed. In the "extended acquisition effect" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, an effect that succeeds in extending the period for controlling to a low probability time reduction state (extended acquisition effect of a success pattern) is executed. As a result, during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the control is performed to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped, but the "extended acquisition effect" is low. It is an effect that is not executed when an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the probability non-time saving state. As a result, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from that of the low-probability non-time-saving state.

Further, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol after the 681th time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, it is set as the executable period of the extended acquisition effect, and even if the immediate short hit is not achieved, the low probability is low. It is possible to execute an "extended acquisition effect" that notifies whether or not the period for controlling the time saving state is extended. In this example, during the execution of the symbol variation X, which is the N-2nd special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed although the immediate short hit is not performed, and the immediate short is executed. In the "extended acquisition effect" that is executed when there is no hit, a ghost effect (extended acquisition effect of a failure pattern) that fails to extend the period for controlling to a low probability time saving state is executed. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, but since it is not an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed.

Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. .. Even in such a case, the remaining number of variations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C and the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger than the number of times, the low probability after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. That is, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is larger, the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. Further, the period during which the switching to the new low-probability time saving state C becomes effective is set as the executable period of the extended acquisition effect.

Further, when the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the "help mode S" corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C is being executed while the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. It is not switched to the "help mode S effect" indicating that, and the "help mode L effect" that was executed in the low probability time saving state B is continuously executed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, there is no change in the point where the "help mode L effect" is executed, so that the control of the low-probability time-saving state B continues (extended). ) Can be made to look like it was done. Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the "extension chance display" is continuously executed.

FIG. 226 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit time during control of 100 low-probability time saving states A started with the big hit C as a trigger. First, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if an immediate short-time hit occurs, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving based on the immediate short-time hit. The number of times of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the state C is compared. Then, when the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger than the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. Controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped (enables the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C). Further, when the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is discarded, and the execution is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C. It is controlled to newly count the number of possible variations of the special symbol (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the immediate short hit symbol). That is, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, the control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state rather than the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. The period is to be extended. On the other hand, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is larger than the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. Maintains the low-probability time-saving state A without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped. The low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to continue (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalidated). In this way, when an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the player selects and executes the low-probability time-saving state with the larger number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol. It is possible to execute an advantageous state for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and it is possible to continue the game with expectation.

As shown in FIG. 226, when the variation display of the Nth special symbol shows "immediate short hit A" during the control of the low probability time saving state A, "100-N <100" (N =). When the switching condition (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled like this. That is, if "immediate short hit A" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is started after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached. Is set as.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if "immediate short-time hit B" is obtained in the Nth special symbol variation display, "100-N <40" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). When the switching condition (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state A already executed) is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state A is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch. That is, when the "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is started after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 60th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is set after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 60th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit B" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit B" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if "immediate short-time hit C" is obtained in the Nth change display of the special symbol, "100-N <20" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). When the switching condition (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state A already executed) is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state A is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch. That is, when the "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the execution of the 81st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is started after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 80th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is set after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 80th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit C" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 81st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit C" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Next, the staging progress before and after the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state A will be described. In this example, among the 1st to 100th special symbol fluctuation displays during the control of the low-probability time saving state A, the Nth special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z) becomes "immediate short hit A". An example of controlling to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped is described.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit A" is reached. It is set as a valid period. Then, during the period in which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached, and the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Since the period for controlling the state is extended, it is set as the feasible period for the extended acquisition effect. Further, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, in addition to executing the "pull-back mode effect" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the effect display device 1600 has a low effect. The "extension chance display" is executed, which indicates that the period for controlling the probability time reduction state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified as an effect display in which a message image related to the extension (a message image "If the character X appears, the time may be shortened ...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Not shown). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the extension acquisition effect is executed, and to enjoy whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

Further, in the case of immediate short hit during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth variation display of the special symbol, among the 1st to 100th special symbol variation displays during the control of the low probability time saving state A. Executes the "extension acquisition effect" and controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped, and extends the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state. .. Here, the "extended acquisition effect" is a success pattern (low probability time reduction) in which a display is performed to incite whether or not the character X appears from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600, and the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600. An effect that succeeds in extending the period for controlling the state) and a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that fails to extend the period for controlling the low probability time saving state). ) Is performed (not shown). In addition, while the symbol variation Z is being executed, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect, and an "extended acquisition effect" for notifying whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended is executed. In the "extended acquisition effect" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, an effect that succeeds in extending the period for controlling to a low probability time reduction state (extended acquisition effect of a success pattern) is executed. As a result, during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the control is performed to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped, but the "extended acquisition effect" is low. It is an effect that is not executed when an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the probability non-time saving state. As a result, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from that of the low-probability non-time-saving state.

Further, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A, it is set as the executable period of the extended acquisition effect, and even if the immediate short hit is not achieved, it is low. It is possible to execute an "extended acquisition effect" that notifies whether or not the period for controlling the probability time reduction state is extended. In this example, during the execution of the symbol variation X, which is the N-2nd special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time saving state A, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed although the immediate short hit is not performed, and the immediate shortening is performed. In the "extended acquisition effect" that is executed when there is no hit, a ghost effect (extended acquisition effect of a failure pattern) that fails to extend the period for controlling to a low probability time saving state is executed. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, but since it is not an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed.

Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. .. Even in such a case, the remaining number of variations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C and the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger than the number of times, the low probability after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. That is, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is larger, the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. Further, the period during which the switching to the new low-probability time saving state C becomes effective is set as the executable period of the extended acquisition effect.

Further, when the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the "help mode S" corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C is being executed while the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. It is not switched to the "help mode S effect" indicating that, and the "pull-back mode effect" that was executed in the low probability time saving state A is continuously executed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, there is no change in the point where the "pull-back mode effect" is executed, so that the control of the low-probability time-saving state A is continued (extended). You can make it look like. Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the "extension chance display" is continuously executed.

In the above, if the immediate short hit occurs during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B, the immediate short hit. At the time of the symbol change Z that became, the "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed to notify that the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended, but the "extended acquisition effect" is executed. May be executed at the following timings. That is, the low-probability time-saving state set before the immediate short-hit after switching to the low-probability time-saving state C without executing the "extension acquisition effect" at the time of the symbol change Z that became the immediate short-hit. The "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of the success pattern) may be executed at the timing when the number of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in A or the low probability time saving state B expires. For example, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is set to 100 times, and the symbol variation Z which is the 80th variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A. If an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of, a special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A set before the immediate short hit after switching to the low probability time saving state C. The "extended acquisition effect" is executed at the timing when the number of fluctuation display reaches 100 times, and the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state C at that time is notified. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is suddenly extended without noticing that the immediate short hit is achieved until the "extended acquisition effect" is executed.

Further, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the immediate short hit is taken as the immediate short hit. At the time of the symbol change Z, the "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed to notify that the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended, but the "extended acquisition effect" If a power failure occurs during the execution of, after the power is turned on again, the return processing for the execution of the "extension acquisition effect" is performed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", the "extended acquisition effect" is executed after the power is turned on again to control the time to a low probability. It is possible to recognize that the period is extended, and it is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible to grasp how long the period for controlling the low probability time saving state will continue.

Next, the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state A of 599 times started by the big hit D will be described. In order to prevent confusion with the previously explained "100 low-probability time-saving states A started with the big hit C", the following 599 low-probability time-savings started with the big hit D for convenience of explanation. The state A is described as "low probability time saving state A2".

If an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped, regardless of the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2. The low-probability time-saving state A2 is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state A2 is continued for the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2. It is in control (disables switching to the low probability time saving state C). That is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, the above-mentioned "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid period (a period during which the low-probability time-saving state C is not controlled when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes" immediate short-time hit "). The same control as "is performed. As described above, the low-probability time-saving state A2 continuously continues to the low-probability time-saving state B through 599 special symbol fluctuation displays, and the low-probability time-saving state C is in the middle of such a low-probability time-saving state A2. If it is switched to, there is a possibility that the continuity with the low probability time saving state B will be cut depending on the timing, but in this example, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantageous situation for the player. Further, for example, when switching to the low-probability time-saving state C 100 times in the variation display of the special symbol after the 501st time, the above-mentioned disadvantageous situation does not occur, but the low-probability time-saving state C has no profit. Therefore, there is a concern that the original fun of the low-probability time-saving state C may be reduced, but in this example, such a player can avoid the concern.

In the above, the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C are set to the same time-saving performance. That is, in the low probability time saving states A to C, when the ordinary lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary hit" is increased, or the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit". By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. It is said that the probability that the lottery result of the symbol will be "normal hit" and the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened are the same. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C may be configured to be set to different time-saving performances. In such a configuration, the higher the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit", and the longer the time and the number of times the variable winning opening 2003 is open, the more the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003. It is said that the acceptance of B is easy and the time saving performance is high.

Specifically, a first time saving control in the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B and a second time saving control in the low probability time saving state C are set, for example, a second time saving control than the first time saving control. When the time saving performance of 2 is higher, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch from A or the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C. On the other hand, when the time saving performance of the first time saving control is higher than that of the second time saving control, the immediate shortening is achieved during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B. It is controlled so as to maintain the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the hit symbol is stopped. Thereby, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the player can switch to the low-probability time-saving state C, which is a time-saving performance advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above, when the time saving performance of the first time saving control is higher than that of the second time saving control, the immediate short hit is made during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B. , It is controlled to maintain the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped, but in addition to this, when the immediate short hit is reached, the low probability time saving state A and The remaining number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is compared with the number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-hit is larger, the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B is low after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped. It may be controlled to switch to the probability time saving state C. As a result, when the remaining number of variations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B is small, the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. You can enjoy whether you can switch to C.

Further, in the above, the case where the immediate short hit occurs in the low probability non-time saving state and the case where the immediate short hit occurs in the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B have the same period and the same. The low-probability time-saving state C is controlled by the time-saving performance of, but apart from this, the period and time-saving performance of the low-probability time-saving state C are changed according to the game state at the time of immediate short hit. You may do it. For example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is 100 times low as described above. While switching to the probability time saving state C is controlled, when the immediate short hit A is obtained in the low probability non-time saving state B, the low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short hit A is 120 times the low probability time saving. The switch to the state C may be controlled. Further, for example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the first low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is described above. While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C with time-saving control is performed, when the immediate short-time hit A is reached in the low-probability non-time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short-time hit A is the first. It is also possible to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the time-saving control of 2.

Further, as another example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is described above. While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C 100 times as described above, when the immediate short-time hit A is reached again in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit A, this second immediate short-time hit is achieved. The low-probability time-saving state C based on A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C 120 times for control. Further, for example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the second low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is described above. While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the time-saving control, when the immediate short-time hit A is reached again in the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short-time hit A, this second immediate short-time hit The low-probability time-saving state C based on A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the third time-saving control (time-saving control having higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control).

By making the period and the time saving performance of the low probability time saving state C different according to the gaming state at the time of the immediate short hit in this way, the game playability using the immediate short hit can be further diversified. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Detailed description of the external terminal board 558]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, information about the game can be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer via the external output terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 according to the progress of the game. The external device is, for example, an external information device installed above each pachinko machine 1 in a hall computer or island facility that controls information in a game hall, and is based on information transmitted via an external output terminal 558a. The number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the information of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped, the player can monitor whether or not an illegal game is played, and the player can be informed about the history of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, It is possible to provide information on the number of big hits for each day, information on the number of changes in the symbol up to each big hit, information on the number of prize balls at each big hit, information on the number of continuations of time-saving fluctuations, etc.) in a numerical or graphed manner. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the transition to a special gaming state such as the low-probability time-saving state B or the low-probability time-saving state C controlled by the above-mentioned new embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is transferred to the special gaming state via the external output terminal 558a. , Information on these special gaming states is appropriately transmitted to the external device, and even if the player has such special game performance, the situation advantageous to the player is appropriately transmitted to the external device. It is possible to properly manage the gaming machines on the side of the gaming store where the gaming machines are installed, and to provide the gaming machines that are easy to operate in the gaming stores. This point will be described below.

First, the external terminal board 558 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing a connection between the pachinko machine 1 and an external device. As shown in FIG. 227, the external terminal board 558 of the present embodiment is connected to the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, and various signals (related to the payout of the game ball) input to the external terminal board 558 are connected. External based on signals, signals related to the opening of the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, signals related to symbol determination, signals related to entering each starting port, signals related to various hits, signals related to special conditions, signals related to security, etc.) Various signals are output to the device. In the present embodiment, various signals output from the external terminal board 558 are input to each of the hall computer and the external information device, but various signals output from the external terminal board 558 are, for example, for example. The mode may be input to the hall computer and input from the hall computer to the external information device, or conversely, input to the external information device and input from the external information device to the hall computer. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 113A, 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are mounted on the external terminal board 558. In the present embodiment, the 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are, from the left side of the figure, an external output terminal 558ab, an external output terminal 558ac, an external output terminal 558ad, an external output terminal 558ae, an external output terminal 558af, an external output terminal 558ag, and an external device. The output terminal 558ah, the external output terminal 558ai, the external output terminal 558aj, and the external output terminal 558ak are arranged in this order in the horizontal direction, and different information can be transmitted to the external device. The configuration of the external terminal board 558 is not limited to this, and 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak may be arranged in an order different from that of the present embodiment, and may be more than 10 or 10 pieces. It may be composed of a smaller number of external output terminals.

The 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are each colored in a different color. Specifically, the external output terminal 558ab is white, the external output terminal 558ac is green, the external output terminal 558ad is gray, the external output terminal 558ae is yellow, the external output terminal 558af is black, the external output terminal 558ag is pink, and the external output terminal. The 558ah is colored blue, the external output terminal 558ai is colored red, the external output terminal 558aj is colored orange, and the external output terminal 558ak is colored light blue. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are colored in different colors, the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak can be easily visually distinguished, and the external terminal board 558 can be easily distinguished. When connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the external device via the pachinko machine 1, a connection error between each of the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak and each of the input terminals of the external device can be suppressed, and the malfunction of the external device can be suppressed.

Hereinafter, the types of information transmitted via the external output terminals 558ab to 558ak will be described. As described above, the external terminal board 558 of the present embodiment is connected to the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, and is controlled by the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310. Various signals (signals related to payout of game balls, signals related to opening of door frame 3 or main body frame 4, signals related to symbol determination, signals related to entering balls into each starting port, signals related to various hits, special states Signals, security-related signals, etc.) are transmitted (output) to external devices.

An electric signal is always output from the external output terminals 558ab to ak, but the electric signal is switched according to the progress of the game. In this example, it is possible to switch between an electric signal having a predetermined first voltage (an electric signal in an ON state) and an electric signal having a predetermined second voltage (an electric signal in an OFF state), and various types described later. The signal of the name (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, gaming state signal, etc.) refers to an electric signal having a predetermined first voltage (an electric signal in the ON state). Hereinafter, outputting an electric signal having a predetermined first voltage is simply referred to as "outputting signals having various names (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.)", and is referred to as a predetermined second. Outputting an electrical signal with voltage simply means "not outputting signals with various names (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.)" or "signals with various names (symbol confirmation signal, advantageous state start). Stop the output of signals, game status signals, etc.) ".

First, the external output terminal 558ab outputs, for example, a prize ball number information output signal corresponding to the actual prize ball number to the external device. Specifically, in the port output process of the payout control board 633 described above, when the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds 10 (that is, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is 10). (When the ball is reached), the prize ball number information output signal is output from the payout board 633 to the external terminal board 558, and the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external device via the external output terminal 558ab of the external terminal board 558. Will be done. The prize ball number information output signal is an electric signal that is output for a short time within a range that can be received by the external device when the number of game balls actually paid out reaches 10, and in the present embodiment, it is an electric signal. For example, it is an electric signal output for 0.106 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal can be reliably input to the external device, and even in the case where the prize ball number information output signal is continuously transmitted a plurality of times, the prize is awarded. The transmission of the ball number information output signal can be completed in a short time, and the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the number of game balls actually paid out reaches 10 in succession, the prize ball number information output signal is output from the external terminal board 558 with an interval of, for example, 0.106 seconds or more. It is desirable to prevent the number of prize balls from being erroneously counted by continuously inputting the information output signal of the number of prize balls input to the external device to the external device, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be managed more appropriately on the hall side.

The external output terminal 558ac outputs, for example, a detection signal corresponding to the opening of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 to the external device. Specifically, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch when the door frame 3 is released and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch when the main body frame 4 is released are transmitted via the payout control board 633. When each detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 and each detection signal is input, the main control board 1310 outputs the detection signal to the external device from the external output terminal 558ac of the external terminal board 558. The detection signal is an electric signal output while the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is released and the detection signal from the door frame release switch or the main body frame release switch is input, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The state of the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side.

The external output terminal 558ad outputs, for example, a symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol to the external device. The main control board 1310 described above sends a symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and counts up the relief count counter described above, but the external output terminal 558ad is used. The symbol confirmation signal output via the system is external every time the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, including when the symbol confirmation command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and when the relief count counter described above is not counted up. It is output to the device. The symbol confirmation signal is an electric signal that is output for a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, it is an electric signal that is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the special symbol continuously fluctuates, the symbol confirmation signal can be reliably input to the external device, and the special symbol is displayed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The number of fluctuations (so-called number of starts) can be managed appropriately.

The external output terminal 558ae outputs, for example, a winning signal corresponding to the game ball entering each starting port to an external device. Specifically, the main control board 1310 reads the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401, respectively, and transmits the corresponding start port winning command classified into others. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is detected by the second start port sensor 2401. When there is a signal, the start port winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, and the winning signal corresponding to these transmission information is transmitted from the external output terminal 558ae of the external terminal board 558. It is output to an external device. The winning signal is an electric signal that is output for a short time within a range that can be received by the external device when the game ball enters each starting port. In the present embodiment, the electric signal is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. It is a signal. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning signal can be reliably input to the external device, and even if the winning signal is continuously transmitted a plurality of times, the transmission of the winning signal is completed in a short time. The pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the gaming balls continuously enter each starting port, it is desirable that the winning signal is output from the external output terminal 558ae of the external terminal board 558 with an interval of, for example, 0.128 seconds or more. By continuously outputting the winning signals input to the external device to the external device, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings from being erroneously counted. It can be managed properly.

The external output terminal 558af outputs, for example, an advantageous state start signal to the external device when the advantageous state for the player is started. In the external device, in response to this advantageous state start signal, the number of times the advantageous state is started for the player (number of special prizes) and the like can be counted. Further, in the present embodiment, the trigger of the signal output from the external output terminal 558af includes not only when the lottery result of the conventional special symbol becomes a big hit but also when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. It is set to be an opportunity. Specifically, the trigger for signal output from the external output terminal 558af is
(A) When controlled by a jackpot game based on the stop result of a special symbol
(B) When the low probability time saving state B is controlled based on the count value of the relief count counter described above.
(C) When the special symbol is controlled to the low probability time saving state C based on the stop display with the immediate short hit symbol.
It is one of the above, and the advantageous state start signal is output to the external device with these as an opportunity. This advantageous state start signal is output in combination with the external output terminal 558af at the triggers (a) to (c) in order to avoid the addition of the external output terminal, and the external device side recognizes it as one signal. Will be done. However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to output the advantageous state start signal at different times according to each trigger, and it is also possible to make the external device recognize which trigger the input is related to by that time. There is. In the present embodiment, in the case of the opportunity (a), the period during which the game is controlled by the big hit game (until the opening of all the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 is completed) (for example). The advantageous state start signal is continuously output during the big hit period), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped at the end of the big hit game. In the case of the opportunity (b), it is low. The advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the probability time saving state B (for example, after the variable symbol whose count value of the relief count counter is 600 is determined), and 0.128 seconds have elapsed. The output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped at, and in the case of the trigger (c), at the start of the low-probability time-saving state C (for example, the stop display of the immediate short-hit symbols (immediate short-hit A to C symbols)). The advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds, and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped after 0.256 seconds. In a general game machine including the machine 1, the big hit period in the opportunity (a) is controlled by the big hit game (until all the opening of the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 is completed, etc. ) Is a long period of 0.256 seconds or more, so that the advantageous state start signal output when controlled by the jackpot game may be erroneously recognized as the low probability time saving states B and C. There is no such thing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the output time of the advantageous state start signal output at the triggers (b) and (c) is shorter than that of the advantageous state start signal output when controlled by the jackpot game. Is set to. In addition to the above-mentioned purpose of making the external device recognize which opportunity the input is related to, the purpose of this is to improve the creditworthiness of the count of the number of special prizes. That is, in the present embodiment, the higher the importance of the target for counting the number of special prizes, the longer the output time, and specifically, the "big hit" is emphasized from the viewpoint of whether or not it is based on the lottery result. The high and low of the importance and the length of the advantageous state start time are set so as to have the relationship of "game> low probability state C> low probability state B". By setting the output time to be longer as the importance is higher, for example, the output of the advantageous state start signal output when controlled by the jackpot game is cut off in the middle due to some noise or the like. Even in such a case, depending on the timing of interruption, it is possible to count the number of special prizes on the external device side by regarding it as a substitute for the advantageous state start signal output at the time of the trigger (b) (c). In other words, the possibility that the information will be discarded without inputting the required time on the external device side can be reduced in the order of "big hit game> low probability state C> low probability state B", and the information on the external device side. It suppresses the deterioration of the credibility of.

In addition, regarding whether or not information is recognized by distinguishing the triggers (a) to (c), there is a point that the needs differ for each hall. Therefore, for example, it is desired to distinguish the triggers (a) to (c) for information recognition. In the case (for example, when it is desired to recognize a big hit game, a low probability time saving state B, C by different special prize times A, B, C, or when it is not desired to recognize a part of special prize times), the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal is used. The output time (big hit period longer than 0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, 0.256 seconds) is determined on the external device side, and the number of special prizes etc. is counted on the external device side according to the result. If you want to recognize information without distinguishing the triggers (a) to (c) (for example, if you want to recognize big hit games, low probability time saving states B and C by adding them to the same number of special prizes). Is a special prize on the external device side in response to the output of the advantageous state start signal regardless of the output time of the advantageous state start signal described above (big hit period longer than 0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, 0.256 seconds). It may be set to count the number of times and the like. Further, when it is desired to distinguish the triggers (a) and the triggers (b) (c) without distinguishing the triggers (b) and (c) (for example, the low probability time saving states B and C are the same number of special prizes A). If you want to distinguish it from the special prize number B of the big hit game while recognizing it in total), for example, in an external device, set the input of the advantageous state start signal of 0.256 seconds or less to be regarded as the same input. You just have to leave it. Further, in addition to the triggers (a) to (c), the external output terminal 558af may also be used when the small hit game is executed. In this case, the output time of the advantageous state start signal is 0. It can be exemplified by setting an output time (for example, 0.100 seconds) different from any of the jackpot periods longer than 128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, and 0.256 seconds so that the information can be recognized as a separate opportunity.

The external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah have, for example, the number of symbol fluctuations (so-called start number) displayed on the external device side (particularly the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1) at the turning point of the game. A fluctuation reset signal that triggers a reset is output to an external device. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation reset signal 1 is output from the external output terminal 558ag, and the fluctuation reset signal 2 is output from the external output terminal 558ah, and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output at a partially different trigger. It is a thing. The fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are provided separately from the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal, and can be used mainly for resetting the number of symbol fluctuations and the like separately from the number of special prizes. It should be noted that the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are also triggered not only when the conventional special symbol lottery result is a big hit, but also when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. Is set to.

First, the fluctuation reset signal 1 will be described. The trigger for outputting the fluctuation reset signal 1 of the present embodiment is the same as the triggers (a) and (b) described in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also the trigger described in the advantageous state start signal. It has the same output mode as (a) and (b) (two patterns with a jackpot period longer than 0.128 seconds and 0.256 seconds). That is, the fluctuation reset signal 1 is started to be output based on the occurrence of the big hit game or the low probability time saving state B, and the external information installed on the external device side (particularly above the pachinko machine 1) in response to this fluctuation reset signal 1. It is possible to reset the number of symbol fluctuations and the like on the device), and the player can be made to recognize the number of symbol fluctuations from the initial value in a new gaming state. As for the fluctuation reset signal 1, there are some points where the needs differ for each hall as to whether or not the information is recognized by distinguishing the triggers (a) and (b). Therefore, for example, the triggers (a) and (b). ) When you want to distinguish and recognize information (for example, when you do not want to reset the number of fluctuations in either the big hit game or the low probability time saving state B), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 1 (0.128 seconds, 0.256). The jackpot period longer than a second) should be determined on the external device side, and the target for resetting should be selected on the external device side according to the result, and conversely, the triggers (a) and (b) are not distinguished. When you want to reset the number of fluctuations (for example, when you want to reset the number of fluctuations in each of the big hit game and the low probability time saving state B), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 1 described above (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds) Regardless of the long jackpot period), the external device may be set to reset the number of fluctuations by receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1.

Next, the fluctuation reset signal 2 will be described. The trigger for outputting the fluctuation reset signal 2 of the present embodiment is the same as the triggers (a) and (c) described in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also the trigger described in the advantageous state start signal. It has the same output mode as (a) and (c) (two patterns with a time longer than 0.256 seconds and 0.256 seconds). That is, the fluctuation reset signal 2 is output based on the occurrence of the big hit game or the low probability time saving state C, and the external information device installed on the external device side (particularly above the pachinko machine 1) in response to the fluctuation reset signal 2. ), The number of symbol fluctuations and the like can be reset, and the player can be made to recognize the number of symbol fluctuations from the initial value in a new gaming state. As for the fluctuation reset signal 2, there are some points where the needs differ for each hall as to whether or not the information is recognized by distinguishing the triggers (a) and (c). Therefore, for example, the triggers (a) and (c). ) When you want to distinguish and recognize information (for example, when you do not want to reset the number of fluctuations in either the big hit game or the low probability time saving state C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 2 (0.256 seconds, 0.256). The jackpot period longer than a second) should be determined on the external device side, and the target for resetting should be selected on the external device side according to the result, and conversely, the triggers (a) and (c) are not distinguished. When you want to reset the number of fluctuations (for example, when you want to reset the number of fluctuations in each of the big hit game and the low probability time saving state C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 2 described above (0.256 seconds, 0.256 seconds) Regardless of the long jackpot period), the external device may be set to reset the number of fluctuations by receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2.

Further, the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are common in that the trigger (a) is the output trigger, and if both the external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah are connected to the external device side, With the arrival of the trigger (a), the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output from the respective terminals. At first glance, there is a concern that the number of fluctuations will be reset multiple times on the external device side. However, in the present embodiment, even if the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are output from the respective terminals due to the arrival of the trigger (a), the entire output periods of the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are completely overlapped. Even if each of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is output, the fluctuation count is reset only once on the external device side.

In addition, apart from this embodiment, the external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah are not separated into one external output terminal ax, and the fluctuation reset signal X is configured to be output from the triggers (a) to (c). You may. For example, the trigger for outputting the variable reset signal X via the external output terminal 558ax is set to the same trigger as the above-mentioned triggers (a) to (c) as in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also in the advantageous state. It can be exemplified that the output mode is the same as that of the start signal. Regarding the variable reset signal X as well, there is a point that the needs differ for each hall as to whether or not the information is recognized by distinguishing the triggers (a) to (c). Therefore, for example, the triggers (a) to (c) are used. When you want to recognize information separately (for example, when you do not want to reset the number of fluctuations due to a big hit game, low probability time saving state B, C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal X (0.128 seconds, 0) The external device side may determine the jackpot period longer than .256 seconds and 0.256 seconds), and the external device side may select the target for resetting according to the result. When it is desired to reset the number of fluctuations without distinguishing (c) (for example, when it is desired to reset the number of fluctuations in each of the big hit game, the low probability time saving state B, and C), the output time of the fluctuation reset signal X (0.128). Regardless of the jackpot period longer than seconds, 0.256 seconds, and 0.256 seconds), the external device may be set to reset the number of fluctuations by receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal X.

The external output terminal 558ai outputs a game state signal to an external device, for example, while the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player. This game state signal makes it possible for the external device to grasp that the state advantageous to the player continues, and in this example, it is controlled to either a time saving state, a high probability state, or a big hit game. It is designed to output when it is. Specifically, as the trigger for signal output from the external output terminal 558ai, the same triggers as the above-mentioned triggers (a) to (c) can be exemplified, and the game status signal is started to be output to the external device with these triggers. This game state signal is output in combination with the external output terminal 558ai at the triggers (a) to (c) in order to avoid the addition of the external output terminal. Further, for example, when it is controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state A after the big-hit game ends and the big-hit game ends, or when the low-probability time-saving state A shifts to the low-probability time-saving state C. When controlled, when controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state B, or during the low-probability time-saving states A, B, C, a big hit game or a small hit game is started. When controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B during the low-probability time-saving state C, or to shift from the low-probability time-saving state A which continues over 559 fluctuations to the low-probability time-saving state B. The game status signal is continuously output without stopping the output of the game status signal when controlled by. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a series of advantageous states can be continuously recognized on the external device side, and the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 can obtain an advantageous state toward the outside. It can be continuously notified.

The external output terminal 558aj outputs, for example, a scheduled prize ball signal corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out to an external device. Specifically, in the above-mentioned prize ball control process, the main control board 1310 has a case where the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the input information storage area. In addition, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area. Based on the input information of the lever, that is, various winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, second large winning opening 2007, etc. provided in the game board 5 ( Hereinafter, it is described as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"), and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted based on the game balls entered into the game board 5, and the main control is built-in. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM. In the prize ball control process, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is used. , The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value 10. When there is (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and output information is stored as transmission information. It is stored in the area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the above-mentioned prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter.

Further, the main control board 1310 outputs the transmission information stored in the output information storage area as a scheduled prize ball signal to an external device via the external output terminal 558aj of the external terminal board 558. This scheduled prize ball signal is an electric signal that is output for a short time within a range that can be received by the external device when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Then, for example, it is an electric signal output for 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transmission information can be reliably input to the external device, and the transmission information is transmitted even when the main control board 1310 continuously transmits the scheduled prize ball signal a plurality of times. The transmission of the pachinko machine 1 can be completed in a short time, and the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the number of prize balls to be paid out reaches 10 consecutively, the planned prize ball signal is transmitted from the external output terminal 558aj of the external terminal board 558 with an interval of, for example, 0.128 seconds or more. It is desirable that it be output, and by continuously outputting the scheduled prize ball signal input to the external device to the external device, it is possible to prevent the planned prize ball number from being erroneously counted, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be managed more appropriately on the side of the hall.

The external output terminal 558ak outputs, for example, a security signal related to security to an external device. Specifically, the main control board 1310 has various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first start). Detection signal from mouth sensor 3002, detection signal from second start port sensor 2401, detection signal from variable winning opening sensor 2526, detection signal from first big winning opening sensor 2524, from second big winning opening sensor 2561 Detection signal, detection signal from out sensor 664, detection signal from first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, detection signal from vibration sensor, detection signal from safe switch, RAM The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button, and the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball control process are transmitted to the effect that the payout control board 633 has normally received. Based on the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, an abnormality (for example, a magnetic abnormality related to a magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to a vibration sensor, or a normal electric combination when a game ball is won in a normal electric accessory during normal times Abnormal item winning, abnormal winning opening when there is a prize in the large winning opening at normal times, abnormal safe switch related to the safe switch, abnormal passing through the probabilistic area when the game ball passes through the probabilistic area at normal times, when clearing RAM, When it is determined that there is a designated symbol route abnormality, RAM error, etc.), a security signal is output to an external device from the external output terminal 558ak of the external terminal board 558.

The security signal of the present embodiment is an electric signal that is output for a time within a range that can be reliably received by the external device side, and is, for example, an electric signal that is output for 30.000 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a security signal can be reliably input to an external device, and the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It should be noted that the security signal has an abnormality during its output (for example, a magnetic abnormality related to a magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to a vibration sensor, a normal electric accessory winning abnormality when a game ball is won in a normal electric accessory during normal times, a normal electric accessory winning abnormality, normal Sometimes when there is a prize in the big prize opening, there is an abnormality in the big winning opening, there is an abnormality in the safe switch related to the safe switch, there is an abnormality in passing through the probability change area when the game ball passes through the probability change area in normal times, when the RAM is cleared, there is an abnormality in the designated symbol route, When it is determined again that there is a RAM error, etc.), a further security signal is output from that point. Specifically, after it is determined that there is an abnormality and a security signal is output, for example, when it is determined again that there is an abnormality 15 seconds later, a security signal is output for an additional 30.000 seconds from that point. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229, a symbol confirmation signal output from the external output terminal ad each time the special symbol is stopped during the game progress process, and an external output when a state advantageous to the player is started. The advantageous state start signal output from the terminal 558af and the gaming state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai while the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player will be described in detail. FIG. 228 shows the situation when the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C via the low probability time saving state B, and FIG. 229 shows the situation where the pachinko machine 1 has a low probability. It shows the situation when transitioning from the non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C, and further transitioning to the new low probability time saving state C during the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the symbol determination signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is a special symbol regardless of the gaming states of the low-probability non-time saving state, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C. It is an electric signal output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device every time the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (every time the confirmation time of the special symbol is started). In this embodiment, the symbol is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device. Each time the confirmation signal is output, the display of the number of fluctuations of the external device is incremented by 1. Further, the symbol confirmation signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is output for 0.128 seconds at one trigger, and after 0.128 seconds have elapsed (after the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped), a predetermined output is performed. Until the prohibition period A (0.15 seconds) has elapsed, a new symbol confirmation signal is not output. The output period and output prohibition period A of the symbol confirmation signal are set to a time shorter than the shortest special fluctuation time (2 seconds in this example) of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1, thereby changing the special symbol. Even when the display is continuously performed, the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the variable display of each special symbol can be reliably transmitted to the external device side.

Next, FIG. 228 will be described. In FIG. 228, the advantageous state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B based on the count value of the relief count counter (count value of the relief count counter = 600). (T1 in FIG. 228) and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 228). T1 of FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (b), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state B. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the advantageous state start signal when transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and displays "1" for the number of special prizes. to add. Further, t2 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (c), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, even when the low-probability time-saving state B is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C, the advantageous state start signal is output and the number of special prizes is displayed as "1". Is added.

Further, these advantageous state start signals are output regardless of whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is started after the low probability time saving states B and C are started. For example, the advantageous state start signal has no special symbol hold at the start of the low-probability time-saving states B and C (the number of hold of the lottery result of the first and second special symbols is zero), and the symbol is being displayed non-variably. It will be output even when it is in the standby state. As a result, even a player who does not know the existence of the low-probability time-saving states B and C can be made to recognize that an advantageous situation has occurred due to the behavior of the external device, and the low-probability time-saving state B, It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking C and leaving the seat.

Further, for any of the advantageous state start signals, after the lapse of each output time (after the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped), until the predetermined output prohibition period B (0.15 seconds) elapses. , The output of the new advantageous state start signal is not duplicated. The output period and output prohibition period B of the advantageous state start signal are the shortest special fluctuation time (2 seconds in this example) of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 as in the relationship between the output period and the output prohibition period A of the symbol confirmation signal. ) Is set to a shorter time, for example, the variation display of the special symbol is performed twice in succession, and the low probability time saving states B and C are continuously generated by the variation display of each special symbol. Case (when the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the low-probability time-saving state B is started and the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped and displayed to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C, or immediately after the low-probability time-saving state C is started. When the relief count counter reaches 600 times in the variable display of the special symbol and shifts to the low probability time saving state B, or when the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the low probability time saving state C is started, a new immediate short hit symbol is displayed. Even in the case of a stop display and a new transition to the low-probability time-saving state C, etc.), the advantageous state start signal corresponding to each state can be reliably transmitted to the external device side without duplication.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228, the fluctuation reset signal 1 output from the external output terminal 558ag and the fluctuation reset signal 2 output from the external output terminal 558ah have a low probability of non-time reduction based on the count value of the relief count counter. When the state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state B (t1 in FIG. 228), and when the special symbol stops and displays as an immediate short-hit symbol and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C (FIG. 228). It is output to t2) respectively. T1 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (b), and the variable reset signal 1 is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state B. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1 when transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0. , The current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified from the external information device to the outside such as a player. Further, t2 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case (c) described above, and the variable reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, the display of the number of fluctuations is reset to 0 by receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2 even when the transition from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C is received. However, the current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified from the external information device to the outside such as a player.

Further, these fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output regardless of whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started after the low probability time saving states B and C are started, similarly to the advantageous state start signal. For example, the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 have no special symbol hold at the start of the low-probability time saving states B and C (the number of hold of the lottery result of the first and second special symbols is zero), and the symbol is being displayed non-variably. It will be output even when the standby state is reached. As a result, even a player who does not know the existence of the low-probability time-saving states B and C can be made to recognize that an advantageous situation has occurred due to the behavior of the external device, and the low-probability time-saving state B, It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking C and leaving the seat. Further, for any of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, after the lapse of each output time (after the output of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is stopped), a predetermined output prohibition period C (0.15 seconds) is set. Until the elapse has passed, the new fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not output. The output period and output prohibition period C of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are the shortest special fluctuation time of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 (in this example, as in the relationship between the output period and the output prohibition period A of the symbol confirmation signal). The time is set to be shorter than 2 seconds), so that, for example, the variation display of the special symbol is performed twice in succession, and the low probability time saving states B and C are continuously displayed by the variation display of each special symbol. When it occurs (when the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the low-probability time-saving state B is started, the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped and displayed to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C, or when the low-probability time-saving state C is started. When the relief count counter reaches 600 times and shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B in the variation display of the special symbol immediately after, or when the variation display of the special symbol immediately after the low-probability time-saving state C is started, a new immediate short hit Even when the symbol is stopped and displayed and a new low-probability time-saving state C is entered, etc.), the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 corresponding to each state can be reliably transmitted to the external device side.

Further, the game state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai is special when the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the relief count counter (the above-mentioned opportunity (b)). When the symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)), each is set as an output trigger. Although the output is started at the preceding trigger (b), the new output is not started at the subsequent trigger (c). Specifically, regarding the "N fluctuation" in the "variation / stop of the special symbol" in FIG. 228, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game state signal is output when the trigger (c) arrives. , If the game status signal is not output, the output of the game status signal is newly started, and if the game status signal is output, the game status signal is continuously output without stopping. Is controlled. In this way, by continuously outputting the game state signal from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C without stopping the output of the game state signal in the middle, a series of advantageous states can be continued as described above. It is made to be recognizable on the external device side.

In addition, regarding "N fluctuation" in "variation / stop of special symbol" in FIG. 228, the one having a relationship of the 700th variation display in the low probability time saving state B (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short hit) is targeted. Even in this case, the output is started at the preceding trigger (b), but the new output is not started at the subsequent trigger (c). That is, as shown in t3 of FIG. 228, the output stop timing of the game state signal is the fixed time (for example, 0.128 seconds) after the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C. It is set at a predetermined timing after the lapse of (the timing when a specific surplus period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed since the fixed time has elapsed), and after the end of the low-probability time-saving state B or the low-probability time-saving state C. However, the output of the game status signal is slightly continued. Therefore, even if the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B and the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed, the low-probability time-saving is performed within the specific surplus period. When the state C is started, the output of the game state signal is treated in the same manner as when the state C is controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of the low-probability time-saving state B (the opportunity (c) has arrived). Processing will be performed (assuming that the game state signal is sometimes output), and it is considered that a series of advantageous states are continuing for a slight error, and the low probability time saving states B to C are in progress. It is designed so that it can be recognized by the external device as well.

It should be noted that the target is the one in which the "N fluctuation" in the "variation / stop of the special symbol" in FIG. 228 is related to the variation display after the 700th time in the low probability time saving state B (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short hit). In this case, even if it is controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C after the end of the low-probability time-saving state B, the output of the game state signal is newly started. Regarding this point, as another example, when the specific surplus period is set to be relatively long (for example, 10 seconds in which the special symbol can be performed multiple times in a low probability non-time saving state), the immediate short hit symbol is set. If the timing at which is stopped and displayed is within the specified surplus period, the output of the game state signal is treated in the same manner as when it is controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of the low-probability time-saving state B ( The processing may be performed (assuming that the game state signal is output when the trigger (c) arrives). By doing so, it is considered that a series of advantageous states are continuing even for the error of the number fluctuation of the special symbol, and it becomes possible to recognize it on the external device side as in the low probability time saving states B to C. .. In this embodiment, a low-probability time-saving state A (a low-probability time-saving state A that continues until the variation display of the special symbol is performed 559 times) due to the jackpot D described above is also set. Therefore, for example, when the trigger (b) is reached (600th special symbol variation display) through this low-probability time-saving state A (559 times of special symbol variation display) and the process shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B. In addition, if a time longer than "the time obtained by combining the special fluctuation time and the fixed time of the 600th special symbol" is set as the specific surplus period, the low-probability time-saving state A due to the jackpot D to the low-probability time-saving state A is set. The game state signal can be continuously output up to the state B, and it is considered that a series of advantageous states are continuing, and the recognition on the external device side becomes possible in the same manner as described above.

Next, FIG. 229 will be described. In FIG. 229, the free state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C (t1 in FIG. 229). ), And when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 229), they are output respectively. Both t1 and t2 in FIG. 229 correspond to the case (c) described above, and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the advantageous state start signal when transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C, and displays "1" for the number of special prizes. Even when the low probability time saving state C is changed to the new low probability time saving state C, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes in response to the output of the advantageous state start signal.

Further, the fluctuation reset signal 2 output from the external output terminal 558ah is when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state C (t1 in FIG. 229). , The special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol, and is output when the transition from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 229). Both t1 and t2 in FIG. 229 correspond to the above-mentioned trigger (c), and the variable reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2 when transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C, and resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0. , The current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified from the external information device to the outside such as a player. Further, even when the transition from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C is received, the display of the number of fluctuations is reset to 0 by receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2, and the player or the like from the external information device. The current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified to the outside. Note that FIG. 229 does not show the above-mentioned trigger (b) for transitioning to the low probability time saving state B based on the count value of the relief count counter, so that the fluctuation reset signal 1 is output from the external output terminal 558ag. not.

Further, the game state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C (the above-mentioned opportunity (c)). And, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)), each is set as an output trigger. In FIG. 229, the output is started when the low-probability non-time saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C, but the new output is generated when the low-probability time-saving state C is changed to the new low-probability time-saving state C. I try not to start. Specifically, for "N fluctuation" in "variation / stop of special symbol" in FIG. 229, the one having a relationship of variation display in the low probability time saving state C (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short hit) is targeted. It is shown as a time when it is controlled to shift to a new low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of the low-probability time-saving state C. Regarding such a game state signal of FIG. 229, when the trigger (c) arrives as described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game state signal is output, and outputs the game state signal. If not, the output of the game state signal is newly started, and if the game state signal is output, the game state signal is controlled to be continuously output without being stopped. In this way, by continuously outputting the game state signal from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C without stopping the output of the game state signal in the middle, as described above, a series of advantageous states. Is continuously recognized by the external device.

In addition, when the "N fluctuation" in the "change / stop of special symbol" in FIG. 229 is related to the variation display in the low probability time saving state C (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short hit). In addition, the output is started when the low-probability non-time saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C at the preceding opportunity (c), but the new low-probability time-saving state C is changed to the new low-probability time-saving state at the subsequent opportunity (c). When the state C is entered, a new output is not started. That is, as shown in t3 of FIG. 229, the output stop timing of the game state signal is the elapsed time (for example, 0.128 seconds) after the final change stop of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C as described above. It is set to a predetermined timing (the timing when a specific surplus period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed after the fixed time has elapsed), and the output of the game state signal is slightly even after the end of the low probability time saving state C. It is supposed to be continued. Therefore, even if the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C and the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed, the low-probability time-saving is performed within the specific surplus period. When the state C is started, the output of the game state signal is processed in the same manner as when the state C is newly controlled to shift to the low probability time saving state C in the middle of the low probability time saving state C. , A slight error is regarded as a continuation of a series of advantageous states so that it can be recognized by the external device.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output due to the occurrence of a “specific error state”. The control is controlled in a peculiar manner. This point will be described below.

The "specific error state" in the present embodiment is a state in which a specific abnormality that triggers the output of a security signal from the above-mentioned external output terminal 558ak to an external device has occurred. Here, the trigger for outputting a security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to an external device is, for example, a magnetic abnormality related to a magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to a vibration sensor, or an ordinary electric motor when a game ball is won in a normal electric accessory during normal times. Abnormal character winning, abnormal winning opening when there is a prize in the large winning opening at normal times, abnormal safe switch related to the safe switch, abnormal passing through the probabilistic area when the game ball passes through the probabilistic area at normal times, when clearing RAM , It is a case where it is determined that there is a designated symbol route abnormality, a RAM error, or the like, and the state in which these determinations are made is defined as "a state in which a specific abnormality has occurred". In this "state in which a specific abnormality has occurred", it is highly likely that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal game has been played, and the game may not proceed normally. It is important to inform external devices of this situation through security signals. However, if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to the external device for some reason, there is a possibility that the information cannot be transmitted to the external device through the security signal. Regarding this point, in the present embodiment, when a specific abnormality occurs in a state where all the outputs of the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset signal 1 and 2 are stopped, or when a specific abnormality occurs, the advantageous state start signal and fluctuation reset are performed. When a specific abnormality occurs while either signal 1 or 2 is being output, the mode is different from when the game is proceeding normally (when a specific error state does not occur). It is controlled so that, apart from the security signal, it is notified to the external device that the game is not proceeding normally.

First, a case where a specific abnormality occurs while all the outputs of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped will be described. In the present embodiment, all the outputs of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped until the above-mentioned triggers (b) and (c) occur in the low probability non-time saving state. If a specific abnormality occurs in this state, a security signal will be output from the external output terminal 558ak to the external device, but in addition to that, the above-mentioned trigger ( b) Even if (c) occurs, all of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not output, and control is performed so that they are maintained in the stopped state.

That is, in the normal state, when the triggers (b) and (c) occur, the output of the game state signal is started, and the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output. Under the circumstances where a specific abnormality has occurred, even if the triggers (b) and (c) occur, only the output of the game state signal is started, but the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are the same. The output is limited, and from the external device side, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not input, and only the game state signal is input, which is a peculiar input situation. As described above, a specific abnormality can be detected on the external device side through a security signal if the external output terminal 558ak is connected to the external device, but the external output terminal 558ak must be connected to the external device. For example, since the security signal is not input to the external device, the external device cannot detect it. Regarding this, in the present embodiment, under a situation where a specific abnormality has occurred, when the triggers (b) and (c) occur in a low probability non-time saving state, a peculiar input situation that cannot occur under normal conditions. (A situation in which the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not input, but only the game state signal is input) is generated, and this peculiar input situation can occur, so that the security signal is tentatively sent to the external device. Even if it is not input, it is possible for the external device to detect that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or that an illegal game has been played.

Next, a case where a specific abnormality occurs while either the advantageous state start signal or the fluctuation reset signal 1 or 2 is output will be described. In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned triggers (b) and (c) occur in the normal state, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output over a predetermined output period, respectively, and the output is stopped after the output period elapses. Is to be done. However, if a specific abnormality occurs within the output periods of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, in the present embodiment, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation are normally caused by the passage of each output period. Where the outputs of both reset signals 1 and 2 should be stopped, the outputs of both the advantageous state start signal and the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are continued even after the respective output periods elapse. It is controlled to maintain the output state.

That is, in the normal state, when the triggers (b) and (c) occur, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output over a predetermined output period, but the output thereof. If a specific abnormality occurs within the period, both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not stopped endlessly even after each output period has elapsed, and the output is not stopped endlessly. It is designed to be a peculiar input situation in which the input is continued beyond even the maximum value of the jackpot period, which is the output period of a). As described above, a specific abnormality can be detected on the external device side through a security signal if the external output terminal 558ak is connected to the external device, but if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to the external device, security can be detected. The signal is not input to the external device and cannot be detected by the external device. Regarding this, in the present embodiment, when a specific abnormality occurs in the state where the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output, a peculiar input situation (advantageous state) that cannot occur in the normal state is obtained. The input period of the start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is continued beyond the maximum value of the jackpot period, which is the output period of the trigger (a)), and due to this peculiar input situation, security is assumed. Even if the signal is not input to the external device, it is possible for the external device to detect whether the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or an illegal game has been played.

In the present embodiment, all of the above-mentioned peculiar input situations are canceled by resolving a specific abnormality, but if the condition for resolving the specific abnormality is that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the power is re-turned. It is preferable that the peculiar input situation is continued until the input.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 output at the same time in the normal state are used to generate a peculiar input situation, but the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation Even if only one of the reset signals 1 and 2 is used, it is possible to generate a situation equivalent to the above-mentioned peculiar input situation. However, by generating a peculiar input situation by using both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, one of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is input to the external device. Even if it is not, it becomes possible to detect that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or an illegal game has been played by the other input, and the information is transmitted to the external device. At that time, the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the "specific error state", all of the specific abnormalities that trigger the output of the security signal from the above-mentioned external output terminal 558ak to the external device are targeted. It is not limited, and may target a part of a specific abnormality that triggers the output of a security signal. In this case, in consideration of detecting that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or an illegal game has been played, a specific abnormality is selected from the abnormalities that trigger the output of the security signal. The conditions to be made to correspond should be set on the game machine designer side, and the conditions to be made to correspond to a specific abnormality from among the abnormalities that trigger the output of security signals should be arbitrarily set on the hall side. Can be exemplified.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the low-probability time-saving state B is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C and the low-probability time-saving state is continued, and the low-probability time-saving state C is changed to the new low-probability time-saving state C. Although the case where the low-probability time-saving state is continued by transitioning to is described in detail, the present invention is not limited to these, and the present invention is not limited to these, for example, from the low-probability time-saving state A which is transitioned based on the above-mentioned jackpot. Similarly, even when the low-probability time-saving state is continued by transitioning to the time-saving states B and C, or when the low-probability time-saving state C is changed to the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state is continued. , Advantageous state start signal, fluctuation reset signal 1, 2, and game state signal are output. Of these, the game state signal will be continuously output until the output stop timing arrives after the output is started at the earliest trigger such as the start of the big hit game state. As a result, the external device can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in an advantageous state for the player. For example, the notification from the external information device is not stopped even once, and the pachinko machine 1 is above the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to continuously notify the outside of the player and the like that the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player from the installed external information device, and the player misidentifies the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed.

The external terminal board 558 of the present embodiment is provided with 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, but the external terminal board 558 has a variable reset signal X like the above-mentioned external output terminal ax. At least one external output terminal may be further arranged to output. The external output terminal ax may be arranged, for example, on the game board 5, or more specifically, on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5. Therefore, when adding the external output terminal ax, by providing the game board 5 (main control board 1310) according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 whether the external output terminal ax is necessary or not, the external terminal board 558 and thus the main body are provided. The external output terminal ax can be added without replacing the frame 4, the cost for adding the external output terminal ax can be suppressed, and the design change can be facilitated.

Further, among the 10 external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, all or at least the external output terminal 558af, the external output terminal 558ag, the external output terminal 558ah, and the external output terminal 558ai used for a peculiar gaming machine as in the present embodiment. Some of them may be arranged on the game board 5, for example, and more specifically, they may be arranged on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5. Regarding the external output terminal 558af, the external output terminal 558ag, the external output terminal 558ah, and the external output terminal 558ai used for such a peculiar gaming machine, each game board 5 (main control board 1310) according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By making changes to, it is possible to add external output terminals as needed without replacing the external terminal board 558 and thus the main body frame 4, and it is possible to facilitate design changes.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol that triggers the start of the low-probability time-saving state B, that is, the immediate short hit that triggers the start of the low-probability time-saving state C in the 600th variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability state, is won. , An external signal corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state B (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 1) and an external signal corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 2). ) Both signals are not output, but only one signal is output. Specifically, when the immediate short hit is won in the variable display of the special symbol that triggers the start of the low-probability time-saving state B, the case is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C in preference to the low-probability time-saving state B. Outputs an external signal corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 2), and wins an immediate short hit with the fluctuation display of the special symbol that triggers the start of the low-probability time-saving state B. When it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B in preference to the low-probability time-saving state C, the external signal corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state B (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 1) is used. Output the corresponding external signal. It should be noted that when an immediate short hit is won in the variable display of the special symbol that triggers the start of the low-probability time-saving state B, which of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C is preferentially controlled is playability. It may be set appropriately according to the above.

[LED light emission mode of function display unit 1400]
FIG. 230 is a front view showing the function display unit 1400. The LED light emitting mode of the function display unit 1400 described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 230 and the like. As shown in FIG. 230, the function display unit 1400 is a first special symbol consisting of eight LEDs 1400aa to 1400ah that display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004. A first special hold number indicator 1400b consisting of a display 1400a, two LEDs 1400ba and 1400bb for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2004, and a game ball to the second start port 2005. The second special symbol display 1400c consisting of eight LEDs 1400ca to 1400ch that displays the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of B, and the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 A second special hold number indicator 1400d consisting of two LEDs 1400da and 1400db to be displayed, and a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs 1400ea and 1400eb displaying the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the gate 2002. It is provided with a device 1400e and a normal hold display 1400f composed of two LEDs 1400fa and 1400fb for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002. The first special symbol display 1400a, the second special symbol display 1400c, and the normal symbol display 1400e are, for example, that each symbol is being drawn by blinking each LED 1400aa to 1400ah, 1400ca to 1400ch, 1400ea, and 1400eb. Is displayed, and the lottery result of each symbol is displayed by the lighting / extinguishing pattern of each LED 1400aa to 1400ah, 1400ca to 1400ch, 1400ea, and 1400eb, and the player confirms the function display unit 1400 so that each symbol can be displayed. It is possible to confirm that the lottery is in progress or the lottery result of each symbol.

Further, the first special hold number indicator 1400b, the second special hold number indicator 1400d, and the normal hold indicator 1400f are, for example, extinguishing, lighting, and blinking each LED 1400ba, 1400bb, 1400da, 1400db, 1400fa, and 1400fb. Each hold number is displayed by a pattern, and the player can confirm the hold number corresponding to each symbol by checking the function display unit 1400. Specifically, in the case of the first special hold number indicator 1400b, it indicates that the hold number is 0 when each LED 1400ba and 1400 bb is turned off, and when the LED 1400ba is on and the LED 1400 bb is off, the hold number is 1. When each LED 1400ba and 1400bb is lit, the number of holdings is 2, when the LED1400ba is blinking, and when the LED1400bb is lit, the number of holdings is 3, and when each LED 1400ba and 1400bb is blinking. Indicates that the number of pending numbers is 4.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display 1400 g composed of two LEDs 1400 g and 1400 gb for displaying the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, and two LEDs 1400 ha and 1400 hb indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a right-handed state. When the right-handed display 1400h and the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol are "hits", etc., the number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first prize opening 2006 and the second prize opening 2007 ( It is equipped with a round display 1400i composed of four LEDs 1400ia to 1400id for displaying the number of rounds). The right-handed display 1400h displays, for example, that each LED 1400ha and 1400hb is on or off to indicate that it is in a right-handed state in which right-handed is required at the time of a big hit or each time reduction, and the player displays the function display unit 1400. By confirming, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is currently in a right-handed state. Specifically, when each LED 1400ha and 1400hb is lit, it indicates that it is in a right-handed state, and when each LED 1400ha and 1400hb is turned off, it indicates that it is not in a right-handed state.

Further, the round display 1400i determines the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of each large winning opening when the lottery result of each special symbol is "hit" or the like, for example, by the pattern of turning on and off each LED 1400ia to 1400id. By displaying and confirming the function display unit 1400 when the lottery result of each special symbol is "hit" or the like, the player can confirm the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening. Specifically, it indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 2 when the LEDs 1400ia are on and each LED 1400ib to 1400id is off, and when each LED 1400ia and 1400ic is on and each LED 1400ib and 1400id is off, the number of repetitions (number of rounds). The number of rounds) is 3 times, each LED 1400ia to 1400ic is lit, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 5 when the LED 1400id is off, and the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 5 times when each LED 1400ia to 1400id is lit. The number of rounds) is 10 times.

Further, the state display 1400 g is, for example, by turning on and off each LED 1400 g and 1400 gb, the pachinko machine 1 has the above-mentioned low-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state (each low-probability time-saving state A, B, C), and high. It is displayed that it is either the probability time saving state or the high probability non-time saving state, and the player can confirm the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 by confirming the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when each LED 1400ga and 1400gb is turned off, it indicates that it is in a low-probability non-time saving state, and when LED1400ga is turned off and LED1400gb is turned on, it is in a low-probability time-saving state (each low-probability time-saving state A, B, C). It indicates that there is a high probability non-time saving state when the LED 1400ga is lit and the LED 1400gb is turned off, and it is shown that the high probability time saving state is when each LED 1400ga and 1400gb is lit.

[LED light emission mode of the function display unit 1400 when the time saving state is continuous]
Next, the light emitting mode of the state indicator 1400 g when the time saving state is continuous will be described in detail. In the conventional pachinko machine, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be in the lighting state every time a time saving state occurs. That is, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state and the time saving state is controlled again after the big hit game (when the time saving state occurs continuously), the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is temporarily turned off. After controlling, it is controlled to be lit again. However, in the present embodiment, unlike the conventional control via a big hit, the gaming machine has a game playability by a peculiar control that directly connects the time saving state, and the gaming machine having such a game play property is the same as the conventional one. If the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be turned off / on every time a time saving state occurs, the following problems may occur. That is, the time saving state is terminated by the player by temporarily controlling the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 to be turned off even though the time saving state is directly and continuously generated without going through the big hit. It may give a misunderstanding that it has been done, and may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time saving state directly and continuously occurs without going through a big hit, the light emitting state of the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 does not give a misunderstanding to the player. This is explained in detail below. FIG. 231 shows a situation in which the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state A via a jackpot, and further transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state A. It is a thing.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the control is performed in the low probability time saving state B, a game state signal is sent from the external output terminal 558af to the external device, and every time the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (the confirmation time of the special symbol). Every time) is started, a symbol confirmation signal is output. Further, since the low-probability time-saving state B is the time-saving state, the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be in the lighting state. In FIG. 231, the LED 1400ga of the status display 1400g is maintained in the off state because the pachinko machine 1 has not transitioned to the high probability state.

As described above, the game state signal is output when it is controlled to either the time saving state, the high probability state, or the big hit game, and while it is in an advantageous state (in this example, the time saving state, the high probability state, and the big hit). While controlling to one of the games), it is designed to continuously output. That is, in FIG. 231, although the output of the game state signal is started when the low probability time saving state B, which is the preceding trigger, is controlled, the game is controlled to the big hit game based on the stop result of the special symbol, which is the subsequent trigger. When (t1 in FIG. 231) or when the transition from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231), no new output is started. That is, when each opportunity to output the game state signal arrives, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game state signal is output, and if the game state signal is not output, a new game state is obtained. When the output of the signal is started and the game state signal is output, the game state signal is controlled to be continuously output without being stopped. This makes it possible for the external device side (particularly the hall computer) to recognize that a series of advantageous states are continuing.

Further, the symbol confirmation signal is a signal for each time the special symbol change is stopped regardless of the gaming states of the low-probability non-time-saving state, each low-probability time-saving state A, B, C, the high-probability time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state. A symbol confirmation signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to an external device (every time the special symbol confirmation time starts), and the external device (particularly an external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1). Then, when the symbol confirmation signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is input, the display of the number of fluctuations is added one by one.

Further, when the game is controlled to a big hit game based on the stop result of the special symbol (t1 in FIG. 231), the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol, and the transition from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C. At that time (t3 in FIG. 231), the advantageous state start signal is output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device. T1 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned opportunity (a), and is until all the opening of the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 is completed while being controlled by the big hit game. The advantageous state start signal is continuously output during the jackpot period (such as during), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped at the end of the jackpot game. Further, t3 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (c), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. After that, even if it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, it is not output. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the advantageous state start signal is input based on the fact that the low probability time saving state B is controlled by the big hit game, in other words, the advantageous state start signal is in the big hit period. When the advantageous state start signal is input based on the transition from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C by adding "1" to the display of the number of special prizes. In other words, when the advantageous state start signal is input only for 0.256 seconds, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes. On the other hand, in the hall computer, when the advantageous state start signal is input based on the control from the low probability time saving state B to the big hit game, in other words, the advantageous state start signal is input for more than 0.256 seconds. In that case, "1" is added to the display of the number of special prizes, but when the advantageous state start signal is input based on the transition from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C, in other words, the advantageous state start. When the signal is input over the jackpot period, the number of special prizes is maintained without adding "1" to the display of the number of special prizes. In this way, while the hall computer accurately displays the number of times controlled by the jackpot game, the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 not only accurately displays the number of times controlled by the jackpot game, but also has a low probability. The total number of times controlled in the time saving state B is displayed. Therefore, the number of times controlled by the big hit game is displayed to the player more than the actual number of times to stimulate the game motivation, and the hall manager is controlled to the big hit game by the display of the hall computer. It will be possible to accurately grasp the number of times it has been done.

Further, when the jackpot game is controlled based on the stop result of the special symbol (t1 in FIG. 231), in addition to the above-mentioned advantageous state start signal and game state signal, the fluctuation reset signal 1 and the fluctuation reset signal 2 And are output from the external output terminal 558ah to the external device. T1 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case (a) described above, and the variable reset signals 1 and 2 are continuously output over the jackpot period, and the variable reset signal 1 and 2 are output upon the end of the jackpot game. The output of 2 is stopped. Further, in the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are input over the big hit period based on the control from the low probability time saving state B to the big hit game. Is designed to reset the display of the number of fluctuations to 0.

Further, in this example, the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be turned off over the jackpot period so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. That is, in the big hit game, the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2007 is controlled multiple times, but a large amount of game balls (prize balls) are acquired by inserting the game ball into the second big winning opening 2007. It is possible, and it has a great influence on the profit of the player. Therefore, when the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is lit, the occurrence of the time saving state is mistakenly recognized and the game ball. There is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on the jackpot game, including the launch mode of. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED 1400gb of the status display 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to the extinguished state while the jackpot game is controlled, regardless of whether or not the time saving state is controlled after the big hit game is completed. Therefore, while controlling the big hit game (big hit period), attention is not paid to the LED 1400 gb of the status display 1400 g of the function display unit 1400, and the big hit game is concentrated. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, when transitioning to the low probability time saving state A after the end of the big hit game, the output of the advantageous state start signal, the fluctuation reset signal 1, and the fluctuation reset signal 2 is stopped (t2 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, the game state signal is continuously output without being stopped even when the state transitions to the low probability time saving state A. Further, in the case of transitioning to the low probability time saving state A, the LED 1400gb of the state display unit 1400g of the function display unit 1400 controlled to be turned off when the big hit game is started is controlled to be turned on again to control the time saving state. It is designed to notify you of what you are doing.

Further, t3 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case (c) described above, and the variable reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time saving state C. .. Further, in this example, in the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, even when the transition from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C is performed, the fluctuation reset signal 2 is output and the number of fluctuations is displayed. Is reset to 0.

Further, the LED 1400 gb of the state display 1400 g is controlled to be in a lighting state when the jackpot game transitions to the low probability time saving state A (t2 in FIG. 231), but the special symbol is immediately shortened during the low probability time saving state A. When the stop display is displayed with the hit symbol and the transition from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231), the lighting state is maintained without being changed to the off state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the machine transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C without executing the jackpot game, and the time-saving state control has already been executed, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is turned off. I try to keep the lighting state without changing to. As described above, if the game is controlled by the big hit game, the player may be disadvantaged. Therefore, even if the time is reduced after the big hit game is finished, the state is displayed while the game is controlled by the big hit game. The LED 1400gb of the vessel 1400g is controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions to the low probability time saving state C, the big hit game is not executed, so that there is no risk of giving a disadvantage to the player, and the LED 1400 gb of the status indicator 1400 g is used. By changing to the off state once, the player is rather confused, or the player who recognizes that the transition to the low probability time saving state C is caused by the immediate short hit symbol being stopped and displayed is anxious or distrustful. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state C without executing the jackpot game, the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g is maintained in the lit state without being changed to the off state so as not to confuse the player. At the same time, I try not to make them feel uneasy or distrustful.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 231 above, the mode in which the low-probability time-saving state B is changed to the low-probability time-saving state A via the jackpot game has been described with respect to the lighting and extinguishing states of the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g. The same applies to the mode of transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state A to the new low-probability time-saving state A via the jackpot game, or the mode of transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state C to the low-probability time-saving state A via the jackpot game. During the big hit game, the LED 1400 gb of the state display 1400 g is controlled to be turned off against the game state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the big hit game without paying attention to the light emission of each LED 1400ga and 1400gb of the state display 1400g, thereby not giving a disadvantage to the player. Further, in the mode of transitioning from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state A via the big hit game, the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g is output from the external output terminal 558ai between the low probability non-time saving state and the big hit game. Since it is controlled to be turned off against the game state signal, the player can concentrate on the big hit game without paying attention to the light emission of each LED 1400ga and 1400 gb of the state display 1400 g.

Further, in the mode of transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 228 to the low-probability time-saving state C via the low-probability time-saving state B, when the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled, the state indicator 1400 g. The LED 1400gb is controlled to be turned off, and a symbol confirmation signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device every time the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (every time the confirmation time of the special symbol starts), and the external device (especially). In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the symbol confirmation signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is input, the display of the number of fluctuations is added one by one. In addition, in FIG. 228, the LED 1400ga of the state display 1400 g is maintained in the off state because the pachinko machine 1 has not transitioned to the high probability state.

Further, in the case of transitioning from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the above-mentioned relief count counter (t1 in FIG. 228), the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g is controlled to be in the lighting state. The advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 1 are output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device for 0.128 seconds, and the game state signal is further output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device. The lighting state of the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained at least during the low probability time saving state B (t1 to t2 in FIG. 228), and the gaming state signal is maintained at least during the low probability time saving state B (t1 to t2 in FIG. 228). Is maintained. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the advantageous state start signal when transitioning from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and displays "1" for the number of special prizes. The addition is performed, and the display of the number of fluctuations is reset to 0 in response to the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1.

As described above, the display of the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 is reset even when the big hit game is ended or the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in this example, the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game, the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol executed after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the count value of the relief count counter. The number of times the variation display of the special symbol is executed after the value becomes "600" is notified. In addition, the display of the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device is reset only when the big hit game is performed, and when the big hit game is not performed (when the immediate short hit occurs or the count value of the relief count counter is "600"". When it becomes), the display of the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device may not be reset. Further, the relief count counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state and does not count the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high probability state, but the number of fluctuations displayed on the external information device is displayed in the low probability state. Not only the number of fluctuations of the special symbol but also the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high probability state is displayed.

Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol and transitions from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C (t2 in FIG. 228), the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g is not changed to the extinguished state. The lighting state is maintained, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 2 are output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device for 0.256 seconds, and the game state signal is continued from the external output terminal 558af to the external device. And output.

When the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled and the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C, the big hit game is not executed, and the game state does not change from the low-probability time-saving state. Therefore, there is no risk of giving a disadvantage to the player even if the player is not notified when transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the state indicator is displayed when the low-probability time-saving state B is terminated. When the 1400 g LED 1400 gb is temporarily turned off and the low probability time saving state C is started, the state indicator 1400 g LED 1400 gb is turned on again to confuse the player, or the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed. This may cause anxiety or distrust of the player who recognizes that the transition to the low probability time saving state C occurs. Therefore, when the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled and the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is lit without changing to the off state. By maintaining this, the player is not confused, and at the same time, it is not anxious or distrustful.

Further, when the low-probability time-saving state C ends and the low-probability time-saving state C transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving state (t3 in FIG. 228), the LED 1400gb of the state display 1400g is controlled from the lit state to the extinguished state. , Stops the output of the game status signal when the specified surplus engine has elapsed. As described above, in this example, when the LED 1400 gb of the status indicator 1400 g is controlled from the off state to the lit state, the output of the game state signal is also started at the same time, but when the LED 1400 gb of the status indicator 1400 g is controlled from the lit state to the lit state. The timing to stop the output of the game status signal is delayed. As a result, even if the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving states A, B, and C, and the process shifts to the low-probability time-saving state C, the specified surplus period is reached. If the low-probability time-saving state C is started, the output of the game state signal is treated in the same manner as when the game state signal is controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of the low-probability time-saving states A, B, and C. Processing will be performed, and it is considered that a series of advantageous states are continuing for a slight error, so that the external device can recognize it as in the low-probability time-saving states C to C. As a result, it is possible to make the duration of the advantageous state appear longer, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state A, B, C and shifts to the low probability time saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is turned off. It is controlled to maintain the lighting state without changing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, and to prevent anxiety and distrust as to whether or not the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 229 described above, in the case of transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C, the lighting state is maintained without changing the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g to the off state. The advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signal 2 are output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device for 0.256 seconds, and the game state signal is continuously output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device.

When the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled, the immediate short-time hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and even when the transition to a new low-probability time-saving state C is performed, the immediate short-time state B is controlled when the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state B is controlled. Similar to the case where the hit symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C, the big hit game is not executed, and the game state does not change from the low-probability time-saving state. Therefore, when transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state C to the low-probability time-saving state C, that is, when continuously controlling the low-probability time-saving state C, there is no risk of giving a disadvantage to the player without notifying that fact. When the low-probability time-saving state C under control is terminated, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is temporarily turned off, and when a new low-probability time-saving state C is started, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is turned on again. This may confuse the player, or may cause anxiety or distrust of the player who recognizes that the low-probability time-saving state C will continue because the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled and the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped and displayed to transition to a new low-probability time-saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is not changed to the extinguished state. By keeping the lighting state, the player is not confused, and at the same time, it is not anxious or distrustful.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231 described above, during the jackpot game (t1 to t2 in FIG. 231), the LED 1400 gb of the status indicator 1400 g is controlled to be turned off, but the time is shortened. When controlling to a small hit game during the state, by maintaining the lighting state of the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g even during the small hit game, the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g is turned off by the rare small hit game. It may be possible to prevent the player from becoming anxious and not to make the player feel uneasy or distrustful. Specifically, during the above-mentioned low-probability non-time saving state (LED 1400 gb off state), the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g is maintained in the off state while the small hit game is performed. It is controlled so that the LED1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained in the lighting state while the small hit game is performed during the low probability time saving states A to C (LED1400gb is in the lighting state). To. As a result, even if a small hit game that has a lower profit level than the big hit game and is completed in a short time occurs in the game progress process in the time saving state, the pachinko machine 1 does not misunderstand that the pachinko machine 1 is in the non-time saving state. It is possible to continuously notify that the pachinko machine is in a time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the above description, it is illustrated that the lighting state of the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g is maintained even during the small hit game, but as another example, a specific big hit game among a plurality of types of big hit games (for example, two rounds, etc.) A big hit, such as while a big hit game that ends in a short period of time) is executed, or if certain conditions are met during the big hit game (for example, if the game ball does not enter the so-called V winning opening and the big hit ends early). If a specific light emission condition is satisfied during the game, it is considered that the influence of the problem that the player misidentifies the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is not large, and the LED 1400 gb of the state display 1400 g is lit even during the big hit game. You may try to maintain the state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player is misunderstood by maintaining the light emitting state of the LED 1400 gb of the state indicator 1400 g of the function display unit 1400 when the time saving state directly and continuously occurs without going through a big hit. In addition to this, the light emission / extinguishing state of the right-handed display 1400h consisting of two LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in the right-handed state should also be passed through a big hit. It may be maintained when the time saving state occurs directly and continuously. Specifically, in the present embodiment, right-handed hitting is recommended aiming at winning the second big winning opening 2007 during the big hit game, so that the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled in the lit state. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes in a short time state is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and left-handed is recommended when aiming to win a prize in the variable winning opening 2003. , LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled in the off state. Therefore, for example, when the low probability time saving state B is controlled and the transition to the low probability time saving state A is performed via the big hit game, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb in the off state are turned on based on the start of the big hit game. After that, it is controlled to be turned off based on the time saving state. On the other hand, when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to the low probability time saving state C when the low probability time saving state B is controlled, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb in the off state are the immediate short hit symbols immediately. It is controlled to be maintained in the off state including before and after the stop display. In this way, when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state, the light emission / extinguishing state of the right-handed display 1400h is maintained unchanged. It is possible to continuously notify the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in the non-time saving state without causing the player to misidentify it, and it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. The right-handed display 1400h is not limited to the same configuration as this embodiment. For example, in a state where right-handedness is recommended, LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled in a red lighting state, and left-handedness is recommended. In the state, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled in the blue lighting state, and the control similar to the above (when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed and transitions to a new low probability time saving state, the blue lighting state is set. (Maintain) may be done. Alternatively, in the state where right-handed striking is recommended, only the LED1400ha is controlled in the lit state, and in the state where left-handed striking is recommended, only the LED1400hb is controlled in the lit state, and the control similar to the above (immediate short hit symbol). Is displayed as a stop and transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state, the lighting state of only the LED 1400hb may be maintained).

[Help mode L rush count notification effect]
Next, a modification example that is partially different from the above-mentioned help mode L effect will be described below. In the help mode L effect of the modified example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). The same is true in that the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, but the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state is a predetermined specific number of notifications (low-probability time-saving state B). The number of changes in the special symbol for which the transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is scheduled when the number of times reaches less than 600 times, which is the start trigger. The difference is that the peripheral control board 1510 side executes the "help mode L rush count notification effect" that notifies the remaining number of fluctuations up to 600 times. It should be noted that both the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect" and the "help mode L rush count notification effect" described below may be executed, or only one of them may be executed. ..

In the "help mode L rush count notification effect" of this example, the power is turned on regardless of which value (count value) is stored (maintained) in the relief count counter when the power is turned on. It is an effect that is executed when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol performed in a low probability state reaches a predetermined specific number of notifications (200 times in this example) without the big hit game occurring. .. The count of the specific number of notifications to which the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is to be performed uses the notification-only counter provided on the peripheral control board 1510 instead of the relief count counter provided on the main control board 1310. The peripheral control board 1510 counts based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 every time the variation of the special symbol is displayed in a low probability state after the power is turned on. It suppresses the load on the substrate 1310 side. The value of the notification-only counter is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off or the power is turned on, and the value is not stored (maintained) like the relief count counter. Hereinafter, the progress of the “help mode L rush count notification effect” will be described using a time chart.

FIG. 232 (a) is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when 350 is set (maintained) in the relief count counter at the time of power-on (that is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 350). Is. As shown in FIG. 232 (a), in the low probability state after the power is turned on, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed 200 times after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring (relief count counter = 550, notification). Dedicated count counter = 200), and the 200th special symbol fluctuation display (Z fluctuation) is scheduled to control the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L"). The "help mode L rush count notification effect" for notifying the remaining number of fluctuations (“50 times” in this example) up to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol being 600 is executed. In the "help mode L rush count notification effect", for example, "50 times remaining until the help mode L" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the remaining fluctuation until the help mode L is started for the player. It is designed to notify that the number of times is 50 times. It should be noted that the counting (update) of the notification-only count counter is stopped with the execution of the "help mode L rush count notification effect", and after that, even if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is not counted.

An external information device installed in the island facility of the game hall that displays the game history can display information on the number of changes in the special symbol. Specifically, the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the day. Information, in other words, information on the number of changes in the special symbol executed during one business day from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the start of business of the game hall to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business is closed is displayed. It is customary for the player to grasp and confirm the current game situation by referring to the information on the number of fluctuations of the external information device. Further, on a new business day, the fluctuation frequency information displayed on the external information device is generally reset to "0".

That is, if the gaming state after the power is turned on is a low probability state and the 200th special symbol variation display is executed without becoming a big hit after the power is turned on, the value of the relief count counter is maintained when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, "200 times" will be displayed on the external information device as information on the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the day (there may be slight differences depending on the settings of the external information device). Here, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the value of the relief count counter is maintained when the power is turned on, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the actual transition timing to the low probability time saving state B. be. However, since the execution timing of the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is when the 200th special symbol variation display is executed without becoming a big hit after the power is turned on, the external information device should be visually recognized. If so, the player can easily grasp it. As a result, even for a player who is anxious because he / she does not know the actual timing of transition to the low-probability time-saving state B, the number of changes of the special symbol scheduled to be controlled to shift to the low-probability time-saving state B is up to 600 times. It is possible to induce the game to continue until the timing for notifying the remaining number of fluctuations of the above (execution timing of the "help mode L rush count notification effect") is reached, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate. In addition, the player is informed that the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is executed and the remaining number of fluctuations up to 600 fluctuations of the special symbol scheduled to be controlled to shift to the low probability time saving state B is small. If it is grasped, the motivation to continue the game can be continuously increased. The content of the game history displayed on the external information device is switched by the player's operation on the external information device (for example, from the state of displaying the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the day as information on the number of changes of the special symbol). It is also possible to switch to a state where the final number of fluctuations on the previous day is displayed, etc.), and if these game histories are taken into consideration, "Low probability time saving state B with the expectation that the value of the relief count counter will be maintained when the power is turned on. In addition to the game motivation of "aiming to shift to", it is possible to give the player a new game motivation of "aiming to execute the help mode L rush count notification effect".

Further, as another embodiment, for example, the relief count counter at the time of turning on the power is "0" (the relief count counter is initialized), and the big hit game does not occur in the low probability state after the power is turned on. When the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed 200 times after the power is turned on (relief count counter = 200, notification-only count counter = 200), the execution of "help mode L rush count notification effect" reduces the probability of time. It will be understood by the player that the number of remaining fluctuations up to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol scheduled to be controlled to shift to the state B is large, up to 600. Even in such a case, in this example, the execution timing of the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is set to the variable display of the special symbol of "200 times", and the "help mode L rush count count" is set. The transition timing from the execution timing of the "notification effect" to the low-probability time-saving state B is set to 1/3 of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol 600 times for which the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state B is scheduled. As a result, the motivation to continue the game for the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B is not lost, and the player is given the right to choose whether to end or continue the game, and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. In addition, it is desirable that the execution timing of the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is set to a value that can maintain the motivation to continue the game. It is preferably within 1/2 to 1/3 of the number of fluctuations of 600 times.

Further, in the above, as an embodiment of the "help mode L rush count notification effect", an embodiment of clearly indicating the start time of the low probability time saving state B such as "remaining XX times until the help mode L" is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode may be such that the start time of the low probability time saving state B is abstractly notified. For example, an embodiment according to the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol whose transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B is planned up to 600 times (for example, if the remaining number of fluctuations is 1 to 100). ☆ is displayed on the staging display device 1600, ◎ is displayed on the staging display device 1600 if the remaining number of fluctuations is 101 to 200, and 〇 is displayed on the staging display device 1600 if the remaining number of fluctuations is 201 to 300. If the number of remaining fluctuations is 301 to 599, Δ may be displayed on the staging display device 1600 to display (a mode in which it is difficult to accurately determine the number of remaining fluctuations, etc.). , Even after the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is executed, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation and tension regarding the start timing of the low probability time saving state B and proceed with the game. Further, in this case, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is scheduled to be controlled to shift from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, is notified with a predetermined range. Since it is difficult to grasp the exact number of remaining fluctuations, the game can be continued not only when the number of remaining fluctuations is small but also when the number of remaining fluctuations is large, and the decrease in the operating rate is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the above, the use of the display on the effect display device 1600 is exemplified as the execution mode of the "help mode L rush count notification effect", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "help mode L rush count number of times" is not limited to this. The "notification effect" may be executed by a light emission effect using LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, or a sound effect using the sound output from the speaker. In addition, when trying to execute "help mode L rush count notification effect" using light emission effect or sound effect, LED light emission or sound output depending on other effects or game conditions (some error, etc.). May be used for other purposes (the LED light emission and sound output may be used at the same time), but even in such a case, "help mode L rush" by light emission effect or sound effect. The priority of the "number of times notification effect" may be set lower than that of other uses. By doing so, even if the execution time of the "help mode L rush count notification effect" arrives, the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is performed according to other effects and game conditions (such as some error). It will be non-execution, and the player who expects "help mode L rush count notification effect" will be given a sense of tension to pay attention to the usage trend of LED light emission and sound output at the execution time, and the game will proceed. be able to.

Further, before executing the "help mode L rush count notification effect", the same "help mode L rush count notification precursor effect" (distinguished from the help mode L precursor effect) similar to the above help mode L precursor effect. It may be a possible mode, or it may be a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the help mode L precursor effect) to suggest that the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is imminent. Often, in this case, the remaining number of fluctuations up to the help mode L rush count notification effect may be notified as the "help mode L rush count notification effect", or the help mode L rush count notification effect may be notified. It may be difficult to grasp the exact number of remaining fluctuations by displaying the mode corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations (a mode in which it is difficult to determine the accurate number of remaining fluctuations). In addition, in the "help mode L rush count notification precursor effect", the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are set to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L rush count notification precursor effect. Alternatively, the BGM for the help mode L rush count notification precursor effect may be output from the speaker. As a result, the player can be made aware that the help mode L rush count notification precursor effect is being executed, and the effect can be enhanced by sound or light.

Further, in the above example, the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall displays information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, but it is different from the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall, or. In addition to the external information device provided in the island equipment of the game hall, the display device provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the effect display device 1600) may display the game history including information on the number of changes of the special symbol. In this case, a separate counter is newly provided on the peripheral control board 1510 side to control the counting and display of information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is linked with the count value of the relief count counter when the power is turned off or the power is turned on. It should be possible to initialize (reset) independently without doing so. As a result, the game is guided to continue until the timing for notifying the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol whose transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is planned is reached. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate. Further, in this case, the game history is displayed based on the operation of the staging operation unit 301 or the like of the staging operation unit 300 when a specific condition such as the variation display of the special symbol is not executed. Alternatively, the game history may be displayed at all times (excluding special states such as when an abnormality occurs). Further, the content of the game history displayed on the display provided in the pachinko machine 1 is switched by operating the staging operation unit 301 or the like of the staging operation unit 300 (for example, it is executed during the day as information on the number of changes of the special symbol). It is also possible to switch from the state of displaying the number of changes of the special symbol to the state of displaying the number of changes of the special symbol after the big hit game state).

Next, a case where the transition timing to the low probability time saving state B arrives before the execution timing of the “help mode L rush count notification effect” will be described. FIG. 232 (b) is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when 450 is set (maintained) in the relief count counter at the time of power-on (that is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 450). Is. In this example, in the low probability state after the power is turned on, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed 150 times after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring (relief count counter = 600, notification-only count counter = 150). , The transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is planned when the 150th special symbol variation display is stopped. That is, when the variation display of the special symbol is executed 150 times after the power is turned on, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and the variation display of the special symbol is low before the 200th variation display of the special symbol is executed after the power is turned on. Transition control (execution of "help mode L") is performed from the probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. It should be noted that the counting (update) of the notification-only count counter is stopped with the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B, and after that, even if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is not counted.

As shown in FIG. 232 (b), it is the case where the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained when the power is turned on, and the 200th time after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring. If the transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is planned before executing the variable display of the special symbol of, the above "help mode" is performed. When the 600th variation display of the special symbol scheduled to be controlled to shift from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is stopped without executing the "L rush count notification effect", the "help mode L" It is designed to suddenly notify you that you will enter.

Further, in this example, the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained when the power is turned on, and the 200th special symbol fluctuation after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring. If the transition control from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is planned before the display is executed, the above "help mode L precursor effect", All of the "help mode L rush count notification precursor effect" and the "help mode L rush count notification effect" are not executed. That is, after the player turns on the power by visually recognizing the information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external information device provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the display device provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the effect display device 1600). It is possible to grasp the remaining number of fluctuations until the 200th special symbol variation display is executed, but before the 200th special symbol variation display is executed after the power is turned on, the player's It is notified that the "help mode L" is suddenly entered without any sign at a timing earlier than the expected timing. Therefore, the transition control from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is suddenly executed without going through the jackpot, and can give a strong impact, and "help". While giving surprise and unexpectedness to the player who recognized that the "mode L rush count notification effect" is executed, the transition control to an advantageous state is performed, that is, the time reduction is given to improve the game entertainment. be able to.

Next, a case where the transition timing to the low probability time saving state C arrives before the execution timing of the “help mode L rush count notification effect” will be described. FIG. 232 (c) is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when 350 is set (maintained) in the relief count counter at the time of power-on (that is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 350). Is. In this example, in the low probability state after the power is turned on, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed 250 times after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring (relief count counter = 600, notification-only count counter = 250). However, when the 250th special symbol variation display was stopped, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reached 600 times, and the transition control from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B was planned. In the low probability state after the power was turned on, the fluctuation display of the special symbol was executed 155 times after the power was turned on without the big hit game (relief count counter = 505, notification-only count counter = 155), so that the 155th time. In the variation display of the special symbol, "Immediate short hit A" is won, and when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped for the 155th time, it is notified that the "help mode S" is entered, and the low probability non-time reduction state is low. The transition to the probability time saving state C is controlled. In this case, the counting (update) of the notification-only count counter is not stopped by the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C, and after that, the counting is performed by the fluctuation display of the special symbol until the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. It is designed to continue.

As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit A", until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. During that time, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C (“help mode S”). That is, in FIG. 232 (c), since the transition control is performed to the low probability time saving state C when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped for the 155th time after the power is turned on, the variation display of the special symbol for the 255th time after the power is turned on is stopped. It is planned to end the low-probability time-saving state C and control the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbol is executed 250 times after the power is turned on, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and the transition condition to the low probability time saving state B is satisfied. That is, the transition condition to the low-probability time-saving state B is satisfied before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C reaches 100 times, in other words, before the end condition of the low-probability time-saving state C is satisfied.

In this example, when the transition condition to the low-probability time-saving state B is satisfied before the end condition of the low-probability time-saving state C is satisfied, that is, when the change display of the special symbol in the low-probability state is stopped for the 600th time, "O It notifies that it will enter "help mode L", ends the low-probability time-saving state C ("help mode S"), and controls the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B ("help mode L"). There is. As described above, the low-probability time-saving state B continues until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state C continues until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times. That is, in the low-probability time-saving state C, the time saving is given until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, whereas in the low-probability time-saving state B, the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. It is a time saving grant during the period, and the low probability time saving state B is more advantageous to the player than the low probability time saving state C. In this way, when the transition condition to the low-probability time-saving state B is satisfied during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, the low-probability time-saving state B is preferentially controlled to give the player an advantageous time-saving. Is supposed to do.

Further, in this example, the transition control is performed from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C (“help mode S”) before the 200th special symbol variation display is executed after the power is turned on, and the low-probability time-saving state C is performed. During the control of, the 200th special symbol variation display is reached, in which the above-mentioned "help mode L rush count notification effect" is scheduled to be executed. However, since the low-probability time-saving state C is already in an advantageous state for the player, in this example, the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is not executed, and the player's awareness of the low-probability time-saving state C is set. (Make the player forget the existence of the low probability time saving state B). Similarly, when controlled to the low probability time saving state C, the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect" and "help mode L rush count notification precursor effect" are not executed. As a result, while concentrating the player's consciousness on the low-probability time-saving state C, when the control of the low-probability time-saving state C is continuously controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B, the player is surprised and the game is played. You will be able to improve your interest.

In the above, the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is executed at the time of the 200th change display of the special symbol after the power is turned on, but the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is unnecessary and is low. Since there are a certain number of players who want to always maintain a sense of expectation and tension regarding the start timing of the probability time saving state B, the help mode L rush count notification displayed on the staging display device 1600 for such players. A "help mode L concealment effect" may be added to a part or all of the effect, which may be arbitrarily difficult or unrecognizable by the player.

Specifically, as the "help mode L concealment effect", when a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, the "help mode entry count notification effect" is produced. Is displayed on the staging display device 1600, which is different from the display regarding the remaining number of fluctuations until the help mode L is started in the upper layer of the display regarding the remaining number of fluctuations until the help mode L is started. Display a concealed image (for example, a special still image that is filled with white to make the publication invisible) and obscure at least a part of the display regarding the remaining number of fluctuations until the help mode L is started. It may be made visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who does not need the "help mode L rush count notification effect", and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. After displaying the concealment image on the effect display device 1600 by operating a predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1 such as the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 is further displayed. The mode of the concealed image may be changed by operating a predetermined operating means provided on the pachinko machine 1 such as the 301. For example, the pachinko machine 1 such as the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300 may be provided. By operating a predetermined operating means, the concealment image is displayed in the first display mode displayed over the first display area on the effect display device 1600, and the concealment image is displayed again. In the second display mode, which is displayed over a second display range wider than the first display area by performing a predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1 such as the effect operation unit 301 of the operation unit 300. The concealed image may be displayed, or the concealed image may be displayed in a third display mode in which the concealed image is displayed over a third display range narrower than the first display area. With this configuration, the player himself can determine the range that obscures the display of the remaining number of fluctuations until the help mode L displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started. Only the information that you do not want to know can be hidden, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. Further, by operating a predetermined operating means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300, a concealment image is displayed on the staging display device 1600, or a concealment image is displayed. After displaying the concealment image in the second display mode or the third display mode by performing the predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 again, for a predetermined period (for example, 30). When a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300 is not operated, or is provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300. When a specific operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (may be when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, or immediately before the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (for example, 1). Seconds ago) may be), the display of the concealment image on the staging display device 1600 may be terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

Further, the mode corresponding to the needs of the player who does not need the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is not limited to the addition of the above-mentioned "help mode L concealment effect", and may be as follows. .. For example, during the non-variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol), the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is performed by performing a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 such as the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300. It may be possible to select and set whether or not to execute the game. In this case as well, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who does not need the "help mode L rush count notification effect" and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. can.

Further, in the above, the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the 200th time after the power is turned on without the big hit game is not yet controlled to the low probability time saving state B has been described. When the 200th special symbol variation display is executed after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring, the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended, and the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled after that. If there is no such thing, you can do as follows.

That is, in the case of maintaining the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned on, the 200th variation display of the special symbol is executed after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring. When the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended (for example, the notification-only count counter = 200, but the relief count counter exceeds 600 times, and the low-probability time-saving state B has ended and the low probability is low. (When returning to the non-time saving state), all of the above "help mode L precursor effect", "help mode L rush count notification precursor effect", and "help mode L rush count notification effect" are not executed. I am doing it. That is, after the player turns on the power by visually recognizing the information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external information device provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the display device provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the staging display device 1600). The remaining number of fluctuations until the 200th special symbol variation display is executed, but the low probability time saving state B is already executed when the 200th special symbol variation display is executed after the power is turned on. If the above is completed, the player is falsely performed by performing the above-mentioned "help mode L rush count notification effect", "help mode L rush count notification effect", and "help mode L rush count notification effect". Since it will give expectations, we limit them so that they are not executed, and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable due to false production. In the above example, the counting (update) of the notification-only count counter is stopped due to the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B, and after that, even if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is not counted. If the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect", "help mode L rush count notification precursor effect", and "help mode L rush count notification effect" For the purpose of limiting the execution of "(The pachinko machine 1 will be able to recognize that the 200th special symbol variation display has been reached with the low probability time saving state B already completed after the power is turned on." Therefore, it is sufficient to count (update) the notification-only count counter. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 indicates that the 200th special symbol variation display has been reached with the low probability time saving state B already completed after the power is turned on by setting a separate count instead of the notification-only count counter. It may be recognizable.

Further, in such a case, instead of executing all of the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect", "help mode L rush count notification precursor", and "help mode L rush count notification effect", the power is turned on. When the 200th special symbol variation display is executed later, or before the 200th special symbol variation display is executed after the power is turned on (for example, the notification-only count counter = 50, 100, 150). It is also possible to perform a "help mode L completed effect" that suggests that the low probability time saving state B has already ended at multiple timings of the above, or at the notification-only count counter = all periods after 150). .. As an embodiment of the "help mode L completed effect", it is possible to exemplify displaying "help mode L has already been completed" or the like on the effect display device 1600, thereby helping the player. By notifying that the mode L has been completed and making the player aware of what the current gaming situation is, it is possible to avoid having excessive expectations.

Further, in the above, the example in which the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is not executed has been described, but it is a case where the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the 200th special symbol variation display is executed after the power is turned on without the big hit game occurring, the low probability time saving state B has already ended (for example, the notification-only number counter = 200, but Even when the relief count counter exceeds 600 times and the low-probability time-saving state B ends and returns to the low-probability non-time-saving state), the "help mode L rush count notification effect" is executed. , As the mode of the "help mode L rush count notification effect", set the mode corresponding to the fact that the low probability time saving state B has already ended, and perform the "help mode L rush count notification effect". You may do it. In this case, normally, as a mode of "help mode L rush count notification effect", a mode is set in which a message of "remaining XX times until help mode L" is displayed to clearly indicate the start time of the low probability time saving state B. However, when the low-probability time saving state B has already ended, the message "Help mode L has already been completed" such as the above-mentioned "Help mode L completed production" is displayed. Even in such a case, the player is notified that the help mode L has been completed, and the player is made aware of what the current game situation is. By doing so, it is possible to avoid having excessive expectations.

[Variable example of opening and closing of variable winning opening]
Next, a modified example of the opening / closing mode of the variable winning opening 2003 capable of accepting the game ball according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be described. In the above example, the same time saving performance is set as the low probability time saving state C to be controlled when the immediate short hit is A, when the immediate short hit is B, and when the immediate short hit is C. However, the time saving performance may be different depending on whether the immediate short hit A is obtained, the immediate short hit B is obtained, or the immediate short hit C is obtained. The "time saving performance" here is a performance mainly related to the frequency of winning the variable winning opening 2003, and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 can be mainly exemplified. In the following, the difference in time saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning opening 2003 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the immediate short hit A is reached, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner without being controlled by the big hit game or the small hit game. It is controlled to the low probability time saving state C1 where the time saving state is terminated if it does not become a big hit until it is executed, and when it becomes an immediate short hit B, it is not controlled to the big hit game or the small hit game, and it is a special symbol. If the fluctuation display of (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is not a big hit by the time it is executed 40 times, the time saving state is controlled to the low probability time saving state C2, and the immediate short hit C is obtained. In that case, the time saving state is terminated if the big hit is not achieved before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 20 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. It is controlled to the low probability time saving state C3.

Further, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port from the input information read from the input information storage area in the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning process, that is, when the game ball passes through the gate 2002. , The value of the counter that updates the normal symbol random number for use in determining the normal symbol (lighting mode of the two LEDs) that is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is extracted and the above normal winning opening prize is won. As information, it is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit", it is determined to be one of the hit normal symbol A, the hit normal symbol B, and the hit normal symbol C based on the normal symbol random number. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the type of normal hit (type of hit normal symbol) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 233 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the gaming state is the low probability non-time saving state or the high probability non-time saving state. That is, when the control of the time saving state is not executed, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed and controlled by the opening / closing pattern 1 (opening / closing P1) regardless of the type of normal hit (type of hit normal symbol). , When the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit", the game state is one of the high probability time saving state, the low probability time saving state A, and the low probability time saving state B, that is, the time saving state triggered by the big hit. When the control of the time saving state is executed (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A) and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. In (low probability time saving state B), the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing pattern 2 (opening / closing P2) regardless of the type of normal hit (type of hit normal symbol).

Further, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" and the game state is the low probability time saving state C1, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit. When the control of the time saving state is executed based on the determination of "immediate short hit A", the variable winning opening door of the variable winning opening 2003 is performed regardless of the type of normal hit (type of winning ordinary symbol). The opening and closing of 2521 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern 3 (opening / closing P2). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" and the game state is the low probability time saving state C2, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit. When the control of the time saving state is executed based on the fact that it becomes "immediate short hit B", if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit A", the variable winning opening 2003 is variable winning. The opening / closing control of the door 2521 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern 2 (opening / closing P2), and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit B" or "normal hit C", the variable winning door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed pattern 3 Opening and closing is controlled by (Opening and Closing P3), and when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit", the game state is the low probability time saving state C3, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". When the control of the time saving state is executed based on the fact that the type of the immediate short hit is "immediate short hit C", the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit A" or "normal hit B". If it is, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close by the opening / closing pattern 2 (opening / closing P2), and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit C", the variable winning opening door of the variable winning opening 2003 The opening and closing of 2521 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern 3 (opening / closing P3).

That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state (when the time-saving state control is not executed), the same opening / closing pattern is used regardless of the type of normal hit and whether it is the low-probability state or the high-probability state. The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close by (opening / closing pattern 1), and whether the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, and the low-probability time-saving state B are normal hit types or low-probability states. The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close with the same opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern 2) regardless of the type of the high probability state or the time saving state. On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3, among the opening / closing patterns that control the opening / closing of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 depending on the type of normal hit and the type of time-saving state. , The ratio determined for the opening / closing pattern 2 and the opening / closing pattern 3 is different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), the opening / closing pattern 1 (opening / closing P1) performs the operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the variable winning opening 2003 for 0.5 seconds only once. The opening / closing pattern 2 (opening / closing P2) operates the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the variable winning opening 2003 for one second twice, and the opening / closing pattern 3 (opening / closing P3) is a variable winning opening. The variable winning door 2521 that keeps the 2003 open for 1.5 seconds is operated twice. Further, the opening / closing pattern 1 is the opening / closing mode most disadvantageous to the player among the opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, and it is more difficult to insert the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003 than the opening / closing patterns 2 and 3. The opening / closing pattern 2 is an opening / closing mode that is more advantageous to the player than the opening / closing pattern 1, but is considered to be a more disadvantageous opening / closing mode to the player than the opening / closing pattern 3, and the game ball is inserted into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the opening / closing pattern 3. Although it is difficult to make a ball (or the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening 2003 is smaller than that of the opening / closing pattern 3), it is easier to make a game ball enter the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the opening / closing pattern 1. The opening / closing pattern 3 is the opening / closing mode most advantageous to the player among the opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, and it is easier to insert the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the opening / closing patterns 1 and 2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning opening 2003 (the game control mode in the time saving state including at least the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003) according to the type of the time saving state. ) Can be made different. Further, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3 are the time-saving states. Variable winning opening 2003 variable winning opening with an opening / closing pattern that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" compared to the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state where control is not executed. The opening and closing of 2521 is controlled. Further, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3 are all those in which the time-saving state is controlled. However, the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3, which are controlled in the case of an immediate short-time hit, are a high-probability time-saving state, a low-probability time-saving state A, and a low-probability time-saving state. Compared to B, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the probability of opening and closing the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is higher with an opening and closing pattern that is advantageous to the player. (It is configured so that the probability that the opening / closing pattern 3 is executed is high). In other words, the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3, which are controlled in the case of an immediate short-time hit, are a high-probability time-saving state, a low-probability time-saving state A, and a low-probability time-saving state B. It is configured so that the time saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning opening 2003 is higher than that of the above.

Further, the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 are all controlled when the immediate short-time hit occurs, but the low-probability time-saving state C1 controlled when the immediate short-time hit A occurs is the immediate short-time state. When the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" compared to the low probability time saving state C2 controlled when the hit B is obtained and the low probability time saving state C3 controlled when the immediate short hit C is obtained. It is configured so that the probability of opening / closing the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is high with the opening / closing pattern 3 most advantageous to the player, and the low probability time saving state controlled when the immediate short hit B is obtained. C2 is a variable winning with the opening / closing pattern 3 which is most advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" as compared with the low probability time saving state C1 which is controlled when the immediate short hit A. The lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal" compared to the low probability time saving state C3 which is controlled when the immediate short hit C is obtained although the probability of opening and closing the variable winning door 2521 of the mouth 2003 is low. It is configured to increase the probability of opening and closing the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 with the opening and closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when it becomes a "hit", and it is controlled when the immediate short hit C is obtained. The low-probability time-saving state C3 to be performed has a normal symbol as compared with the low-probability time-saving state C1 controlled when the immediate short-time hit A occurs and the low-probability time-saving state C2 controlled when the immediate short-time hit B occurs. When the lottery result is "normal hit", the opening / closing pattern 3 which is most advantageous to the player is configured to reduce the probability of opening / closing the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003.

In this way, the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 have higher time-saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning opening 2003 than the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, and the low-probability time-saving state B. It is configured in. Specifically, the time saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning opening 2003 is "low probability time saving state C1 (immediate short hit A)> low probability time saving state C2 (immediate short hit) between the low probability time saving states C1 and C3. B)> Low probability time saving state C3 (immediate short hit C) ”is set, and more specifically, when immediate short hit A is reached, it is always set to high time saving performance. It is configured, and when the immediate short hit B is set, the probability of being set to higher time saving performance than when the immediate short hit A is set is low, but the time saving performance is set higher than when the immediate short hit C is set. It is configured so that the probability is high, and when the immediate short hit C is obtained, the probability of being set to higher time saving performance is lower than when the immediate short hit B is obtained, but the high probability time saving state and the low probability time saving state are achieved. It is configured so that the probability of being set to a higher time saving performance is higher than that of A and the low probability time saving state B. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rate of determining the opening / closing pattern, in other words, the rate of setting the high time saving performance, differs depending on the type of the low probability time saving state controlled in the case of an immediate short hit. , It becomes possible to make the player's advantage different according to the type of immediate short hit.

As shown in FIG. 233 (a), in this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the hit normal symbol A is determined at a rate of 100/200, and the number is 50/200. It is configured to determine the hit normal symbol B at a rate and to determine the hit normal symbol C at a rate of 50/200. By this configuration, the open / close pattern 3 is determined in the low probability time saving state C1. In the low probability time saving state C2, the ratio determined by the opening / closing pattern 3 is 50%, the ratio determined in the opening / closing pattern 2 is 50%, and in the low probability time saving state C3, the opening / closing pattern 3 is set. The ratio determined to be 25% and the ratio determined to the opening / closing pattern 2 are 75%, and it becomes difficult to reduce the number of balls held in the order of low probability time saving state C1> low probability time saving state C2> low probability time saving state C3. Therefore, the advantages of each of the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 can be changed stepwise.

In this way, by making the period of the low probability time saving state C and the time saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning opening 2003 different according to the type of the immediate short hit, the playability using the immediate short hit is used. Can be further diversified and the interest can be improved. The symbol determination table at the time of hitting the normal figure shown in FIG. 233 (a) is an example, and the selection ratio of the opening / closing pattern and the opening / closing pattern are not limited to the ratio shown in the symbol determination table at the time of hitting the normal figure. For example, the opening / closing pattern 2 may be determined even when a normal hit occurs in the low-probability time-saving state C1. In this case, the ratio determined by the opening / closing pattern 3 in the low-probability time-saving state C1 may be determined. It may be set so as to be higher than the ratio determined by the opening / closing pattern 3 in the low probability time saving states C2 and C3. Further, the relationship between the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed before the end of the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 and the time-saving performance is not limited to the above, and for example, the ratio set to high time-saving performance. When is high, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed before the end of the low-probability time-saving state C is reduced (for example, when the immediate short-time hit A is reached, the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C3 is controlled), and the high-probability time-saving state C is controlled. When the ratio set in the performance is low, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed before the end of the low-probability time-saving state C is increased (for example, when the immediate short-time hit C is reached, the low-probability time-saving state C1 is entered. It may be controlled). In this case, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed by the end of the low probability time saving state C is small, the ratio set to the high time saving performance can be increased, and the player's advantage degree. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed before the end of the low-probability time-saving state C is large, the rate of setting the high time-saving performance is low, but the control is performed in the low-probability time-saving state over a longer period. Because it can be done, it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorated.

In addition, when the low probability time saving state is controlled to any of C1, C2, and C3, before the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times in this example), When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B" or "immediate short hit C". Ends the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control, and shifts to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 according to the type of "immediate short hit" according to the lottery result and the determination result of the special symbol. It may be controlled, or the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control may be continued without being terminated. By continuing the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control without terminating, the game interest is reduced by switching to the low-probability time-saving state in which the time-saving performance that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. It can be suppressed (details will be explained later). Regarding this point, for example, when the low probability time saving state is controlled to any one of C1, C2, and C3, the variation display of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (any of 20, 40, and 100 times in this example). Before reaching, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit is either "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B" or "immediate short hit C". If the determination result corresponds to the low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) having higher time-saving performance than the low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) under control. (Low probability time saving state C3 → low probability time saving state C2, low probability time saving state C3 → low probability time saving state C1, low probability time saving state C2 → low probability time saving state C1 etc.), to low probability time saving state C with high time saving performance If the decision result corresponds to the low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) having a lower time-saving performance than the low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) under control. (Low probability time saving state C1 → low probability time saving state C3, low probability time saving state C1 → low probability time saving state C2, low probability time saving state C2 → low probability time saving state C3, etc.), to low probability time saving state C with low time saving performance You may want to limit the changes in. By doing so, if the low-probability time-saving state C3 or the low-probability time-saving state C2 is being controlled, it is possible to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C1 at which the time-saving performance advantageous to the player is executed at a high rate. You can enjoy it.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as described above, not only the low probability time saving state is controlled after the big hit game as in the conventional case, but also the special symbol is immediately stopped without executing the big hit game. By being displayed, it has a special game progress control that immediately shifts to a low-probability time-saving state according to the immediate short-hit symbol (a low-probability time-saving state in which the time-saving performance differs for each immediate short-hit symbol). When having such a special game progress control, the following problems may occur.

Conventionally, the first special symbol corresponding to the entry into the fixed start port (the symbol that mainly displays fluctuations in the non-time saving state) and the second special symbol corresponding to the entry into the variable start opening (the time saving state). The second special symbol (the symbol that is mainly variable and displayed in a time-saving state) is configured to give the player a greater game profit than the first special symbol. However, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent illegal game and prevent the game behavior from being unintentional by the designer, the ball is suppressed from entering the variable starting port in the non-time saving state. It is common to perform controls related to ordinary symbols. As the control related to the ordinary symbol, for example, the ordinary fluctuation time determined based on the result of the ordinary lottery described above (from the start to the end of the variation display of the ordinary symbol (the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is derived). By setting the time) to be longer (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state, the lottery frequency of the normal symbol in the non-time saving state is reduced, and the non-time saving state is reduced. It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the variable starting port in the state. It is known that the normal fluctuation time in the non-time saving state is set to a long time regardless of whether the result of the normal lottery (the lottery result of the normal symbol) is a hit or a miss.

In this regard, it has a special game progress control as in this example (a special symbol is immediately controlled to a low probability time saving state C by stopping and displaying the immediate short hit symbol without executing the big hit game). In this case, if the normal fluctuation time is set to be longer in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state by using the same control as in the previous stage, it is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the variable start port in the non-time reduction state. However, there is a risk of hindering the smooth progress of the game in the time-saving state when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Explaining this point corresponding to this example, for example, during the variation display of the normal symbol started in the low probability non-time saving state of this example, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short hit symbol. When controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability non-time-saving state continues even during the low-probability time-saving state C over the stop display period of the special symbol by the immediate short-hit symbol. In some cases. In this case, during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the long-term normal fluctuation time set in the low probability non-time saving state, the relatively disadvantageous gaming state (low probability non-time saving state) to the relatively advantageous gaming state (low probability). It will shift to the time-saving state C), but since the normal fluctuation time is a long-term time set in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the long-term normal fluctuation time ends even after shifting to the low-probability time-saving state C. Until this is done, the variable start opening (variable winning opening 2003 having the variable winning opening door 2521) will not be opened quickly. In the unlikely event that the low-probability time-saving state C ends early in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol before the long-term normal fluctuation time elapses (for example, a relatively short-term low-probability time-saving state). When the end condition of 20 times is satisfied by the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the fluctuation time shortened in C3), the low probability time reduction is achieved even though the transition to the low probability time reduction state C has been made. In the state C, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 may never operate and may return to the low probability non-time saving state. In such a case, not only the fun of the low-probability time-saving state C that is suddenly started and the time-saving performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 cannot be experienced by the player, but also the player is frustrated. This may hinder the smooth progress of the game in the low-probability time-saving state C and may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

Regarding this point, this example has the following peculiar aspect, and is designed to suppress the hindrance of smooth progress of the game in the low-probability time-saving state C and the deterioration of the game interest. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the following special time is set as the normal fluctuation time from the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the stop. That is, although the normal fluctuation time set in the low-probability non-time saving state in the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a plurality of times, in any of them, "variation of special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3". Than the shortest time until the display reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times, 40 times, or 20 times in this example) and ends (in this example, the shortest time required for the low probability time saving state C3 is 20 seconds). A time limited to be shortened (in this example, the maximum time of the normal fluctuation time set in the low probability non-time saving state is 19 seconds) is set. In addition, it is more than this "shortest time until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 40 times, or 20 times) and ends". The normal fluctuation time limited to be shortened is not limited to the low-probability non-time saving state, but is selected in all gaming states.

As a result, after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started based on the normal fluctuation time set in the low probability non-time reduction state, the special symbol immediately stops the short hit symbol during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and is low. Regardless of which of the probabilistic time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 is entered, the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 are surely avoided by the time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is completed. can. Further, the variable winning door 2521 is surely controlled to open and close at least once with the time saving performance corresponding to the above-mentioned low probability time saving state C1, C2, and C3, and the smooth progress of the game in the low probability time saving state C is hindered. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. In addition to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3, such a normal fluctuation time is assumed to be "the number of times that the special symbol is changed and displayed several times (for example, the number of times that the special symbol is held less than the number of times)). It is particularly effective when controlling to a low-probability time-saving state CX that ends with, and even in such a case, the variable winning door 2521 can be reliably opened and closed, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, in this example, the following control is added to prevent the smooth progress of the game in the low-probability time-saving state C from being hindered. That is, in this example, when the game state is controlled to shift after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and before the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, FIG. 233 ( The game state when the normal symbol shown in A) is stopped is determined, and the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close by the opening / closing pattern set in the symbol determination table according to the gaming state. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 234 (A), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3, and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3. When "hit normal symbol A" is derived, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed controlled by the opening / closing pattern 2 with reference to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low probability time saving state C3 in FIG. 234 (A). On the other hand, although the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3, the "hit normal symbol A" is derived from the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3. When the "hit normal symbol A" was derived to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after the transition control to the low probability time saving state C1 was performed without any problem, it corresponded to the low probability time saving state C1 in FIG. 234 (A). The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to be opened / closed by the opening / closing pattern 3 with reference to the symbol determination table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (B), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1. When "hit normal symbol B" is derived, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed controlled by the opening / closing pattern 3 with reference to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low probability time saving state C1 in FIG. 234 (A). On the other hand, although the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, the "hit normal symbol B" is derived to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1. When the "hit normal symbol B" was derived to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after the transition to the low probability time saving state B was performed without any problem, the low probability time saving state B in FIG. 234 (A) was obtained. The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close by the opening / closing pattern 2 with reference to the symbol determination table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (C), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C2. When "hit normal symbol C" is derived, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed controlled by the opening / closing pattern 3 with reference to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low probability time saving state C2 in FIG. 234 (A). On the other hand, although the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C2, the "hit normal symbol C" is derived from the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C2. If the "hit normal symbol C" is derived from the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the jackpot game state, the symbol determination table according to the low probability non-time saving state of FIG. 234 (A) is obtained. The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close by the opening / closing pattern 1. In this example, the jackpot game state is a state in which a large number of game balls (prize balls) can be obtained by inserting a game ball into the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007, and the variable winning opening 2003. Even if the variable winning door 2521 is controlled to open and close, it does not have any advantage to the player. Therefore, the variable winning door 2521 of the variable winning door 2003 is controlled to open and close with the opening and closing pattern 1 which is the most disadvantageous to the player. ing. It should be noted that during the big hit game state, the control may be performed in a low-probability non-time saving state. In this case, the actual game state and the open / close control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 can be matched. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed controlled by an opening / closing pattern according to the gaming state when the normal symbol is stopped, not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. It is designed to do. As a result, as described above, after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started based on the normal fluctuation time set in the low probability non-time saving state, the low probability time saving states C1 and C2 are displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. In addition to reliably avoiding the fact that the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 are terminated by the time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is completed, regardless of which of the two is shifted to C3, the low probability is achieved. By controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning door 2521 at least once with the time saving performance according to the probability time saving state C1, C2, C3, it is possible to prevent the smooth progress of the game in the low probability time saving state C from being hindered. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. In addition, the gaming state can be matched with the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003, so that the player does not feel distrust.

The effect display device 1600 may also display the normal symbol variation result. In this case, only the information regarding the winning (for example, ○ ×) is displayed in the normal variation area at the screen edge of the effect display device 1600, and is normal. The type of hit (type of normal symbol) may not be displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display that alternately displays "○" and "×" in the normal fluctuation area of the staging display device 1600 is started. Then, when the normal symbol variation display is stopped on the normal symbol display, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the normal symbol display device 1600 is stopped with "○" displayed in the normal fluctuation area. If the lottery result of the normal symbol is "off", it is stopped with "x" displayed in the normal fluctuation area of the effect display device 1600, and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", it is stopped. Regardless of the type of normal hit (type of hit normal symbol), it may be difficult to discriminate the type of normal hit (type of hit normal symbol) by displaying "○" in the normal fluctuation area of the effect display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine the type of normal hit (type of hit normal symbol) from the stop mode of the normal symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, which the player pays the most attention to, and when it becomes a normal hit, it becomes a normal hit. It is possible to pay attention to the type, that is, the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003, and it is possible to prevent the control of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 of the pachinko machine 1 from becoming complicated and reliable. It is possible to improve the property and prevent the occurrence of an error.

Although not shown, in this example, for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" during the control of the low probability time saving state C1, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started in response to the lottery result. However, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C1 ends without deriving the "hit normal symbol A" or "hit normal symbol B" to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the normal symbol The fluctuation display may be continued even during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state. In that case, the low-probability non-time-saving state may be further shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving states C2 and C3, or the low-probability non-time-saving state C1 may be newly changed according to the fluctuation display result of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability non-time-saving state. It is also possible to move to. In such a case, if an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the normal fluctuation time, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1 becomes the low-probability time-saving state. It will be continued until the transition to the low-probability time-saving states C2 and C3 through C1 and the low-probability non-time-saving state and the control to the new low-probability time-saving state C1, and the gaming state when the above-mentioned normal symbol is stopped. If the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close according to the opening / closing pattern, it becomes difficult to design the game in consideration of the opening / closing timing of the variable winning opening door 2521, and the intention of the designer is appropriately reflected. There is a risk that the achieved playability cannot be realized.

Therefore, in this example, for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started in response to the lottery result, but the low-probability time-saving state C1 The low-probability time-saving state C1 ends without deriving "hit normal symbol A" or "hit normal symbol B" to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not low-probability. When it is continued even during the control of the time saving state, it is restricted so that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not continued over the further transition of the gaming state after that. Specifically, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1 is continued during the control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1. The normal fluctuation time to be set is set to a specific normal fluctuation time of less than a specific time (for example, less than 5 seconds), and the lottery result of the first special symbol after being controlled to at least a low probability non-time reduction state is an immediate short hit. In this case, the special fluctuation time is set to the special fluctuation time for limiting the time longer than the specific normal fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds or more). As a result, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1 is continued during the control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is changed to the low-probability non-time-saving state. It can be ensured to end while it is being controlled. For example, after controlling the transition to a low-probability non-time saving state, "hit normal symbol A" and "hit normal symbol B" are derived from the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In this case, it becomes possible to foresee that the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to be opened / closed by the opening / closing pattern 1 with reference to the symbol determination table. As a result, it becomes easy to design a game in consideration of the opening / closing timing of the variable winning door 2521, and it is possible to easily realize the game performance that reflects the intention of the designer.

[Transition of the gaming state in the modified example of the opening / closing mode of the variable winning opening]
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the modified example of the opening / closing mode of the variable winning opening described above will be described. FIG. 235 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in the modified example of the opening / closing mode of the variable winning opening. Since the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 235 is partially different from the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 196, only the part different from the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 196 will be described, and the game shown in FIG. 196 will be described. Do not duplicate explanations about parts that are common to state transitions.

Even in the modified example of the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening, it is possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "immediate short hit". When the lottery result is "big hit", the game shifts to the time saving state after executing the big hit game, whereas when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" or the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. If is satisfied (in this example, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times without changing the game state from the low probability state to the high probability state), the jackpot game is executed. It is designed to shift to a shorter time state without doing so.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit A", the special symbol changes without executing the big hit game. If the low probability time saving state C1 is controlled until the display reaches 100 times and "immediate short hit B" is determined as the type of the immediate short hit, the special symbol changes without executing the big hit game. Until the display reaches 40 times, if the low probability time saving state C2 is controlled and the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit C", the special symbol changes without executing the big hit game. Until the display reaches 20 times, the low probability time saving state C3 is controlled. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" or if the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied before the variation display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (in this example, the low probability state). When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the above reaches 600 times), the low probability time saving state C is terminated at that time.

In addition, when the low probability time saving state is controlled to any of C1, C2, and C3, before the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times in this example), When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" and the type of the immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B" or "immediate short hit C". Is a low-probability time-saving state C1, C2 with a high rate of execution of a higher time-saving performance (higher advantage of the player) than the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 in which the determined immediate short-time hit type is being controlled. , The low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, and C3 being controlled on the condition that it is an immediate short-time hit that causes control to C3, and the low-probability time-saving state C1 according to the determined type of immediate short-time hit. , C2, C3, while the determined immediate short hit type has a higher rate of execution of lower time saving performance (lower advantage of the player) than the low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3 under control. In the case of an immediate short hit, the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control are continued without being terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 235, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" in the case of controlling to the low probability time saving state C3, "immediate short hit A" is used as the type of the immediate short hit. Or, when it is determined to be "immediate short hit B", the low probability time saving state C3 is terminated, the transition control is performed to the low probability time saving state C1 or the low probability time saving state C2, and the control is performed to the low probability time saving state C2. If the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" and "immediate short hit A" is determined as the type of the immediate short hit, the low probability time saving state C2 is terminated and the low probability time saving is performed. When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" when the transition to the state C1 is controlled and the low probability time saving state C1 is controlled, "immediate short hit B" is used as the type of the immediate short hit. Or, when "immediate short hit C" is determined, the low probability time saving state C1 is continued without ending, and when the low probability time saving state C2 is controlled, the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit". When it becomes, if "immediate short hit C" is determined as the type of the immediate short hit, the low probability time saving state C2 is continued without ending. Therefore, when the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 are controlled, the time-saving performance (higher advantage of the player) is executed than the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control. It becomes possible to play with expectation as to whether or not the transition is controlled to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 having a high ratio.

Further, in this case, even if the promotion acquisition effect of notifying whether or not to promote to the low-probability time-saving state C, which has a higher ratio of executing the higher time-saving performance than the low-probability time-saving state C under control, is executed. Often, when the promotion acquisition effect is executed, the game entertainment can be improved. When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the time saving performance is higher than the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 being controlled as the type of the immediate short hit (the advantage of the player is high). High) may be executed even if the immediate short hit that causes control to the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 is not determined, and the promotion acquisition effect may be executed. When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the time saving performance is higher than the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 under control as the type of the immediate short hit (the player's advantage is high). ) Is executed at a high rate of low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3. A success pattern in which the character Y appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (a low-probability time-saving state in which a higher rate of time-saving performance than the low-probability time-saving state C under control is executed) is displayed. When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 that are being controlled as the type of the immediate short hit are executed. If the immediate short hit that causes control to the low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3 with a high rate of execution of high time saving performance (high advantage of the player) is not determined, at a predetermined rate. A failure pattern (higher time saving performance than the low probability time saving state C under control) in which a display is performed to indicate whether or not the character Y appears from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600 and the character Y does not appear from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600. May be executed (the effect of failing to be promoted to the low probability time saving state C). As a result, when the promotion acquisition effect is executed, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the promotion to the low-probability time-saving state C, which has a higher ratio of the time-saving performance being executed than the low-probability time-saving state C under control, can be expected. become.

When the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the same low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3 as the low probability time saving states C1, C2, C3 being controlled as the type of the immediate short hit. When the immediate short hit that causes the execution of is determined, that is, when the immediate short hit A is determined as the type of the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state C1, or during the control of the low probability time saving state C2. When the immediate short hit type is determined to be the immediate short hit B, and when the immediate short hit type is determined to be the immediate short hit C during the control of the low probability time saving state C3, the low probability time saving state C1. The controllable period may be extended to C2 and C3. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" in the 20th variation display of the special symbol after being controlled to the low probability time saving state C1, the type of the immediate short hit is "immediate short hit A". When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the transition control to the low probability time saving state C1 is reset (set to 0) and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state C1 after the change display is stopped, which is determined to be "immediate short-hit A" as the type of immediate short-hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted from 0 again, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100. When the number of times is reached, the low-probability time-saving state C1 may be continued. In this case, the low-probability time-saving state C1 is controlled until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 120 times, which is 20 times more than usual. You will be able to. Further, in this case, the success pattern of the extension acquisition effect may be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved when the extension acquisition effect is executed. Even if the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are not won during the control of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3, the failure pattern of the above-mentioned extension acquisition effect is performed at a predetermined ratio. You may want to do it. As a result, it becomes possible to pay attention to whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended when the extended acquisition effect is executed.

In addition, when the low probability time saving state is controlled to any of C1, C2, and C3, before the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times in this example), Even if a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied (in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times), the control of the low probability time saving states C1, C2, and C3 is terminated. You may try to continue without doing it. In this case, when the variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 reaches a predetermined number of times (either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times in this example), the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2 and C3 may be terminated to control the transition to the low-probability non-time saving state B. In this case, in the low-probability time-saving state C1, the switch is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C2 or the low-probability time-saving state C3 in which the time-saving performance disadvantageous to the player is executed before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to being played. Further, when the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state B is configured after the end of the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" or the low-probability time-saving state B is set. The low-probability time-saving state B may be terminated when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the transition control reaches a predetermined number (700 in this example), or the lottery result of the special symbol is a "big hit". Or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied (in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 in the low probability state) is the predetermined number of times (in this example). The low-probability time-saving state B may be terminated when (700 times) is reached (executed in the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times). The number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the low probability time saving state B).

In the above example, the ratio of the judgment value to be distributed to the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number and the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit to be compared with the second symbol random number are distributed. Although the ratio of the judgment values is the same, these ratios may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 236 (D), the symbol determination at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number. In the table, the ratio determined for the immediate short hit C that causes control to the low probability time saving state C3 with a low rate of high time saving performance being executed is the highest, and the rate of high time saving performance being executed is high. While the ratio determined for the immediate short hit A that causes control to the state C1 is the lowest, the ratio of high time saving performance executed is high in the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number. The immediate short hit C that causes control to the low probability time saving state C3 with the highest ratio determined for the immediate short hit A that causes control to the low probability time saving state C1 and the low ratio that the high time saving performance is executed. The ratio determined to be the lowest may be set to the lowest. With this configuration, there is a possibility that an immediate short hit will occur in both the normal time (non-time reduction state) and the time reduction state, but in the time reduction state, the time reduction state is more advantageous to the player than in the normal time. Since the probability of being controlled can be increased and the degree of advantage in the time-saving state can be improved, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the time-saving state.

In addition, in the lottery table at the time of low probability and the lottery table at the time of high probability, the probability that it is determined to win the immediate short hit based on the immediate short hit judgment value compared with the second special random number, and the first special random number. The probability of winning an immediate short hit may be different from the probability of winning an immediate short hit based on the immediate short hit determination value compared with, for example, as shown in FIG. 236 (A), a lottery table at the time of low probability. And the lottery table at the time of high probability, the probability that it is determined to win the immediate short hit based on the immediate short hit judgment value compared with the second special random number is the immediate short hit judgment compared with the first special random number. It may be set so as to be higher than the probability that it is determined that the immediate short hit is won based on the value. In this case, there is a possibility that an immediate short hit will occur in both the normal time (non-time reduction state) and the time reduction state. It is possible to achieve continuous generation, and it is possible to expect more advantageous transition control to the time saving state when the time saving state is reached. It should be noted that the probability of winning the immediate short hit may be different only between the lottery table at the time of low probability and the lottery table at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 224 (B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 236 (D), the determination value to be distributed between the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number and the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number. In addition to making the ratios different, as shown in FIG. 236 (A), it is determined that the lottery table compared with the first special random number and the lottery table compared with the second special random number win the immediate short hit. The probabilities may be different, and in such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the time-saving state is further increased, and the game entertainment in the time-saving state can be improved.

Further, the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit may be different depending on the game state. For example, as shown in FIGS. 237 (A) and 237 (B), the non-short hit state is obtained when the immediate short hit occurs. If (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), the execution rate of the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing P1 in this example) that is advantageous to the player is low (the time-saving performance is low), which causes control to the low-probability time-saving state C3. If it is determined to be an immediate short hit C and the time saving state (low probability time saving states A, B, C1 to C3 and high probability time saving state), the execution rate of the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing P1 in this example) advantageous to the player is high. The immediate short hit A that causes control to the low probability time saving state C1 (high in time saving performance) or the immediate short hit B that causes control to the low probability time saving state C2 may be determined. With this configuration, in the non-time saving state, when the immediate short hit is achieved, the transition control is performed to the low probability time saving state C3, which has a low degree of advantage. By winning, it is possible to control the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C1 or the low-probability time-saving state C2, which is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving state C3, so that the degree of advantage can be changed step by step.

In addition, when controlling to a high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state), it is not controlled to low probability time saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". It may be set as "immediate short hit symbol invalid period". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in the game interest due to a fall from a high-probability state to a low-probability state. Further, the low-probability time-saving state C may be controlled only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "immediate short-time hit" only when the low-probability time-saving state is controlled. The degree of advantage of the state can be improved.

[Modification example of game characteristics using low probability time saving state C]
Next, a modified example in which a part of the game property is different from the above-described embodiment will be described below. In the above-described embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is "immediate short hit" is stopped, the effect display device 1600 says "help mode S rushes !!". A relief confirmation image is displayed to notify the player that the player is in the "help mode S", and after entering the "help mode S", the current game state is displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. As the state display to be shown, it is configured to display a rescued image "during help mode S" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled, but the state shifts to the low-probability time-saving state C. Control (relief confirmed image of "help mode S rush !!") and control of low probability time saving state C (relief in progress image of "help mode S") are "immediate short hit" Depending on the type, the notification may not be given, and the low-probability time-saving state C may be concealed to make the game progress. Hereinafter, an example of such a new variation of the game will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), in this example, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as an opportunity to control the low probability time saving state C, in addition to the above-mentioned immediate short hit, " "Specific immediate short hit" is set, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win this specific immediate short hit. In this example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific immediate short hit symbol, the specific immediate short hit symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the special symbol) when the special symbol is stopped, and the specific immediate short hit symbol is used. When the derivation display is performed, the time saving state is controlled as in the case where the immediate short hit A symbol, the immediate short hit B symbol, and the immediate short hit C symbol are derived and displayed. When the specified immediate short hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice, unlike the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 described above. It is controlled to the low probability time saving state C4 that can be continued until the end. Since the lottery table and the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 238 are partially different from the lottery table and the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 224, only the parts different from FIG. 224 are described, and the common parts are duplicated. It is omitted because it is an explanation. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), a lottery for whether or not to win the immediate short hit and a lottery for whether or not to win the specific immediate short hit are separately configured. It is possible not to perform a lottery as to whether or not to win the prize (that is, control the transition to the low probability time saving state C (relief confirmation image of "help mode S rush !!") or the low probability time saving state C. It is possible not to provide an immediate short hit to notify that the player is under control (the image being rescued in "help mode S"), and a lottery and specific immediate whether or not to win the immediate short hit. The lottery for whether or not to win the short hit is executed together (for example, when the lottery for whether or not to win the immediate short hit is performed and the lottery result for making the immediate short hit is obtained, the immediate short hit symbol is obtained. The type may be determined from the immediate short hit A symbol, the immediate short hit B symbol, the immediate short hit C symbol, and the specific immediate short hit symbol. In this case, the specified immediate short hit symbol may be used. Make the ratio to be determined much higher than other types (for example, immediate short hit A symbol: immediate short hit B symbol: immediate short hit C symbol: specific immediate short hit symbol = 1: 2: 7: 90, etc.) May be).

In the lottery table shown in FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), in the lottery table at the time of low probability and the lottery table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, in any of the set values 1 to 6. Also has the same 10/319 specific immediate short hit probability, which matches the immediate short hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the immediate short hit, and the other first special random numbers are out of the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that. On the other hand, in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the specific immediate short hit determination value is not provided. As a result, in the non-time saving state in which the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting prize to the first starting port 2004 is the mainstream, the specific immediate short hit can be generated more frequently than in the time saving state. It will be like.

As described above, in this example, the specific immediate short hit probability does not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, and does not change even when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched. In addition, the specific immediate short hit probability is considered to be a very high probability compared to the big hit probability and the immediate short hit probability, so that the specific immediate short hit can be frequently generated before the big hit or the immediate short hit. It has become.

Further, in the jackpot symbol determination table in the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 238 (C), in the jackpot symbol determination table referred to for comparison with the first symbol random number, the determination values are distributed to jackpot C and jackpot D. The judgment value is not distributed to the jackpot A and the jackpot B, and the judgment value is distributed at the ratio of "big hit C: jackpot D = 99: 1" to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100). Has been done. Further, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is distributed only to the jackpot C and the jackpot D as in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, and the jackpot A and the jackpot B are assigned. Although the judgment values are not distributed, the judgment values are distributed at a ratio of "big hit C: big hit D = 80:20" to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100). It is configured so that the rate of being determined as a big hit (in this case, big hit D) with a higher degree of advantage is higher than when it is a big hit with a symbol random number, and the first special based on the starting prize to the first starting port 2004. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is executed rather than the variation display of the symbol, the player is in an advantageous state.

On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table in the time-saving state shown in FIG. 238 (D), in the jackpot symbol determination table referred to for comparison with the first symbol random number, the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D Judgment values are distributed to all, and the judgment is made at a ratio of "big hit A: big hit B: big hit C: big hit D = 25: 25: 49: 1" with respect to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100). The values are distributed. Further, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is distributed only to the jackpot A and the jackpot C, and the determination value is not distributed to the jackpot B and the jackpot D, but the second symbol random number (for example, Judgment values are distributed at a ratio of "big hit A: big hit D = 80: 20" to random numbers from 1 to 100), and the big hit has a higher degree of advantage than the case where the first symbol random number is a big hit. (In this case, the jackpot A) is configured to be higher, and the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening is more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2004. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize in 2003 is executed, the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 238 (C) and 238 (D) determines the jackpot A and the jackpot B which are controlled to the jackpot A and the jackpot B which are controlled to the high probability state until the next jackpot, for example, the jackpot having a higher degree of advantage than the non-time saving state in the time saving state. It is configured so that the ratio to be determined and the ratio determined to the jackpot A and the jackpot D to which the long-term time saving state is given are high. That is, if the result of the special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is a big hit in the time saving state, the second starting opening 2005 is in the non-time saving state. Alternatively, the degree of advantage is higher than when the result of the special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003 is a big hit. Therefore, if the result of the special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is a big hit in the time saving state, the second starting port 2005 or the second starting port 2005 or in the non-time saving state. It is possible to generate a big hit that is more advantageous than when the result of the special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003 is a big hit, and it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the time saving state and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 239 (A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", the game state is the low probability time saving state C4, that is, the specific immediate. When the control of the time saving state is executed based on the short hit, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed pattern 4 regardless of the type of the normal hit (the type of the winning ordinary symbol). Opening and closing is controlled by (Opening and closing P4). Further, as shown in FIG. 239 (B), the opening / closing pattern 4 (opening / closing P4) performs the operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens the variable winning opening 2003 for 0.51 seconds only once. There is, and the opening / closing operation is performed in the same manner as the opening / closing pattern 1 (opening / closing P1) executed when the gaming state is the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state, that is, when the control of the time saving state is not executed. It has become like. In the low-probability non-time saving state C4 in which the transition is controlled based on the specific immediate short hit, the time saving state is not controlled when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit". The variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in the same manner as in the case, and the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to the low probability time saving state C4 from the opening and closing mode. It is difficult to determine whether or not it is.

As described above, the low-probability time-saving state C4 is a state in which the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be continued until it is executed twice, and more specifically, the low-probability time-saving state C4. In the state C4, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed twice, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed twice, or the first special symbol is executed, except that the jackpot game is executed. It is a state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is continued until it is executed once. That is, unlike the opening / closing patterns 2 and 3 (opening / closing P2, 3), the above-mentioned opening / closing pattern 4 (opening / closing P4) does not significantly increase the possibility of entering the variable winning opening 2003, so that the low probability time saving state C4 Is not always promised the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice rather than the possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed twice and ends. It is more likely that the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be displayed once and then terminated.

Further, in this example, when the immediate short hit is made during the time saving state, the immediate short hit is controlled to the low probability short hit state in a more advantageous manner than when the immediate short hit is made during the non-time saving state. The type (immediate short hit symbol) will be decided. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 239 (C) and 239 (D), the lottery result of the first special symbol was an immediate short hit in the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). In this case, the opening / closing pattern and control period of the variable winning door 2521 are determined at a high rate to the immediate short hit C (immediate short hit C symbol) that causes control to the relatively disadvantageous low probability time saving state C3. It is configured in. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state), the immediate short time that causes control to the low probability time saving state C2 Although it is possible to determine the hit B (immediate short hit B symbol), the immediate short hit C (immediately) that causes the variable winning door 2521 to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C3 in which the opening / closing pattern and the control period are relatively disadvantageous. It is configured to be determined at a high rate in the short hit C symbol).

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time saving state (low probability time saving states A to C), the immediate short hit C (immediate short hit C symbol) is not determined. It is controlled to the immediate short hit A (immediate short hit A symbol) and the low probability short time state C2, which causes the variable winning door 2521 to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C1 in which the opening / closing pattern and the control period are relatively advantageous. It is configured to be determined at a high rate with the immediate short hit B (immediate short hit B symbol) that is the cause. Further, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes an immediate short hit in the time saving state (low probability time saving states A to C), it is configured so that it is not determined as the immediate short hit C (immediate short hit C symbol). It is controlled to the immediate short hit A (immediate short hit A symbol) and the low probability short time state C2, which causes the variable winning door 2521 to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C1 in which the opening / closing pattern and the control period are relatively advantageous. It is configured to be determined at a high rate with the immediate short hit B (immediate short hit B symbol) that is the cause. In the time-saving state, when the second special symbol is an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is determined in a more advantageous manner than when the first special symbol is an immediate short hit. There is. With this configuration, in the non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, the transition is controlled to the low probability time saving state C3 with a low degree of advantage at a high rate, but while being controlled to the low probability time saving state C3. If the immediate short hit is won, the transition control can be performed to the low probability time saving state C1 or the low probability time saving state C2, which is more advantageous than the low probability time saving state C3, so that the degree of advantage can be changed step by step. ..

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in a non-time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C Among them, the period that can be controlled to the low probability time reduction state (number of time reductions) is configured to be determined to be the shortest immediate short hit C, and the second special symbol is determined in the non-time reduction state (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state). When the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit with the longest controllable period (number of time reductions) among the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C. Although it is decided to be an immediate short hit B and an immediate short hit C other than A, the period (number of time reductions) that can be controlled to a low probability time saving state is the shortest among the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C. It is configured so that the ratio determined for the short hit C is the highest.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the short time state, the period in which the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C can be controlled to the low probability short hit state ( It is configured so that the shortest immediate short hit C is not determined, and if the lottery result of the second special symbol is the immediate short hit in the short time state, the immediate short hit A and the immediate short hit It is configured so that the period (number of time reductions) that can be controlled to the low probability time reduction state among B and the immediate short hit C is not determined for the shortest immediate short hit C. With this configuration, in the non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, the transition control is performed to the low probability time saving state C3, which has the shortest controllable period (time saving number) to the low probability time saving state at a high rate. If the immediate short hit is won after the transition control to the low probability time saving state C3, the low probability time saving state C1 or the low probability that the period (number of times of time saving) that can be controlled to the low probability time saving state is longer than that of the low probability time saving state C3. Since the transition to the time saving state C2 can be controlled, the degree of advantage can be changed step by step.

In the non-time saving state and the time saving state, when the second special symbol is an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit is determined to be more advantageous than the case where the first special symbol is an immediate short hit. ing. That is, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the non-time saving state, the execution rate of the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing P1 in this example) advantageous to the player is low probability time saving state C1 and low probability. While it is determined only for the immediate short hit C that causes control to the lowest low probability time saving state C3 among the time saving state C2 and the low probability time saving state C3, the lottery of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state When the result is an immediate short hit, the execution rate of the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing P1 in this example) advantageous to the player is among the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3. It is configured so that the immediate short hit B, which is the cause of controlling to the low probability time saving state C2 different from the lowest low probability time saving state C3, can also be determined. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the non-short hit state, the period during which the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C can be controlled to the low probability short hit state. While (the number of time reductions) is determined only for the shortest immediate short hit C, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is the immediate short hit in the non-time reduction state, the immediate short hit A and the immediate short hit are determined. Among the hit B and the immediate short hit C, the period that can be controlled to the low probability time saving state (number of time reductions) is the shortest. It is configured so that it can also be determined by B.

Further, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time saving state, it is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time saving state. Immediate short hit that causes the execution rate of the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing P1 in this example) to be controlled to the highest low-probability time-saving state C1 among the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2, and the low-probability time-saving state C3. It is configured so that the ratio determined to A is high. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time saving state, the immediate short hit A is compared with the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time saving state. Among the immediate short hit B and the immediate short hit C, the ratio of the immediate short hit A having the longest controllable period (number of time reductions) to the low probability time saving state is set to be high. In this way, in addition to making the degree of advantage in the case of immediate short hits different between the non-short hit state and the short time state, the lottery result of the second special symbol that is mainly displayed in a variable manner in the short time state is the immediate short hit. By making the degree of advantage (opening / closing pattern, number of time reductions) different between the case where the lottery results are obtained and the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is mainly displayed in a variable manner in the non-time reduction state, is an immediate short hit, the advantage in the time reduction state. It is possible to enhance the sex and improve the entertainment of the game.

Next, the transition of the gaming state using the "specific immediate short hit" will be described. FIG. 240 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state when the specified immediate short hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and FIG. 240 (b) is the illustration specified by the lottery of the first special symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state when the immediate short hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 240 (a), when the game ball passes through the gate 2002 in the process of the game mainly for the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability non-time saving state, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner with, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived after the lapse of a predetermined period. As described above, in the non-time saving state, the normal fluctuation time (the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived)) is longer than the time saving state (for example, 120). Seconds, etc.). Then, when any one of "hit normal symbol A", "hit normal symbol B", and "hit normal symbol C" is derived to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the low probability of FIG. 239 (A) is obtained. With reference to the table of opening / closing patterns at the time of normal hit according to the non-time saving state, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is opened / closed pattern 1, that is, the variable winning opening 2003 is 0 as shown in FIG. 239 (B). . The variable winning door 2521 is controlled to open and close so that it is opened only once for 5 seconds.

Further, when the game ball received in the variable winning opening 2003 is detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts the variable display of the second special symbol. Note that FIG. 240 (a) illustrates a case where the "immediate short hit" is won during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, and the immediate short hit C is determined as the type of the immediate short hit. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the immediate short hit C (immediate short hit C symbol) in "D" of FIG. 240 (a), the immediate short hit is performed when the variation display of the decorative symbol resulting in the lottery is stopped. A relief confirmation image that displays a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "549" as a symbol combination corresponding to the C symbol and notifies the staging display device 1600 that the "help mode S" is entered. (In this example, "Win! Enter help mode!") Is displayed (help mode S entry notification), and after entering "help mode S", "E" to "H" in FIG. 240 (a). As shown in, a relief image indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C3 is being controlled is displayed (effect display for help mode S), and the player is positively informed that the low-probability time-saving state C has been reached. It is designed to notify the target.

In this example, when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 or when the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to be in the open state, a predetermined ratio (when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner). It may be executed without fail, it may be executed only when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol becomes an immediate short hit, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol becomes an immediate short hit, it does not become an immediate short hit. It may be executed at a higher rate than the specific effect area (which may be executed at a higher rate) and is different from the area where the decorative symbol of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. ) Is displayed with an opening suggestion image (in this example, "Aim at the opening / closing winning opening!") Notifying that the variable winning opening 2003 is in the open state.

Further, as described above, when the game ball enters the variable winning opening 2003 and the variable winning opening sensor 2526 detects the game ball received in the variable winning opening 2003, the start opening winning effect is started from the main control board 1310. A starting port winning command for instructing is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The start opening winning command is provided corresponding to each of the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and when a game ball received in the variable winning opening 2003 is detected. Pre-lottery result of special symbol based on various acquired random numbers (result of pre-lottery whether to make big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is a small hit The type of small hit, the type of immediate short hit if it is an immediate short hit, the big hit, the small hit, and the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not an immediate short hit. Or, it includes pre-determination information such as the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed.

In this example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC responds to the detection of any of the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the variable winning port sensor 2526, and the start winning command (first start port sensor 3002 and the first). (Ii) Any one of the starting port sensor 2401 and the variable winning opening sensor 2526 (for example, the variable winning opening sensor 2526) or any combination (may be all, or a sensor related to the second special symbol (second starting opening sensor). When 2401 and the variable winning opening sensor 2526), etc. are received, it may be executed without fail when a predetermined ratio (starting opening winning command is received), or when the pre-lottery result is an immediate short hit. When the pre-lottery result is an immediate short hit, it may be executed at a higher rate than when it is not an immediate short hit). The mini character battle effect in which the character Z fights against the enemy character is executed. In the mini character battle effect of this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003. In this case, it is executed from before the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to during the variable display of the second special symbol, and displays the effect mode according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in a low probability non-time saving state (in this example, the display result of the second special symbol is "immediate short hit B symbol" or "immediate short hit C". When the "design" is derived and displayed), a mini character battle effect is executed in which the mini character Z fights against the middle boss as an enemy character in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600 after the variable winning opening 2003 is closed (FIG. 240 (a). ) "C"), the mode in which the mini character Z wins over the middle boss as an enemy character when the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed is displayed, and the staging display device 1600 is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. A rescue confirmation image (in this example, "win! Entering help mode!") Is displayed to notify that the player is entering "help mode S" ("D" in FIG. 240 (a)). .. On the other hand, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the lottery result of the second special symbol does not become an immediate short hit and is out of order (in this example, "out of place" is derived and displayed as the display result of the second special symbol), that is, If it is not an immediate short hit, the mode in which the mini character Z is defeated by the middle boss as an enemy character is displayed when the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, and the effect is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. Notify the device 1600 that the entry into the "help mode S" has failed. As a result, the player can be positively notified and recognized that the player may be in the "help mode S" or the player will be in the "help mode S", which is executed by the effect display device 1600. It is possible to pay attention to the effect and the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol (one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is neither a big hit nor a small hit when the immediate short hit is not obtained in the low probability non-time saving state. Only By executing the mini character battle production, it is possible to prevent the mini character Z from becoming a big hit or a small hit after displaying the mode in which the mini character Z is defeated by the middle boss or the big boss as an enemy character in the mini character battle production. You may not confuse the player by performing the mini character battle effect by associating with the display result of the mini character battle effect, or you can execute the mini character battle effect at a predetermined ratio even if it does not result in an immediate short hit. , Even if it is not an immediate short hit, if a specific lottery result (for example, if it is a big hit A), the mini character battle effect is executed at a predetermined ratio, so that the mini character Z can be used in the mini character battle effect. The joy may be doubled by displaying the mode of defeat to the middle boss or the large boss as an enemy character to discourage the player and then deriving and displaying the lottery result advantageous to the player.

In this way, the lottery result of the special symbol in the low probability non-time saving state is an immediate short hit (in this example, the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "immediate short hit B symbol" or "immediate short hit C symbol". In the case of derivation display), it is suggested that a mini character battle effect is executed in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600 and an immediate short hit is obtained, and a relief confirmation image is displayed and "O" is displayed. During the control of the low-probability time-saving state C2 and the low-probability time-saving state C3, the player actively notifies that the user enters the "help mode S", that is, controls the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C2 or the low-probability time-saving state C3. Execute the background display for the help mode S (in this example, "help mode S effect") as the background display of the effect display device 1600 (background of the landscape displayed on the lower layer of the decorative pattern) to "help". It is designed to positively notify that "mode S" is being executed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 240 (b), the specific immediate short hit and the low probability time saving state C4 are used to advance the game in a more advantageous manner than in FIG. 240 (a). Specifically, in FIG. 240 (b), in the low probability non-time saving state, the result of the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a specific immediate short hit in the process of the game mainly in which the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition to concealing that a specific immediate short hit is achieved by not executing a mini character battle effect in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600, a symbol corresponding to the specific immediate short hit symbol when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. As a combination, a combination of decorative symbols different from the immediate short hit symbol, for example, a combination that becomes the same "378" symbol as when the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are removed is displayed, and relief is provided even if the decorative symbol stops. By not displaying the confirmed image, it is concealed that the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 is concealed, and the background display similar to the normal time (non-time-saving state) is displayed even during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C4 (some are different). It may be) to conceal the control to the low probability time saving state C4.

That is, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific immediate short hit in the low probability non-time saving state, the mini character battle effect is not executed in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. As a symbol combination corresponding to the specified immediate short hit symbol when stopped, a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "378" is displayed so as not to remind the specified immediate short hit symbol, and the decorative symbol changes. Even if the display is stopped, the relief confirmation image is not displayed to conceal the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 (“B” in FIG. 240 (b)), and during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C4. By displaying the background in the normal time (non-time saving state) in the effect display device 1600, it is concealed that the control to the low probability time saving state C4 is concealed.

Further, as described above, in order to conceal the control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 from the player, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability time-saving state C4 are displayed in a variable manner. It is desirable that the time (special fluctuation time) also closely resembles the special fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability non-time saving state. That is, it is difficult to recognize that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4, and it is parallel to such special fluctuation time. Then, by performing the above-mentioned mini character battle effect, it is possible to conceal that the transition control to the low probability time saving state C4 is performed.

When the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b, which is smaller than the decorative symbol and is inconspicuous, is executed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. To. In this variable display of the identification symbol 1600b, "○" and "x" are alternately displayed as the identification symbol 1600b, and when the decorative symbol is stopped, either "○" or "x" is displayed and stopped. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), "○" is displayed as the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b, and the lottery result is out of order. In some cases, it is stopped in a state where "x" is displayed as a display result (stop symbol) of the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b. In this example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific immediate short hit, the same "x" as in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order as the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b is displayed. It is designed to stop in the displayed state. As described above, in this example, it is difficult to determine that the immediate short hit has occurred even from the display result (stop symbol) of the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b, thereby controlling the transition to the low probability time saving state C4. It keeps things secret.

In addition, the low-probability time-saving state C4, which is controlled to shift to a specific immediate short hit, ends and is low when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice. It controls the transition to a probability non-time saving state. In other words, if it becomes a specific immediate short hit, it does not suggest that it will be a specific immediate short hit, it does not notify that it has entered the help mode S, and that it is controlling to the low probability time saving state C. Not only that, the low probability time saving state C4 is controlled only for a short period until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal". Even when it becomes a "hit", the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close with the opening / closing pattern 4 which is very similar to the normal time (non-time saving state) (see FIG. 239), so that the time saving state control is executed. Even if it is done, it is substantially similar to the low-probability non-time saving state, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that it is controlled by the low-probability time-saving state C4. That is, in this example, the time saving performance of the low-probability time-saving state C4 is considered to be a time-saving performance that closely resembles the game progress in the low-probability non-time-saving state. It is difficult to determine the state C4 and the low-probability non-time saving state. In this example, when the low probability time saving state C4 is controlled, the time until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived is configured to be shorter than the normal time (non-time saving state). By setting the time until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived to the same time as in the non-time saving state (for example, 119 seconds), the low probability time saving state C4 depending on the time until the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived. It may be difficult to determine whether or not the control is performed.

Further, in the low-probability time-saving state C4, the variable winning opening 2003 is variable-winning with the opening / closing pattern 4 which is very similar to the normal time (non-time-saving state) without controlling to make it easier for the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 2003. The opening and closing of the door 2521 is controlled, but as shown in FIGS. 239 (C) and 239 (D), the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit in the non-time reduction state and the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit in the time reduction state. In the time-saving state, it is determined to be an immediate short hit, which has a higher degree of advantage than in the non-time-saving state. It shifts to a more advantageous state than the normal state (non-time saving state). In this way, when controlling the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C4, which is more advantageous than the normal state (non-time-saving state), it is concealed that the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 and the control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 are performed. By doing so, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C4 without being recognized by the player, and an advantageous game profit such as an immediate short hit A which is not determined in the non-time saving state is given to surprise the player and improve the game entertainment. You will be able to make it. That is, in the case of a specific immediate short hit, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the control is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C4 or the low-probability time-saving state C4. When the variable winning door 2521 is opened by controlling the transition to the probability time saving state C4 and ending the low probability time saving state C4 without noticing it, this opening is a normal lottery in the non-time saving state and a lottery of normal symbols. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the result is "normal hit" or whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the short time state. Therefore, for a player who is unaware that the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C4 has been controlled, a big hit (big hit A, big hit B in this example) or an immediate short hit (immediate short in this example) is won only in the time-saving state. If the hit A) is won, the player can be surprised, and the game can be advanced with the expectation that the player is actually controlled by the low-probability time-saving state C4.

Further, in this example, after the transition control to the low probability time saving state C4 is performed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401 and the variable winning port sensor during the control of the low probability time saving state C4. A start winning command corresponding to any detection of 2526 (any one of the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526 (for example, the variable winning opening sensor 2526) or Even when an arbitrary combination (either all or sensors related to the second special symbol (second starting port sensor 2401 and variable winning opening sensor 2526), etc.) is received, a predetermined ratio (starting opening winning command) is issued. It may be executed whenever it is received, or it may be executed only when the lottery result is an immediate short hit, and when the lottery result is an immediate short hit, it is better than when it is not an immediate short hit. (It may be executed at a high rate)), the mini character Z executes a mini character battle effect in which the mini character Z fights against an enemy character in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in the low probability time saving state C4 (in this example, the display result of the second special symbol is "immediate short hit A symbol" or "immediate short hit B". When the "design" is derived and displayed), after the variable winning opening 2003 is closed, the mini character Z performs a mini character battle effect in which the mini character Z fights against the big boss as an enemy character in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 240 (b). ) "C"), the mode in which the mini character Z wins the big boss as an enemy character when the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed is displayed, and the staging display device 1600 is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. A rescue confirmation image (in this example, "win! Entering help mode!") Is displayed to notify the player that the player is entering "help mode S" ("D" in FIG. 240 (b)). .. On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving state C4, the lottery result of the second special symbol does not become an immediate short hit and is out of order (in this example, "out of place" is derived and displayed as the display result of the second special symbol), that is, If it is not an immediate short hit, the mode in which the mini character Z is defeated by the big boss as an enemy character is displayed when the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, and the effect is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. Notify the device 1600 that the entry into the "help mode S" has failed. In this way, when the transition control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state C4 that executes almost the same control as the normal state (non-time-saving state), the control is performed so that the player does not easily understand the game state, and the normal state (non-time-saving state) is performed. When the transition control is performed to the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 that are controlled to be more advantageous than the state), the player is positively notified to be recognized, and the effect or decorative pattern executed by the effect display device 1600 is performed. You can pay attention to the variable display of.

Further, in this example, when the mini character battle effect is executed, the enemy character is made different according to the pre-judgment information included in the start opening winning command. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the types of the immediate short hit are "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". When the "immediate short hit C" with the lowest degree of advantage is decided, the middle boss appears as an enemy character (Fig. 240 (a)), while the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". If the type of immediate short hit is determined to be "immediate short hit A", "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C", which have the highest degree of advantage, the enemy A large boss, which is higher than the middle boss, appears as a character (Fig. 240 (b)). In this way, since the degree of advantage at the time of winning differs depending on the type of the enemy character that is competing in the mini character battle production, it is possible to expect the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of immediate short hit depending on the type of the enemy character. In addition, it is not limited to the one that makes the type of the enemy character different according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of the immediate short hit, and whether the game state is the non-time saving state (in this case, the low probability non-time saving state C4 is included). ), The type of the enemy character may be different depending on whether the time is shortened, the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 3002, or the second start port sensor 2401 is supported. The type of the enemy character may be different depending on which of the starting opening winning command and the starting opening winning command corresponding to the variable winning opening sensor 2526.

In the above example, it is decided whether or not to execute the mini character battle effect depending on whether or not it is an immediate short hit, but it is not limited to the case where it is an immediate short hit and it is a mini character depending on whether or not it is a big hit. You may decide whether or not to execute the battle effect, or you may decide whether or not to execute the mini character battle effect depending on whether or not it is a small hit, and it will be an immediate short hit. It may be decided whether or not to execute the mini character battle effect by combining one or more (or all of them) of whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit. That is, if the mini character battle effect is not executed in the case of a specific immediate short hit, the lottery type that causes the execution of the mini character battle effect may be arbitrarily set. In this case, the type of enemy character that appears in the mini character battle production is different according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit) to suggest the degree of advantage. May be good.

Further, when the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled, the time-saving latency suggestion image (for example, "Large boss appearance rate is high !!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined ratio for a predetermined period. However, it is said that the low probability time saving state C4 is controlled during the period when the time saving latency suggestion image is displayed, that is, there is a high probability that the hit will be advantageous to the player in the case of an immediate short hit. You may make them aware and raise expectations for immediate short hits. In addition, even when the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled, the time-saving latency suggestion image (for example, "Large boss appearance rate is high !!") is displayed on the staging display device 1600 at a predetermined ratio for a predetermined period. In this case, if the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled, the time-saving latency suggestion image (the time-saving latency suggestion image) is displayed at a higher rate than when the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled. For example, "Large boss appearance rate is high !!") may be displayed over a predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to change the monotonous game when the low-probability non-time-saving state or the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled so that the game does not get bored.

[Start of low-probability time-saving state B during variable display of the first special symbol (variation example)]
In the above, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the variable winning opening 2003, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. However, the variable display of each special symbol is executed in the order of entry into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, and the variable winning opening 2003, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the first (Ii) It is configured to sequentially execute the variable display of special symbols. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. In such a configuration, when the symbol change is stopped and displayed, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter =). If the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is made after the stop display of the symbol change reaching 600) is made, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low-probability state becomes 600 times (relief count counter = 600). During the variation display of the first special symbol to be reached, the variation display of the second special symbol may be started as the 601st symbol variation, and the low probability time saving state even though the 601st symbol variation is started. There may be a sense of discomfort that you have not moved to B. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time, the variation of the special symbol in the low probability state at the start of the symbol variation. When the number of times (relief count counter) is counted and the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B It is preferable to move to. Such a configuration will be described below.

FIG. 241 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. FIG. 241 (A) describes a case where there is no variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, and FIG. 241 (B) shows a case where the second special symbol is not displayed during the variation display of the first special symbol. Explains the case of starting the variable display of.

In this example, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted up at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability non-time reduction state is shifted to the low probability time reduction state B, but the low probability time reduction is achieved. Regarding the transition timing to the state B, as the start of the symbol fluctuation (variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). There is.

As shown in FIG. 241 (A), when the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are executed during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are started. At times, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted. Then, when the symbol variation A1 of the first special symbol is executed as the next symbol variation, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) at the start of the symbol variation A1 of the first special symbol. When the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), at the start of the symbol change A1 of the first special symbol, the low probability from the non-time saving state to the low probability It has shifted to the time saving state B.

Further, as an external device, an external information device for transmitting game information to the player is provided above the pachinko machine 1. Here, the external device displays the number of changes in the special symbol after the big hit, but for the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief count counter is counted up at the start of the change in the special symbol. Similar to the above, the count is increased at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the count is reset with the big hit as the trigger, just as the count of the relief count counter is reset with the big hit as the trigger. Therefore, in the case of controlling to a low probability state triggered by a big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol ( It will match the count of the relief count counter). In such a case, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600) by visually recognizing whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device reaches 600 times. ) Is reached, and it can be determined whether or not the state B shifts to the low probability time saving state B.

Further, in the low probability non-time saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, so that the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 is the mainstream. Of these, the ratio of the game ball B entering the first starting port 2004 is high, and the game in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed has become the mainstream. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the lamp light emission, and the voice output, the symbol variation effect on the first special symbol side (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. On the other hand, after shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state. It is the mainstream, and the game in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is the mainstream. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the lamp light emission, and the voice output, the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) on the second special symbol side is executed.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, when the symbol fluctuations A to D of the first special symbol are executed before the symbol variation A1 in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. In the help mode L effect, the help mode L precursor effect is executed, which counts down until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect notifying the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state). Then, at the start of the symbol variation A1 in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the help mode indicating the start of the help mode L (the start of the low probability time saving state B) is shown. The L start effect is executed, and after the help mode L start effect is executed, the help mode L effect indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state B) is executed. There is. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is displayed 700 times after that (total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state). Is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B (until 1300 times), and the period for controlling to such a low-probability time-saving state B (700 times special symbol variation display) is set to "help mode L. It is called.

Similarly, in the lamp emission and the voice output, the symbol fluctuations A to D of the first special symbol are before the symbol fluctuation A1 in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). At the time of execution, the help mode L precursor effect that counts down to the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state) is executed. .. Then, at the start of the symbol variation A1 in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the help mode indicating the start of the help mode L (the start of the low probability time saving state B) is shown. The L start effect is executed, and after the help mode L start effect is executed, the help mode L effect indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state B) is executed. There is.

The help mode L start effect is executed from the start of the symbol variation A1 when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state until a predetermined time elapses. It is supposed to be. The predetermined time is preferably the degree of fluctuation time in one symbol fluctuation. However, as a modification, after the start of the help mode L start effect, the symbol variation reaches the timing at which the symbol variation is stopped and displayed (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600)). At the timing when A1 is stopped and displayed), the help mode L start effect may be switched to the help mode L effect.

As shown in FIG. 241 (B), when the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are executed during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, the symbol variations A to D of the first special symbol are started. At times, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted. Then, when the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol, the special symbol in the low probability state is started at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is started. There is a transition from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B.

As described above, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the second is performed during the execution of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol. When the symbol variation X of the special symbol is started and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is being executed. Nevertheless, at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol, the state shifts from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. In this way, when the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is started as the 600th symbol variation during the execution of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol, the 600th symbol variation is started. Nevertheless, there is no situation in which the player has not transitioned to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the game can be played without a sense of discomfort. In addition, for example, after the stop display of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B Then, during the execution of the symbol variation X, the symbol variation A1 of the first special symbol is started as the 601st symbol variation, and the 601st symbol variation A1 is also started. Regardless of this, there will be a sense of incongruity that the low-probability time-saving state B has not been entered.

In addition, the external device displays the number of changes in the special symbol after the big hit, but for the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the external device, the relief count counter is counted up at the start of the change in the special symbol. Similarly, the count is increased at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the count is reset with the big hit as the trigger, just as the count of the relief count counter is reset with the big hit as the trigger. Therefore, in the case of controlling to a low probability state triggered by a big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol ( It will match the count of the relief count counter). In such a case, the special symbol displayed on the external device at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). Since the number of fluctuations is 600 and the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to play a game without a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, the transition to the start time of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that is, to the low probability time saving state B. At that point, the help mode L start production has started. Similarly, in the lamp light emission and the voice output, the start time of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that is, to the low probability time saving state B. At the time of transition, the help mode L start production has started. As described above, although the help mode L precursor effect is executed during the execution of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol, the help mode L precursor effect is executed during the execution of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol. Since it suddenly switches to the help mode L start effect, it can be made to appear as if it suddenly shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

In this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the symbol variation of the first special symbol. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the symbol variation X of the second special symbol is started, and the probability is not low. It is shifting from the time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. First, a specific example of the effect when there is no variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 241 (A) shows a time chart showing a change in the gaming state when there is no change display of the second special symbol during the change display of the first special symbol, but FIG. 242 shows the progress of the time chart. A concrete example of the production is shown.

As shown in FIG. 242 (A), when the first variation pattern command (command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 In the upper region, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is executed. Similarly, when the second variation pattern command (command for notifying the start of variation display of the second special symbol) is transmitted, the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 is executed in the lower region of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left, middle, and right first decorative symbols 1600a1 and second decorative symbols 1600a2 are variablely displayed until the variation time corresponding to the first variation pattern command and the second variation pattern command elapses. The display is stopped in the order of left decorative design → right decorative design → middle decorative design. As the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second decorative symbol 1600a2, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time. That is, it is possible to start the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 during the execution of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, and the first decorative symbol 1600a1 during the execution of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2. It is possible to start the variable display of.

Further, when the first variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the first identification symbol 1600b1 which is smaller than the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and is inconspicuous in the upper right portion of the upper region of the effect display device 1600. Fluctuation display is executed. Similarly, when the second variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the second identification symbol smaller than the second decorative symbol 1600a2 is inconspicuous in the upper right portion of the lower region of the effect display device 1600. The variation display of 1600b2 is executed. Specifically, 〇 and × are variablely displayed as the first identification symbol 1600b1 and the second identification symbol 1600b2 until the variation time corresponding to the first variation pattern command and the second variation pattern command elapses. Stop display with any of ×. As the stop symbols of the first identification symbol 1600b1 and the second identification symbol 1600b2, 〇 is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), and × is stopped and displayed when the lottery result is out of order. To. In addition to this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the lottery result may be used as the stop symbol of the first identification symbol 1600b1 or the second identification symbol 1600b2. If it is a big hit or a small hit, 〇, if the lottery result is an immediate short hit, and if it is a miss, x is displayed as a stop, and it is an immediate short hit from the stop symbol of the first identification symbol 1600b1 or the second identification symbol 1600b2. It may be difficult to recognize that it is.

Further, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol (state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is waiting) and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). It enables the variable display (waiting state). Specifically, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed with a circle in the lower left of the effect display device 1600 by the number of holds, and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is the number of holds. The amount of □ is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold is started, the hold displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are deleted. However, the reserved display 1600c and 1600d of the special symbol may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold until the variable display of the special symbol ends. ..

Further, in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current gaming state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time saving state, and "normal medium" corresponding to the low-probability non-time saving state is displayed.

In addition, as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol are displayed from the 500th variation display of the special symbol. Every time the variation display of 1600a2 (second special symbol) is stopped (may be at the start), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state in the central portion of the staging display device 1600 is. The count effect to notify is executed. In this example, the relief notice image A of "500 fluctuations" corresponding to the 500th stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 is displayed. .. By executing the count effect in this way, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state approaches 600 times.

Specifically, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 or the first decorative symbol 1600a1 in the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. (Ii) The variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a2 is stopped, but when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the main control board 1310 is separated from the symbol confirmation command. Is sending a relief count command to the peripheral control board 1510. This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the relief count command has been received, thereby storing the number of times the relief count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. By recognizing that and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is increased. It is possible to grasp the number of times, and based on the grasped number of fluctuations, when the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the special symbol in the low probability state It is possible to execute a count effect that notifies the number of fluctuations. Further, the relief count command is not limited to the above-described mode from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and each time a symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. A different command may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving the relief count command 1, and receives the relief count command 2. It becomes possible to grasp how many times the special symbol has changed in the low-probability state, such as recognizing that the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low-probability state has reached 501 times. Will be possible.

As shown in FIGS. 242 (B) and 242 (C), as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the first decorative symbol is displayed from the 597th variation display of the special symbol. Every time the variation display of 1600a1 (first special symbol) or second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is shown as a count effect. The stop symbol of the one decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second decorative symbol a2 is displayed as a stop. In this example, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 597th, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is referred to as "597" on condition that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order. The symbol combination for the relief notice is selected and set, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol. This relief notice symbol combination can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect is executed (when the reach is out of reach), the above-mentioned reach is displayed. As a result of variable display, the out-of-reach symbol (combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; the out-of-reach symbol) is displayed once. Although it is displayed, it is subsequently changed and displayed as a symbol combination for relief notice such as "597". Further, from the 597th variation display of the special symbol, the "help mode" executed when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 is imminent. A relief notice image B indicating that "help is imminent!" Is displayed.

In addition, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variation display in which the lottery result is excluded is executed as the variation display of the 600th special symbol. If there is a hold, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is a hold display of a special symbol indicating that the special symbol is on hold for executing the 600th variable display of the special symbol (FIG. 242). (Face hold) displayed at the lower left of (C) to (G) is displayed. As a result, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol is executed, and the "help mode" is set. The player can know in advance that he will rush.

As shown in FIGS. 242 (D) and 242 (E), at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted. When the count is increased and it is determined that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 598th, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is set on the condition that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order. A combination of symbols for relief notice called "598" is selected and set, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 242 (F) and 242 (G), at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted. When the count is increased and it is determined that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is set as a stop symbol on condition that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order. A combination of symbols for relief notice called "599" is selected and set, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol. Further, when the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped for the 599th time, the "help mode L" is entered with the variation display of the next special symbol at the center of the staging display device 1600. A relief suggestion image of "CHANGE!" Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 242 (H), at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted up. When it is determined that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low-probability state is the 600th, the low-probability non-time-saving state is changed to the low-probability time-saving at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol). It has moved to the state B. Then, at the start time of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L is used by using the effect display device 1600, the lamp emission, and the voice output. The start production has started.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a relief confirmation image of "help mode L rush !!" is displayed so as to notify that the "help mode L" is entered by the start of the help mode L start effect. it's shown. In FIG. 242 (H), the face hold displayed in the lower left of FIGS. 242 (C) to (G) is moved / enlarged and displayed next to the character display "Help mode L rushed !!". So, it is clearly shown that the face hold corresponds to "help mode L". Further, during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed is displayed in a small size in the upper right part of the upper area of the effect display device 1600. The variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed is displayed small in the lower right portion in the lower region of the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 242 (I), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the lottery result of the first special symbol is removed from the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed. As a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, the normal stop symbol "854" is stopped and displayed on condition that the above is the case. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the help mode L start effect, that is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L start effect is ended.

As shown in FIG. 242 (J), after the end of the help mode L start effect, the help mode L effect is started. Specifically, during the execution of the help mode L effect, the low probability time saving state B is being controlled as a state display indicating the current gaming state in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. The image being rescued, which is "in help mode L", is displayed. Further, in the low probability time saving state B, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning opening 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600. The arrow bar of "Left-handed!" Is displayed to instruct the fire to aim at.

If neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is reserved during the execution of the help mode L effect, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) or the second decorative symbol is held. The variable display of 1600a2 (second special symbol) is not started, and the volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and the light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed at the lower part of the staging display device 1600. it's shown. In addition, the volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar changes the light amount level by operating the light amount button. Therefore, it is possible to change the memory display. Further, the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed during the variable display or the non-variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol). In this way, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is stopped, there is no hold of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first is When the variable display of the 1-decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) or the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is not executed, the volume level can be adjusted by displaying the volume adjustment bar or the light amount adjustment bar. It is possible to know that the light intensity level can be changed during this period. Further, the above-mentioned rescued image and the arrow bar are continuously displayed even when the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) or the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is not executed. It is possible, and it is continuously displayed in the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) in the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar described above, and the player accidentally leaves the seat despite the low probability time saving state B. I try not to end up. Further, regarding the display of the relief notice image B "help is imminent!" And the relief suggestion image "CHANGE!", The first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second) are also displayed. It can be continuously displayed when the variable display of the special symbol) is not executed, and these images are also continuously displayed at the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) in the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar described above. , The player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat even though the low probability time saving state B is imminent.

Further, during the execution of the help mode L effect, there is neither a hold of the first special symbol nor a hold of the second special symbol, and various winning openings are held until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. When there is no entry into the ball, a demonstration effect (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the effect display device 1600. At the end of the demo production, a "depression prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescued image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demo production, and are continuously displayed at the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) in the above-mentioned demo production or the "depression prevention display". , The player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the above-mentioned relief notice image B "help is imminent!" And the relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Can be continuously displayed during the demo production, and these images can also be displayed during the demo production and "engagement". It is continuously displayed in the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) by the "prevention display", so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even though the low probability time saving state B is near. .. If there is a ball entering various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 during the execution of the demo production, only the demo production is ended at that point, and the rescued image and the arrow bar are continuously displayed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 242 (K), the 700th first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 are being executed during the help mode L effect, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B. When the variation display of (second special symbol) is executed (when the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, "help mode L" is executed. The relief end image "Help last!" Notifying that the last decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) or second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is a variable display during execution of "" it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 242 (L), the 700th first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (after executing the help mode L effect, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B). After the variation display of the second special symbol) is stopped (after the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 1300th, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped), the low probability time saving state B is terminated and the low probability is not. Since the transition to the time saving state is performed, "normal" is displayed in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600 to notify that the current gaming state is the low probability non-time saving state after passing through the "help mode L". .. Further, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "help L: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that "help mode L" has been executed once. .. It should be noted that the 700th first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) change during the execution of the help mode L effect, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B. If the lottery result becomes a "big hit" before the display is executed, the low-probability time-saving state B is terminated and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the type of "big hit". The help mode L production is finished with.

Next, a specific example of the effect in the case of starting the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 241 (B) shows a time chart showing a change in the gaming state when the variation display of the second special symbol is started during the variation display of the first special symbol, but FIG. 243 shows the time chart. A concrete production example in the case of progress is shown. 243 (A) to (F) are the same as FIGS. 242 (A) to (F), and FIGS. 243 (K) to 242 (L) are shown in FIGS. 242 (J) to (L). Since they are the same, the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

As shown in FIG. 243 (F), the number of fluctuations (relief) of the special symbol in the low probability state at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) during the control of the low probability non-time saving state. After counting up the count of the number counter) and determining that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, as shown in FIG. 243 (G), the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol). When the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is started during the execution of the variation display, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted up. It is determined that the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th. Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability non-time reduction state is changed to the low probability time reduction at the start of the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol). It has moved to the state B.

Further, during the execution of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), at the start time of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B. , The effect display device 1600, the lamp light emission and the voice output are used to start the help mode L start effect. In this example, a count effect (help mode L precursor effect) that counts down to the start of the help mode L effect is executed using the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, but the count effect is until the end. Even though it has not been executed, the help mode L start effect is suddenly started while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is being executed, and the low probability time saving state B is set. You can make it look like a sudden transition.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a relief confirmation image of "help mode L rush !!" is displayed so as to notify that the "help mode L" is entered by the start of the help mode L start effect. it's shown. Further, during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed is displayed in a small size in the upper right part of the upper area of the effect display device 1600. The variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed is displayed small in the lower right portion in the lower region of the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 243 (H), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the lottery result of the first special symbol is removed from the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed. On the condition that it is, the normal stop symbol "599" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1. Further, as shown in FIG. 243 (I), if there is a hold of the first special symbol after the stop display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, the new first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) changes. Start displaying. Further, as shown in FIG. 243 (J), regarding the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed, the second is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order. As the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a2, the normal stop symbol "219" is displayed as a stop. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the help mode L start effect, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed from the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L start effect is ended.

In this example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is executed in the upper region of the effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 is executed in the lower region of the effect display device 1600. Since the game in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is the mainstream during the control of the low-probability non-time saving state, the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is visually executed on the staging display device 1600. Then, the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 may be executed so as to be difficult to see or invisible. In such a case, it is not known whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has started during the execution of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol), and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times due to the start of, the help mode L start effect is suddenly started, and it is as if the state suddenly shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B. I can show you.

In the above, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, at the start time of the variable display of the second special symbol (at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B). , Help mode L start production has started. However, during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the count effect (help mode L precursor effect) that counts down to the start of the help mode L effect is executed using the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1. Therefore, if the variation display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol and the help mode L start effect is started, the count effect is not executed until the end. Therefore, for example, for the effect display device 1600, the help mode L start effect may be started after waiting for the count effect to be executed to the end. Such a configuration will be described below.

FIG. 244 is a time chart showing changes in the gaming state when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed. FIG. 241 (B) describes a case where the help mode L start effect is started at the start time of the variation display of the second special symbol (the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B), but FIG. 244 shows. , Only the parts that are different from it are explained.

As shown in FIG. 244, at the time of transition from the low-probability non-time saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, the help mode L start effect is executed by using the effect display device 1600, the lamp light emission, and the voice output. .. Of these, in the effect display device 1600, the start time of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that is, to the low probability time saving state B. At the time of transition, the help mode L start effect has not been started, and after the stop display of the symbol variation D of the first special symbol that was being executed at the start of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol, the help is provided. Mode L start production has started. Here, before the symbol variation X of the second special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the first special symbol is designated as the 599th symbol variation. The symbol variation D is started, and when the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is executed, the countdown is performed until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, how many times the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is). Help mode L to notify if there is a count effect) The precursor effect is being executed. In this regard, until the symbol variation D of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the help mode L start effect is not started, and the help mode L precursor effect is continuously executed to produce the help mode L effect. The countdown to the start does not end suddenly, and you can play a game without any discomfort. However, regarding the effect display device 1600, at the time of transition to the low-probability time-saving state B, a cut-in image or the like is displayed during the execution of the help mode L precursor effect, and the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B is indicated. You may make it noticeable.

On the other hand, in the lamp light emission and the voice output, the start time of the symbol variation X of the second special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that is, to the low probability time saving state B. At the time of transition, the help mode L start production has started. That is, with respect to the lamp light emission and the sound output, the help mode L start effect is started prior to the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the effect display device 1600, the help mode L start effect is not started at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, whereas in the lamp light emission and the voice output, the effect is changed to the low probability time saving state B. Since the help mode L start effect is started at the time of transition, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600) during the execution of the symbol change D of the first special symbol. Even if it reaches, it is possible to notice that the state has shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

Next, a specific example of the effect in the case of delaying the start of the help mode L start effect will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 244 shows a time chart showing a change in the gaming state when the start of the help mode L start effect is delayed, but FIG. 245 shows a specific example of the effect when the time chart progresses. ing. It should be noted that FIGS. 243 (A) to (F) are the same as those of FIGS. 242 (A) to (F), and FIGS. 243 (M) to (O) are shown in FIGS. 242 (J) to (L). Since they are the same, the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

As shown in FIG. 245 (F), the number of fluctuations (relief) of the special symbol in the low probability state at the start of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) during the control of the low probability non-time saving state. After counting up the count of the number counter) and determining that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, as shown in FIG. 245 (G), the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol). When the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is started during the execution of the variation display, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted up. It is determined that the number of changes in the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th. Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability non-time reduction state is changed to the low probability time reduction at the start of the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol). It has moved to the state B.

Further, although not shown, at the start time of the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L is started by using the lamp emission and the voice output. The production has started. On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the help mode L start effect is not started at the start time of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol), that is, at the time of transition to the low probability time saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 245 (H), after the transition to the low-probability time saving state B, the lottery result of the first special symbol is excluded from the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed. On the condition that the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is stopped, a combination of symbols for relief notice called "599" is selected and set, and the stop symbol is displayed in place of the normal stop symbol. Further, when the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped for the 599th time, the "help mode L" is entered with the variation display of the next special symbol at the center of the staging display device 1600. A relief suggestion image of "CHANGE!" Is displayed. In this example, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is used to execute a count effect (help mode L precursor effect) that counts down to the start of the help mode L effect. By delaying the start of the help mode L start effect, the count effect is executed to the end. In this way, until the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped and displayed for the 599th time, the help mode L start effect is not started, and the count effect (help mode L precursor effect) is performed. By continuously executing the game, the countdown to the start of the help mode L effect does not end suddenly, and the game can be played without a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 245 (I), after the stop display of the variation display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped, the variation display of the new first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is started. However, after the stop display of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped, the effect display device 1600 is used to start the help mode L start effect. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the help mode L start effect is executed until the variable display of the new first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a relief confirmation image of "help mode L rush !!" is displayed so as to notify that the "help mode L" is entered by the start of the help mode L start effect. it's shown. Further, during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed is displayed in a small size in the upper right part of the upper area of the effect display device 1600. The variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed is displayed small in the lower right portion in the lower region of the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 245 (J), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol is removed from the variable display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) being executed. As a stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 1600a2, the normal stop symbol "513" is stopped and displayed on condition that the above is the case. Then, as shown in FIG. 245 (K), after the stop display of the variation display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is performed, the variation display of the new second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) is displayed. It has started.

As shown in FIG. 245 (L), during the execution of the help mode L start effect, the lottery result of the first special symbol is removed from the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) being executed. As a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, the normal stop symbol "854" is stopped and displayed on condition that the above is the case. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the help mode L start effect, that is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the transition to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L start effect is ended.

As in this example, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the variation of the second special symbol is changed during the variable display of the first special symbol. The second special symbol may be stopped and displayed before the display is started and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, unlike this example, at the start of the symbol change, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter). = 600) If the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is performed after the stop display of the symbol change reaches 600), the number of changes of the special symbol in the low-probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600). During the variable display of the first special symbol that reaches, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (for the purpose of seeing, the 600th symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed). , The first special symbol with the relief count counter = 600 has not yet been stopped and displayed, and there may be a sense of incongruity that the low probability time saving state B has not been entered. However, in this example, at the start of the symbol change, the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief count counter = 600). ) Is started, the second special symbol as described above is stopped and displayed (for the purpose of seeing, the 600th symbol change is stopped and displayed) because the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B. There is no sense of incongruity that the low-probability time-saving state B has not been entered.

In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device is counted up at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, as is the case of counting up the relief count counter at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. That is, at the start of the symbol fluctuation in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, 600 times is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device. It is possible to determine that the state B will shift to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, as another example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device may be counted up when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In such a case, at the start of the symbol change in which the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the state shifts to the low probability time saving state B, and when the symbol change is stopped, the symbol change is stopped. 600 times will be displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external device, but since it has shifted to the low probability time saving state B before 600 times are displayed on the external device, the game There is no impression that a person has suffered a disadvantage. Further, as described above, while the variation display of the first special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the variation display of the second special symbol is started. , When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of changes of the special symbol displayed on the external device at the time when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is 600 times will be displayed. However, in this example, the player is disadvantaged because the player shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol before the 600 times are displayed on the external device. You will not get the impression that you have suffered from.

[Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match]
(About ID code)
In the present embodiment, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front, and is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 with respect to the door frame 3. A staging operation unit 300 (operation device) that is attached to the front of the door frame top unit 450 (decorative member), the plate decoration unit 250, and the plate base unit 210 and can be operated by the player is attached. As shown in FIG. 246, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300 can be attached to and detached from each other with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment in the game hall. There is, and it is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, a door frame top unit 450, and a staging operation unit 300 as a set as one group for each model series. In other words, when changing to a new model series, with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment in the game hall, the game board 5 corresponding to the series of the model before the change, the door frame top unit 450, After removing the staging operation unit 300, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300 corresponding to the new model series will be attached. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) when it is desired to renew not only the game playability but also the appearance of the gaming machine when changing models, and the efficiency is high. The playability and the appearance of the gaming machine can be renewed.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 via the door frame top relay board. It is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the staging operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 (front decorative substrate 321 and rear decorative substrate 322), a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative substrate 364, and an operation button. It is for relaying the connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. be. Thereby, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322, for example, via the operation unit relay board 332.

As shown in FIG. 247, the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 are unique for identifying the model series. A unique ID code, which is special information with a different code (a code that exists only once in the world), is stored in advance. This ID code has a unique ID code for each model series and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332 and refer to it. Further, the RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332. The ID code stored in this table matches the model series with the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 that matches the model series with respect to the game board 5. It matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has an ID code stored in the reference table and an ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. A predetermined determination period determines whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. Judgment is made within. Here, when the door frame top unit 450 whose model series matches (in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the door frame are attached. The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the top unit 450 matches, while the model series does not match the game board 5 (not in a regular relationship). The door frame top unit 450 When attached, the respective ID codes do not match. Similarly, when the staging operation unit 300 having the same model series (having a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the staging operation unit The ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the 300 matches, while the staging operation unit 300 whose model series does not match (not in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5. If so, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the staging operation unit 300 do not match.

If only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. During an error notification pattern 1 (for example, "Please check the type of door frame top unit" is displayed) is executed. If only the ID code of the staging operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the staging display device 1600 is used to indicate that the staging operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. The notification pattern 2 during an error to be notified (for example, the display of "Please check the type of the effect operation unit") is executed. If neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the staging operation unit 300 match with respect to the game board 5, the staging display device 1600 is used to display a series of models. Error notification pattern 3 (for example, "Check the types of the door frame top unit and the effect operation unit" to notify that the door frame top unit 450 that does not match and the effect operation unit 300 that does not match the model series are installed. Please display).

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is not attached to the door frame 3, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 relays the door frame top relay board or the operation unit when the power is turned on. The ID code cannot be taken out from the board 332 and referred to. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has an ID code stored in the reference table and an ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. , And whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. At that time, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is not connected when the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board 332 even after the predetermined determination period has passed. It is determined that the state is.

Further, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be confirmed (cannot be acquired) for the game board 5, an error is notified by using the effect display device 1600 that the effect operation unit 300 is not attached. The middle notification pattern 4 (for example, the display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit") is executed. Further, when only the ID code of the staging operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be acquired) for the game board 5, an error is being generated to notify the game board 5 that the staging operation unit 300 is not attached by using the staging display device 1600. The notification pattern 5 (for example, the display of "Please check the connection of the staging operation unit") is executed. If neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the staging operation unit 300 can be confirmed (acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the staging display device 1600 is used to use the door frame. The error notification pattern 6 (for example, "Please check the connection between the door frame top unit and the effect operation unit" is displayed) for notifying that the top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not attached is executed.

Here, for the game board 5, the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the staging operation unit 300 match. Regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is used, it is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 at the time of executing a normal effect (a variable effect or a non-variable effect). Similarly, with respect to the game board 5, even if there is a part of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code cannot be confirmed, a normal effect (a variable effect or a non-variable effect) is produced. ), Various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light.

Further, regarding the door frame top unit 450, when the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 match, it is normal. At the time of executing the effect (effect during change or effect during non-variation), for example, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right via the door frame top relay board. While it is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the decorative board 457, if they do not match, the series of the model does not match (not in a regular relationship). The various LEDs mounted on the board are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. If the door frame top unit 450 is not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is performed. There is no.

Similarly, for the staging operation unit 300, when the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the staging operation unit 300 match, it is normal. At the time of executing the effect (effect during change or effect during non-variation), for example, various LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322 are controlled to emit light via the operation unit relay board 332. However, if they do not match, the series of the model does not match (not in a regular relationship), and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the staging operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light. The various LEDs are turned off. Further, when the effect operation unit 300 is not attached and the operation unit relay board 332 cannot be confirmed, the light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 is not performed.

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, when controlling various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 to emit light, the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is used as a member located around the game board 5. The light emission control of the various LEDs mounted and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the staging operation unit 300 is performed in cooperation with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute an integrated light emitting effect using not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300. However, among the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300, for the parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the parts that do not match can be controlled to emit light. Because there is no such thing, it is not possible to participate in the light emission production. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300, the parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID code cannot be confirmed are mounted on the light emitting board of the parts whose ID code cannot be confirmed. Since there is no light emission control of various LEDs, it is not possible to participate in the light emission effect.

In this example, the game board 5 can be attached to and detached from the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 can be installed on a predetermined main body frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 is a dish left decorative board 273 provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 via the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. Plate right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top center decorative board 455, It is connected to the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 passes through the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3, and the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the door window 101a in the door frame 3 Plate left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side Various LEDs mounted on the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can be controlled to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 247, the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 has a unique ID, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying the model series. The code is stored in advance. This ID code has a unique ID code for each model series and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the interface board 635 and refer to it. Further, the RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the interface board 635. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 in which the model series matches.

Then, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 match. Judgment is made within the judgment period. Here, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 whose model series matches (in a regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table and the main body frame 4 If the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 that matches the ID code of the interface board 635 but does not match the model series (not in a regular relationship), it is stored in the reference table. The ID code used does not match the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. If the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 do not match, the model series do not match (there is no regular relationship). On the other hand, since the game board 5 is attached, the launch control for launching the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 cannot be performed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, when the predetermined execution conditions are satisfied, the door frame top unit is used as a member located around the game board 5 when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5. The light emission control of the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the 450 and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the staging operation unit 300 are performed in cooperation with each other, but they are mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3. It is possible to perform light emission control in cooperation with each of the various LEDs. As a result, it is possible to execute an integrated light emitting effect using not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, but also the door frame 3.

(About setting suggestion staging)
In the present embodiment, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 while the design is changing or not changing. Various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, and the like are used to perform a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. The currently set value is stored in the RAM on the main control board 1310 side, and is currently set at a predetermined timing (when the change of the set value is completed, the timing when the symbol change starts, etc.). By transmitting a command related to the set value to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the currently set setting value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In the setting suggestion effect, one of the suggestion effects A to D is executed as an effect according to the currently set setting value. Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the suggestion effects A to D is to be executed. In the execution determination, a predetermined random number value is determined by the peripheral control MPU when it is determined to execute the suggestion effect. Suggestion effect A that acquires X and suggests a setting value 6, suggestion effect B that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6), and even setting values (setting values 2, 4, 6). ) Is likely to be suggested effect C, or an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5) is likely to be suggested effect D, which is set as the currently set value. Determined according to the random number value X.

Here, when the currently set value is the set value 1, the suggestion effect D has a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 1: 1: 8). ) Is referred to, and the staging determination according to the random number value X is performed with reference to the suggestion staging distribution table 1. Further, when the currently set value is the set value 2, the suggestion effect C has a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 1: 8: 1). The staging decision is made according to the random number value X with reference to the suggestion staging distribution table 2 determined in. Further, when the currently set value is the set value 3, the suggestion effect D has a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 1: 1: 8). The staging decision is made according to the random number value X with reference to the suggestion staging distribution table 3 determined in. Further, when the currently set setting value is the set value 4, the suggestion effect B and the suggestion effect C have a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 5: The staging determination according to the random number value X is performed with reference to the suggestion staging distribution table 4 determined in 4: 1). Further, when the currently set setting value is the set value 5, the suggestion effect B and the suggestion effect D have a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 5: The staging determination according to the random number value X is performed with reference to the suggestion staging distribution table 5 determined in 1: 4). Further, when the currently set setting value is the setting value 6, the suggestion effects A to D including the suggestion effect A suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are included. Is determined with a predetermined probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 3: 4: 2: 1). Is done. That is, since the suggestion effects A to D may be output regardless of the current set value, the set value is not fixed, but the suggestion effect A is currently set when the suggestion effect A is executed. It is confirmed that the set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestion effect.

Then, at the time of executing the suggestion effect, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 and the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 are used to emit light with a predetermined emission color for each type of suggestion effect. Various LEDs mounted, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, and the like are controlled to emit light. Specifically, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the suggestion effect B that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode (rainbow color) and suggests that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6). As the suggestion effect C that blinks in red and suggests that there is a high possibility of even-numbered setting values (setting values 2, 4, 6), it blinks in blue and odd-numbered setting values (1, 3, 6,). As the suggestion effect D suggesting that the possibility of 5) is high, the light emission is controlled so as to blink in green.

As shown in FIGS. 248 and 249, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300. Various LEDs and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3 can be divided into a plurality of groups and light emission control can be performed for each group, and each group can emit light with a predetermined light emission color. Is possible.

First, as described in detail above, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 attached to the game board 5 is a back front peripheral decoration body formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. The back front peripheral decoration board 3201 and the back front peripheral decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs for light-emitting decoration the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 are mounted are provided, and the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 has a back front. The plurality of LEDs on the peripheral decoration substrate make it possible to independently emit light and decorate each of the portions divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 248, as the light emitting board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration board are used to make the upper left portion of the back front peripheral decorative body 3201 light emitting decoration. Multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board are LED1, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration board for light emitting decoration on the lower left are LED2, and the back front peripheral decoration board for light emitting decoration on the lower right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the LED 3 are divided into LED3, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate for illuminating and decorating the upper right part are divided into LEDs 4, and the LEDs are emitted for each group of LEDs 1 to 4. It is possible to control the emission of LEDs of the same group to the same color.

As shown in FIG. 249, as for the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456 are mounted on the LED5 and the door frame top center decorative board 455. The plurality of LEDs to be mounted are divided into LED6, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457 are divided into LEDs7, and the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group of LEDs 5 to 7, and the LEDs of the same group have the same color. It is possible to control the light emission.

Further, as for the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, among the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 are mounted on the LED 8 and the rear decorative board 322. A plurality of LEDs are divided into LEDs 9, and, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 8 to 9 and control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color.

Further, as for the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side unit 420 are the LED10 and the door of the door frame left side unit 420. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the frame are LED 11, the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272, and the dish right decorative board provided behind the dish right decorative lens 277. Multiple LEDs mounted on 278 are LED12, multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 are LED13, and multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame right side unit 430 are door frame right side upper decorative board. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the 432 are divided into LEDs 14, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 11 to 14 and control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color.

As the light emitting substrate of the game board 5, in addition to the above-mentioned back front peripheral decorative substrate, a variable winning opening decorative substrate (not shown) for making the variable winning opening 2003 emit light, and a first starting opening 2004 emit light. A first starting port decorative substrate (not shown) for decorating and a second starting port decorative substrate (not shown) for decorating the second starting port 2005 with light emission are provided. In this example, among the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decorative board are LEDs 15, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first starting port decorative board are LEDs 16. , A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second starting port decorative board are divided into LEDs 17, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of LEDs 15 to 17 and control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color. It has become.

FIG. 250 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion effect executed as an effect during the change of the symbol. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5, and the rainbow is used as a suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 while the design is changing. A case of executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a light emitting mode will be described below.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the variation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. The staging display device 1600 starts a fluctuating staging such as a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and in conjunction with the display of the staging display device 1600, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and staging operation unit 300. LED 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (timing t0). Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 prompts the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, "effect". Press the operation button! ”) To execute the button operation promotion effect.

Then, at the timing t1, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is not pressed, and the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. Then, LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door. LED 8 of the frame 3 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". Make it emit light with. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (eg for 5 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 each emit light in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow emission mode in cooperation with each other, resulting in high-impact emission. You can perform the production. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the 14 is emitted in different emission colors for each of the two groups, and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, and it is sufficient that a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

On the other hand, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 are executed. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not involved. As for the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, during the execution period of the suggestion effect A, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued regardless of the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode.

Further, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, during the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the plurality of display areas are different from each other. The staging image of the rainbow mode to be displayed in the display color is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted.

Further, as described in detail above, the back-up front staging unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 has a rectangular back-up front decorative body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and behind the back-up front decorative body 3310. It is equipped with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-up front decorative body 3310. There is. The back-up front decoration body 3310 is provided so that the seven rankings of sumo such as "yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and the LED on the back-up front decoration board. Therefore, each of the seven rankings can be independently luminescent and decorated. In this example, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, during the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in the rainbow light emission mode that emits light in a different light emission color. In such a display body with a rainbow emission mode, the emission color emitted by each of the seven numbers is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red". In this way, such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds).

As described above, when the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed during the fluctuation of the design, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, but LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved when performing suggestion effects B to D. And the light emission effect is executed. That is, when the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (set value 4 to 6) is executed, the LED 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emitting effect that blinks in red, suggesting that there is a high possibility of even set values (setting values 2, 4, 6). When the suggestion effect C is executed, LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved to execute a light emission effect that blinks in blue, suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5). When the effect D is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved in executing the light emitting effect that blinks in green.

Specifically, when the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is executed, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is set by the player at timing t1. When the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without being pressed or the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to the door frame top unit 450 are pressed. 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to blink in "red". Further, when the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility of an even set value (setting values 2, 4, 6) is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also made to emit light so as to blink in "blue". Further, when the suggestion effect D suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5) is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also made to emit light so as to blink in "green". That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 blink in the same emission color for each group. To emit light.

(Regarding restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match)
In the above, the case where the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on has been described, but the door frame top unit 450 with respect to the game board 5 has been described. If either or both of the ID codes of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match, at least a part of the light emission effect with the emission color corresponding to the suggestion effect A to D is restricted when the suggestion effect is executed. ing. Similarly, when either or both of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the door frame 3, the suggestion effects A to D are supported when the suggestion effect is executed. At least a part of the emission effect in the emission color is limited.

In this example, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 matches that of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 can be controlled to emit light, whereas the ID code is used. If they do not match, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Similarly, when the ID code of the staging operation unit 300 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 can be controlled to emit light, whereas the ID codes match. If not, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 8 to 9 are turned off. That is, among the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300, for the parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the parts that do not match can be controlled to emit light. Instead, the LED is turned off while the symbol is changing or not changing.

FIG. 251 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion effect executed as an effect during the change of the symbol when there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 among the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 does not match with the game board 5, and the set value 6 is set while the design is changing. As the suggestion effect A suggesting the above, a case where the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is determined will be described below. When the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, or when the ID codes of both the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5. The same control is performed during the execution period of the suggestion effect.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the variation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. The staging display device 1600 starts a fluctuating staging such as a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and in conjunction with the display of the staging display device 1600, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3 Light emission is controlled from 14 to 14 (timing t0). At this time, for the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Become. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing, the display prompting the operation to the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 by the effect display device 1600 (for example). "Press the effect operation button!") Is performed. The button operation promotion effect is executed (timing tA).

Then, when the button operation promotion effect is started at the timing tA, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Not only the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, but also the LEDs 8 to 9 and the game board of the staging operation unit 300 whose ID codes match the game board 5. The LEDs 1 to 4 of 5 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are also turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the staging operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off.

Then, the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed by the player or the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed at the timing t1. Then, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, although it is the timing to execute the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). There is no directing. Specifically, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the ID code is given to the game board 5. Not only the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 that do not match, but also the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 whose ID codes match the game board 5. The LED is turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the staging operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off.

On the other hand, between the timing t1 and the timing t10, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 are turned off. , LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in red. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, Instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and are lit in the rainbow light emitting mode, the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and are lit in red is executed.

As described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. , LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with that of the game board 5, the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 1 to 14 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. The execution of the light emission effect that lights up with is suppressed. Here, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be controlled to emit light, so other LEDs (game board). When an attempt is made to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, one of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. It becomes an incomplete mode in which the portion is missing, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. Therefore, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the ID code is sent to the game board 5 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. By suppressing the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode including the matching parts, it is possible to prevent the light emission in the mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established, and the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it cannot be determined whether or not the user is present.

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), it fluctuates at the timing t1 when the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. If there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 while the execution of the effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the pattern command is stopped, the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. At the timing tA before the timing t1 to execute, the execution of the effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command is stopped, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the like. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 are turned off. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to implicitly notify in advance that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode cannot be executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3.

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), the execution period of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 (timing t1 to t10). ), The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to change with a part of the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, but there is a component whose ID code does not match with that of the game board 5. In this case, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to light in red without changing the emission color. There is. Here, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6). When the above is executed, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to blink in red. That is, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, the suggestion effect B is used instead of the light emission effect of lighting the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in the rainbow light emission mode as the suggestion effect A. It is performing a light emission effect that lights up in red, similar to. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, so that it is not possible to notify that the set value 6 is set. By performing a light emitting effect that lights up in red using LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to notify as if there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6), and there is no expectation. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

If there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set value 4 to 6) is high. ), Instead of the light emitting effect that blinks in red with the involvement of LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. , LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in red. Further, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5, the execution period (timing) of the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility of an even set value (setting values 2, 4, 6). In t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in a light emitting effect that blinks in blue. Instead, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in blue. Further, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5). During the execution period of D (timing t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved. Instead of the light emitting effect that blinks in green, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing the light emitting effect that lights in green.

In this example, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. LED1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued regardless of the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, even when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 Does not turn off the LEDs like LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and continues the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern. I am doing it. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 correspond to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the light emission effect, it is possible to maintain a situation in which expectations can be expected for the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

Among the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decorative board are LED15, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first starting port decorative board are LED16. (2) Starting port A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board are divided into LEDs 17, and the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) so as to improve the reflection efficiency. Has been done. For this reason, even when a plurality of full-color LEDs that can emit light are emitted in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and develop a vivid color. The first starting port 2004 and the LED 17 can make each of the second starting port 2005 brighter and more vividly (clearly) luminescently decorated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, for the LEDs 15 to 17, an LED that emits light only in a single color (for example, red) may be used, and even when such an LED is used, the variable winning opening 2003 by the LED 15 and the first starting port 2004 by the LED 16. Each of the second starting ports 2005 can be brightly and vividly (clearly) luminescently decorated by the LED 17, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match). In the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. The production image of is displayed. That is, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame While LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the effect display device 1600 is a rainbow. The effect image of the aspect is displayed. As a result, as long as the light emitting area (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is focused, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, but the effect is produced. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it can be grasped that the set value 6 is suggested by the staging image of the rainbow mode.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match). During the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in a different light emitting color. That is, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame While the LED 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the back top front decoration body 3310 is not used. , Each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in a rainbow emission mode that emits light in different emission colors. As a result, as long as the light emitting area (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is focused, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, but the effect is produced. By paying attention to the back-up front decorative body 3310 over the upper part of the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the set value 6 is suggested by the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5, the variation pattern command is used at the timing tA before the timing t1 for executing the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. The execution of the effect according to the specified fluctuation pattern is stopped so that the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. However, it may be at least a stage before the timing t1 for executing the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, and for example, the game starts from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to execute the suggestion effect (timing t0). The LEDs 1 to 4 on the board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 on the staging operation unit 300 may be turned off. In such a configuration, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit are used as a warning effect to anticipate the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode from the start of the symbol change to the execution of the suggestion effect. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a notice effect is not executed, and the player expects a light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. Can be deterred from holding. Further, from the variation display of the symbol before the variation display of the symbol on which the suggestion effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are displayed. May be turned off. In such a configuration, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top are used as a look-ahead effect for predicting a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode before the variable display of the symbol on which the suggestion effect is to be executed. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a look-ahead effect is no longer executed, and the expectation for a light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is a game. It is possible to deter a person from holding.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to LED 1 of the game board 5 4. The LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 are turned off, but the execution period of the suggestion staging A suggesting the set value 6 (timing t1 to t10). The LED 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300 may be kept off even after the end of the process. In such a configuration, after the end of the suggestion effect, for example, when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed again when the symbol becomes a hit symbol when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, or after the symbol becomes a hit symbol. Even when performing a light emission effect that lights up again in the rainbow light emission mode during the hit game, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. It is possible to collectively prevent the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode from being emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established.

Further, in this example, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on. Even when the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is not connected, the same processing as when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 is performed. That is, when the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5 when the power is turned on, the same as when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5. During the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame. The LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3 are used to suppress the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

Regarding the above, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on (including the determination of whether or not they are connected). Since it is not determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the game is performed after the power is turned on. When the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is removed from the board 5, it cannot be detected that the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 has been removed. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the LED is turned off for the parts removed from the game board 5, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. During the period (timing t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. That is, when the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 do not match (including the case where they are not connected) with the game board 5 when the power is turned on, the set value 6 is suggested. During the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A, the execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted, whereas the door frame top unit 450 with respect to the game board 5 after the power is turned on. Or, when the effect operation unit 300 is removed (including the case where it is not connected), the rainbow light emission mode is not established during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. Will emit light at. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 (including the case where it is not connected) after the power is turned on, the trace is notified to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside that a problem has occurred in connection with the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300.

Further, after the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, a component having the same ID code as the game board 5 is connected to the removed part. Even if this is the case, it is not possible to detect that a component having the same ID code is connected. Therefore, for the parts having the same ID code connected to the game board 5, the LEDs are turned off, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. During the period (timing t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. On the other hand, after the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5 are connected to the removed parts. If this is the case, it cannot be detected that a component whose ID code does not match is connected. Therefore, for the parts whose ID codes connected to the game board 5 do not match, the LEDs are turned off, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. During the period (timing t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. As a result, if the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including the case where the effect operation unit 300 is not connected), the game board 5 is subsequently connected. Regardless of whether a part with a matching ID code or a part with a non-matching ID code is connected, there is a trace to the outside that the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 have been removed from the game board 5. It is possible to notify the outside that it is necessary to take measures so that a problem does not occur again with respect to the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300.

Further, in this example, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on (including the determination of whether or not they are connected). However, after the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is input to the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 or the effect is performed for the game board 5. It may be determined whether or not the ID codes of the operation units 300 match (including the determination of whether or not they are connected). In addition, a pachinko machine is used to determine whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match (including the determination of whether or not they are connected) with respect to the game board 5. It is provided on the back side of the machine 1, and when the operation switch is operated after the power is turned on, it is determined (connected) whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300 match with the game board 5. It may include the determination of whether or not it is done.). According to such a configuration, when the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is removed by operating the operation switch thereafter. Can be detected. That is, if the door frame top unit 450 or the staging operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5 at the time of operating the operation switch, there may be a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5. Similarly, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300. The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to prevent the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode from being executed.

Further, in this example, when the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 are executed. Although the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14, the light emitting effect of lighting in such a rainbow light emitting mode may be executed by an effect other than the suggestive effect, for example. During the variable display of the symbol, it may be executed with a high expectation degree effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of hitting. Even in such a configuration, if there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 during the execution period of the high expectation effect. While LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the game board 5 is used. When there is a part whose ID code does not match, it is suppressed so that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed during the execution period of the high expectation effect.

Further, in this example, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300 can be changed when the model is changed, but other modes may be used. For example, not only the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 but also other decorative units may be changed for the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) when the model is changed. As an example. , The upper decorative unit located above the door window 101a provided in the door frame 3 (similar to the door frame top unit 450 of the above embodiment), the right decorative unit located to the right of the door window 101a, and the left of the door window 101a. Even if at least four decorative units such as the left decorative unit located on the side and the lower decorative unit located below the door window 101a (similar to the effect operation unit 300 of the above embodiment) can be changed when the model is changed. good. As a result, the change in the appearance of the gaming machine due to the model change can be further increased, and the player can be given more freshness. It should be noted that a plurality of LEDs are provided in each of these four decorative units, and an ID code is set for each of them so that a match / mismatch / non-mounting determination can be made in the same manner as described above. It is possible to perform the same processing as described above with respect to the light emitting effect such as the rainbow light emitting mode, and it is possible to obtain the same gaming effect as described above.

[Winning button effect when executing rainbow effect]
In the present embodiment, a rainbow effect (a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting during the variable display of the symbol. Then, it is not possible to determine whether or not a hit is achieved only by executing the rainbow effect, but it is determined whether or not a hit is achieved when a predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. The player operation effect (button effect) that can be performed is executed.

In this example, as an effect according to the variation pattern, a rainbow effect as a high expectation effect can be executed during the variation display of the symbol, and a hit rainbow effect is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol. Although the rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is set, in which the deviation is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol. That is, at the time of hitting, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, and at the time of losing, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Then, by lowering the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of deviation from the fluctuation pattern for executing the effect at the time of other deviations, the rainbow at the time of deviation is lower than the effect at the time of other deviations. The frequency of execution of the production is reduced. As a result, when executing the rainbow effect, it is not possible to determine whether it is the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the rainbow effect at the time of off, but the ratio of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is high, and there is a high possibility that it will be a hit. It has come to suggest that.

Further, in this example, the effect suggesting the set value 6 can be executed as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A during the variable display of the symbol, and the rainbow effect as the high expectation effect is the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. It is the same in that the production is performed. That is, when the rainbow effect as the high expectation effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LEDs 5 to the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as when the suggestion effect A is executed. 7. Using LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing different from the execution timing of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6) (timing). t1), LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". , To make it emit light. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (eg for 10 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 each emit light in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow emission mode in cooperation with each other, resulting in high-impact emission. You can perform the production. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the 14 is emitted in different emission colors for each of the two groups, and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, and it is sufficient that a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted.

In this example, for the purpose of further enhancing the fun of the rainbow effect and further improving the game entertainment, it is determined whether or not a hit is made when a predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. A possible button effect is executed, and any of the button effects A to C is executed. Here, a case of executing each of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B, and the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C will be described below.

(Rainbow production with button production A)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjusting button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the staging operation unit 301 in the staging operation unit 300. As the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, it is possible to adjust the light amount step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity stage from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step. As the light intensity of the LED increases and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to reduce the stage, the light intensity of the LED decreases. As for the LED of the light emitting decoration, the amount of light can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the design.

In the button effect A, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, at least the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are configured. (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) It is possible to determine whether or not. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hit is being executed, the amount of light can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, and it is possible to grasp that the hit is a hit. When the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, the light amount cannot be adjusted, and it can be grasped that the light intensity is off.

FIG. 252 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect A during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the variation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting to execute the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection to execute the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the game reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to the staging operation unit 300 are reached. 9. The light emitting effect (rainbow effect) of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). Is continuing.

Further, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). At the same time, a display explaining that it is a hit when the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 and that it is off when the light amount cannot be adjusted (for example, "If the light amount can be adjusted, it is a hit! If it cannot be adjusted, it will come off! ").

Execution of the hit rainbow effect When the hit variation pattern is determined, the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the hit rainbow effect. Set to a possible light intensity adjustable period. During this light amount adjustable period, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (game). The amount of light of LEDs 1 to 4 on the panel 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) will change. As a result, when the amount of light can be adjusted during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is a hit, and it is possible to know whether or not the light amount is a hit. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the light amount adjusting button 228 to be positively operated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is determined, the light intensity is adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. Set to a period during which the amount of light that cannot be adjusted cannot be adjusted. During this light amount non-adjustable period, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (game). The amount of light of LEDs 1 to 4 on the panel 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) does not change. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the amount of light cannot be adjusted, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the pattern being executed is out of order, and it is possible to determine whether or not it is a hit. To know, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be encouraged to operate positively.

In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, The LED 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LED 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) can adjust the amount of light, while the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) can be adjusted. , The amount of light cannot be adjusted so that it always emits light with a constant amount of light. As a result, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the LED (rainbow light emission mode) in which the light amount does not change if the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting is configured. The amount of light of an LED whose amount of light can be changed (LED constituting the rainbow light emission mode) changes relatively with respect to an LED which does not), whereas the amount of light does not change when the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is being executed. The light amount of an LED whose light amount can be changed (LED which constitutes a rainbow light emission mode) changes relatively with respect to a certain LED (LED which does not constitute a rainbow light emission mode). From this, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the light amount can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and the variable display of the pattern being executed can be displayed. You can clearly see if it will be a hit.

Further, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the effect display device is performed after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. In 1600, a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit is displayed. Specifically, in the staging display device 1600, the display notifying that the variable display of the running symbol was off and the result was disappointing (for example, "sorry!") And the light intensity adjustment button 228 were operated. Occasionally, a display is executed to notify that the state in which the amount of light could not be adjusted has been returned to the state in which the amount of light can be adjusted (for example, "The amount of light can be adjusted already!"). As a result, even if it is not possible to recognize whether or not the light amount can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect. It is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the running symbol is out of alignment by the specific image.

In this example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed, until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is completed. In the meantime, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is not determined, and the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is restricted so as not to be executed again. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the hit when the rainbow effect of the hit is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of off is finished. The execution of the rainbow effect of the time is not restricted. As a result, in a short period of time such as a specific period, the rainbow effect at the time of off is not repeated, and the trust in the rainbow effect that is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting is lost. There is no such thing, and you can look forward to the next rainbow production.

In this example, the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10). However, when the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, it is recognized that the light intensity could not be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 even before the predetermined time has elapsed. The rainbow effect at the time of disengagement may be terminated at the time when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. As a result, after recognizing that the light amount could not be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, the rainbow effect is not continued, and the rainbow effect is produced even though the variation display of the running symbol is off. Can reduce the discomfort that is being performed.

Further, in this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). However, the operation is not limited to this, and the operation for the light amount adjustment button 228 is performed while the operation for the light amount adjustment button 228 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is also possible not to execute the button operation promotion effect that performs a prompting display (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and for the player who normally actively operates the light amount adjustment button 228. For players who do not normally actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 by letting them know whether or not it will be a hit at an early stage, the hit result as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol after the rainbow effect is executed (the hit time described later). You can pay attention to whether or not the warning message or the warning message at the time of disconnection is displayed, and you can thoroughly enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit, but in addition to this, the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement (timing t1 to t10). ), Even when the volume control button 227 provided near the light amount control button 228 is operated, the specific image may be displayed in the same manner as when the light amount control button 228 is operated. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the volume control button 227 instead of the light volume control button 228 during a limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the intention to operate the light intensity control button 228 is The effect can be advanced as if it were a certain thing, and the same effect as when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the volume control button 227 is operated instead of the light amount control button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the LED (game board 5) constituting the rainbow light emission mode. The amount of light of LEDs 1 to 4, LED 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) does not change, but in such a case, the light amount adjustment button 228 It is preferable to execute a special notification (for example, "It is not a light intensity adjustment!") That is not performed when the is operated to encourage the operation to be an erroneous operation.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect A may be performed. In this case, depending on the situation of the rainbow effect by the button effect A (whether the light amount is adjusted), the player determines whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the hit game being executed. You just have to make it recognize.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol accompanying the start prize, but the button effect A is not limited to this and is performed without the start prize. You may try to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if the situation where the start prize does not occur in the middle continues, the player will be disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time elapses without the start prize occurring, the design It can be exemplified that a dummy effect imitating the variable display of the above is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed in the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect at the time of off is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, and the light amount is adjusted even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is possible to make the player aware that the result of the dummy effect is not a hit.

(Rainbow effect with button effect B)
In the button effect B, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow light emission mode. Whether to continue the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3). It is possible to execute the production of and determine whether or not it will be a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is not terminated and continues until a predetermined time elapses. While it is possible to grasp that it is a hit, when the invo effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is terminated and it is grasped that the defeat is performed. can do.

FIG. 253 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the variation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting to execute the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection to execute the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the game reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to the staging operation unit 300 are reached. 9. The light emitting effect (rainbow effect) of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). Is continuing.

Further, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect for displaying an operation prompting the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). At the same time, a display explaining that it is a hit when the running rainbow effect continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and that it is off when the running rainbow effect is completed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. (For example, "If the rainbow continues, it will win! If the rainbow does not continue, it will come off!").

When the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit is determined, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the door Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300. The rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) is continued without ending. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, it is understood that the variation display of the symbol being executed is a hit. It is possible to encourage the staging operation unit 301 to actively operate in order to know whether or not it will be a hit.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit). The rainbow effect using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is completed, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are emitted from the light emitting mode in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-light emission or light emission in a single color. I try to switch to. As a result, it is possible to understand that during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the rainbow effect being executed during the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is completed, the variation display of the symbol being executed is out of order. It is possible to encourage the staging operation unit 301 to actively operate in order to know whether or not it will be a hit.

In this example, during the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to the door frame 3 While 14 is involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 correspond to the fluctuation pattern regardless of the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode. The light emission effect is being executed. Then, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450) constituting the rainbow light emission mode are used. Regarding LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the rainbow light emission mode is switched from the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to the non-light emission or the light emission in a single color. With respect to the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that are not configured, the light emission in a predetermined mode is continued by executing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, for example, all the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. On the other hand, if the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the non-light emission mode, all the LEDs are turned off, which may give a misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 1 has failed. It is possible to prevent such misidentification by continuing to emit light in a predetermined mode by executing a light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern for at least a part of the LED of the light emitting decoration.

In this example, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the running rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 during the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10). In addition to the effect operation unit 301, a plurality of effect operation units that can be operated by the player may be provided, and all of them may be the operation targets of the button effect B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating other than the effect operation unit 301 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and the player cannot recognize the fun of the button effect B. As the operation unit for a plurality of effects, for example, a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player to adjust the light amount, and a volume can be adjusted by being operated by the player. The volume control button 227 may also be included, and by operating these buttons, it may be possible to confirm whether or not to continue the running rainbow effect.

Further, in this example, when the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated when the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed, the effect display device 1600 is performed after the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is executed. In, a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit is displayed, but similarly, when the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated to produce the rainbow effect. When is finished, a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit may be displayed. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 may execute a display (for example, "sorry!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment and a disappointing result has been obtained. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect operation unit 301 is operated just before the end of the rainbow effect, and it cannot be recognized whether or not the rainbow effect is completed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is out of alignment by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

Further, in this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the operation to the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). However, the operation is not limited to this, and the operation for the effect operation unit 301 is performed while the operation for the effect operation unit 301 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is possible not to execute the button operation promotion effect which performs the prompt display (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and for a player who normally actively operates the effect operation unit 301. For players who do not normally actively operate the effect operation unit 301 by letting them know at an early stage whether or not they will win, the result of the variation of the symbol after the rainbow effect is displayed (the hit time described later). You can pay attention to whether or not the warning message or the warning message at the time of disconnection is displayed, and you can thoroughly enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect B may be performed. In this case, the player recognizes whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the running winning game according to the situation of the rainbow effect by the button effect B (whether or not it ends halfway). You just have to let it.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol accompanying the start prize, but the button effect B is not limited to this and is performed without the start prize. You may try to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if the situation where the start prize does not occur in the middle continues, the player will be disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time elapses without the start prize occurring, the design It can be exemplified that a dummy effect imitating the variable display of the above is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed in the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect at the time of off is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B, and during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is performed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. It may be finished so that the player recognizes that the result of the dummy effect is not a hit.

(Rainbow production with button production C)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. With respect to the sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume level output from various speakers from 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and operate the volume control button 227 upward. The larger the stage, the higher the volume output from the various speakers, and the volume control button 227 is operated downward to reduce the volume, the lower the volume output from the various speakers. In this example, the volume of the lowest stage (1) is zero, and all the staging sounds are inaudible. Further, the volume of the sound output from various speakers can be adjusted regardless of whether the symbol is changing or not.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, the volume is forcibly set to the lowest stage (1) regardless of the volume control button 227 by the player, and the rainbow effect is accompanied by the start of the rainbow effect this time. Any production sound including the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the above is forcibly changed to an inaudible state that the player cannot recognize. As will be described in detail later, in the button effect C of this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated upward to raise the volume level in such an inaudible state, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. Is performed to determine whether or not the sound changes from the non-audible state to the audible state, and it is possible to determine whether or not the game is a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting, when the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. This makes it possible to know that it is a hit, but when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. The inaudible state is maintained, which makes it possible to know that it is out of order.

Further, in this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated to change the volume stage in addition to the above, a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound, but the button effect C is accompanied. In the rainbow effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the sound is hit by using the presence or absence of the output of the operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is not output from various speakers, which is a hit. On the other hand, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is output from various speakers when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed. It is possible to grasp that it is out of order.

That is, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. However, in this case, a specific voice (for example, pip-pi), which is an operation confirmation sound, is not output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227. On the other hand, when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained in an inaudible state even if the volume control button 227 is operated. In response to the operation of the volume control button 227, only a specific voice (for example, pip pip), which is an operation confirmation sound, is output. The details of such an effect will be described below.

FIG. 254 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the variation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting to execute the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection to execute the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the game reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to the staging operation unit 300 are reached. 9. The light emitting effect (rainbow effect) of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). Is continuing.

Further, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!"). At the same time, it is a hit when the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state by operating the volume control button 227, and even if the volume control button 227 is operated, it is a rainbow. A display explaining that the staging sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the staging is out of order when the inaudible state is maintained (does not change to the audible state) (for example, "If it changes to the audible state, it is a hit! If it doesn't change to the state, it will come off! ").

Execution of the rainbow effect at the time When the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined, the rainbow is operated when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. The staging sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the staging is changed from the inaudible state to the audible state. That is, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether or not the effect sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. It should be noted that a specific voice (for example, pip-pip) as an operation confirmation sound is not output when the volume control button 227 is operated. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the volume control button 227 is operated to execute when the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the symbol inside is a hit, and it is possible to encourage the volume control button 227 to be positively operated in order to know whether or not it is a hit.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. , The staging sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow staging is maintained in an inaudible state (does not change to an audible state). That is, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether or not the staging sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow staging is maintained in the inaudible state (does not change to the audible state). Further, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the volume control button 227 is operated to maintain the inaudible state of the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect (change to the audible state). When a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the running symbol is out of order, and to know whether or not it is out of order. It is possible to encourage the volume control button 227 to be positively operated.

As described above, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained in an inaudible state (). Not only does it not change to an audible state), but also a specific voice (for example, pip-pip) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the operation has been accepted unless any sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. However, by outputting a specific voice (for example, beeping) as an operation confirmation sound, such confirmation can be appropriately performed.

In this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the volume control button 227 is operated. However, when the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the volume control button 227 is operated to produce a BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow effect. When it is recognized that the sound is maintained in the inaudible state (it does not change to the audible state) (when the volume control button 227 is operated), the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection may be terminated. .. As a result, after operating the volume control button 227 and recognizing that the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained in the inaudible state (does not change to the audible state), the rainbow effect is continued. It is possible to reduce the discomfort that the rainbow effect is being executed even though the variable display of the symbol being executed is off.

Further, in this example, as the button effect C during the execution of the rainbow effect, whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. When the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow production does not change from the inaudible state to the audible state, a specific sound (for example, pip-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound. However, not limited to this, the operation is confirmed when the volume control button 227 is operated without performing the effect of whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. It may be configured to execute only the effect of whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, pip pip) as a sound. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, a specific voice (for example, pip-pip) is not output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated, which is a hit. On the other hand, when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. , It can be grasped that it is out of order. In addition to this, not only the volume control button 227 but also a plurality of operation units including the volume control button 227 (for the production of whether or not to output a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) as an operation confirmation sound) are used. The staging operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume control button 227) may also be used. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, the operation is confirmed regardless of which of the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated. It is possible to grasp that it is a hit without outputting a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) as a sound, but when the invo effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, a plurality of operation units (effect). When any one of the operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound, and it is possible to grasp that the sound is off. ..

In the above configuration, various operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume control button 227) may be operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. I try not to output a specific sound (for example, pip pip) from the speaker. Similarly, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, a specific sound is output from various speakers among a plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume control button 227). Except for the operation unit, no specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is output from various speakers regardless of which operation is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, when each of the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation (for example, "button"). I've operated "). As a result, when any of a plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, any sound is output. If this is not done, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the operation has been accepted, but such confirmation can be appropriately performed by displaying the display corresponding to the operation.

Further, in this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!"). However, the operation is not limited to this, and the operation for the volume control button 227 is performed while the operation for the volume control button 227 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is also possible not to execute the button operation promotion effect that performs a prompting display (for example, "press the volume control button!"). As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and for the player who normally actively operates the volume control button 227. For players who do not normally actively operate the volume control button 227 by letting them know whether or not it will be a hit at an early stage, the hit result as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol after the rainbow effect is executed (the hit time described later). You can pay attention to whether or not the warning message or the warning message at the time of disconnection is displayed, and you can thoroughly enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, when the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated when the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed, the effect display device 1600 is performed after the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is executed. In, a specific image is displayed that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit, but the volume control button 227 is also operated during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C. If the staging sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow staging does not change from the non-audible state to the audible state, after the rainbow staging at the time of disengagement is executed, the variation display of the running symbol becomes a hit. A specific image that is not recognized may be displayed. Specifically, in the staging display device 1600, a display notifying that the variable display of the running symbol was out of order and a disappointing result was obtained (for example, "sorry!") And the volume control button 227 were operated. Occasionally, a display (for example, "You can adjust the volume already!") May be executed to notify that the state in which the volume could not be adjusted has been returned to the state in which the volume can be adjusted. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. Even if it cannot be recognized, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is out of alignment by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

In the above configuration, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is audible from the inaudible state even though the volume control button 227 is operated. If the state does not change, after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the pattern being executed is a hit. In addition, the volume control button 227 was also operated when the light amount control button 228 provided near the volume control button 227 was operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. A specific image may be displayed as in the case. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the light amount control button 228 instead of the volume control button 227 during a limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the intention to operate the volume control button 227 is The effect can be advanced as if it were a certain thing, and the same effect as when the volume control button 227 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated instead of the volume control button 227 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. It does not change from inaudible to audible, but in that case it executes a special notification (eg, "It's not volume control!") That isn't done when the volume control button 227 is operated. It is preferable to encourage the user to make an erroneous operation.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect C may be performed. In this case, the status of the sound output by the button effect C (whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state, and a specific sound as an operation confirmation sound (for example, pip pip)). Depending on whether or not the game is output), the player may be made to recognize whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the winning game being executed.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol accompanying the start prize, but the button effect C is not limited to this and is performed without the start prize. You may try to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if the situation where the start prize does not occur in the middle continues, the player will be disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time elapses without the start prize occurring, the design It can be exemplified that a dummy effect imitating the variable display of the above is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed in the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect at the time of off is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, and during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the rainbow is operated even though the volume control button 227 is operated. Prevent the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the production from changing from the inaudible state to the audible state, or output a specific sound (for example, pip-pi) as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. By doing so, the player may be made aware that the result of the dummy effect is not a hit.

Further, in the above, the rainbow effect with the button effect A, the rainbow effect with the button effect B, and the rainbow effect with the button effect C are executed as individual effects, but the rainbow effect in which these button effects are combined is executed. You may do so. For example, a rainbow effect with a composite button effect D having the elements of the button effect A and the button effect B, a rainbow effect with a composite button effect E having the elements of the button effect A and the button effect C, and a rainbow effect with the button effect B and the button effect. It may be possible to execute a rainbow effect with a composite button effect F having an element of C, and a rainbow effect with a compound button effect G having the elements of button effect A, button effect B, and button effect C. More specifically, for example, in a rainbow effect accompanied by a composite button effect G, the amount of light depends on the target operated by the player among a plurality of operation units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227). (Element of button effect A using light amount adjustment button 228), effect of whether to continue rainbow effect (element of button effect B using effect operation unit 301), BGM corresponding to rainbow effect Which of the staging (element of the button staging C using the volume control button 227) of whether or not the staging sound such as, etc. changes from the inaudible state to the audible state is executed, and a plurality of operations are performed. It ends when any one of the units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment button 227) is operated to derive the result of the effect corresponding to the operation. In the other composite button effect, some effect elements are missing from the compound button effect G, and the target to be operated by the player is more limited than the compound button effect G. That is, only when a part of the operation units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227) is operated, the result of the effect corresponding to the operation is derived. It becomes. In such a composite button effect, the player is arbitrary because it gives the player a choice as to which button effect is to be executed for the rainbow effect (which button effect is used to proceed with the rainbow effect). Allows you to select the mode of progress of the rainbow effect. Therefore, not only the same effect as the various button effects described above can be obtained, but also the fun of the rainbow effect can be further enhanced.

(Specific alert message after button production)
As described in detail above, the button effect B of the button effects A to C is provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3). It is possible to execute the effect of whether or not to continue the rainbow effect using ~ 14) and determine whether or not it is a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is not terminated and continues until a predetermined time elapses. While it is possible to grasp that it is a hit, when the invo effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is terminated and it is grasped that the defeat is performed. can do.

FIG. 255 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the effect operation unit 301 is not operated in the button effect B during the execution of the rainbow effect. In the above, when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, staging operation). While the rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is continued without ending, even when the effect operation unit 301 is not operated, the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is performed. The rainbow effect is finished after waiting for the execution period (timing t1 to t10) to elapse. Further, when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit). While the rainbow effect using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) is finished, when the effect operation unit 301 is desired to be operated, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is completed. ) Waits for the passage of time to finish the rainbow production. That is, when the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10), the rainbow effect is waited for the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10) to elapse. Since it ends, it is not possible to recognize whether the rainbow effect was a hit or miss rainbow effect at the end of the rainbow effect.

In this respect, in this example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301. After that, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the rainbow effect being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, and also notifies the warning message at the time of disengagement corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement (for example). "This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the clerk.") In this way, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect that has been executed is the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. By notifying, there is no misunderstanding that it is a rainbow production at the time of hitting. In addition, since the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting, the player's dissatisfaction is external just by notifying that it is a rainbow effect at the time of off. Although it may be directed to the (hall clerk), it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from being directed to the outside (hall clerk) by notifying the warning message at the time of disconnection.

As described above, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, when the rainbow effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is disengaged. In addition to notifying that it is a rainbow effect of, a display (for example, "Don't complain to the clerk because this rainbow is a fake") is executed to notify you of a warning message at the time of disconnection corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. However, the warning message at the time of such disengagement is composed of a number of colors smaller than the number of colors constituting the rainbow emission mode (7 colors in this example). As a result, while the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, the motivation for playing is improved by the number of colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, but after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed, the rainbow light emission mode is configured. By displaying with a smaller number of colors than the number of colors to be played (7 colors in this example), the improved motivation for playing can be diminished, and the display of a warning message or the like at the time of disengagement is effectively notified. be able to. During the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. It is displayed, and after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect has elapsed, the effect image of the rainbow mode is deleted.

Further, in this example, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is disengaged. Execute a display (for example, "Don't complain to the clerk because this rainbow is a fake") to notify that it is a rainbow effect at the time and to notify a warning message at the time of disconnection corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. However, when the staging operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection is being displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection. As a result, while the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection is being displayed, the state in which the player's willingness to play is diminished continues. The state can be terminated. In this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the effect alert message or the like is being displayed, the display of the effect alert message or the like is erased, but the effect operation unit 301 is operated. When this happens, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display object (display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 301) on the front side of the display of the warning message at the time of disconnection, and the warning message at the time of disconnection is displayed. By concealing at least a part of the display such as, the display of the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection may be configured to be difficult or invisible to the player. Even with such a configuration, by operating the staging operation unit 301 according to the player's will, the display of a warning message or the like at the time of disengagement is made difficult or invisible to the player, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. You can end the state you are in.

On the other hand, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit elapses. Executes a display ("This rainbow is a hit!") Notifying that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit. Then, after the predetermined period has elapsed, as a warning message at the time of hitting corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, a display for preventing excessive devotion to the game (for example, "Don't immerse yourself in this rainbow only at the hit"". ) Is executed. As a result, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of being a hit, and by notifying that the rainbow effect is a hit rainbow effect, the player's A state in which the motivation for playing is excessively improved will occur, but after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, it will be hit after executing the display notifying that the variation display of the running symbol will be hit. By notifying the warning message of the time, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the effect display device 1600 executes the display for notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement, whereas after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the effect display device 1600 executes the display. In the effect display device 1600, a display for notifying a warning message at the time of hitting is executed. However, immediately after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the display notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement is executed, whereas after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the running symbol is executed. After executing the display notifying that the variable display is a hit, the display notifying the warning message at the time of hitting is executed. As a result, if the display that notifies the warning message of the hit is executed immediately after the execution of the rainbow effect of the hit, the lingering sound that the rainbow effect was the rainbow effect of the hit cannot be enjoyed. , After a predetermined period has elapsed (after executing the display notifying that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit), by executing the display notifying the warning message at the time of hitting, such It is possible to prevent the hindrance to the enjoyment of the afterglow.

Further, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the effect alert message or the like is being displayed, a predetermined display object is displayed on the front side of the display of the effect alert message or the like on the effect display device 1600. (Display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 301) is displayed, and at least a part of the display of the warning message at the time of hit is hidden, so that the player can display the warning message at the time of hit. It may be configured to be difficult to see or invisible. With such a configuration, the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively improved is terminated while the warning message or the like at the time of hitting is being displayed. By operating, it is possible to make the display of a warning message or the like at the time of hit difficult or invisible to the player, and to prevent such a state from continuing too much.

In this example, the case where the button effect B is executed during the execution of the rainbow effect has been described, but also when the button effect A and the button effect C are executed, the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1) at the time of disconnection is also described. In (t10), after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. It may be configured to execute a display notifying a warning message at the time of disconnection.

Further, in this example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. After that, after executing the display notifying that the variation display of the running symbol is a hit, the display notifying the hit warning message corresponding to the hit rainbow effect is executed. However, it is preferable to configure so that the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement is longer than the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of hitting. As a result, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow that has been executed is notified by notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement. It is possible to recognize that the effect is a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, but such recognition can be ensured by lengthening the execution period of the display for notifying the alert message at the time of disengagement. Further, regarding the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of hit and the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement, the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10) executed before that. It is preferable to configure it so as to be shorter than. As a result, while the alert message at the time of hitting or the alert message at the time of disconnection is being displayed, the state of declining game motivation will continue, but the execution period for displaying those alert messages will be shortened. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the state in which the motivation for playing is excessively reduced from continuing.

[Simulated rainbow production]
There are many effects that players rarely encounter and cannot experience (such as the above-mentioned rainbow effects) in the effects that are performed during the variable display of the design. In recent years, the game machines have not experienced the fun of these effects. There was a case that the operation of was slowed down. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a specific period during which the player can recognize such an effect, a "effect introduction period" is generated during the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbol. In the production introduction period of this embodiment, in addition to the model introduction such as the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, the rainbow light emission mode that imitates the rainbow production at the time of hitting despite the non-variable display of the design. I am trying to execute a simulated rainbow effect that lights up. This effect introduction period starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol, and the simulated rainbow effect is executed at the predetermined time. I am doing it.

In this example, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A during the variable display of the symbol. Is the same in that it executes. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600, as in the case of executing the suggestion effect A. -7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, in the case of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the game is played. LEDs 1 and 2 on the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 on the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 on the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LEDs 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and door frame 3 LED 8 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". I try to let you. Further, in the case of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. "Red", LED3-4 of the game board 5 is "purple", LED5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 is "blue", LED7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED8 of the door frame 3 are "green", the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange", the LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and the LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (eg for 10 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 each emit light in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow emission mode in cooperation with each other, resulting in high-impact emission. You can perform the production. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the 14 is emitted in different emission colors for each of the two groups, and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. However, it is not necessary to have seven colors, and it is sufficient that a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be different depending on whether the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed or the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the hit rainbow effect is executed, the symbols are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the symbols may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, it is not misunderstood that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting. The display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, a display such as "simulating" may be executed when the simulated rainbow effect is executed.

Further, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting are performed by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, but it is preferable to provide the control program of another effect instead of the control program of the same effect and execute those control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of hitting and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for the separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program can be normally executed for either one, and the abnormality occurs. It is possible to minimize the non-execution of the production at the time.

In this way, the player rarely encounters by executing a simulated rainbow effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode that imitates the rainbow effect at the time of hitting even during the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbol. To make the player aware that the rainbow effect that cannot be experienced can be experienced by the player during the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbol, and that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting can be executed during the variable display of the symbol. Can be done.

(Regarding the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the simulated rainbow production is completed)
In addition, when performing a simulated rainbow production during the production introduction period as described above, the player's motivation to play is excessively increased beyond the degree of production introduction, such as "Let's play until that production is encountered". There is a risk that you will be "engaged" in the game. Therefore, in this example, the following special processing is performed in order to take care that the simulated rainbow effect causes "engagement" in the game.

FIG. 256 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a squeeze prevention display is executed after the simulated rainbow effect is executed. In this example, the hit-time rainbow effect is executed as the hit-determined effect during the variable display of the symbol, but the hit-time rainbow effect is any of the hit-time rainbow effects A to C. Is running. Further, the simulated rainbow effect is executed during the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol, but any of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed as the simulated rainbow effect. Then, for each of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting, and for each of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 during the execution period of the rainbow effect. It is the same in that the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow emission mode is executed by using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position. It is different in whether or not it is operated and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different light emitting colors. As described in detail above, the back-up front staging unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 has a rectangular back-up front decorative body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and behind the back-up front decorative body 3310. It is equipped with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-up front decorative body 3310. When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. ..

Specifically, in the rainbow effect A at the time of hitting and the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the back upper front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position, and is initially set. It shall be maintained at the position, and for the back-up front decorative body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow light emitting mode. Further, in the rainbow effect B and the simulated rainbow effect B at the time of hitting, it is assumed that the back top front decoration body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and the back top front decoration. The body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Further, in the rainbow effect C at the time of hitting and the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the back-up front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position, and is initially set. It shall be maintained at the position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies.

In this example, the effect introduction period is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed. Then, during the effect introduction period, the effect display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end stage, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. There is. At this time, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 and the door of the game board 5 are executed. Using LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow emission mode is executed. While the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, the effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed for the logo display of the model title. That is, the logo display of the model title is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the staging image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Next, when the logo display of the model title ends, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C being executed ends, and after the logo display of the model title ends, the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 in the effect display device 1600. Display the logo of "Pachinko is something to enjoy moderately. Be careful not to get into it") after that, to prevent you from getting into the game excessively. Is running. Then, the production introduction period is terminated by displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". Here, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the same effect as the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting, which is executed as the hit confirmation effect, is executed, so that the player's motivation to play is executed. However, after executing the simulated rainbow staging A to C, after executing the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1, a warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is displayed. By executing the display, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the back-up front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the back-up front decorative body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow light emitting mode. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, there is no need to perform an operation for returning the back-up front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is started. Is short. That is, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is short, and the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is early.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the back-up front decorative body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 is operated. Each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow emission mode. Here, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, it is necessary to perform an operation for returning the back-up front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the operation is executed before the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is displayed. During the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title, the operation for returning the front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is executed. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement". That is, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is late.

Further, in the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect C, the back upper front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the upper front decorative body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. Here, the simulated rainbow effect C is the same as the simulated rainbow effect B in that it lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310. At the time of executing the effect C, although the back upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained in the initial position, attention is paid to whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, there is a possibility that attention is paid to the back-up front decorative body 3310, and when a warning message regarding "prevention of squeezing" is displayed at an early timing, the "prevention of squeezing" is displayed. May miss the alert message. In this respect, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect C, the operation for returning the back-up front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is not required during the execution period of the logo display of the model title, but the simulated rainbow effect B As in the case of the execution of, it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". That is, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is delayed. It is possible to prevent overlooking the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness".

In this example, in the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation are performed. Using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. In addition, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is not lit in the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effects B and C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects B and C, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. I try to do it. That is, in the simulated rainbow effects B and C, the number of members (light emitting regions) involved in the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is larger than that in the simulated rainbow effect A. The simulated rainbow staging B and C are configured so that the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is later than that of the simulated rainbow staging A. In this way, when the simulated rainbow effects B and C are executed, the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" to be executed after that is delayed, which is involved in the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to moderately entertain the state in which the motivation for playing is high due to the large number of members (light emitting areas) until a warning message is displayed.

Further, in this example, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is operated from the initial position to the appearance position, but the back side is the appearance position. The distance that the upper front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position can be changed in a plurality of steps. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the distance moved to return the front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is different, so that the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is started to be displayed. The period (execution period of the logo display of the model title) is variable according to the distance traveled. For example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, if the back-up front decorative body 3310 has moved a long distance from the initial position as the appearance position, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the “engagement” is performed. The period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention" is started is extended. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the back top front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Therefore, after executing the simulated rainbow effect A, there is no need to perform an operation to return the front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is started. The period (execution period of the logo display of the model title) is fixed.

Further, in this example, the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A and the simulated rainbow effect B is the same, and the period of executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is the same. Since the front decorative body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position, the execution period may be longer than that of the simulated rainbow effect A. In addition, as described above, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, a warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is displayed according to the distance moved to return the back upper front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. The period until the start (execution period of the logo display of the model title) is variable. As a result, even if the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect B becomes long, the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is started (the execution period of the logo display of the model title) can be changed. , It is possible to make the completion timing of the series of production introduction period as soon as possible by the end of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness", and the execution period of the series of production introduction period becomes unnecessarily long. Can be prevented.

Further, in this example, after the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is started to be displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, but the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting are started. Even after the execution of, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is started. As a result, when the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting are executed, the player's motivation to play may be excessively improved because the hit-determined effect is executed. By displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after executing the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively enthusiastic about the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. It is preferable that the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is longer than the execution period of the display of the warning message. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the player's motivation to play may be excessively improved even though the effect is not a definite hit, but the execution period of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to surely reduce such a state in which the motivation for playing is excessively improved. Further, it is preferable that the execution period of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is shorter than the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect executed before that. As a result, while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the state in which the motivation for playing is excessively improved is diminished. It is possible to prevent the motivation to play from being excessively reduced.

(Regarding the deletion of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the end of simulated rainbow production A)
In this example, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to the effect operation unit 300. 9. The LED 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, but the front decorative body 3310 on the back does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the front decorative body 3310 on the back, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow light emitting mode. During the execution of such a simulated rainbow effect A, the player's motivation to play is not excessively improved as compared with the simulated rainbow effects B and C, and after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the player's motivation to play is not excessively improved. , I don't feel the need to display a warning message about "preventing immersiveness". Therefore, in this example, only after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the alert message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the display of the alert message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is deleted. It makes it possible to do.

FIG. 257 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the entanglement prevention display is erased after the simulated rainbow effect is executed. As described above, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is displayed. However, while the warning message regarding "preventing digging" is displayed, the staging operation unit When the 301 is operated, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding the "prevention of entanglement". As a result, while the simulated rainbow effect A is being executed, the play motivation is improved by executing the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, but after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, cautions regarding "prevention of immersiveness" are taken. By executing the display of the arousal message, the improved play motivation can be diminished, and the display of the caution message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" can be effectively notified. In addition, while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" can be erased by operating the staging operation unit 301 at the will of the player, which is excessive. It is possible to prevent the state in which the willingness to play is diminished from continuing.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, Not only is the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but also the back upper front decorative body 3310 is assumed to operate from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body is assumed. The 3310 is lit in a rainbow emission mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. That is, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, there are more members (light emitting areas) involved in the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode than in the simulated rainbow effect A, and the motivation for playing is excessively improved. It has become. Therefore, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of digging" is displayed. However, while the warning message regarding "preventing digging" is displayed, the effect operation unit 301 is displayed. Even if it is operated, it is impossible to erase the display of the warning message regarding the "prevention of immersiveness". As a result, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is displayed for a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated. It is possible to surely reduce the state in which the motivation for playing is improved, and it is possible to effectively notify the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness".

Further, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is deleted. However, during the period from the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A to the start of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" (execution period of the logo display of the model title), the effect operation unit 301 is operated. Even when it is done, it is possible to erase (do not execute) the display of the warning message regarding the "prevention of immersiveness". As a result, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is hidden by operating the staging operation unit 301 at the will of the player before starting the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". It is possible to prevent a state in which the willingness to play is reduced by displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" in advance. Similarly, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is deleted (not executed) after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed. Is possible. Even with such a configuration, by operating the staging operation unit 301 by the player's will before starting the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness", the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. Can be hidden, and it is possible to prevent a state in which the willingness to play is reduced by displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" in advance.

(Regarding the execution restrictions of simulated rainbow production)
In this example, during the execution of the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol, as the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. Later, a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. During the execution of such simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is improved. Therefore, for the player who is easily absorbed in the game, the light emission is lit in the rainbow light emission mode in the first place. There was a danger of performing the production. Therefore, in this example, a predetermined operation unit that can be operated by the player is newly provided in addition to the effect operation unit 301, and when a specific action is detected for the predetermined operation unit, the simulated rainbow effect A is provided. By limiting the execution of ~ C, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming in a state where the player's motivation to play is improved.

FIG. 258 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the execution of the simulated rainbow effect is restricted. First, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a "entry prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. As for the squeeze prevention switch, a knock type is adopted, which is configured to maintain the pressed position when it is pressed all the way for the first time and to return to the initial position when it is pressed all the way for the second time. Then, when the specific action A is detected by operating the entanglement prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed when the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives. However, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Is restricted. In addition, if the specific action A is not detected, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed, but when the specific action A is detected. Also restricts the display of warning messages regarding "prevention of immersiveness" from being executed. Further, when the specific action A is detected, the game cannot be played, for example, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launcher 540 even if the handle 195 is operated, or the game ball B is first started. It is controlled so that the variation display of the symbol is not started even if the ball is entered into various entrances such as the mouth 2004.

The squeeze prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and although it can be operated by the player, it is assumed that the player's family and hall personnel will operate it. Then, if the player's family or hall personnel determine that the player is absorbed in the game, the player's family or hall personnel should operate the depression prevention switch so as to stop the game. Just do it. Here, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is improved by executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. By operating the entanglement prevention switch, it is possible to prevent the player from being enthusiastic about the game in advance without executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C. In addition, since the purpose is to stop the game when the player's family or a person involved in the hall operates the immersive prevention switch, not only the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, but also the simulated rainbow effects A to are performed. It is also assumed that the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the execution of C is not executed.

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a "pinching prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided in addition to the "pinching prevention switch". As for the squeeze prevention switch, like the squeeze prevention switch, there is a knock type that is configured to maintain the pressed position when it is pressed all the way for the first time and to return to the initial position when it is pressed all the way for the second time. It has been adopted. Then, when the specific action B is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position, the same as when the specific action A is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position. When the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LED 8 of the effect operation unit 300. -9, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode from being executed. However, when the specific action B is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position, it is different from the case where the specific action A is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position. , Display a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness".

The entanglement prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and is assumed to be operated by the player. Then, when the player is concerned that he / she will be absorbed in the game, he / she may operate the insertion prevention switch so that the effect of being absorbed in the game does not occur. Here, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is improved by executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. By operating the simulated rainbow effects A to C, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game in advance. In addition, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed after the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. The display causes a state in which the player's motivation to play is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

In this example, as the "squeeze prevention switch" that restricts the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, a "squeeze-in strong prevention switch" and a "squeeze-in weakness prevention switch" are provided. The squeeze strength prevention switch is maintained at the pressed position when it is pressed all the way to the initial position when it is pressed all the way to the initial position by pressing it all the way to the initial position in a state where the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed. Even if it is returned, the restricted state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed is not released, and the state is continued unless the power is turned on again. As a result, after the player's family and hall personnel operate the squeeze prevention switch, even if the player operates the squeeze prevention switch, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed and the game is played. Since the state in which the game cannot be played continues, the game can be reliably stopped. On the other hand, the squeeze weakness prevention switch is initially held at the pressed position when it is pressed all the way to the back, and it is initially pressed all the way to the back in a state where the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed. When the position is returned, the restricted state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed can be released.

In addition, the squeeze prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible for not only the player's family and hall personnel but also the player to operate it, but the player operates it. It is preferable that a person involved in the hall prepares a remote controller or the like so that the pachinko machine 1 can operate the remote controller or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1 to detect the specific action A. As a result, even when the player is seated on the pachinko machine 1, the player's family and hall personnel operate the remote controller or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1 to detect the specific action A. Can be made to. Further, if the squeeze prevention switch is provided on the remote controller or the like without providing the squeeze prevention switch on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the player cannot operate the squeeze prevention switch without permission, so that a simulated rainbow effect is produced. The player cannot release the state in which the states A to C are restricted so as not to be executed, and the game can be stopped.

Further, in this example, the "entry weakness prevention switch" and the "entrance prevention switch" are maintained at the pressed position when the first time they are pressed all the way, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed. In, when the player returns to the initial position by pressing it all the way for the second time, the restricted state is not immediately released, and when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the restricted state is released. It is supposed to be. That is, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed continues until the predetermined period elapses after returning to the initial position by pressing the button all the way to the back for the second time. As a result, immediately before the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, even if the player presses the button all the way to the initial position to return to the initial position, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed and the player can play the game. It is possible to effectively prevent the person from being absorbed in the state.

In addition, while the "entry prevention switch" and "entrance prevention switch" are being operated (in the state where they are not released), the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 are not executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the lighting effect to be performed in the rainbow light emission mode. Instead of lighting the light emitting effect, at least a part of LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color. It may be configured to notify the outside that the "entry prevention switch" or the "entrance prevention switch" is being operated. Further, for each type of "entry prevention switch" and "entrance prevention switch", LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LED 10 of the door frame 3 It may be configured so that the emission color which lights at least a part of to 14 is different. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside that the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed while the "entry prevention switch" or the "entry prevention switch" is being operated. ..

[Confirmation of rainbow emission]
In the present embodiment, the rainbow effect at the time of hit (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) is executed as the hit confirmation effect at which the hit is confirmed during the variable display of the symbol. If the production is not performed properly, there is a risk that it will be a factor that reduces the enjoyment of the game. In particular, since the appearance rate of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is extremely low, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed even in a hall or a factory. Therefore, in this example, the rainbow light emission mode can be confirmed at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Specifically, during the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol, as a simulated rainbow effect, a light emission effect that lights up in the same rainbow light emission mode as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, and the rainbow light emission mode is executed. It is possible to easily check in a hall, factory, etc. whether or not the light emission effect that lights up with is normally executed. The effect introduction period is an effect that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol, and the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to the above, a simulated rainbow effect will be executed. In this example, the simulated rainbow effect is compared with the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit. It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but the timing of regularly switching the light emitting colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode is earlier. It is different in that it is done or slowed down.

In this example, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A during the variable display of the symbol. Is the same in that it executes. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600, as in the case of executing the suggestion effect A. -7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, in the case of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the game is played. LEDs 1 and 2 on the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 on the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 on the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LEDs 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and door frame 3 LED 8 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". I try to let you. Further, in the case of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. "Red", LED3-4 of the game board 5 is "purple", LED5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 is "blue", LED7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED8 of the door frame 3 are "green", the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange", the LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and the LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (eg for 10 seconds).

In this example, not only the hit rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, but also the hit rainbow effect is executed as a simulated rainbow effect even during the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol. Similarly, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. As described above, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. It is possible to confirm whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. In addition, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, by observing the state where the LED emission color is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" at any time. , It is possible to confirm whether each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, and it is easy to find out whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the emission of any of the LEDs. can do.

Further, in the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, one of the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 emit light. By controlling each emission color to be switched to a plurality of emission colors in order in a short unit emission time when no abnormality has occurred, these LEDs cooperate to visually emit light in a rainbow emission mode. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is done, and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with an impact. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the 14 is emitted in different emission colors for each of the two groups, and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, and it is sufficient that a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be different depending on whether the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed or the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the hit rainbow effect is executed, the symbols are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the symbols may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, it is not misunderstood that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting. The display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, a display such as "simulating" may be executed when the simulated rainbow effect is executed.

Further, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting are performed by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, but it is preferable to provide the control program of another effect instead of the control program of the same effect and execute those control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of hitting and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for the separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program can be normally executed for either one, and the abnormality occurs. It is possible to minimize the non-execution of the production at the time.

FIG. 259 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the light emission confirmation of the LED is performed at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect. In this example, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are divided into two groups every predetermined period. The emission color of the LED is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red", but when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, the normal speed (for example) The rainbow emission mode is such that the emission color of the LED is switched in 0.1 seconds), whereas the emission color of the LED is switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second) when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. The light emission effect that lights up with is started. That is, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started so that the interval at which the emission color of the LED is switched is longer than that of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Then, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, the emission colors of the LEDs are switched, and at least all the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode appear for each of the LEDs 1 to 14, and then the rainbow at the time of hitting. Similar to the effect, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow emission mode is executed so that the emission color of the LED can be switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second). As described above, since the interval at which the LED emission colors are switched is long at the start of the simulated rainbow effect, whether each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode. Can be slowly confirmed, and it is possible to easily find out whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of any of the LEDs. In addition, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, by returning the interval at which the LED emission color is switched to the normal speed, the LED emission color is emitted at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) like the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. It can also be confirmed that it is possible to switch.

Further, as described above in detail, the effect introduction period starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variable display of the symbol (may be after the power is turned on) and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not displayed. are doing. Then, during the effect introduction period, the effect display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end stage, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. There is. At this time, the simulated rainbow effect is executed while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are executed. Using LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the effect display device 1600 does not execute the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, when executing the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the effect display device 1600 visually confirms whether or not the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, so that the executing rainbow effect is simulated rainbow. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is an effect, and by extension, it is possible to understand that it is an effect for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, an effect image (for example, a background image) displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 or a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed for the effect image (for example, the effect image of a character, an item, etc.) displayed in. On the other hand, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 is configured not to display the effect image of the rainbow mode for the logo display of the model title, the background image, the character, the item, and the like. .. As a result, when the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, the effect display device 1600 visually recognizes whether or not the effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby simulating the running rainbow effect. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is a rainbow effect, and by extension, it is possible to easily grasp that it is an effect for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the back top front decoration body 3310 can be operated from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back top front decoration body 3310 is numbered seven. Each display body is used to light up in a rainbow emission mode. On the other hand, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the back-up front decoration body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Each of the numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow emission mode. As described in detail above, the back-up front staging unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 has a rectangular back-up front decorative body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and behind the back-up front decorative body 3310. It is equipped with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-up front decorative body 3310. When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. .. As a result, when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, whether or not to operate the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, and each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are displayed. By visually recognizing whether or not to turn on the rainbow light emission mode that emits light with different emission colors, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect, and as a result, there is an abnormality in the LED emission. It can be easily grasped that it is an effect for confirming whether or not it has occurred.

In this way, during the execution of the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 It is the same in that the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14, but whether or not to display the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 and the initial decoration body 3310 on the back. It is different in whether or not it is operated from the position to the appearance position and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different light emitting colors. That is, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect is executed with the incomplete effect content so that a part of the effect content executed by the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is omitted. This makes it easy to see if the running rainbow effect is a simulated rainbow effect by visually recognizing whether or not the effect is being executed with incomplete effect content when executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to easily grasp that the effect is for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED. Further, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the rainbow light emission is performed by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. As an effect related to the light emitting effect that lights up in the mode, the operation of the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the lighting of the rainbow light emitting mode in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are added, and an integrated effect is made so that the number of related members increases. By executing the above, it is possible to make the production more interesting than the simulated rainbow production, and to make the production noticeable to the player.

In the above, during the execution of the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 It is the same in that the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14, but during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, It may be configured so that the LED does not light on a part of the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In such a configuration, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, a part of the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is missing, and the emission is performed in a mode in which the rainbow emission mode is not established. The difference becomes clear, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect.

Further, as described in detail above, the dish unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjusting button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the staging operation unit 301 in the staging operation unit 300. As the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, it is possible to adjust the light amount step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity stage from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step. As the light intensity of the LED increases and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to reduce the stage, the light intensity of the LED decreases. As for the LED of the light emitting decoration, the amount of light can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the design.

Regarding the above, at least among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect, at least the rainbow. It is possible to adjust the amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the light emitting mode. I have to. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used for the rainbow. It is possible not only to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode can be normally executed, but also to confirm whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally adjust the amount of light.

In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door). Regarding LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the amount of light can be adjusted, whereas the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (game). With respect to the LEDs 15 to 17) of the board 5, the amount of light cannot be adjusted, and the light is always maintained in a state of light emission with a constant amount of light. That is, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the LED whose light amount can be changed (rainbow light emission mode) as opposed to the LED whose light amount does not change (LED which does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode). The amount of light of the LEDs) constituting the above will change relatively. Thereby, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the light amount can be normally adjusted with respect to the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. For LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5), the amount of light cannot be adjusted, and not only the state of constantly emitting light with a constant amount of light is maintained, but also the emission color is maintained. Is preferable. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs that do not form the rainbow light emission mode are not paid attention to, and the emission color of each LED is normally switched to the LEDs that form the rainbow light emission mode. You can pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not.

On the other hand, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door) even during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) allow the amount of light to be adjusted, whereas the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow emission mode (game). Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17) of the board 5, the amount of light cannot be adjusted, and when the light is emitted, the light is always emitted at a constant amount, but it is not necessary to keep the light emitted at all times. The decorativeness is not lost during the variable display of the design. As with the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, for the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the light amount cannot be adjusted, and when the light is emitted, the light is always emitted at a constant amount. However, it is preferable to maintain the emission color. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode is not paid attention to, and the LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. You can pay attention to what is being done.

Further, in this example, it is confirmed whether or not the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect operation unit 301 It is possible to end the simulated rainbow effect when you operate. Specifically, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode. The rainbow effect using (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) is completed, and the rainbow light emission mode is changed. The constituent LEDs are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or light emission in a single color. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, after confirming whether or not the simulated rainbow effect can be executed and the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, any arbitrary during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect can be executed. By operating the effect operation unit 301 at the timing, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended at any timing, and the execution of unnecessary rainbow effect after the confirmation affects other manufacturing confirmations and the like. Can be stopped. In addition, after the simulated rainbow effect is completed, it is clarified that the simulated rainbow effect is completed by switching the LED constituting the rainbow light emission mode from the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to the non-light emission or the light emission in a single color. I can tell you.

On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect at the time of hit is not ended. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the rainbow effect at the time of hitting does not end in the middle, and it is possible to reliably inform that the definite effect of confirming the hit is being executed.

Further, as a modification, at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5). , LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), while the LED emission changes depending on the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. The LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) are configured so that the LED does not emit light or the LED emits light without changing the emission color (does not blink). May be good. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs that do not form the rainbow light emission mode are not paid attention to, and the emission color of each LED is normally switched to the LEDs that form the rainbow light emission mode. You can pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not.

Also in the above modified example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect is terminated and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, doors). LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or single color light emission. .. On the other hand, for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5), when the staging operation unit 301 is operated, the LED does not emit light or the light emitting color does not change and the LED emits light. I try to maintain the state (not blinking). As a result, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, only the light emission status of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode changes, and it is clearly notified that the simulated rainbow effect has ended. Can be done.

On the other hand, as a modification, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LED 1 of the game board 5). For 4), LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), the LED emission changes depending on the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode may be configured so that the LED blinks or the light emission color of the LED changes. .. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the decorativeness during the variable display of the symbol is not lost even for the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the variable display of the symbol is started by entering the ball into various starting ports (first starting port 2004 and second starting port 2005), the simulated rainbow effect is ended. (The production introduction period is over), but during the execution of the simulated rainbow production, the production is performed even if there is no entry into various starting ports (first starting port 2004 and second starting port 2005). When the operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to end the simulated rainbow effect. As a result, when it is desired to end the running rainbow effect at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, it is not necessary to enter the ball into various starting ports, and it is only necessary to operate the effect operation unit 301. Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the effect operation unit 301, a plurality of operation units such as a light amount adjustment button 228 and a volume adjustment button 227 are provided. Only when the operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to end the running rainbow effect. As a result, for example, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the LED (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are not terminated without ending the simulated rainbow effect being executed. It is possible to sufficiently confirm whether each of the LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) can normally adjust the amount of light.

Further, in this example, a simulated rainbow effect is executed during the execution of the effect introduction period, which is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses while the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the light is turned on in the rainbow light emission mode. I try to check if the light emission effect can be executed normally, but after the power is turned on, the simulated start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect, is on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided on the side, and when the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on, it is possible to start the simulated rainbow effect and confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. Further, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow effect is started after the predetermined period elapses. I am doing it. As a result, for example, at the time of manufacturing confirmation in line work in a factory, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at an arbitrary timing by operating the simulated start operation unit at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on. The problem (confirmation error, omission of confirmation, etc.) caused by the time difference between the work process of turning on the power and operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of confirming lighting is solved, and the light emission is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the confirmation work of whether or not the production can be executed normally. Further, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 until a predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 On the side, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a light emitting mode different from the rainbow light emitting mode (for example, a single color light emitting mode or a light emitting mode having a plurality of light emitting colors less than the rainbow light emitting mode), and depending on the mode of line work. These confirmations may be made possible by using the time difference described above. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent mistakes in confirmation and omission of confirmation of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also to further improve the efficiency of the confirmation work. The simulated start operation unit may be an operation unit provided in a place where the player cannot operate or visually recognize the power switch 630a, which is a rotary switch type operation unit or a push switch. An example is an operation unit of a type, or an operation unit of a type that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by an administrator. Of these, if it is a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (thin bar, etc.) or key possessed by the administrator, the operation of the simulated start operation unit can be made to function only at the factory, in the hall. It is also possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operation.

In the above, the simulated start operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the effect operation unit 301 for ending the simulated rainbow effect is the pachinko machine 1. It is provided on the front side of. As a result, in order to operate the simulated start operation unit after turning on the power and to operate the effect operation unit 301 after starting the simulated rainbow effect, it is necessary to go around to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the manufacturing of the factory. In this case, there is no need to forget to confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be normally executed, and the effect operation unit 301 is operated to perform a simulated rainbow effect. Can be prevented from terminating.

(Relationship with confirmation other than rainbow emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) as the hit confirmation effect at which the hit is confirmed during the variable display of the symbol, the hit time A simulated rainbow effect is executed at a timing different from that of the rainbow effect, and it is possible to confirm the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, directing operation). Regarding LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to confirm whether or not the lights are normally turned on during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, but the LEDs (game board) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode. Regarding LEDs 15 to 17) of 5, it is possible to confirm whether or not the lights are normally turned on at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect. Further, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect.

FIG. 268 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 after the power is turned on, all the LEDs of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are used. I try to keep it lit. Further, the emission colors of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow emission mode are set to emit light in a single color (for example, red or blue). As a result, after the power is turned on, by visually recognizing whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED. Can be confirmed.

Further, after the power is turned on, the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted, and the light is always maintained in a constant light amount. That is, even if the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated after the power is turned on, the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode does not change. As a result, after the power is turned on, the amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not become too dark, and it is confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs. be able to. For LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5), the amount of light cannot be adjusted, and not only the state of constantly emitting light with a constant amount of light is maintained, but also the emission color is maintained. Is preferable. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is possible to pay attention only to the confirmation of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit.

Further, after the power was turned on, all the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that did not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) were turned on. Although it is maintained in a state, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3) are used. With regard to ~ 14), it is restricted not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, among the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3). At least some of the LEDs, for example, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned on. Further, regarding the emission colors of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow emission mode. , The LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LED 15 of the game board 5) by emitting light with a single color (for example, green or yellow) that is different from the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5). It is notified that it is a confirmation period for checking whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of to 17). In this way, during the confirmation period of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs that form the rainbow light emission mode (LED 1 of the game board 5) -4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not each LED is normally lit for the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode without paying attention to the switching of the light emission. The amount of LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode is adjusted. Even if the button 228 is operated, the amount of light does not change, which prevents the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode from affecting the confirmation of whether or not the lights are normally turned on. ing.

In this example, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected after the power is turned on. That is, after the power is turned on, a confirmation period is provided to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the pachinko machine 1, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the player is in contact with the handle 195 on the main control board 1310 side, and the player detects the contact with the handle 195. By operating, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects on the main control board 1310 side, and it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 (launch the game ball B from the ball launcher 540). I have to. That is, even if the player comes into contact with the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is not normally detected, the game ball B cannot be driven. Therefore, after the power is turned on, by providing a confirmation period for confirming whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the hall manager or the like comes into contact with the handle 195 and comes into contact with the handle 195. Can be confirmed whether is detected normally.

Further, in the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195 and the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the contact with the handle 195 is detected. , The fact that it is normally detected is notified to the outside. Specifically, in addition to the LED of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, an LED for notifying that the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected is provided. There is. Further, when the hall manager or the like makes contact with the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker. This makes it possible to appropriately confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195 after the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame). The LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, after the power is turned on, during the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to the door frame top unit 450) are used. 7. LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 are restricted so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In this way, during the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect). Since the LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 do not perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the change of light emission in the rainbow light emission mode is not paid attention to, and the handle 195 is reached. It is possible to pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not the contact of the door is detected normally.

Although the details have been described above, in this example, a simulated start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect after the power is turned on, is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and simulated after the power is turned on. When the start operation unit is operated, it is possible to start the simulated rainbow effect and confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. Further, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow effect is started after the predetermined period elapses. I am doing it. As a result, after confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode after the power is turned on, contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. After confirming whether or not the LED is to be performed, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at any timing by operating the simulated start operation unit at any timing during the confirmation period. Further, since the simulated rainbow effect is started after a predetermined period has elapsed from the operation of the simulated start operation unit, for example, the work of operating the simulated start operation unit at the time of manufacturing confirmation in line work at a factory or the like. The LED (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450) that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode by solving the problems (confirmation mistakes, confirmation omissions, etc.) caused by the time difference between the process and the work process of confirming lighting. In LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the work of confirming whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed.

In the above, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the confirmation executed before the simulated start operation unit is operated. The period is continued, and when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), the confirmation period executed before operating the simulated start operation unit is terminated. That is, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the simulated rainbow effect is not started and the light is turned on in the rainbow light emission mode. Since the light emission effect is not executed, it is confirmed whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit, and the handle is the same as before operating the simulated start operation unit. Attention can be paid to the confirmation of whether the contact with 195 is normally detected.

Specifically, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the door is the same as before the simulated start operation unit is operated. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are maintained in a lit state. When a predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), all the LEDs of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are turned on. As a result, by utilizing the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of confirming lighting, the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode is abnormal. Can be confirmed if is not occurring. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed before operating the simulated start operation unit, the rainbow light emission mode is performed after operating the simulated start operation unit. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect that lights up in is normally executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of confirmation mistakes, confirmation omissions, and the like. However, regarding the light emitting modes of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode, the light emitting modes different from the light emitting modes executed before operating the simulated start operation unit (for example, different light emitting modes). It emits light in color or in a blinking state instead of always lit. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the simulated start operation unit has been operated by the light emitting mode of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode.

Similarly, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the handle 195 is set to the same as before the simulated start operation unit is operated. Whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started) is continued. I am trying to end the confirmation period of. That is, when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195 during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the handle When the contact with 195 is normally detected, the fact that the contact with 195 is normally detected is notified to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by utilizing the time difference generated between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of confirming lighting. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected before operating the simulated start operation unit, the contact with the handle 195 after operating the simulated start operation unit is also performed. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not is normally detected, it is possible to prevent confirmation errors, omissions, and the like from occurring.

If the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. I have to. That is, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the LED (LED 15 of the game board 5) that does not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode is reached when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. The period for confirming whether or not ~ 17) is normally lit and the period for confirming whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected are terminated. As the predetermined period for ending the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and the handle 195 is set. There is a period during which it is possible to sufficiently confirm whether or not the contact is detected normally. In this way, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the simulated rainbow effect is not started immediately after the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on. Is executed during the execution of the staging introduction period that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the state in which the variable display is not performed. You can check whether the effect can be executed normally.

Further, even after the simulated rainbow effect is started, it may be possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by the contact with the handle 195. Specifically, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on is set when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. Although it ends, an extension confirmation period may be generated after the end of the confirmation period, and it may be possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by the contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period. When the extension confirmation period is provided, the execution condition of the simulated rainbow effect may be satisfied within the extension confirmation period, and the extension confirmation period and the simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. In such a case, if there is contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, as in the case of operating the staging operation unit 301, Finished the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode. However, the LED constituting the rainbow light emitting mode may be switched from light emitting in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-light emission or light emission in a single color.

The main purpose of ending the simulated rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 is to end the unnecessary simulated rainbow effect, while it is not possible to end the simulated rainbow effect by touching the handle 195. The main purpose is not to end the necessary simulated rainbow effect, but to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Further, in order to clarify such a difference, when the staging operation unit 301 is operated and when the handle 195 is touched, a partly different process is performed at a control point (for example, sound control) different from the light emission. It is preferable to keep it. For example, a unique effect end sound is output only when the simulated rainbow effect is terminated by the operation of the effect operation unit 301, whereby the simulated rainbow effect is produced by the operation of the effect operation unit 301 and the contact with the handle 195. Even if there is a common point of terminating, it is possible to make the operator surely recognize whether or not it is the end of an unnecessary simulated rainbow effect depending on the presence or absence of the effect end sound.

Further, in the above example, since a confirmation sound (a sound different from the effect end sound) is emitted when the handle 195 is touched, this confirmation sound is output by the contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period. If this is set, the operator can be surely recognized whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by the difference between the effect end sound and the confirmation sound. Further, as the confirmation sound, a confirmation sound A at the time of contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period and a confirmation sound B at the time of contact with the handle 195 within the confirmation period preceding the extension confirmation period are provided. However, due to the difference between the confirmation sounds A and B, in addition to confirming whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, it is also necessary to confirm whether or not the confirmation is performed during the extended confirmation period. It can be surely recognized by the person.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned off in the situation where the fluctuation display of the symbol is being performed or the hold in which the fluctuation display of the symbol is not performed is stored, such information is stored. After the power is turned on, such information is restored and the variable display of the symbol is restarted. After such power is turned on, the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. There is no confirmation period for. As a result, if the power is turned off while the symbol variation is being displayed or the hold for which the symbol variation display has not been performed is stored, the symbol variation display can be performed quickly after the power is turned on. It can be restarted and can be prevented from affecting the restart of the game.

Further, in this example, the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor that detects the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, or the magnet is brought closer to the pachinko machine 1. When a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 occurs, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being performed by vibration or magnetism, and such an abnormality occurs. The fact that it has occurred is notified to the outside. Then, after the power is turned on, a confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit, and a confirmation period of whether or not contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the above, when an abnormality occurs due to the detection of vibration or magnetism, such a confirmation period is forcibly terminated. As a result, in the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and in the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, Hall managers and others are performing confirmation work, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to vibration or magnetism while aiming for such confirmation work.

Further, after the power is turned on, in order to confirm whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 operates normally, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the staging display device 1600 is used. The initial operation in which the back upper front decorative body 3310 appears on the front side is performed. In such a case, after the back-up front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed, and the back-up front decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position. If not, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, after the power is turned on, the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Although confirmation periods are provided, if these confirmation periods are to be paralleled to the initial operation of the back-up front decorative body 3310, attention will be paid to the initial operation of the back-up front decorative body 3310, and confirmation will be made. There is a possibility that confirmation in the period will be neglected. Therefore, regarding the initial operation of the back-up front decorative body 3310, the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and the contact with the handle 195 are normal. It is preferable to execute it after the confirmation period of whether or not the LED is detected has expired. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the operator can perform the confirmation in the confirmation period and the confirmation in the initial operation of the back-up front decorative body 3310, respectively.

(About the rainbow independent decoration part for checking the rainbow emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) as the hit confirmation effect at which the hit is confirmed during the variable display of the symbol, the hit time It is possible to confirm the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode at a timing different from the rainbow effect of. Specifically, during the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol, as a simulated rainbow effect, a light emission effect that lights up in the same rainbow light emission mode as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, and the rainbow light emission mode is executed. It is possible to check in a hall, factory, etc. whether or not the light emission effect that lights up with is normally executed. The effect introduction period is an effect that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol, and the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to the above, a simulated rainbow effect will be executed. However, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, if the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, it can be grasped that it is the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect, but the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. When the production could not be executed normally, it was not possible to grasp whether or not the execution timing of the simulated rainbow production had arrived. Therefore, in this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. In addition to executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, a rainbow independent decorative unit 1700 that can be mounted separately from those plurality of members is provided, and the LED of the rainbow independent decorative unit 1700 is rainbow emitted. In order to notify that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed by executing the notification effect that lights up in the mode, and to confirm in the hall, factory, etc. whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. It is made clear that it is the timing of.

FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is attached to the game board 5. The rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is provided so as to be able to be attached to the game board 5 from the front side. Specifically, in the lower right region of the game board 5 (game area 5a), the connection terminal for connecting the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is exposed, and the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is connected to the connection terminal. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 enables the light emission control of the LED provided in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700.

In this example, since the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side, even if the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rainbow single decoration portion 1700 is attached. The part 1700 can be easily attached and detached. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow light emission mode is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. However, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect only when confirming in a hall, factory, etc. whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally. The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 may be attached to the game board 5. The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is not attached to the game board 5, and is configured so that the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is maintained even when the game board 5 is removed.

Further, as will be described later, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is provided with a substrate on which a total of 21 LEDs, 3 in the vertical direction and 7 in the horizontal direction, are mounted, and in front of the LEDs. Provided a transparent cover (not shown) to mitigate the direct viewing light from the LED. When removing the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 with respect to the game board 5, it is possible to remove the entire board on which the LED is mounted, but only the cover body is removed without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. It also makes it possible. Thereby, for example, when it is difficult to see the light emission of the LED in the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, it is sufficient to remove only the cover body, and it is possible to easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed.

Further, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rainbow single decoration portion 1700 can be easily visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the door window 101a. Further, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used in a rainbow light emitting mode. Although the light emitting effect of lighting is executed, the light emitting decoration body provided with the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 is located behind the area where the game ball B flows down, whereas the rainbow is used. The single decoration unit 1700 is located on the front side of the area where the game ball B flows down. That is, in the light emitting decorative body provided with the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the game ball B can flow down the front side, whereas in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, the game ball B does not flow down the front side. It is configured in. As a result, when the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode, the visual recognition is not hindered by the flow of the game ball B, and it is possible to easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. can.

FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram showing a rainbow single decoration unit 1700. The rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is provided with a substrate on which a total of 21 LEDs, 3 in the vertical direction and 7 in the horizontal direction, are mounted. Then, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. That is, at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect, the LED 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to emit rainbow light. The notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 in synchronization with the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in. Specifically, in the case of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 The three LEDs in row A are made to emit light in "red, purple, and blue", respectively. That is, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 are made to emit light so that three predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Then, for the LED of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, each of them is in the order of A row → B row → C row → D row → E row → F row → G row every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The three LEDs in the row are switched to emit light. In addition, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow single decoration section 1700 emit light in "red, purple, blue", and the three LEDs in row B emit light in "purple, blue, green", and row C. The three LEDs in row E emit light in "blue, green, orange", the three LEDs in row D emit light in "green, orange, yellow", and the three LEDs in row E emit "". It emits light in "orange, yellow, white", "yellow, white, red" for the three LEDs in row F, and "white, red, purple" for the three LEDs in row G. It is supposed to be. In this way, for the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, one of the three colors is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) so that the emission color appearing at the same time can be switched. By controlling, these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow light emitting mode in cooperation with each other. Then, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, such regular switching of the emission color (switching of the row in which the three LEDs emit light) is repeated.

FIG. 262 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a simulated rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is attached. In this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In synchronization with the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. In this way, since the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode as in the simulated rainbow effect (light emitting effect that lights in the rainbow light emitting mode), it is possible to grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. It can be used as a guideline for confirming whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed in a hall, a factory, or the like. Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3) are used. When an abnormality in which the LED does not light occurs in a part of ~ 14), it becomes an incomplete mode in which a part of the light emitting color constituting the rainbow light emitting mode is missing, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. However, regardless of whether or not such an abnormality has occurred, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 has a rainbow light emitting mode. The notification effect that lights up with is executed. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, if there is an abnormality that the LED does not light up in a part of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode, a visual difference from the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 occurs. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode has not been normally executed even though the simulated rainbow effect is being executed.

Regarding the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, not only the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect during the execution of the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol, but also the execution timing of the hit rainbow effect during the variable display of the symbol. Also, it may be attached to the game board 5. That is, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 may always be attached to the game board 5. In such a case, when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in synchronization with the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In this way, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode as well as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting (light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode), so that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed. It can be grasped, and it can be used as a guide for the execution of the hit confirmation effect in which the hit is confirmed. Further, when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3) are used. When an abnormality in which the LED does not light occurs in a part of the LEDs 10 to 14), the rainbow emission mode is not established because a part of the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is missing. It is difficult to know whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting because it emits light at, but regardless of whether or not such an abnormality has occurred, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is , The notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. As a result, even if there is an abnormality that the LED does not light up in a part of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the rainbow light emitting mode in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is used. By visually recognizing the light emission of the LED, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting, and it is possible not to overlook useful information for the player.

Further, as described above in detail, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, after confirming whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the simulated rainbow can be operated by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to end the production. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, after confirming whether or not the simulated rainbow effect can be executed and the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, any arbitrary during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect can be executed. By operating the effect operation unit 301 at the timing, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended at any timing, and the execution of unnecessary rainbow effect after the confirmation affects other manufacturing confirmations and the like. Can be stopped. Further, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 are used. Not only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is ended by using the LEDs 10 to 14, but also the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is ended by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. Specifically, the LED of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission. In this way, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect is completed by switching the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission. You can clearly tell that.

Even if the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is not attached to the game board 5, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting is not determined. At the time of execution, as usual, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. I am trying to execute a light emission effect. As a result, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect only when confirming in the hall or factory whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the rainbow independent decoration unit for the game board 5 is used. The 1700 is attached, and the rainbow single decoration part 1700 can be removed during other periods. Further, when the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is attached to the game board 5, a notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, such as a part of the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 not lighting. Is not normally executed, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 are used as usual. It is assumed that the LEDs 10 to 14 are used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect of affecting the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect. Some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are lit. Even if an abnormality has occurred, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission constituting the rainbow light emission mode is executed. The light is emitted in an incomplete mode in which a part of the color is missing (a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established).

The rainbow single decoration unit 1700 makes it possible to light in a rainbow light emitting mode as a single member without using a plurality of members, but the back upper front decorative body 3310 also does not use a plurality of members. As a single member, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to enable lighting in a rainbow emission mode. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the back-up front decoration body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained in the initial position. Each display body is used so as not to light in a rainbow light emitting mode. Therefore, although the back-up front decorative body 3310 can be turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode, it cannot be grasped that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, and the light emitting effect is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode. It cannot be used as a guideline for confirming whether or not the above can be performed normally in a hall or factory. Further, since the back-up front decorative body 3310 is attached to the back side of the game board 5, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back-up front decorative body is attached to the game board 5. The 3310 cannot be attached or detached. That is, the back-up front decorative body 3310 cannot be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the game board 5 like the rainbow single decorative portion 1700, and can normally execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. It is difficult to attach the back-up front decorative body 3310 to the game board 5 only when confirming whether or not it is in a hall or a factory. Further, since the decorativeness on the front side of the game board 5 cannot be maintained when the back upper front decorative body 3310 is removed from the game board 5, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is the rainbow single decorative part 1700. As described above, it is not suitable as a member for confirming the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect.

As described above, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 includes a substrate on which 21 LEDs are mounted. Specifically, a top-view type LED is mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700. Therefore, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is visually recognized brightly. Can be done.

Further, as the substrate of the rainbow single decoration portion 1700, a white substrate having at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) painted in white is used. When a white substrate is used as the substrate on which the LED is mounted on the front surface, light is reflected with a higher reflectance than when a substrate other than the white substrate (for example, a black substrate or a green substrate) is used. Is possible. Therefore, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is visually recognized brightly. Can be done.

Further, in the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used. A coating film made of a solder resist is formed. That is, the 21 LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 are "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow", each of which is a emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. It emits light in either "white" or "white", but for the coating film made of solder resist, the same color as the emission color of the LED is used. Specifically, among the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, a coating film made of a "red" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits "red", and the LED emits "purple". A coating film made of "purple" solder resist is formed around the LED, and a coating film made of "blue" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in "blue" to form "green". A coating film made of "green" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in, and a coating film made of "orange" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in "orange". A coating film made of a "yellow" solder resist is formed around the LED that is formed and emits light in "yellow", and a "white" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in "white". The coating film is formed. Here, when the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used as the coating film made of the solder resist, the reflectance is higher than when a color different from the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to reflect the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. Therefore, at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is clearly visually recognized. be able to.

Further, for the coating film made of the above-mentioned solder resist, a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is added based on the white solder resist. When a white solder resist is used as the coating film made of the solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a non-white solder resist is used. Therefore, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is visually recognized brightly. Can be done. As the coating film made of solder resist, the higher the proportion of the white solder resist as the base, the higher the reflectance of light can be reflected. Therefore, regarding the coating film made of solder resist, It is preferable to increase the proportion of the base white solder resist rather than the solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 are used. When performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 10 to 14, each LED has a light emission color "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow" that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode. It emits light in the order of "white", but like the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each LED emits "red, purple, blue, green, orange" which is the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. It may emit light in any of "color, yellow, and white". That is, for LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, each LED is not a full-color LED but a rainbow alone. A monochromatic LED may be used as in the decorative section 1700. Then, as in the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, for example, by making a predetermined three colors appear at the same time and regularly switching the three colors, a rainbow light emitting mode can be realized. In such a case, as the LED substrate involved in the rainbow light emission mode, a white substrate having at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) painted in white is used as the rainbow single decoration portion 1700. It is used. Further, in the front surface of the LED substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), which is involved in the rainbow emission mode, around each of the mounted LEDs, the rainbow emission is emitted as in the rainbow single decoration portion 1700. A coating film made of a solder resist having the same color as the light emitting color constituting the embodiment is formed. Further, for the coating film made of a solder resist, a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is added based on the white solder resist. As a result, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to the door frame 3 are executed. When the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using 14, the same effect as that of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 can be exhibited. Further, in the front surface of the LED substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) involved in the rainbow light emission mode, the surroundings of each of the mounted LEDs are the same as the light emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode. By forming a coating film made of colored solder resist, if the emission color of the LED does not match the color of the solder resist, it is possible to know that the LED is not mounted in the correct position. can.

In the above, as the LED substrate involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white, but the rainbow light emitting mode is used. As the LED substrate that is not involved, a substrate that is painted in a color different from the emission color (for example, black or green) that constitutes the rainbow emission mode is used. As a result, the LED involved in the rainbow light emission mode can reflect light with a high reflectance, whereas the LED not involved in the rainbow light emission mode can reflect the light with a high reflectance. Since it becomes difficult, the visibility of the light becomes different, and when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode can be visually recognized so as to stand out.

The rainbow single decoration unit 1700 has an LED mounted on the front surface of the substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the direct light from the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a light guide unit for guiding the light from the LED may be provided so that the player can visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide unit. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700. Another example of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is provided with a substrate on which seven LEDs are mounted side by side, and the substrate is provided in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5. The seven LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 of another example are "red, purple, blue, green, orange", each of which is a emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. It emits light in either color, yellow, or white. In such a case, for example, a rainbow emission mode can be realized by making predetermined three colors appear at the same time and regularly switching the three colors. Further, a light guide unit is provided so as to be close to the seven LEDs, and by irradiating the light of the LED from the side of the light guide unit, the light guide unit can be made to emit light with the emission color of the LED. .. The front side of the substrate on which the seven LEDs are mounted (the front side facing the player) is covered with a cover portion so that the player does not see the direct light from the LEDs. In this way, by providing a light guide unit that guides the light from the LED and configuring the indirect light from the light guide unit to be visually recognized by the player, the direct viewing light of the LED involved in the rainbow light emission mode is provided. However, it is possible to prevent a situation such as a burden on the eyes when visually recognizing occurs.

Further, although the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 of another example can be easily attached to and detached from the game board 5, it is also possible to remove only the light guide unit without removing the substrate on which the LED is mounted. It is possible. Here, when only the light guide unit is removed, the light guide unit does not guide the light from the LED, and the light emission (emission color) of the LED cannot be recognized. For this reason, a light guide unit is attached in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect only during the confirmation period in which the hall or factory confirms whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. During the period other than that, the light guide unit can be removed for use. Further, even if the light guide unit is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 can be maintained. Therefore, in the rainbow independent decorative unit 1700 of another example, the rainbow alone including the substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided. It is preferable to remove only the light guide portion without removing the entire decorative portion 1700.

[Limitation of rainbow light emission when anomaly is detected]
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute at least the rainbow effect at the time of hitting (light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode) during the variable display of the symbol, but the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is appropriate due to some trouble or abnormality. If it is not executed, there is a risk that it will be a factor that reduces the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, when some trouble or abnormality has occurred, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 are executed when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In this example, it suffices as long as it is possible to execute at least a rainbow effect at the time of hitting during the variable display of the symbol. As explained, a rainbow effect at the time of deviation is executed during the variable display of the symbol, an effect suggesting the set value 6 as the suggestion effect A is executed during the variable display of the symbol, or a non-variable display of the symbol is executed. It may be possible to perform a simulated rainbow effect. Such a rainbow effect is the same in that a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. A light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using ~ 14. Specifically, in the case of executing the rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the game board 5 LEDs 1 and 2 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "blue". "Green", LED9 of the door frame 3 and LED10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". ing. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (eg for 10 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 each emit light in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow emission mode in cooperation with each other, resulting in high-impact emission. You can perform the production. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the 14 is emitted in different emission colors for each of the two groups, and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, and it is sufficient that a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted.

(When an abnormality is detected in the front decorative body (movable body) on the back)
As described in detail above, the back-up front staging unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 is provided behind the back-up front decorative body 3310 and the back-up front decorative body 3310, which are rectangular and long in the left-right direction in the front view. It is equipped with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-up front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Further, after the back-up front decorative body 3310 is movable from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the effect, when a predetermined effect end condition is satisfied, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed. ing. In such return control, whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 has returned to the initial position is detected by using a detection sensor, and when the back upper front decorative body 3310 has not returned to the initial position. It is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. When it is determined that an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, the back-up front decorative body 3310 appears from the initial position even if a predetermined effect condition is satisfied thereafter. It is restricted to perform movable control to move. Further, when it is determined that an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the return control for returning the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times. When the back-up front decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position, the determination that the initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side is eliminated.

In the above, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied during the variable display or the non-variable display of the symbol, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Although it is possible for the front decoration body 3310 to appear, in addition to this, for example, in order to confirm whether or not the back top front decoration body 3310 operates normally when the power is turned on, the back top front The decorative body 3310 is movable from the initial position to the appearance position, and it is possible for the back-up front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the staging display device 1600. Even in such a case, after the back-up front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed, and similarly, the back-up front decoration body 3310 is performed. If is not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

FIG. 264 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed at the time of an initial position error of the back upper front decorative body 3310. In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3, but apart from this, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used. A light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Here, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the seven rankings of sumo such as "yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and the back-up front decorative board is provided. Each of the seven numbers can be independently lit and decorated by the LED. Then, at the time of executing the rainbow effect, each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different light emitting colors. In such a display body with a rainbow emission mode, the emission color emitted by each of the seven numbers is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red". In this way, such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds).

Then, when the initial position error does not occur in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used in the rainbow light emitting mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. If an initial position error has occurred for the back-up front decoration body 3310 while the lighting effect is executed, the seven rankings in the back-up front decoration body 3310 are assigned when the rainbow effect is executed. The display body is not used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, and the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 are turned off. That is, when an initial position error has occurred for the back-up front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 are used in the rainbow light emission mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. The execution of the lighting effect is restricted. For example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, when a light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310. Since the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is conspicuous, it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310. By not executing the above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310.

Further, when the initial position error does not occur in the front decorative body 3310 on the back, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation are performed. When the LED 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, whereas an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310. When the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to emit rainbow light. LED1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off without executing the light emitting effect lit by. It is supposed to be. That is, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 are used in the rainbow light emission mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. In addition to limiting the execution of the lighting effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. For example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and a door. If only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the frame 3, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. A sense of incongruity will occur, and it will be easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the staging operation unit 300. ~ 9, By not executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it becomes easy to notice that the initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310. Can be prevented from occurring.

In the above, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are used when the rainbow effect is executed. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off. As another example, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit. Instead of the light emission effect in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and light up in the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and light up in a single color (for example, red or blue). The light emitting effect may be executed. As a result, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but the LEDs 10 to the door frame 3 are not executed. With respect to 14, the situation in which the light emitting effect can be expected can be maintained by executing the light emitting effect of lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue).

Further, in the above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow is used by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310, but the lighting is performed in such a rainbow light emitting mode. The light emission effect to be performed may not be executed separately, but may be executed integrally. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the back upper front decoration body 3310. May be integrated to emit light in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is established. In such a configuration, for example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and an effect operation unit. If only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a part of the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is missing, resulting in an incomplete mode of rainbow light emission. It will emit light in a mode in which the mode does not hold. Therefore, in this example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300 By not executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 8 to 9 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the light emission in the mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established, and whether the rainbow effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation that cannot be determined.

In this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, rainbow light emission is performed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 at the time of executing the rainbow effect. Although the light emitting effect that lights up in the mode is not executed, if an initial position error occurs for the back-up front decorative body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the subsequent time. At the time of executing the rainbow effect, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed by using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is also executed. For example, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined time such as several hours elapses, the predetermined time elapses in a situation where the game is continued even though the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. If the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is suddenly not executed after that, a sense of incongruity arises that the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs in the back-up front decorative body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of strangeness from occurring.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used at the time of executing the rainbow effect. Although the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed, after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the occurrence of such an initial position error, the back side is executed when the subsequent rainbow effect is executed. Using the seven numbered display bodies in the upper front decorative body 3310, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is also executed. In such a case, the work for eliminating the initial position error has not been performed until a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the occurrence of the initial position error on the back upper front decorative body 3310. become. In this respect, in this example, after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the occurrence of the initial position error on the back upper front decorative body 3310, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. By executing the effect, the back-up front decorative body 3310 stands out, so it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, and work to eliminate the initial position error. It is possible to prevent the situation where the above is not performed from continuing.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back top front decoration body 3310 are used at the time of executing the rainbow effect. In addition to the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Although the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode is not executed, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (the front decorative body 3310 on the back, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect). The LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3) are also used for effects other than the rainbow effect. Then, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect at the time of hitting or a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is determined and the rainbow effect is performed. During the variable display of the symbol to be executed, the LED constituting the rainbow light emitting mode is not turned on when performing an effect other than the rainbow effect. On the other hand, during the variation display of the symbol in which the variation pattern in which the rainbow effect is not executed is determined and the pattern in which the rainbow effect is not executed is executed, the LED constituting the rainbow light emission mode is turned on when the effect other than the rainbow effect is executed. I have to. In such a configuration, from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the execution of the rainbow effect, for example, as a notice effect for anticipating the rainbow effect, the back top front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a notice effect is no longer executed, and the player has expectations for the rainbow effect. Can be deterred.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit rainbow light. Regardless of the emission color that constitutes the embodiment, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. On the other hand, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, the back-up front decorative body 3310, the game, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 at the time of executing the rainbow effect. Unlike the LEDs 1 to 4 on the board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the staging operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, the LEDs did not turn off and responded to the fluctuation pattern. I try to continue the light emission production. As a result, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to the game board 5 With respect to 17, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the light emission effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern can be expected.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, the effect display device is used when the rainbow effect is executed, as in the case where the initial position error has not occurred. The display area of 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-mode effect image in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. That is, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, the back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 are executed when the rainbow effect is executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and do not perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, whereas the effect display device 1600 is of the rainbow mode. The staging image is displayed. As a result, as long as the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (light emission by the back-up front decorative body 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14) is focused, it cannot be determined whether or not the rainbow effect is executed, but the effect is produced. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed by the effect image of the rainbow mode.

(When a situation occurs in which the production image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. If another image is displayed on the front side of the rainbow-type staging image, the player cannot see it. In this way, when there is a situation in which the staging image of the rainbow mode in the staging display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the back top front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 are used. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to limit the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227 occurs. Time is mentioned. The dish unit 200 of this example is provided with a light amount adjusting button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the staging operation unit 301 in the staging operation unit 300. As the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, it is possible to adjust the light amount step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity stage from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step. As the light intensity of the LED increases and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to reduce the stage, the light intensity of the LED decreases. The plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. With respect to the sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume level output from various speakers from 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and operate the volume control button 227 upward. The larger the stage, the higher the volume output from the various speakers, and the volume control button 227 is operated downward to reduce the volume, the lower the volume output from the various speakers. It should be noted that the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the symbol.

Then, at the time of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228, a light amount adjustment image for notifying the stage of the light amount of the LED is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume adjustment using the volume control button 227 is performed. At the time of operation, a volume adjustment image for notifying the stage of the volume output from various speakers is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. These light amount adjustment images and volume adjustment images are displayed on the front side of the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, at the time of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227, at least a part of the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized by the light amount adjustment image or the volume adjustment image. Since there is no such situation, it is determined that there is a situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Further, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed with the end of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227, the light amount adjustment image and the volume Since the adjustment image is erased and the situation returns to the situation where the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized, the judgment that the situation where the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized occurs on the peripheral control board 1510 side is resolved. I try to do it.

Further, as a situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the front side of the effect display device 1600 abnormally stops while the back upper front decorative body 3310 is movable at the appearance position. There are cases where it is. The back-up front decoration body 3310 of this example moves from the initial position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and enables the back-up front decoration body 3310 to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. ing. Further, after the back-up front decorative body 3310 is movable from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the effect, when a predetermined effect end condition is satisfied, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed. However, in such a return control, the back-up front decoration body 3310 may remain movable at the appearance position and abnormally stop, and the back-up front decoration body 3310 may not return to the initial position. In such a case, the abnormal stop of the front decorative body 3310 on the back makes it impossible to visually recognize at least a part of the effect image of the rainbow mode. Therefore, the effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is judged that a situation that cannot be visually recognized has occurred. Further, when it is determined that the back upper front decorative body 3310 has abnormally stopped at the appearance position, the return control for returning the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times. When the front decoration body 3310 on the back side returns to the initial position, the situation returns to the situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized. Therefore, a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. I am trying to eliminate the judgment that I am doing it.

FIG. 265 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. In this example, when there is no situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the back-up front decorative body 3310 and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are displayed when the rainbow effect is executed. , LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, whereas the effect display device 1600. In the case where the staging image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized in the above, when the rainbow staging is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are generated. No. 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, and they are turned off. That is, when a situation occurs in which the staging image of the rainbow mode in the staging display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emitting area around the display area of the staging display device 1600 (in front of the back side) at the time of executing the rainbow staging. The execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the decorative body 3310 (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) is restricted. For example, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, only the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed. , It makes me feel uncomfortable that the staging image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized. However, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the staging image of the rainbow mode in the staging display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode in the light emitting region around the display area of the staging display device 1600. By not executing the effect, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of strangeness from occurring.

Further, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LED 1 of the back-up front decorative body 3310 and the game board 5 is executed when the rainbow effect is executed. ~ 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Even if the situation is returned so that the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the situation in which the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. For example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to the situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is too short, the back top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow effect is executed. It may not be possible to determine if it is present. Therefore, in this example, even if the production image of the rainbow mode is returned to a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed during the remaining time. By continuing, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it cannot be determined whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed occurs.

In the above, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 are used when the rainbow effect is executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off. As another example, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are turned off. Instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and light up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and a single color (for example, red or red) is involved. A light emitting effect that lights up in blue) may be executed. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but the door frame. With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, the light emitting effect of lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue) can be executed, so that the situation in which the light emitting effect can be expected can be maintained.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit rainbow light. Regardless of the emission color that constitutes the embodiment, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. On the other hand, when there is a situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are decorated in front of the back when the rainbow effect is executed. Unlike the body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs do not turn off and fluctuate. The light emission effect according to the pattern is continued. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but the game board. With respect to the LEDs 15 to 17, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be continued, so that the situation in which the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected can be maintained.

Further, in this example, in a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, a ball jam (for example, many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, and the upper plate 201 is the game ball B. Even if an abnormality such as (full state) occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the front decoration body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. For example, in a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, if the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting region around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not executed, the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. It makes me feel uncomfortable that the light emission effect that lights up with is not executed. However, in this example, in a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of strangeness from occurring by executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. ..

(When an abnormality is detected in a pachinko machine)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3, but when some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it is linked with the display of the effect display device 1600. Using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. ing. Further, depending on the type of abnormality with respect to the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (the front decorative body 3310 on the back, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300). The execution of light emission other than LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is also restricted.

Specifically, as the abnormalities for the pachinko machine 1, the first abnormality in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the second abnormality in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate, and the fraudulent activity There is a third anomaly that is likely to be acting. As the first abnormality, a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B are sent to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. There is a condition where it cannot be released. In such a state, only a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, and it is determined that the first abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the ball is removed from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 and the game ball B is returned to the state where the game ball B can be discharged to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, the first one is on the main control board 1310 side. I am trying to eliminate the judgment that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, as a second abnormality, there is a state in which the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. In such a state, there is a possibility that the hall clerk has only opened the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and it is determined that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the determination that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is eliminated.

Further, as a third abnormality, a state in which vibration is detected by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 or a magnet is attached to the pachinko machine 1. There is a state in which magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing it closer. In such a state, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is performed by vibration or magnetism, and when the detection signal from the vibration sensor or magnetic sensor is input, a third abnormality occurs on the main control board 1310 side. It is judged that it has occurred. Further, even when the vibration or magnetism is returned to the state where it is not detected, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is not resolved, and the power is turned on again. By doing so, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is eliminated.

FIG. 266 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. In this example, when the first to third abnormalities have not occurred, the front decoration body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to the door frame top unit 450 when the rainbow effect is executed. 7. LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality has occurred, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) when the rainbow effect is executed. As for the remaining back-up front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the staging operation unit 300, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode is performed. Running. As a result, it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be expected.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to the door frame top unit 450 are generated. 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not involved in performing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (rear top front decoration body). For 3310, LEDs 1 to 14), an error notification effect of lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue) is executed. That is, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs before the execution of the rainbow effect, the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (back-up front decorative body 3310, LED1). The execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode in to 14) is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, when the first to third abnormalities have not occurred, the back-up front decorative body 3310 and the game board 5 are executed when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is executed. LEDs 1 to 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued regardless of the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are in a state where the LEDs notify the error like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. The light emission effect is continued according to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect, expectations are expected for the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern. You can maintain the situation you have.

Similarly, when the second abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to). As in 14), the LED does not go into the error notification state, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. As a result, when the second abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the gaming board 5 correspond to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the light emission effect, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the pachinko machine 1 can be expected to have a light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern, while notifying the pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred. ..

On the other hand, when the third abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14). ), The LED is lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify the error, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality occurs, not only the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed at the time of executing the rainbow effect, but also the fluctuation pattern of the LEDs 15 to 17 of the gaming board 5 is executed. By not executing the light emission effect according to the above, the situation where the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected is eliminated, and the pachinko machine 1 is made aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. Can be done.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. However, when the first to third abnormalities have occurred, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of the abnormality. However, when the first abnormality has occurred, even if the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the situation in which the staging image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is maintained, whereas the second abnormality is maintained. Or, when a third abnormality has occurred, when the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized, and depending on the rainbow mode effect image, the rainbow mode is used. It is not possible to know that the production is in progress.

FIG. 267 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution of the rainbow effect. In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the front decoration body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LED 10 on the door frame 3 ~ 14 is involved in the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Then, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) to execute the error notification effect, and the rest. For the front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is continued. ing. As a result, it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be expected.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back-up front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (back top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14). ), An error notification effect that lights up in a single color (for example, red or blue) is executed. That is, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, in the light emitting area (back top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600. The execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement), the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the effect. While LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 have a rainbow light emitting mode. Regardless of the constituent emission colors, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are in a state where the LEDs notify the error as in the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Instead, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. In this way, if the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected. The situation can be maintained.

Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, for the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14). The LED does not go into the error notification state as in the above, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. As a result, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is stopped, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the gaming board 5 emit light according to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the effect, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the pachinko machine 1 is informed that some abnormality has occurred, while expecting a light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, when the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are the LEDs (rear top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. As described above, the LED is turned on in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify the error, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, when a third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, not only the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is stopped, but also the LEDs 15 to 17 of the gaming board 5 respond to the fluctuation pattern. By canceling the light emission effect, it is possible to eliminate the situation in which the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected, and to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. ..

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. However, when the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of the abnormality. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the situation in which the staging image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is maintained, whereas the second abnormality or the second abnormality is maintained. When the abnormality of 3 occurs, when the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the staging image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized, and depending on the staging image of the rainbow mode, the rainbow staging is being executed. I am trying not to know that.

Further, in this example, when the second abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450 are used. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Similarly, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Under such circumstances, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the situation in which the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. .. For example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to the situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is too short, the back top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow effect is executed. It may not be possible to determine if it is present. Therefore, in this example, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the rainbow is not executed for the remaining time by continuing the situation in which the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it cannot be determined whether or not the effect is being executed.

[Rainbow effect with increase / decrease of rainbow emission LED]
In the above, the rainbow effect is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting during the variable display of the symbol, and when the rainbow effect is executed, it is linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. Using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. However, in this example, as a light emitting decoration body involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, an annular decoration portion 1710 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape is provided, and when the rainbow effect is executed, the LED of the ring decoration portion 1710 is provided. The case of performing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode will be described below. With respect to such an annular decorative portion 1710, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode can be increased or decreased, and the impact on the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be changed.

FIG. 269 is an explanatory diagram showing the annular decorative portion 1710. The annular decoration portion 1710 has a first annular decoration portion 1710A in which seven LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the inside, and 14 LEDs on the outside, which have more LEDs than the first annular decoration portion 1710A. A second annular decorative portion 1710B, in which LEDs are arranged, is provided. The annular decoration portion 1710 makes it possible to light each of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B in a rainbow light emitting mode. The annular decoration portion 1710 is provided as one of the light emitting decorative bodies provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5.

In this example, in the execution period of the light emission effect in which the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is involved and lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A emits light with a different emission color in the rainbow light emission mode. Turn on with. In the first annular decorative portion 1710A of such a rainbow light emitting mode, the emission color emitted by each of the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white →". I try to make changes in a predetermined order of "red" and repeat such regular changes.

Further, in the execution period of the light emission effect in which the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is involved and lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the two adjacent LEDs in the second annular decoration portion 1710B are grouped into two LEDs. Each group of lights is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light with different light emitting colors. In the second annular decorative portion 1710B of such a rainbow light emitting mode, the light emitting color emitted by each of the two LED groups is "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" in advance. I try to make changes in a fixed order and repeat such regular changes.

As described above, with respect to the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B, by controlling each emission color to be sequentially switched to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time. , These LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow light emitting mode in cooperation with each other, and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect having an impact. Further, regarding the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A, seven LEDs are interlocked and controlled, and the seven LEDs are made to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit different emission colors, and further emit light in a short time. By switching the color, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that has more impact than usual. Similarly, with respect to the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B, 14 LEDs are interlocked and controlled, and each of the two LED groups is made to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit different emission colors, and further shortened. By switching the emission color with time, it is possible to execute a emission effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, and it is sufficient that a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

In this example, as an effect according to the variation pattern, a rainbow effect as a high expectation effect can be executed during the variation display of the symbol, and a hit rainbow effect is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol. Although the rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is set, in which the deviation is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol. That is, at the time of hitting, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, and at the time of losing, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Then, by lowering the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of deviation from the fluctuation pattern for executing the effect at the time of other deviations, the rainbow at the time of deviation is lower than the effect at the time of other deviations. The frequency of execution of the production is reduced. As a result, when executing the rainbow effect, it is not possible to determine whether it is the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the rainbow effect at the time of off, but the ratio of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is high, and there is a high possibility that it will be a hit. It has come to suggest that.

FIG. 270 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using the annular decorative portion 1710. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the variation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting to execute the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection to execute the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the operation reaches a predetermined timing determined in advance, a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) in which the first annular decorative portion 1710A of the annular decorative portion 1710 is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. To start.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect using the first annular decoration unit 1710A, when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration unit 1710B) is executed in the effect display device 1600. It is a hit, and a display explaining that the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration portion 1710B) is off when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration portion 1710B) is not executed (for example, "Rainbow emission at the second annular decoration portion 1710B"). If you do, you will win! If the rainbow is not emitted at the second annular decoration part 1710B, it will come off! ")

When the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit is determined, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started by using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, and then at a predetermined timing. In addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. That is, both the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed, the light emitting effect is executed. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is a hit, and in order to know whether or not it is a hit, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. You can pay attention to whether or not.

Further, as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration portion 1710A, the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration portion 1710B at a predetermined timing. When the light emitting effect lit by is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image for recognizing that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "Congratulations!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit and a happy result is obtained. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B has been executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is a hit by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, after starting a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration portion 1710A, a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration portion 1710B at a predetermined timing. When the light emitting effect lit by is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. .. In such an effect image of the rainbow mode, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated. The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B has been executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is a hit by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of disengagement for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is determined, the second ring-shaped decorative portion 1710A is used to start the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and then the second. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed. That is, even if a predetermined timing is reached after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the lighting is performed in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. The LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B remains extinguished without executing the light emission effect, and only the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A continues to be lit in the rainbow emission mode. .. As a result, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. , It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is out of order, and in order to know whether or not it is a hit, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. You can pay attention to whether or not it is done.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, after starting a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. When is not executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "sorry!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment and a disappointing result is obtained. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is out of alignment by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, after starting a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. If the above is not executed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the effect image in the rainbow mode at a predetermined timing.

In this example, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the second annular decoration portion 1710B is used at a predetermined timing after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow emission mode using the first annular decoration portion 1710A. In contrast to the additional light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, when the off-line rainbow effect is executed, the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used to start the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. At a predetermined timing, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is continued without executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. I have to. That is, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, not only the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A but also the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is turned on in the rainbow light emission mode, which is involved in the rainbow light emission mode. The number of LEDs to be used is increasing. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the variation display of the running symbol is a hit depending on whether or not the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode increases. Further, by increasing the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, the player's motivation to play can be excessively increased, coupled with the fact that the variable display of the running symbol becomes a hit.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B are configured to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode, respectively. However, the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B may be integrally configured to light in a rainbow light emitting mode. Further, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, in addition to the state in which the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is lit in the rainbow emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is lit in the rainbow emission mode. However, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is turned off, and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is turned off. It may be configured to switch to a lighting state in a rainbow light emitting mode. Even in such a configuration, since the number of LEDs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B is larger than that in the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode are used when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting. The number will increase.

As a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, after executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B, the hit result (hit) as a result of the variation display of the symbol. The design) is notified, but during the notification of the hit result, the first annular decoration portion 1710A is not executed without executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow emission mode using the second annular decoration portion 1710B. Only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the above is executed. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, both the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B are lit, whereas the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is performed. During the notification of the hit result after the execution, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is turned off, and only the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode. In such a case, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced as compared with the time of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. .. Here, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, since the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B is executed, the player's game A state in which the motivation is excessively improved may occur, but during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. By executing only the effect, it is possible to reduce the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively improved, and to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, and in the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. The same effect as the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, but the same effect is not necessary, and the rainbow is more than the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. It may be configured so as to reduce the impact on the light emitting mode. Further, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced as compared with the time of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Not limited to this, it may be configured so that the impact on the rainbow light emitting mode is reduced as compared with the time when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting. For example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, the emission color of the LED is switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is executed, whereas the rainbow at the time of hitting is executed. During the notification of the hit result after the effect is executed, the LED emission color is switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second) when the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. You may. That is, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the LED is lit in the rainbow light emission mode so that the interval at which the emission color of the LED is switched is longer than that at the time of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. You may perform a light emitting effect. Even in such a configuration, the player's motivation to play is excessively improved because the interval at which the LED emission color is switched becomes long during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. It is possible to reduce the state and prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

Further, for example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hit is executed, the amount of light of the LED is increased when the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is executed, whereas the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit is notified. In some cases, the amount of light from the LED may be reduced when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. That is, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed so that the amount of light of the LED is lower than that at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit. You may. Even in such a configuration, the amount of light of the LED is low during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, so that the state in which the player's motivation for playing is excessively improved is reduced. In the subsequent game, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game.

Further, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, in addition to the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A being lit in the rainbow emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is not only lit in the rainbow emission mode. In the effect display device 1600, the effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed, but during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is displayed in the rainbow light emission mode. Only by lighting, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B does not light in the rainbow light emitting mode, and the effect display device 1600 does not display the effect image in the rainbow mode. Even in such a configuration, the player's motivation to play is excessively improved because the effect image of the rainbow mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. It is possible to reduce the state of being in the state and prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described in detail above, it is possible to attach the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 to the game board 5, and the game board is being executed during the rainbow effect such as the simulated rainbow effect and the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Using LEDs 1 to 4 of 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow emission mode is synchronized with the execution of the light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. As a result, even if there is an abnormality that the LED does not light up in a part of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode during the execution of the rainbow effect, the light is emitted in the rainbow light emitting mode in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. By visually recognizing, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed. In this respect, in this example, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B are used in synchronization with executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow emission mode. , While the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the first annular decoration unit 1710A Is used to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, but the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is not executed with a notification effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. Regarding this, when executing the hit-time rainbow effect, it is important to understand that the hit-time rainbow effect is being executed so that the player does not miss useful information. Even if there is an abnormality in which the LED does not light up in a part of the LEDs of the annular decorative portion 1710A or the second annular decorative portion 1710B, the light emission in the rainbow light emitting mode in the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is visually recognized. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting. On the other hand, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, which is useful for the player. Since it is not information that should be conveyed to the player, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 has an abnormality in which the LED does not light up in a part of the LED of the first annular decoration unit 1710A. The LED is configured so that it does not light in a rainbow light emitting mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed, the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is completed. It does not determine the fluctuation pattern of the time, and limits it so that the rainbow effect at the time of off is not executed again. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the hit when the rainbow effect of the hit is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of off is finished. The execution of the rainbow effect of the time is not restricted. As a result, in a short period of time such as a specific period, the rainbow effect at the time of off is not repeated, and the trust in the rainbow effect that is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting is lost. There is no such thing, and you can look forward to the next rainbow production. Further, if the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used as the rainbow effect and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started before the specific period elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is completed, the light emission effect is started. The rainbow effect is not the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, and the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is not waited for the additional light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. It is possible to grasp that is being executed.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting, rainbow effect at the time of off) is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the hit is not during the variable display of the symbol. During a specific period such as during a game, after executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. You may make a rainbow effect of whether or not to do it. In this case, whether or not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B after executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. Depending on the situation of the rainbow effect, the player may be made to recognize whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the hit game being executed. Further, after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, since useful information for the player is obtained, the second annular decorative portion 1710B is used. Instead of executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the used rainbow light emitting mode, it may be configured to execute only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively improved, and to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

Further, as described above in detail, it is possible to determine whether or not a hit occurs when a predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting, rainbow effect at the time of off). As the button effect, a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B, and a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C may be performed. Further, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting, rainbow effect at the time of off), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!") Prompting the operation to the predetermined operation unit. The button operation promotion effect to be performed may be prevented from being executed, and the button effects A to C may be configured to function as a "hidden effect" during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect when hit, rainbow effect when off). .. For example, as the button effect A, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. At least the amount of light of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) changes. On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, at least the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. The amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) does not change. That is, as a rainbow effect, when the light amount can be adjusted after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the rainbow effect is the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. It is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed without waiting for the addition of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. .. As a result, for the player who normally actively operates the light amount adjustment button 228, it is possible to grasp at an early stage whether or not it will be a hit, and for the player who does not normally actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228. Can pay attention to whether or not to additionally execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and to thoroughly enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed, whereas the light emitting effect at the time of hitting is executed. During the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect, only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, but after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. During the notification of the hit result, the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is longer than that of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Here, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is smaller than that at the time of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. It is difficult to recognize whether or not the light is lit in the mode, but by making the execution period of the light emission effect that lights in the rainbow light emission mode longer than when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, the rainbow light emission mode is used. It is possible to surely recognize whether or not it is lit.

Although various rainbow effects are described individually as necessary for the rainbow effect of the present invention, only one of these rainbow effects may be executed, or a combination of these rainbow effects may be performed in parallel. It may be something to do. For example, as the rainbow effect, a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, a rainbow effect at the time of off, and a simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. Further, in the rainbow effect of the present invention, not only the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 but also the LEDs of the members other than the game board 5 (LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame). Although the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14) of No. 3, any LED may be used as long as the rainbow light emitting mode is realized by using a plurality of LEDs, for example, only the LED of the game board 5. May be configured to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode.

[First Embodiment regarding transmission cutoff status]
In this example, as an operation when the power is turned on, a setting confirmation operation for turning on the power switch 630a while the setting key switch 1311a is ON is performed, so that the set value can be confirmed. Specifically, the power switch 630a is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned on. When the power switch 630a is turned on, the setting key ON signal is input to the main control board 1310, and the setting state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Further, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to detect magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, or the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit to perform pachinko. A configuration that detects vibration by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the machine 1, a configuration that detects the opening and closing of the door frame 3, a configuration that detects the connection status of various wiring, and an external device via an external terminal plate 558. It has a configuration that outputs information about the pachinko machine 1 to the (hall computer), and by these configurations, it is possible to detect and notify whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and it is illegal. We are monitoring the presence or absence of acts. However, in the setting confirmation state, many of the above-mentioned functions related to monitoring are not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience in regular work, and in the case of such a configuration, "setting confirmation" is performed. There is a risk that "injustice that abuses the state" will be carried out. This point will be described below.

First, as one method of conventional fraud, for example, a fraudulent board (so-called hanging board) is connected to the main control board 1310, and contrary to the original game, a ball is input to the main control board 1310 when a start prize is won. Examples include illegally inputting signals, illegally stopping the variable display of special symbols at the jackpot symbol, and illegally generating jackpot games. If the discovery of such an illegal board is delayed, the game hall will be large. Will be damaged. In order to perform such fraud (attachment of a fraudulent board), it is necessary to avoid opening and closing the door frame 3, inserting and removing various wirings, and monitoring various vibrations caused by fraudulent acts and magnetism generated from fraudulent appliances. In the past, many fraudulent activities were carried out outside the business hours of the game hall because of the need to do so. However, in recent years, a gaming machine (pachinko) having the above-mentioned setting confirmation state (a state in which the above-mentioned various monitoring-related functions are not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience in regular work). The number of machines) is increasing, and it is feared that the above-mentioned fraud (mounting of fraudulent boards) will be performed even during the business hours of the game hall by abusing this setting confirmation state. For example, it is conceivable that the setting confirmation state is illegally generated by some method, the illegal board is attached by using the period of the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is terminated in a short period of time. A plurality of wirings are connected to the main control board 1310 by connectors, but such an unauthorized board may be connected by using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by the connector. For example, the wiring used for connection with the peripheral control board 1510 is detached from the main control board 1310, and the unauthorized board is relayed to the wiring, or the unauthorized board is connected to an empty connector by disconnection to the main control board. It is conceivable to connect to the 1310 and illegally access the main control board 1310 side.

The wiring used for connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is a command line for transmitting a command signal from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side. This command line is connected to the main control board 1310 with a connector and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 with a connector. Further, in addition to the command line described above, a plurality of wirings are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and as one of the wirings, there is a power supply line using power supply from the power supply board 630. With respect to such a peripheral control board 1510, as long as the power supply line is connected, the peripheral control MPU can be operated even if the command line connection is cut off, and the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. As the members, the effect display device 1600, the LED (lamp A: frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the LED (lamp B: board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5. ), Speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be operated. In this example, a method for preventing "illegal abuse of the setting confirmation status" by performing a special operation when such a command line is blocked (transmission cutoff status) or when it is reconnected. , Explained below.

(Control when transmission cutoff status does not occur during the setting confirmation status)
FIG. 271 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the connection of the command line (wiring used for connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510) is maintained during the setting confirmation state. Here, in a normal situation where the command line connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is maintained (a situation in which fraud is not performed), the setting confirmation state is terminated when the setting confirmation state is terminated. This section describes the case where the setting confirmation notification executed during the state is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 271, first, when the power of the timing ts is turned on, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state, the setting transition state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Specifically, when the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, the main control MPU 1310a has a specific area of its built-in RAM. The current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6) stored in is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. Further, in the setting confirmation state, even if the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the set value is not changed in response to this pressing operation. Then, after confirming the current set value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing tx to end the setting confirmation state and shift to the normal state. Specifically, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing tx, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value for the setting display 1310g. It is designed to switch from the state of displaying to the state of hiding.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be started. That is, in the setting confirmation state, even if there is a start prize, the variable display of the special symbol is not started, and the start prize is not suspended. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. That is, in the normal state after the setting confirmation state is completed, the variation display of the special symbol can be started when there is a start prize, and when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol, It is possible to perform a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

Further, when the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, the main control board 1310 confirms the setting for notifying the start of the setting confirmation state. The start command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. Further, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing tx, the main control board 1310 confirms the setting for notifying the end of the setting confirmation state. The end command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can be made to know whether to start the setting confirmation state and whether to end the setting confirmation state and shift to the normal state.

The members to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate include the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the various decorative boards of the game board 5. There are LEDs (board lamps), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but for these members, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a setting confirmation start command at the timing ts. Based on the reception, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status is executed. In this way, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the hall manager confirms the set value on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, at least the peripheral control is performed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. By executing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state of the member instructing the operation of the board 1510, it is notified to the outside that it is in the setting confirmation state, and it is grasped that it is in a state where it should be warned to prevent fraudulent acts. Can be made to. Regarding the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, not all of the plurality of LEDs but specific LEDs execute the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and the other LEDs are Normal operation (normal light emission) may be performed. Further, when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state described later is continued or when the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification described later is executed, the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 is also executed. ), The specific LED may perform the operation, and the other LEDs may perform the normal operation (normal light emission).

Specifically, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the effect display device 1600 executes, for example, "setting confirmation" on the screen as a display for setting confirmation different from the normal display. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 has a light emission state for setting confirmation different from the normal light emission, for example, a single color and strong. It is designed to light up with brightness. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 has a light emission state for setting confirmation different from the normal light emission, for example, a single color and strong. It is designed to light up with brightness. However, the light emitting state for checking the setting may be a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and the LED may be in a state where all or a part of the LED is turned off, and the door may be turned off. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are monochromatic and light with strong brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are lit. By turning off the LED, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 becomes conspicuous, and it is understood that the LED (frame lamp) is in a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emission. Can be made to. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the speaker outputs, for example, a notification sound "setting is being confirmed" as a notification sound for setting confirmation different from the normal display.

Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting confirmation end command, and the peripheral control board 1510 operates the member corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Is finished and the normal operation is executed. Here, in the normal operation, when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the peripheral control board 1510 waits for the variation display of the special symbol to start (for example, in the customer waiting state). When the member instructing the operation is operated and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 changes based on the reception of the variation pattern command by the peripheral control board 1510. The operation corresponding to (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) is executed. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variation display of the decorative symbol, and mounts the effect display on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (frame lamp) and the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. In this way, the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the staging display executed by the staging display device 1600.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the movable body mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is in the stopped state. Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the initial operation of the movable body based on the reception of the setting confirmation end command. Here, in the initial operation of the movable body, it is confirmed whether or not the movable body operates normally between the initial position and the appearance position, and accurate alignment is executed so that the movable body waits at the initial position. It is designed to do. Then, after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the normal operation of the movable body is executed. For example, it is possible to operate the movable body during the demonstration in which the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, or during the execution of the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol. However, if an error occurs in the initial operation of the movable body and the movable body cannot operate normally, the movable body operates even if it is time to operate the movable body after the initial operation of the movable body. It is designed not to be done. Further, during the initial operation of the movable body, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbol after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, but the variable display of the started special symbol is being displayed. Even if it is the timing when the movable body should operate as the variable effect to be executed, the initial operation of the movable body is prioritized and the movable body does not operate as the variable effect.

By the way, the main control board 1310 makes it possible to output information about the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (when confirmed), when winning a prize at various starting ports, when a big hit, when the time is shortened, when the prize ball is paid out, when magnetic or vibration is detected, etc., the external terminal board 558 The corresponding terminal is used among the multiple terminals provided in the above to output a signal to the external device (hall computer) so that the external device (hall computer) can grasp various information. .. In this example, the magnet is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1. It has a configuration to detect vibration by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the magnetism, but when magnetism or vibration is detected, a security signal is output using a predetermined terminal of the external terminal plate 558. ing. As a result, the external device (hall computer) can also grasp whether or not magnetism or vibration is detected and monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the security signal is continuously output for the output from the external terminal board 558, and the output enable state A is set so that the other outputs cannot be output. In this way, in the setting confirmation state, the same security signal as the security signal output when magnetism or vibration is detected is output. However, when magnetism or vibration is detected, a short-time security signal is output, whereas in the setting confirmation state, the security signal is output for a long time until the setting confirmation state ends. As a result, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp whether magnetism or vibration is detected or whether it is in the setting confirmation state, and if it is in the setting confirmation state, fraudulent activity is prevented. It is possible to grasp that it is a period to be wary. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, signals other than the security signal (for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (when confirmed), when winning a prize at various starting ports, when a big hit, when the time is shortened, when the prize ball is paid out) Although the output is disabled, no problem occurs because the game cannot be started during the period.

Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The output enable state B is set. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, the security signal output in the setting confirmation state is continuously output. As a result, even if the setting confirmation state is completed in a short time, the security signal is output for a predetermined period after that, so that it is possible to surely grasp that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and the setting is performed by regular work. It is possible to confirm whether or not a confirmation state has occurred. When magnetism or vibration is detected in the output enable state B, the security signal being output is not interrupted, and the security signal based on the detection of magnetism or vibration is output at the end timing or for a predetermined period. The output of the security signal is terminated at the timing when the output of the security signal inside is terminated or at the longer timing. In addition, since it is a period during which the game can be started after the setting confirmation state is completed, a prize is awarded to various starting ports when a signal other than the security signal (for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (when confirmed)). It enables the output of time, big hit, time saving state, and signal when paying out the prize ball).

Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state C which enables all the outputs after the output of the security signal is completed for a predetermined period. That is, in the output enable state C, when magnetism or a signal is detected, a security signal is output, and a signal other than the security signal (for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (when confirmed), when a prize is won to various starting ports). , Signals at the time of big hit, time saving state, and payout of prize balls) can also be output.

(Control A when a transmission cutoff status occurs during the setting confirmation status)
FIG. 272 shows an abnormal situation (a situation in which fraud may have occurred) in which the connection of the command line (wiring used for connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510) is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the winning of various starting ports is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state is completed. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the command line is after the setting confirmation state is completed. Is reconnected, and after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the case where the detection unit B detects a prize in various starting ports without detecting an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is described. .. In such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned unauthorized board to the main control board 1310 is performed.

As described above in detail, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at the timing ts, the setting state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx, the setting confirmation state is terminated and the normal state is entered. In this example, during the setting confirmation state of timings ts to tx, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at the time of timing t1, and the timing is changed. After the setting confirmation state is completed at tx, the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, and the transmission cutoff status is resolved. That is, at the time of the timing ts when the setting confirmation state is started, the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is connected, but at the time of the timing tx when the setting confirmation state is ended, the command line is connected. There is a transmission cutoff situation in which the connection is cut off.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be started. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, even if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the time of the timing tx, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game). ) Is the period during which it is possible to start.

Further, when the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, the main control board 1310 confirms the setting for notifying the start of the setting confirmation state. The start command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. Then, for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, at the time of the timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state based on the reception of the setting confirmation start command. It has become. However, after that, even if the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the timing tx. If so, the main control board 1310 cannot output the setting confirmation end command for notifying the end of the setting confirmation state to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 cannot output the setting confirmation state. It is not possible to know whether to exit and move to the normal state. Therefore, if the transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing tx, the timing ts ~ The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed by tx is continued. As described above, when the transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing tx, at least the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 operates corresponding to the setting confirmation status even after the setting confirmation status is completed. By continuing, it is possible to understand that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity such as the command line connection being cut off. In addition, even if the command line is accidentally pulled out while the hall administrator is checking the set value in the regular setting check work, at least the peripheral control board 1510 will be used after the setting check state is completed. By continuing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state by the member instructing the operation, it is possible to notice such a mistake in the regular setting confirmation work.

Specifically, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the timing tx when the setting confirmation state ends, the peripheral control board 1510 may receive the setting confirmation end command. Even after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the effect display device 1600 continues the display for setting confirmation. Further, even after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue to emit light for setting confirmation. Similarly, even after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to emit light for setting confirmation. Further, even after the setting confirmation state ends at the timing tx, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation.

Then, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line is cut off at the time of the timing t1, and after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the time point of the timing t2. When the command line is reconnected, the transmission cutoff status is resolved, and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive the command output from the main control board 1310. Conventionally, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting confirmation end command at the timing when this transmission cutoff status is resolved, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state for the member instructed to operate. However, in this example, even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is executed at the timings ts to t2. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status that has been set is continued. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, at least the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, so that the command line can be changed. It is possible to leave a trace that the connection is cut off, and it is possible to know that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. That is, even if the command line is quickly inserted and removed from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned unauthorized board to the main control board 1310, there remains a trace that the command line connection is cut off, so that the illegal act Can exert deterrence against.

Specifically, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, the effect display device 1600 continues the display for setting confirmation after the setting confirmation state ends at the timing tx. However, even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the display for setting confirmation is continued. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue the light emitting state for the setting confirmation, but are transmitted at the timing t2. Even after the cutoff status is resolved, the light emission state for setting confirmation continues. Similarly, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to emit light for the setting confirmation, but at the timing t2. Even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the light emission state for setting confirmation continues. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation, but even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the notification for setting confirmation is continued. Sound output is continuing.

In the above, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status executed at the timings ts to t2 is continued for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. However, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, an operation related to the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation-related notification) may be executed. For example, the main control board 1310 monitors whether or not the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is normally connected, and when the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the command line A command to inform that an abnormality has occurred is output to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the time of timing t2, the effect display device 1600 shifts from the display for setting confirmation to the display for setting confirmation related notification. Then, you may execute the display of "There is a possibility that an error has occurred in the command line while checking the settings" on the screen.

Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at the timing t2, at the time of the timing t3, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various starting ports is the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When input to, the main control board 1310 receives a command line for a variation start command for informing the start of variation display of a special symbol and a variation pattern command for instructing a variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern). It is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 in use. At this time, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but at the time of the timing t3, the operation is continued. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state except for a part of the member instructing the operation, and the normal operation is completed. I am trying to execute the operation. Here, when winning a prize to various starting ports is detected by the ball entry sensor (detection unit B), the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the operation of the member. Except for a part of them, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to execute an operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) as a normal operation based on receiving the variation pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 includes an effect including variation display of the decorative pattern, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 for displaying (for example, reach effect), the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. Is performed, and the sound is output from the speaker in conjunction with the staging display executed by the staging display device 1600.

Specifically, among the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3, the effect display device 1600 and the game board 5 Regarding the LEDs (board lamps) and speakers mounted on the various decorative boards, the operations corresponding to the setting confirmation state have been completed and the normal operations have been performed, whereas the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 have been used. Regarding the mounted LED (frame lamp), the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings ts to t3 is continued without executing the normal operation. As described above, even if the winning of various starting ports is detected at the time of timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at the time of timing t2, at least the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. For a part of, by continuing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to leave a trace that the command line connection is cut off, and it is in a state to be wary of fraudulent acts. Can be grasped. That is, even if a prize is intentionally given to the starting port after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, a trace of the command line connection being cut off remains, so that it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts.

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are used. Regarding the mounted LED (frame lamp), the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, but it is not limited to the LED (frame lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the peripheral control board. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be continued for one or more members among the members instructed by the operation of 1510. Further, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3, all the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. , The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be terminated and the normal operation may be executed. Then, when the winning of various starting ports is detected after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 operates a part or all of the members instructing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. However, in this example, as will be described later, when the peripheral control board 1510 detects winning a prize in various starting ports before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 is used. For the member to be instructed to operate, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state has not been completed. As a result, it is confirmed whether or not the transmission cutoff status is resolved by intentionally winning prizes at various starting ports while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. can do.

Further, even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is satisfied. The operation corresponding to is never terminated. On the other hand, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. Regarding the LED (frame lamp), the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, but when a specific operation unit is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall manager operates the specific operation unit. In addition, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be terminated and the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players cannot erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, and only the hall administrator can erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, so that fraudulent acts are being performed. The hall manager can surely confirm whether or not there is a command.

Further, the command line for transmitting a command signal from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310 with a connector and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 with a connector. On the back surface side of the above, a protective member for protecting the command line is provided so as to make it difficult for such a command line to be detached from the connector portion. Further, the protective member is configured to have transparency so that it can be confirmed from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the command line is normally connected to the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. Therefore, the hall manager can easily determine whether or not the command line connection is cut off.

Further, during the transmission cutoff status of timings tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2), the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various starting ports is mainly used. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol, but cannot output the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, with respect to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the normal operation is not executed without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In this way, even if the winning of various starting ports is detected before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, at least the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation are in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, the trace that the command line connection is cut off cannot be erased, and it is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. In other words, even if the start port is awarded a prize during the transmission cutoff status after the setting confirmation state is completed, there remains a trace that the command line connection is cut off, so it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities. can.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the movable body mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is in the stopped state, but at the time of the timing tx, the connection of the command line is cut off. When a situation has occurred, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the setting confirmation end command, and maintains the stopped state without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Further, when the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, the transmission cutoff status is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive the command output from the main control board 1310. The stopped state is maintained without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Then, at the time of timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation of the movable body is executed. As described above, at the timings ts to t3, at least the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but does not execute the initial operation of the movable body during such a period. As a result, it is difficult to misunderstand that the variable effect is being executed, and it is possible to clearly understand that the state should be watched for fraudulent acts.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the security signal is continuously output for the output from the external terminal board 558, and the output enable state A is set so that the other outputs cannot be output. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The output enable state B is set. Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state C which enables all the outputs after the output of the security signal is completed for a predetermined period. However, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, but at the time of the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output. When a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, it may be possible to extend the period for which the security signal is output. As a result, on the external device (hole computer) side, it is possible to grasp the possibility that a transmission cutoff situation has occurred depending on whether or not the period during which the security signal is output is extended. The above is the case where the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is normally connected, and a person who tries to illegally generate the setting confirmation state is such a case. By disconnecting the wiring, it is conceivable that the external device (hall computer) cannot receive the security signal, and the hall administrator cannot grasp the occurrence of the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when trying to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff status) or if it is reconnected, a special operation is performed to "set". It is possible to prevent "fraud that abuses the confirmation status".

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, a member that executes and continues an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress. Makes it impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity even if the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated, and the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated for the member performing the normal operation. This makes it possible to adjust the volume and amount of light. Specifically, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light is disabled, but at the time of the timing tx, the transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off has occurred. After that, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 not only continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but also maintains the state in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted. Further, when the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, the transmission cutoff status is resolved, but the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Not only does it maintain a state in which the volume and amount of light cannot be adjusted. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 is removed except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3. The member instructed to operate has finished the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and is performing the normal operation. For such a member, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. On the other hand, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 not only continue the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but also maintain the state in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted. (Although the volume and light amount are adjusted by accepting the operations of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, they are not reflected in the running volume and light amount).

(Control B when a transmission cutoff status occurs during the setting confirmation status)
FIG. 273 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends in the situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a chart. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the command line is after the setting confirmation state is completed. Will be described when the detection unit A detects an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration before the detection unit B detects a prize in various start ports after the connection is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved. ing. In such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned unauthorized board to the main control board 1310 is performed. Then, in this example, even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues to operate corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is continued. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts attempting to deceive such behavior (operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state) may be performed by intentionally generating the above, and the method for preventing such fraud is described below. ..

In this example, the command between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 at the time of timing t1 during the setting confirmation state of timing ts to tx and the setting confirmation state of timing ts to tx. After a transmission cutoff status occurs in which the line connection is cut off and the setting confirmation state ends at timing tx, the command line is reconnected at timing t2, and the transmission cutoff status is resolved. Even after the setting confirmation state is completed at tx or the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the setting confirmation state executed at timings ts to tx is performed for the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate. Since it is the same as FIG. 272 in that the operation corresponding to the above is continued, description of these points will be omitted.

First, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, at the time of timing t3, the signals of the magnetic sensor (detection unit A) for detecting magnetism and the vibration sensor (detection unit A) for detecting vibration are transmitted. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and an abnormality notification command for notifying the execution of abnormality notification based on the occurrence of the abnormality is issued. , Is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but at the time of the timing t3, the operation is continued. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the abnormality notification command, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is terminated except for a part of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is performed. I'm trying to do it. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 except for the effect display device 1600 have a single color as light emission for abnormality. The LED is turned on and blinks with a strong brightness, and the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 is a single color and blinks with a strong brightness as an abnormal light emission. As an abnormal sound, the speaker outputs a notification sound such as "a magnetic error has occurred" or "a vibration error has occurred". Further, in this example, magnetism and vibration are generated by different operations corresponding to abnormal notification, such as different emission colors and notification sounds of LEDs, depending on whether magnetism is detected and vibration is detected. It is possible to grasp which of the two is detected.

Specifically, among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command at the timing t3, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 Regarding the (frame lamp), the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is completed, and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed. In this way, except for a part of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of an abnormality is generated by executing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification in preference to the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Never miss it. On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings ts to t3 is continued without executing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. In this way, even if an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected at the time of timing t3 after the transmission cutoff condition is resolved at the time of timing t2, at least the peripheral control board 1510 is a member that gives an operation instruction. For some, by continuing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to leave a trace that the command line connection is cut off, and it is in a state to be wary of any fraudulent activity. It can be grasped. That is, even if an abnormality is intentionally generated after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, a trace of the command line connection being cut off remains, so that a deterrent against fraudulent activity can be exerted.

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the setting confirmation state. However, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be continued for one or more members among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, not limited to the effect display device 1600. .. Further, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at the timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the setting confirmation state for all the members instructed to operate. The operation corresponding to the abnormality may be terminated and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification may be executed. Then, when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, a part or all of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, in this example, as will be described later, when the detection unit A detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board is finished. Regarding the member to which the operation is instructed by 1510, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state has not been completed. As a result, it is confirmed whether or not the transmission cutoff status is resolved by intentionally causing an abnormality while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

Further, even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is satisfied. The operation corresponding to is never terminated. On the other hand, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the effect display device 1600 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. However, a specific operation unit is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates the specific operation unit, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is terminated and the normal operation is performed. May be executed. As a result, some players cannot erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, and only the hall administrator can erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, so that fraudulent acts are being performed. The hall manager can surely confirm whether or not there is a command.

Further, during the transmission cutoff status of timings tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2), a magnetic sensor (detection unit A) for detecting magnetism and a vibration sensor (detection unit A) for detecting vibration (vibration). When the signal of the detection unit B) is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and outputs an abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510. Can not do it. At this time, with respect to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is not executed without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In this way, even if an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, at least the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 corresponds to the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the operation to be performed, the trace that the command line connection is cut off cannot be erased, and it is possible to grasp that the state should be watched for any fraudulent activity. In other words, even if an error is intentionally generated during the transmission cutoff status after the setting confirmation state is completed, there will be a trace that the command line connection has been cut off, so it will be effective against fraudulent activities. Can be done.

Then, at the time of timing t3, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed except for a part of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, but the operation corresponding to such abnormality notification is performed. It ends at the timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t3. Further, at the time of timing t4, after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, among the members excluding a part of the members (effect display device 1600) instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, various types of the door frame 3 are used. The LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the decorative board have resumed operations corresponding to the confirmation display state, while the LEDs (board lamps) and speakers mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 have been restarted. As for, the normal operation is executed. Here, when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the peripheral control board 1510 waits for the variable display of the special symbol to start (for example, waiting for a customer) as a normal operation. The member instructing the operation is operated. In this way, even if the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4, at least a part of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 resumes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to leave a trace that the connection of the command line is cut off, and it is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. That is, even if an abnormality is intentionally generated after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, a trace of the command line connection being cut off remains, so that it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts.

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the setting confirmation state. However, at the time of timing t4, even after the other members finish the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, the effect display device 1600 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. There is.

Then, at the time of timing t4, after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, at the time of timing t5, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various starting ports is the main control board. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310, the main control board 1310 has a fluctuation start command for notifying the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and a fluctuation pattern command for instructing the fluctuation effect (effect based on the variation pattern). Is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the staging display device 1600 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but the peripheral control board 1510 starts to fluctuate at the timing t5. Based on receiving the command or the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and executes the normal operation. Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t5, the LEDs (board lamps) and speakers mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are already in the normal state. The operation is running. Here, when winning a prize to various starting ports is detected by the ball entry sensor (detection unit B), the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the operation of the member. Except for a part of them, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to execute an operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) as a normal operation based on receiving the variation pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 includes an effect including variation display of the decorative pattern, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 for displaying (for example, reach effect), the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. Is performed, and the sound is output from the speaker in conjunction with the staging display executed by the staging display device 1600.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t5 after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4, the peripheral control board 1510 Among the members instructed to operate, the LED (board lamp) and the speaker mounted on the effect display device 1600, the various decorative boards of the game board 5, are performing normal operations, whereas the door frame Regarding the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of No. 3, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings t4 to t5 is continued without executing the normal operation. As described above, at least a part of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 even when the winning of various start ports is detected after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4. By continuing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to leave a trace that the command line connection is cut off, and make it aware that it is a state to be wary of fraudulent acts. Can be done. In other words, even if the start port is intentionally awarded a prize after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, the trace that the command line connection is cut off remains, so that the deterrence against fraudulent activity can be exerted. ..

In this example, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t5 after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4, the door frame 3 Regarding the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the above, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, but it is limited to the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3. Instead, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be continued for one or more members among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t5 after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. It is also possible to end the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and execute the normal operation with all the members to be performed. Then, at the timing t4 when the transmission cutoff status has already been resolved, if the peripheral control board 1510 detects the winning of various start ports after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction member. In this example, as will be described later, before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is completed in a part or all of the above. When the winning prize is detected, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state of the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate has not been completed. As a result, it is confirmed whether or not the transmission cutoff status is resolved by intentionally winning prizes at various starting ports while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. can do.

Further, even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is satisfied. The operation corresponding to is never terminated. On the other hand, even if the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t5 after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4, various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are received. Regarding the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the pachinko machine, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, but a specific operation unit is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the hall manager performs a specific operation. When the unit is operated, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state may be terminated and the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players cannot erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, and only the hall administrator can erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, so that fraudulent acts are being performed. The hall manager can surely confirm whether or not there is a command.

Further, during the transmission cutoff status of timings tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2), the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various starting ports is mainly used. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol, but cannot output the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, with respect to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the normal operation is not executed without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In this way, even if the winning of various start ports is detected before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, at least the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction are in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, the trace that the command line connection is cut off cannot be erased, and it is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. In other words, even if the start port is awarded a prize during the transmission cutoff status after the setting confirmation state is completed, there remains a trace that the command line connection is cut off, so it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities. can.

Further, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification at the timings t3 to t4 (before the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4), the ball entry sensor for detecting the winning of various starting ports ( When the signal of the detection unit B) is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol, but the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Cannot be output toward. At this time, with respect to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the normal operation is not executed without ending the operation corresponding to the abnormal notification being executed. That is, with respect to the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, the operation corresponding to the abnormal notification during execution is continued with priority over the normal operation. In this way, even when winning a prize in various start ports is detected before the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed at the timing t4, at least the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. By not ending the operation corresponding to the notification, it is not possible to erase the traces of magnetic and vibration abnormalities, and it is possible to make sure that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of fraudulent acts. can. That is, even when the starting port is awarded a prize during the execution of the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, the trace of the occurrence of the abnormality of magnetism or vibration remains, so that the deterrence against fraudulent activity can be exerted.

Further, in this example, at the time of timing t3, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed except for a part of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the operation corresponding to such abnormality notification is performed. Is set to end at the timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t3, but the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is not terminated within the predetermined period and is continued indefinitely. May be good. In such a case, in this example, even if the winning of various starting ports is detected before the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, at least the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the operation of the member. , It is necessary to turn on the power again because the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is not completed.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the movable body mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is in the stopped state, but at the time of the timing tx, the connection of the command line is cut off. When a situation has occurred, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the setting confirmation end command, and maintains the stopped state without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Further, when the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, the transmission cutoff status is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive the command output from the main control board 1310. The stopped state is maintained without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at the timing t3, the initial operation of the movable body is not started and the stopped state is maintained. Then, at the time of timing t5, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation of the movable body is executed. As described above, at the timings ts to t5, at least a part of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but the initial operation of the movable body during such a period. By not executing, it is difficult to misunderstand that the variable staging is being executed, and it is possible to clearly understand that it is in a state where it is necessary to be cautious about whether or not cheating is being performed.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the security signal is continuously output for the output from the external terminal board 558, and the output enable state A is set so that the other outputs cannot be output. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The output enable state B is set. Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state C which enables all the outputs after the output of the security signal is completed for a predetermined period. However, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, but at the time of the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output. When a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, it may be possible to extend the period for which the security signal is output. As a result, on the external device (hole computer) side, it is possible to grasp the possibility that a transmission cutoff situation has occurred depending on whether or not the period during which the security signal is output is extended. The above is the case where the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is normally connected, and a person who tries to illegally generate the setting confirmation state is such a case. By disconnecting the wiring, it is conceivable that the external device (hall computer) cannot receive the security signal, and the hall administrator cannot grasp the occurrence of the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when trying to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff status) or if it is reconnected, a special operation is performed to "set". It is possible to prevent "fraud that abuses the confirmation status".

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, a member that executes and continues an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress. Makes it impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity even if the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated, and the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated for the member performing the normal operation. This makes it possible to adjust the volume and amount of light. Further, for the member performing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, the volume and the light amount cannot be adjusted even if the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are operated. Specifically, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light is disabled, but at the time of the timing tx, the transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off has occurred. After that, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 not only continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but also maintains the state in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted. Further, when the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, the transmission cutoff status is resolved, but the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Not only does it maintain a state in which the volume and amount of light cannot be adjusted. Then, when the abnormality notification command is received at the timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification except for a part of the member instructing the operation. However, such an abnormality is executed. It is also impossible to adjust the volume and amount of light for the member that is performing the operation corresponding to the notification. In this example, the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are not accepted for the member performing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, but the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated. Although the volume and the amount of light are adjusted in response to the reception, the volume and the amount of light may not be reflected in the running volume and the amount of light. Then, after the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is completed, the member performing the normal operation can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and the member performing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Maintains a state in which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted (although the volume and light intensity are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, they are reflected in the running volume and light intensity. Never).

[Second embodiment regarding transmission cutoff status]
(Control when the transmission cutoff status does not occur during the setting change status or setting confirmation status)
FIG. 274 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line connection is maintained during the setting confirmation state. Here, in a normal situation where the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is maintained, the setting confirmation executed during the setting confirmation state is executed when the setting confirmation state is terminated. The case where the notification is terminated and the setting confirmation completion notification is executed for a predetermined period is described. It differs from FIG. 271 in that the setting confirmation end notification is executed for a predetermined period after the end of the setting confirmation state.

In this example, the case where the setting confirmation state is set at the timings ts to tx is described, but the same applies to the case where the setting value can be changed. The setting confirmation state shifts to the case where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the power of the timing ts is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, regarding the setting change state, when the power was turned on at the timing ts, the setting key switch 1311a was turned on and the pachinko machine 1 was turned on while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is designed to move to the case. Specifically, when the RAM clear signal and the setting key ON signal are input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, the main control MPU 1310a is incorporated therein. The current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6) stored in the specific area of the RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Further, in the setting change state, each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the value increases by 1 from the current setting value, and when the maximum value setting value 6 is reached, the initial value setting value is reached. It can be changed to return to 1. Then, after changing the set value, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx, the set value is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the setting change state is terminated and the normal operation is performed. It is transitioning to the state. Specifically, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing tx, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value for the setting display 1310g. It is designed to switch from the state of displaying to the state of hiding.

Although the details have been described above, in this example, a configuration that detects magnetism by a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 and shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 are performed. A configuration that detects vibration by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1, a configuration that detects the opening and closing of the door frame 3, a configuration that detects the connection status of various wiring, and an external terminal board 558. It has a configuration that outputs information about the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (hall computer) via these configurations, and by these configurations, it is possible to detect and notify whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. And monitors for fraudulent activity. However, in the setting change state and setting confirmation state, in consideration of convenience in regular work, many of the above-mentioned functions related to monitoring are not enabled (disabled), and in such a configuration, , "Illegal by misusing the setting change state or setting confirmation state" may be performed. This point will be described below.

First, as one method of conventional fraud, for example, a fraudulent board (so-called hanging board) is connected to the main control board 1310, and contrary to the original game, a ball is input to the main control board 1310 when a start prize is won. Examples include illegally inputting signals, illegally stopping the variable display of special symbols at the jackpot symbol, and illegally generating jackpot games. If the discovery of such an illegal board is delayed, the game hall will be large. Will be damaged. In order to perform such fraud (attachment of a fraudulent board), it is necessary to avoid opening and closing the door frame 3, inserting and removing various wirings, and monitoring various vibrations caused by fraudulent acts and magnetism generated from fraudulent appliances. In the past, many fraudulent activities were carried out outside the business hours of the game hall because of the need to do so. However, in recent years, it has a setting change state and a setting confirmation state as described above (a state in which the above-mentioned various monitoring functions are not enabled (disabled) in consideration of convenience in regular work). The number of gaming machines (pachinko machines) is increasing, and there is a concern that the above fraud (installation of fraudulent boards) will be carried out even during the business hours of the gaming hall by abusing this setting change state and setting confirmation state. .. For example, the setting change state or setting confirmation state is illegally generated by some method, the illegal board is attached using the period of the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and the setting change state or setting confirmation state is terminated in a short period of time. Etc. are conceivable. A plurality of wirings are connected to the main control board 1310 by connectors, but such an unauthorized board may be connected by using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by the connector. For example, the wiring used for connection with the peripheral control board 1510 is detached from the main control board 1310, and the unauthorized board is relayed to the wiring, or the unauthorized board is connected to an empty connector by disconnection to the main control board. It is conceivable to connect to the 1310 and illegally access the main control board 1310 side.

The wiring used for connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is a command line for transmitting a command signal from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side. This command line is connected to the main control board 1310 with a connector and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 with a connector. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operations of various members connected to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 using the command line. The members to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate include the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the various decorative boards of the game board 5. There are LEDs (board lamps), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. In this example, when such a command line is cut off (transmission cutoff status) or reconnected, a special operation is performed to prevent "illegal abuse of the setting change state or setting confirmation state". The method for this will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 274, first, when the power of the timing ts is turned on, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state, the setting transition state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Specifically, at the time of timing ts, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Further, in the setting confirmation state, even if the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the set value is not changed in response to this pressing operation. Then, after confirming the current set value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing tx to end the setting confirmation state and shift to the normal state.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be started. That is, in the setting confirmation state, even if there is a start prize, the variable display of the special symbol is not started, and the start prize is not suspended. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. That is, in the normal state after the setting confirmation state is completed, the variation display of the special symbol can be started when there is a start prize, and when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol, It is possible to perform a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

Further, when the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, the main control board 1310 confirms the setting for notifying the start of the setting confirmation state. The start command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. Further, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing tx, the main control board 1310 confirms the setting for notifying the end of the setting confirmation state. The end command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can be made to know whether to start the setting confirmation state and whether to end the setting confirmation state and shift to the normal state. Similarly, at the time of timing ts, when the RAM clear signal and the setting key ON signal are input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts the setting change state. The setting change start command for communication is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. Further, when the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing tx, the main control board 1310 changes the setting to notify the end of the setting change state. The end command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can be made to know whether to start the setting change state and whether to end the setting change state and shift to the normal state.

The members to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate include the effect display device 1600, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the various decorative boards of the game board 5. There are LEDs (board lamps), speakers, movable bodies mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but for these members, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a setting confirmation start command at the timing ts. Based on the reception, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status is executed. In this way, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the hall manager confirms the set value on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, at least the peripheral control is performed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. By executing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state of the member instructing the operation of the board 1510, it is notified to the outside that it is in the setting confirmation state, and it is grasped that it is in a state where it should be warned to prevent fraudulent acts. Can be made to. Regarding the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, not all of the plurality of LEDs but specific LEDs execute the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and the other LEDs are Normal operation (normal light emission) may be performed. Further, when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state described later is continued or when the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation end described later is executed, the LED (board) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 is also executed. Of the lamps), a specific LED may be made to perform its operation, and the other LEDs may be made to perform normal operation (normal emission).

Specifically, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the effect display device 1600 executes, for example, "setting confirmation is being confirmed" on the screen as a display for setting confirmation different from the normal display. .. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 has a light emission state for setting confirmation different from the normal light emission, for example, a single color and strong. It is designed to light up with brightness. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 has a light emission state for setting confirmation different from the normal light emission, for example, a single color and strong. It is designed to light up with brightness. However, the light emitting state for checking the setting may be a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and the LED may be in a state where all or a part of the LED is turned off, and the door may be turned off. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are monochromatic and light with strong brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are lit. By turning off the LED, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 becomes conspicuous, and it is understood that the LED (frame lamp) is in a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emission. Can be made to. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the speaker outputs, for example, a notification sound "setting is being confirmed" as a notification sound for setting confirmation different from the normal sound.

Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting confirmation end command, and the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, except for a part of the members. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation completion is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). As a result, even if the setting confirmation state ends in a short time, it is possible to surely grasp that the setting confirmation state has occurred by executing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation end for a predetermined period after that, and it is normal. It is possible to confirm whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred by the work of.

Specifically, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation of the timings tx to ty, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are set to the light emitting state for the end of the setting confirmation. For example, it is a single color and blinks with strong brightness. Further, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation of the timings tx to ty, the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 is set as a light emitting state for the end of the setting confirmation, for example. It is a single color and blinks with strong brightness. However, the light emitting state for completing the setting confirmation may be a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and may be a state in which all or a part of the LED is turned off, and also. The light emitting states of the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are monochromatic and blink with strong brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are used. By turning off the LED, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 becomes conspicuous, and it is understood that the LED (frame lamp) is in a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emission. Can be made to. Further, the light emitting state for completing the setting confirmation is different from the light emitting state for setting confirmation, such as lighting / blinking of the LED and different emission colors, but the same light emitting state may be used. Further, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation of the timings tx to ty, the speaker gives a notification sound for the end of the setting confirmation different from the normal sound, for example, a notification sound "setting confirmed" ( When the setting change state is terminated, a notification sound (a notification sound saying "RAM has been cleared due to the setting change") is output.

After the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the staging display device 1600 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state as a part of the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510, and corresponds to the end of the setting confirmation. The normal operation is executed without executing the operation to be performed.

Then, at the time of the timing tx, the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation is executed except for a part of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Is set to end at the timing ty when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tx. Further, at the time of the timing ty, after the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation is completed, the normal operation is executed for the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the staging display device 1600 continues to execute the normal operation after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx. Here, in the normal operation, when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the peripheral control board 1510 waits for the variation display of the special symbol to start (for example, in the customer waiting state). When the member instructing the operation is operated and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 changes based on the reception of the variation pattern command by the peripheral control board 1510. The operation corresponding to (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) is executed. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variation display of the decorative symbol, and mounts the effect display on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (frame lamp) and the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. In this way, the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the staging display executed by the staging display device 1600.

At the time of timing tx, the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation is executed except for a part of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, but the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation is performed. During execution, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbol when the start prize is won because it is after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx and it is already possible to start the game. It has become. However, during the execution of the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation, it is assumed that the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 should operate as the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol due to the start prize. However, priority is given to the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation during execution, and the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate as a variation effect. As a result, even if a prize is intentionally given to the starting port after the setting confirmation state is completed, a trace of the setting confirmation state remains, so that a deterrent against fraudulent activity can be exerted. However, during such a period, since the effect display device 1600 does not execute the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation, the effect display including the variation display of the decorative pattern (for example, reach effect) is displayed as the variation effect. Can be executed.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the movable body mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is in the stopped state. Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the initial operation of the movable body based on the reception of the setting confirmation end command. Here, in the initial operation of the movable body, it is confirmed whether or not the movable body operates normally between the initial position and the appearance position, and accurate alignment is executed so that the movable body waits at the initial position. It is designed to do. Then, after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the normal operation of the movable body is executed. For example, it is possible to operate the movable body during the demonstration in which the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, or during the execution of the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol. However, if an error occurs in the initial operation of the movable body and the movable body cannot operate normally, the movable body operates even if it is time to operate the movable body after the initial operation of the movable body. It is designed not to be done. Further, during the initial operation of the movable body, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbol after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, but the variable display of the started special symbol is being displayed. Even if it is the timing when the movable body should operate as the variable effect to be executed, the initial operation of the movable body is prioritized and the movable body does not operate as the variable effect.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the security signal is continuously output for the output from the external terminal board 558, and the output enable state A is set so that the other outputs cannot be output. In this way, in the setting confirmation state, the same security signal as the security signal output when magnetism or vibration is detected is output. However, when magnetism or vibration is detected, a short-time security signal is output, whereas in the setting confirmation state, the security signal is output for a long time until the setting confirmation state ends. As a result, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp whether magnetism or vibration is detected or whether it is in the setting confirmation state, and if it is in the setting confirmation state, fraudulent activity is prevented. It is possible to grasp that it is a period to be wary. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, signals other than the security signal (for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (when confirmed), when winning a prize at various starting ports, when a big hit, when the time is shortened, when the prize ball is paid out) Although the output is disabled, no problem occurs because the game cannot be started during the period.

Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The output enable state B is set. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, the security signal output in the setting confirmation state is continuously output. As a result, even if the setting confirmation state is completed in a short time, the security signal is output for a predetermined period after that, so that it is possible to surely grasp that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and the setting is performed by regular work. It is possible to confirm whether or not a confirmation state has occurred. When magnetism or vibration is detected in the output enable state B, the security signal being output is not interrupted, and the security signal based on the detection of magnetism or vibration is output at the end timing or for a predetermined period. The output of the security signal is terminated at the timing when the output of the security signal inside is terminated or at the longer timing. In addition, since it is a period during which the game can be started after the setting confirmation state is completed, a prize is awarded to various starting ports when a signal other than the security signal (for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (when confirmed)). It enables the output of time, big hit, time saving state, and signal when paying out the prize ball).

(Control when a transmission cutoff status occurs at the end of the setting change status or setting confirmation status)
FIG. 275 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state and the winning of various starting ports is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends. It is a time chart showing. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the command line is after the setting confirmation state is completed. Is reconnected, and after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the case where the detection unit B detects a prize in various starting ports without detecting an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is described. .. In such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned unauthorized board to the main control board 1310 is performed. Further, in this example, the case where the setting confirmation state is set at the timing ts to tx is described, but the same applies to the case where the setting change state is set at the timing ts to tx.

As described above in detail, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at the timing ts, the setting state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx, the setting confirmation state is terminated and the normal state is entered. In this example, during the setting confirmation state of timings ts to tx, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at the time of timing t1, and the timing is changed. After the setting confirmation state is completed at tx, the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, and the transmission cutoff status is resolved. That is, at the time of the timing ts when the setting confirmation state is started, the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is connected, but at the time of the timing tx when the setting confirmation state is ended, the command line is connected. There is a transmission cutoff situation in which the connection is cut off.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be started. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, even if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the time of the timing tx, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game). ) Is the period during which it is possible to start.

Further, when the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, the main control board 1310 confirms the setting for notifying the start of the setting confirmation state. The start command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. Then, for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, at the time of the timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state based on the reception of the setting confirmation start command. It has become. However, after that, even if the setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the timing tx. If so, the main control board 1310 cannot output the setting confirmation end command for notifying the end of the setting confirmation state to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 cannot output the setting confirmation state. It is not possible to know whether to exit and move to the normal state. Therefore, if the transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing tx, the timing ts ~ The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed by tx is continued. As described above, when the transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing tx, at least the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 operates corresponding to the setting confirmation status even after the setting confirmation status is completed. By continuing, it is possible to understand that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity such as the command line connection being cut off. In addition, even if the command line is accidentally pulled out while the hall administrator is checking the set value in the regular setting check work, at least the peripheral control board 1510 will be used after the setting check state is completed. By continuing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state by the member instructing the operation, it is possible to notice such a mistake in the regular setting confirmation work.

Then, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line is cut off at the time of the timing t1, and after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the time point of the timing t2. When the command line is reconnected, the transmission cutoff status is resolved, and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive the command output from the main control board 1310. Conventionally, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting confirmation end command at the timing when this transmission cutoff status is resolved, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state for the member instructed to operate. However, in this example, even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is executed at the timings ts to t2. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status that has been set is continued. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, at least the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, so that the command line can be changed. It is possible to leave a trace that the connection is cut off, and it is possible to know that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. That is, even if the command line is quickly inserted and removed from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned unauthorized board to the main control board 1310, there remains a trace that the command line connection is cut off, so that the illegal act Can exert deterrence against.

Specifically, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, the effect display device 1600 continues the display for setting confirmation after the setting confirmation state ends at the timing tx. However, even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the display for setting confirmation is continued. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 continue the light emitting state for the setting confirmation, but are transmitted at the timing t2. Even after the cutoff status is resolved, the light emission state for setting confirmation continues. Similarly, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 continue to emit light for the setting confirmation, but at the timing t2. Even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the light emission state for setting confirmation continues. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the speaker continues to output the notification sound for setting confirmation, but even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the notification for setting confirmation is continued. Sound output is continuing.

In the above, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status executed at the timings ts to t2 is continued for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. However, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, an operation related to the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation-related notification) may be executed. For example, the main control board 1310 monitors whether or not the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is normally connected, and when the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the command line A command to inform that an abnormality has occurred is output to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the time of timing t2, the effect display device 1600 shifts from the display for setting confirmation to the display for setting confirmation related notification. Then, you may execute the display of "There is a possibility that an error has occurred in the command line while checking the settings" on the screen.

Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at the timing t2, at the time of the timing t3, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various starting ports is the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When input to, the main control board 1310 receives a command line for a variation start command for informing the start of variation display of a special symbol and a variation pattern command for instructing a variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern). It is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 in use. At this time, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but at the time of the timing t3, the operation is continued. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern command, the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and executes the normal operation for the member instructed to operate. I am doing it. Here, when winning a prize to various starting ports is detected by the ball entry sensor (detection unit B), the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the operation of the member. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) is executed as the normal operation. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 includes an effect including variation display of the decorative pattern, except for the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 for displaying (for example, reach effect), the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. Is performed, and the sound is output from the speaker in conjunction with the staging display executed by the staging display device 1600.

As described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. , The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status has been completed, and the normal operation is being executed. On the other hand, in this example, as will be described later, when the winning of various start ports is detected before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the member for which the operation is instructed. The operation corresponding to the confirmation status has not been completed. As a result, it is confirmed whether or not the transmission cutoff status is resolved by intentionally winning prizes at various starting ports while the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. can do.

Further, as described above in detail, if the command line connection is not cut off during the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction when the setting confirmation state is terminated at the timing tx. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings ts to tx is completed, but after the operation corresponding to such the setting confirmation state is completed, the setting confirmation is completed. I am trying to execute the operation. On the other hand, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the start port is started at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at the timing t2. Regarding the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 when the winning prize is detected, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings ts to t3 is completed, but such a setting confirmation state is completed. After the operation corresponding to is completed, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation end is restricted. In this example, there is a possibility that the start port is awarded a prize in order to confirm whether or not the transmission cutoff status has been resolved during the period in which the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status is continued, but the transmission cutoff status If the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation end is executed after the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is completed, the hall manager has completed the inspection of the pachinko machine 1. , There is a risk that the subsequent game cannot be started early. However, in this example, if the hall administrator wins a prize at the start port after the transmission cutoff status is cleared during the period in which the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state ends. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by restricting the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation from being executed after the operation is performed.

It should be noted that during the transmission cutoff status of timings tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2), the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various start ports is the main. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol, but cannot output the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, with respect to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the normal operation is not executed without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In this way, even if the winning of various start ports is detected before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, at least the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction are in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, the trace that the command line connection is cut off cannot be erased, and it is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. In other words, even if the start port is awarded a prize during the transmission cutoff status after the setting confirmation state is completed, there remains a trace that the command line connection is cut off, so it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities. can.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the movable body mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is in the stopped state, but at the time of the timing tx, the connection of the command line is cut off. When a situation has occurred, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the setting confirmation end command, and maintains the stopped state without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Further, when the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, the transmission cutoff status is resolved and the peripheral control board 1510 can receive the command output from the main control board 1310. The stopped state is maintained without starting the initial operation of the movable body. Then, at the time of timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation of the movable body is executed. As described above, at the timings ts to t3, at least the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but does not execute the initial operation of the movable body during such a period. As a result, it is difficult to misunderstand that the variable effect is being executed, and it is possible to clearly understand that the state should be watched for fraudulent acts.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the security signal is continuously output for the output from the external terminal board 558, and the output enable state A is set so that the other outputs cannot be output. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The output enable state B is set. Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state C which enables all the outputs after the output of the security signal is completed for a predetermined period. However, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, but at the time of the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output. When a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off, it may be possible to extend the period for which the security signal is output. As a result, on the external device (hole computer) side, it is possible to grasp the possibility that a transmission cutoff situation has occurred depending on whether or not the period during which the security signal is output is extended. .. Regarding the above, it is the case that the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is normally connected, and the person who tries to illegally generate the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is By disconnecting such wiring, it is conceivable that the external device (hall computer) cannot receive the security signal, and the hall administrator cannot grasp the occurrence of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when trying to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff status) or if it is reconnected, a special operation is performed to "set". It is possible to prevent "illegal abuse of the change status and setting confirmation status".

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, a member that executes and continues an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress. Makes it impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity even if the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated, and the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are operated for the member performing the normal operation. This makes it possible to adjust the volume and amount of light. Specifically, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light is disabled, but at the time of the timing tx, the transmission cutoff situation in which the command line connection is cut off has occurred. After that, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 not only continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but also maintains the state in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted. Further, when the command line is reconnected at the timing t2, the transmission cutoff status is resolved, but the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Not only does it maintain a state in which the volume and amount of light cannot be adjusted. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation start command or the fluctuation pattern command at the timing t3, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 ends the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, and is in the normal state. However, for such members, it is possible to adjust the volume and amount of light.

(Control when a transmission cutoff status occurs before the setting change status or setting confirmation status starts)
FIG. 276 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line connection is cut off at the start of the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation state is terminated after the command line is reconnected during the setting confirmation state. It is a time chart. Here, at the start of the setting confirmation state, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the command is commanded during the setting confirmation state. The case where the setting confirmation state is terminated after the line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved is described. In such a transmission cutoff situation, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as disconnecting the command line from the main control board 1310 in order to connect the above-mentioned unauthorized board to the main control board 1310 is performed. Further, in this example, the case where the setting confirmation state is set at the timing ts to tx is described, but the same applies to the case where the setting change state is set at the timing ts to tx.

As described above in detail, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the setting key ON state when the power is turned on at the timing ts, the setting state is shifted to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx, the setting confirmation state is terminated and the normal state is entered. In this example, when the power of the timing ts is turned on, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx occurs. In the middle, at the time of timing t1, the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved. That is, at the time of the timing ts when the setting confirmation state is started, the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, but the setting confirmation state is terminated. At the time of timing tx, the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be started. On the other hand, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, even if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the time of the timing tx, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game). ) Is the period during which it is possible to start.

Further, even if the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing ts, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off. In this case, the main control board 1310 cannot output the setting confirmation end command for notifying the end of the setting confirmation state to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 shifts to the setting confirmation state. I can't figure out if. Therefore, when the transmission cutoff condition occurs at the time of the timing tx, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 cannot execute the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. It is designed to perform standby operations. Here, in the standby operation, the peripheral control board 1510 operates the member instructed to operate so as to indicate that the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state of waiting for receiving a command.

Specifically, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the effect display device 1600 executes, for example, "waiting" on the screen as a standby display different from the normal display. However, the display for waiting may be the same as the normal display displayed in the state of waiting for the start of the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the state of waiting for customers). Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 has a standby light emission state different from the normal light emission, for example, a single color and weak brightness. It is designed to light up with. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 has a standby light emission state different from the normal light emission, for example, a single color and weak brightness. It is designed to light up with. However, the light emitting state for standby may be a specific light emitting state different from normal light emitting (normal light emitting), and all or part of the LED may be turned off, and the door frame may be turned off. The light emitting state of the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 may be different. For example, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are monochromatic and light with low brightness, while the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are lit. By turning off the LED, the LED (frame lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 becomes conspicuous, and it is understood that the LED (frame lamp) is in a specific light emitting state different from the normal light emission. Can be made to. Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the speaker outputs, for example, a notification sound for standby, which is different from the normal display, such as "waiting". However, the standby notification sound includes a silent state.

Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby operation for the member instructed to operate based on the reception of the setting confirmation end command. , I am trying to perform normal operations. Here, in the normal operation, when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the peripheral control board 1510 waits for the variation display of the special symbol to start (for example, in the customer waiting state). When the member instructing the operation is operated and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 changes based on the reception of the variation pattern command by the peripheral control board 1510. The operation corresponding to (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) is executed. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variation display of the decorative symbol, and mounts the effect display on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (frame lamp) and the LED (board lamp) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5, the LED lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. In this way, the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the staging display executed by the staging display device 1600.

As described in detail above, when the command line connection is not cut off when the power of the timing ts is turned on, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to be operated is checked during the timing ts to tx setting confirmation state. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status is being executed. On the other hand, when the power of the timing ts is turned on, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line is cut off, the timing ts to tx are set for the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510. During the confirmation state, the standby operation is executed without executing the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Thereby, when the power is turned on at the timing ts, the transmission cutoff status is determined by determining whether the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the standby operation. Can be confirmed whether or not is occurring.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t1, the setting confirmation state is still in progress, but the setting confirmation state is applied to the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510. The standby operation is continued until the setting confirmation state ends at the timing tx without executing the operation corresponding to. In this way, even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved during the setting confirmation status, at least the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate correspond to the setting confirmation status even though the setting confirmation status is in progress. By not executing the operation to be performed, the trace that the command line connection is cut off cannot be erased, and the deterrence against fraudulent activity can be exerted.

Further, as described above in detail, if the command line connection is not cut off during the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction when the setting confirmation state is terminated at the timing tx. The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings ts to tx is completed, but after the operation corresponding to such the setting confirmation state is completed, the setting confirmation is completed. I am trying to execute the operation. On the other hand, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off when the power of the timing ts is turned on and the transmission cutoff state is resolved during the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the setting is made in the timing tx. Regarding the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 when the confirmation state is terminated, the standby operation executed at the timings ts to tx is terminated, but such a standby operation is terminated. After that, it is restricted not to execute the operation corresponding to the end of the setting confirmation. In this example, if a transmission cutoff status occurs when the power is turned on at the timing ts, the hall administrator notices the occurrence of the transmission cutoff status and commands the command line so that the transmission cutoff status is resolved during the setting confirmation status. However, even though the transmission cutoff status has been resolved, if the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation end is executed after the standby operation is completed, the hall administrator will use the pachinko machine. Even though the inspection of 1 has been completed, there is a possibility that the subsequent game cannot be started early. However, in this example, in the situation where the transmission cutoff status occurs when the power is turned on at the timing ts, if the transmission cutoff status is resolved during the setting confirmation status, the setting confirmation ends after the standby operation ends. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by restricting the operation corresponding to the above.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the movable body mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is in the stopped state (standby state), but the transmission cutoff state is resolved during the setting confirmation state. If so, the peripheral control board 1510 is executing the initial operation of the movable body based on the reception of the setting confirmation end command at the timing tx. Then, after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the normal operation of the movable body is executed. For example, it is possible to operate the movable body during the demonstration in which the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, or during the execution of the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol.

Further, in the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the security signal is continuously output for the output from the external terminal board 558, and the output enable state A is set so that the other outputs cannot be output. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the security signal is continuously output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) for the output from the external terminal board 558, and other outputs are also possible. The output enable state B is set. Then, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the output from the external terminal board 558 is set to the output enable state C which enables all the outputs after the output of the security signal is completed for a predetermined period. Regarding the above, it is the case that the wiring connecting the external terminal board 558 and the external device (hall computer) is normally connected, and the person who tries to illegally generate the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is By disconnecting such wiring, it is conceivable that the external device (hall computer) cannot receive the security signal, and the hall administrator cannot grasp the occurrence of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, in this example, if the command line is cut off when trying to connect an unauthorized board (transmission cutoff status) or if it is reconnected, a special operation is performed to "set". It is possible to prevent "illegal abuse of the change status and setting confirmation status".

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, for a member that is executing an operation during standby, even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the volume and the volume are increased. For a member that cannot adjust the amount of light and is performing normal operation, the volume and amount of light can be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228. Specifically, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the command line connection is cut off at the time of timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction during the setting confirmation state of timing ts to tx. The member is performing the standby operation, but the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted for such a member. In this example, the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are not accepted for the member performing the standby operation, but the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are accepted. Although the volume and the amount of light are adjusted, it may be configured so as not to be reflected in the volume and the amount of light during execution. When the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved during the setting confirmation state of the timings ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction after the setting confirmation state is completed. Although the member is performing normal operation, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light for such a member.

[Third Embodiment regarding transmission cutoff status]
(When the history is displayed during the continuous setting confirmation notification after the setting confirmation status ends)
FIG. 277 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when magnetism or vibration is detected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends in the situation where the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state. It is a chart. Here, a case is described in which the effect display device 1600 is enabled to display a history, which is a history of setting changes and setting confirmations, during the setting confirmation state. Further, during the setting confirmation state, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and the command line is displayed after the setting confirmation state is completed. The case where the detection unit A detects an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration after the connection is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved and before the detection unit B detects the winning of various starting ports will be described. There is.

In this example, among the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays a history display when the effect operation unit 310 is operated as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. If the detection unit A detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration at the time of timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the effect display device 1600 displays the history and for abnormalities in magnetism or vibration. Since it is the same as FIG. 273 except that the display (operation corresponding to the abnormality notification) is executed, the description of the same points will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 273, when the detection unit A detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration at the time of timing t3 after the transmission cutoff state is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 is a member instructing operation. Of these, the LEDs (frame lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, the LEDs (board lamps) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the speakers operate according to the setting confirmation state. While the operation is completed and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the setting confirmation state executed from the timing ts without executing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. It continues to work.

FIG. 278 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period in which the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. In this example, the setting confirmation operation is performed when the power is turned on, and the setting confirmation of the set value is performed. When the setting confirmation operation is performed, the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is only confirmed and cannot be changed.

FIGS. 278 (A) and 278 (B) show the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting confirmation of the set value is performed, and FIG. 278 (A) shows the setting confirmation of the set value started. It is a display screen immediately after, and a message image "setting is being confirmed" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a guidance image (operation image showing the staging operation unit 310) for switching to the history display is displayed below it. To. FIG. 278 (B) is a history display screen switched from the display screen of FIG. 278 (A) when the effect operation unit 310 is operated.

In FIG. 278 (B), the first history display unit that can confirm the history of the past 12 times line by line is displayed on one screen, and the "date and time information" based on the RTC information and the above-mentioned fluctuation of the special symbol are displayed. "Information about the game state" whether or not the game state including the display and the jackpot game has been initialized, "Information about the set value" indicating the current set value, "Information about the count value of the relief count counter", " "Work information such as RAM clear operation and setting change operation" is recorded in order from the left. This information is stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so that it will not be erased even if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed. That is, in the display of FIGS. 278 (A) and 278, various information stored in the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. It is an effect image generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, in FIG. 278 (B), the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display unit is a display related to the current setting confirmation operation, and is ". The current set value "2" is displayed in the place of "Information about the set value". Further, a guidance image (operation image showing the staging operation unit 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. 278 (A) is displayed at the lower left of the first history display unit, and is displayed at the lower right of the first history display unit. Is highlighted with the current "information about the count value of the relief count counter".

If the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the history display screen displayed on the staging display device 1600 is erased when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. ing.

As shown in FIG. 277, when the setting confirmation state occurs at the timings ts to tx, the staging display device 1600 executes the display for setting confirmation as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In such a setting confirmation state, it is possible to display the history display by operating the staging operation unit 310. Further, during the setting confirmation state, the detection of magnetism or vibration is not enabled, and the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. Therefore, when the history display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the setting confirmation state, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the effect display device 1600 does not execute the display for the abnormality. The history display is maintained. In the setting confirmation state, when the history display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the setting confirmation display is executed, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the effect display device 1600 is used for the abnormality. The display for checking the settings is maintained without executing the display of. That is, even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs, the effect display device 1600 does not interfere with the confirmation that the setting confirmation state is being executed by the display for the abnormality, and is a deterrent against fraudulent acts. Can be demonstrated.

Then, in the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, if the transmission cutoff status occurs at the time of the timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate even after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx. With respect to the member, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed at the timings ts to tx is continued. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the staging display device 1600 executes a display for setting confirmation as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but such a setting confirmation state is completed. Later, by operating the staging operation unit 310, it is possible to display the history display. Further, after the setting confirmation state is completed, although the detection of magnetism and vibration is enabled, the peripheral control board 1510 can receive the abnormality notification command related to magnetism and vibration because the transmission cutoff status has occurred. Therefore, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification. Therefore, when the history display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the setting confirmation state is completed, the effect display is displayed even if an abnormality related to magnetism or vibration occurs as long as the transmission cutoff status occurs. The device 1600 does not execute the display for abnormality.

Then, if the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2 after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 operates even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2. For the instructed member, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state executed from the timing ts is continued. Further, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the staging display device 1600 executes a display for setting confirmation as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but the end of such a setting confirmation state. Even after the transmission cutoff status is resolved later, the history display can be displayed by operating the staging operation unit 310.

Then, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, at the time of timing t3, the signals of the magnetic sensor (detection unit A) for detecting magnetism and the vibration sensor (detection unit A) for detecting vibration are transmitted. When input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 detects an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and an abnormality notification command is output to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state, but at the time of the timing t3, the operation is continued. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the abnormality notification command, it is possible to execute the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate.

Specifically, among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command at the timing t3, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 Regarding the (frame lamp), the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is completed, and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is executed. On the other hand, among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the staging display device 1600 performs an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state and an operation corresponding to the abnormality notification without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. I try to do it. Further, when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected at the timing t3, the staging display device 1600 executes a display for setting confirmation as an operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Such magnetism or vibration is executed. Even after the abnormality is detected, the history display can be displayed by operating the staging operation unit 310. Therefore, after the transmission cutoff status after the end of the setting confirmation state is resolved, when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected, the history display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is performed. , The display for abnormality is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 278 (C), when a magnetic abnormality is detected while displaying the history display on the effect display device 1600 under such a situation, the screen of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. At the upper right, a display "Magnetic error occurred" is added as a display for abnormalities.

In the above, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command at the timing t3, it is possible to display the history display on the effect display device 1600 and execute the display for abnormality. For this reason, even when the screen is being focused on while the history display is being displayed on the staging display device 1600, by adding a display for abnormality when an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected, the display for magnetism or vibration can be added. Never overlook the occurrence of vibration-related abnormalities. Further, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is configured not to provide a lamp other than the effect display device 1600 as a member for instructing the operation, an abnormality in magnetism or vibration is detected while the effect display device 1600 is displaying the history display. By sometimes adding a display for abnormalities, the occurrence of abnormalities related to magnetism and vibration will not be overlooked.

Then, at the time of timing t3, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the abnormality notification command, it is possible to display the history display on the effect display device 1600 and execute the display for abnormality. The display for such an abnormality is set to end at the timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t3. That is, after the display for abnormality is finished at the timing t4, only the history display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, at the time of timing t4, after the display for abnormality is finished, at the time of timing t5, the signal of the ball entry sensor (detection unit B) for detecting the winning of various starting ports is the signal of the main control board 1310. When input to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board 1310 outputs a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation pattern command toward the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. At this time, after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the effect display device 1600 can display the history display, but the peripheral control board 1510 starts to fluctuate at the timing t5. Based on receiving a command or a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 ends the history display and executes a normal operation.

[Fourth Embodiment regarding transmission cutoff status]
(Regarding the relationship between the frame decoration unconnected notification and the frame opening / closing notification when the command line between the main control board and the peripheral control board is cut off)
In this example, a game board 5 that allows the game area 5a to be visually recognized from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, and a door attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 with respect to the door frame 3. A staging operation unit 300 (operation device) that is attached to the front of the frame top unit 450 (decorative member), the plate decoration unit 250, and the plate base unit 210 and can be operated by the player is attached. FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing a door frame top unit 450 and an effect operation unit 300 that can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. 246, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300 can be attached to and detached from each other with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the game island in the hall. As a group for each model series, it is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, a door frame top unit 450, and a staging operation unit 300 as a set. In other words, when changing to a new model series, with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the game island in the hall, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and staging corresponding to the series of the model before the change. After removing the operation unit 300, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the staging operation unit 300 corresponding to the new model series will be attached. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) when it is desired to renew not only the game playability but also the appearance of the gaming machine when changing models, and the efficiency is high. The playability and the appearance of the gaming machine can be renewed. Regarding the attachment / detachment of the door frame top unit 450 and the staging operation unit 300, which are replaced corresponding to the game board 5, the installation structure is based on the toolless locking portion from the viewpoint of easing the installation work of the hall manager. Will be adopted. Tool-less locking parts include, for example, a hand screw with a hand-cranked knob on the head, a well-known snap lock that can be attached and detached by one-touch operation to move the lever up or down (not shown), or rotation of the lever. A well-known crescent tablet that can be attached and detached can be exemplified by.

The peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 via the door frame top relay board. Can be controlled to emit light.

Similarly, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the staging operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 (front decorative substrate 321 and rear decorative substrate 322), a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative substrate 364, and an operation button. It is for relaying the connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. be. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322, for example, via the operation unit relay board 332.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to a frame decoration member such as the staging operation unit 300 or the staging operation unit 300. In this example, each of the frame decoration members is connected to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 by using a drawer connector. When the electrical connection by the drawer connector is cut off, the frame decoration member is separated from the pachinko machine 1 or misaligned, and the frame decoration member is not connected to the peripheral control board 1510. It is judged that it is. In addition, unlike this example, a detection switch for whether or not each of the frame decoration members is located at a regular position is provided, and the detection switch connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring is OFF. The frame decoration member may be separated from the pachinko machine 1 or misaligned, and the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that the frame decoration member is not connected.

By the way, as an illegal method, the frame decoration member is illegally detached from the pachinko machine 1 or the position is improperly displaced, so that a gap leading from the front side to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is created or the pachinko machine 1 is thin. By making holes in the places where the pachinko machines have become, access from the front side to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is made possible, and an illegal board is attached to the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable to connect. Regarding an illegal board (so-called hanging board), for example, it is connected to the main control board 1310, and contrary to the original game, the ball entry signal input to the main control board 1310 when the start prize is won is illegally input. It is conceivable that the variable display of the special symbol may be illegally stopped at the jackpot symbol, or the jackpot game may be illegally generated. Further, a plurality of wirings are connected to the main control board 1310 by connectors, and such an unauthorized board may be connected by using any of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by the connector. For example, it is conceivable that a predetermined wiring is separated from the main control board 1310, and an unauthorized board is relayed to the wiring to be connected to the main control board 1310. Similarly, a plurality of wires are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by a connector, but such an unauthorized board is connected by using one of the plurality of wires erroneously connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by a connector. For example, the wiring with the frame decoration member such as the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation unit 300 is separated from the peripheral control board 1510, and the unauthorized board is relayed to the wiring to connect to the peripheral control board 1510. Can be considered. That is, when such a frame decoration member is not connected, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as the above-mentioned unauthorized board being connected to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. In this example, when the frame decoration member is not connected, a method for preventing such fraud will be described below.

FIG. 279 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is not connected. Here, in a normal situation where the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is maintained, the wiring between the frame decoration member and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, and so on. The case where the frame decoration non-connection notification is executed when the decoration member is not connected is described.

As shown in FIG. 279, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the normal state is controlled and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, the variable display of the special symbol can be started when there is a start prize, and the big hit game is started when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the winning symbol. You can play a normal game that you can do.

Further, as the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, the LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member such as the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300. ), LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as members that are not frame decoration members (LEDs outside the frame decoration 1), and LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 as members that are not frame decoration members (frame decorations). There are external LEDs 2), speakers, etc., but these members are designed to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts. Here, in the normal operation, when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the peripheral control board 1510 waits for the variation display of the special symbol to start (for example, in the customer waiting state). When the member instructing the operation is operated and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 changes based on the reception of the variation pattern command by the peripheral control board 1510. The operation corresponding to (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) is executed. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, reach effect) including a variation display of the decorative symbol, and mounts the effect display on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member. LED (LED inside the frame decoration), LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED outside the frame decoration 1), LED mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 (LED outside the frame decoration 2) Then, the LED is turned on and blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600, and the sound is output from the speaker in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. ing.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 periodically (including real-time) determines whether or not it is electrically connected to a frame decoration member such as the staging operation unit 300 or the staging operation unit 300 after the power is turned on. ing. Then, when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing tx after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the peripheral control board 1510 excludes a part of the members instructing the operation, and the normal operation is performed. The operation is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is executed. For example, when it is determined in the peripheral control board 1510 that the frame decoration member is not connected, the LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member and the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are used. Except for the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the screen, the effect display device 1600 executes the display of "Error of not connecting the frame decoration member" on the screen as the display for not connecting the frame decoration. In the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, the LED is turned on and blinks with a single color and strong brightness as the light emission for not connecting the frame decoration, and the LED is emitted from the speaker. , As a notification sound for not connecting the frame decoration, a notification sound "A non-connection error of the frame decoration member has occurred" is output.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is periodically (including real-time) after the power is turned on to determine whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the frame decoration member such as the staging operation unit 300 or the staging operation unit 300. Although it is executed, it may be executed only at the timing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on) when the power is turned on only once. In such a case, if the frame decoration member is not connected before the timing tx arrives, it is possible to determine that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of the timing tx. However, if the frame decoration member is not connected after the timing tx, it cannot be determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, and the frame decoration non-connection notification is not executed. ..

Specifically, when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected in the peripheral control board 1510 at the time of timing tx, among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 and the door frame Regarding the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) and the speaker mounted on the various decorative boards of No. 3, the normal operation is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is executed. In this way, except for a part of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the frame decoration member is subjected to the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification in preference to the normal operation. It is a state to be wary of fraudulent acts such as disconnecting the frame decoration member and connecting the fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 without overlooking the occurrence of abnormalities related to unconnected. You can be sure that you will understand that. On the other hand, the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 continues the normal operation without performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification. In this way, even if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected in the peripheral control board 1510 at the time of timing tx, the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 is mounted. ), By continuing the normal operation, it is possible to grasp that the game can be started even though the frame decoration member is not connected. The LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member is described as "off" in the figure because the frame decoration member is not connected.

In this example, when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tx, the frame decoration non-connection notification is supported except for a part of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. However, even if the frame decoration member is reconnected after that and the unconnected state of the frame decoration member is resolved, the normal operation is not restored and the frame decoration non-connection notification is sent. I am trying to continue the corresponding operation. As a result, even if the position of the frame decoration member is returned after the illegal board is attached to the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 by removing the frame decoration member, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued. As a result, traces of the frame decoration member being unconnected will remain, and a deterrent against fraudulent activity can be exerted.

In this example, a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main body frame opening sensor that detects the opening / closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are provided. The main control board 1310 detects whether or not the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 and whether or not the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and monitors whether or not the door frame 4 is open. are doing. Further, when the ON signal of the door frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 uses a command line to send a door frame opening command for transmitting the opening of the door frame 3. The output is directed to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the OFF signal of the door frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 conveys the closure of the door frame 3. The door frame closing command is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Similarly, when the ON signal of the main body frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 uses a command line for the main body frame opening command for transmitting the opening of the main body frame 4. When the OFF signal of the main body frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 notifies that the main body frame 4 is closed. The main body frame closing command is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Then, when the door frame 3 is opened at the time of timing t1 after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the operation of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the reception of the door frame opening command, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is executed in preference to the frame decoration non-connection notification. For example, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member and the LED (frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5. Except for the outer LED1), in the effect display device 1600, "the door frame is open" is displayed on the screen as a display for opening the door frame, and it is mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3. In the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration), the LED is turned on and blinks with a single color and strong brightness as the light emission for opening the door frame, and the speaker emits a "door" as a notification sound for opening the door frame. The notification sound "The frame is open" is output.

Specifically, among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate when the door frame 3 is opened at the time of timing t1 after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tx. As a member that executes an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t1, the effect display device 1600, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker. Priority is given to the frame decoration unconnected notification, and the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is executed. As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t1, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration non-connection notification. This means that, for example, when the door frame 3 is opened due to fraudulent activity, that fact cannot be overlooked. The LED (LED1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as a member that does not execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t1 is the timing t1. At this point, even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal operation is continued.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed at the time of timing t2 after the door frame 3 is opened at the timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate. Based on the reception of the door frame closing command, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). As a result, even if the opening of the door frame 3 is closed in a short time, it is surely grasped that the door frame 3 has been opened by executing the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification for a predetermined period thereafter. It is possible to confirm whether or not the door frame 3 has been opened by the regular work.

Specifically, when the door frame 3 is closed at the timing t2, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 is used as a single color to emit light for closing the door frame. The LED is turned on and blinks with strong brightness, and the speaker outputs a notification sound "door frame closed" as a notification sound for closing the door frame. The light emitting state for closing the door frame is different from the light emitting state for opening the door frame, such as lighting / blinking of the LED and different emission colors, but the same light emitting state may be used. .. Further, among the members performing the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification at the timings t1 to t2, the LED (LED2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the speaker are the timing t2. When the door frame 3 is closed, the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification is executed, but the effect display device 1600 does not execute the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed at the timing t2, the effect display device 1600 is mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 after the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is completed at the timing t2. For the LED (LED2 outside the frame decoration) and the speaker, after the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the timing t2 is completed, the normal operation for these members is completed. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted without executing. As a result, an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member occurs, and in a situation where the peripheral control board 1510 is executing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the door frame 3 is opened and closed to notify the frame decoration non-connection notification. Even if the operation corresponding to the above is terminated, after the door frame 3 is closed, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is resumed, so that the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected remains, which is a fraudulent act. Can exert deterrence against.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to detect magnetism by a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, or by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1. It has a configuration to detect vibration by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1. With these configurations, it is detected whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 and the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. are doing. Further, when the signal of the magnetic sensor (detection unit A) for detecting magnetism or the vibration sensor (detection unit A) for detecting vibration is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 Has detected an abnormality in magnetism or vibration, and an abnormality notification command for notifying the execution of abnormality notification based on the occurrence of the abnormality is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. Then, when magnetism is detected at the time of timing t3 after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 has a magnetic anomaly for the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate. Based on the reception of the notification command, the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration unconnected notification. For example, when magnetism is detected, an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LED inside the frame decoration) or an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). Except for, in the effect display device 1600, as a display for magnetic abnormality, "a magnetic error has occurred" is displayed on the screen, and LEDs (frames) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are mounted. In the non-decorative LED 2), the LED is turned on and off with a single color and strong brightness as the light emission for magnetic abnormality, and the speaker says "A magnetic error has occurred" as a notification sound for magnetic abnormality. The notification sound is output.

Specifically, when magnetism is detected at the time of timing t3 after it is determined by timing tx that the frame decoration member is not connected, among the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate, from timing t3. As a member that executes an operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification, the effect display device 1600, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker are frames. Priority is given to the unconnected notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed. As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3, the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration non-connection notification. So, for example, when magnetism is detected by fraudulent activity, that fact cannot be overlooked. The LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as a member that does not execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3 is the timing t3. At that point, even if magnetism is detected, normal operation is continued.

The operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is set to end when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t3. Then, after the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is completed, the normal operation is executed for the effect display device 1600, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted without doing so. As a result, an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member occurs, and in a situation where the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the magnet is brought closer so that magnetism is detected. Even if an attempt is made to end the operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification, the frame decoration member is not connected because the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the magnetism was detected. Traces will remain, and it will be possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the period in which the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the frame is used. The operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification is never terminated. On the other hand, when the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification, the door frame closing notification, and the magnetic abnormality notification are supported. Even if the operation is executed, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is resumed after the operation is completed, but the hall manager is specified by providing a specific operation unit on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. When the operation unit is operated, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification may be terminated and the normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players cannot erase the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected, and only the hall manager can erase the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected, so that fraudulent acts are performed. The hall manager can surely confirm whether or not there is any.

Further, when it is determined in the peripheral control board 1510 that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing tx, no signal regarding the non-connection of the frame decoration member is output from the external terminal board 558. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open in the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t1, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened with respect to the output from the external terminal board 558. Is outputting a signal related to. Similarly, when it is determined that magnetism or vibration is detected by the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t3, a signal related to magnetism or vibration detection is output from the output from the external terminal board 558. .. As a result, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp whether or not the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open, and whether or not magnetism or vibration is detected, whereas the frame. It is not possible to know whether or not the decorative member is not connected, but if the frame decorative member is not connected, after opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, or after detecting magnetism or vibration. However, by continuing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification as much as possible by the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the frame decoration member is not connected. Then, it is possible to surely grasp that the state should be watched for fraudulent acts such as the unauthorized board being connected to the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the external device (hole computer) does not know whether or not the frame decoration member is not connected, but in this example, the frame decoration member is not connected in an attempt to connect an unauthorized board. By performing a special operation when it is set to, it is possible to prevent "illegal abuse by misusing the unconnected frame decoration member".

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, for a member that is performing a normal operation, the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. For members that can adjust the amount of light and perform operations that correspond to frame decoration unconnected notification, door frame opening notification, door frame closing notification, and magnetic anomaly notification. Even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted. That is, at the time of timing tx, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the member performing the normal operation (LED (outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5). Except for LED1)), it is impossible to adjust the volume and amount of light. In this example, the member performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is described. Although the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 is not accepted, the volume and light amount are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, but they are reflected in the running volume and light amount. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

FIG. 280 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line is reconnected while the door frame 3 is open in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected after the command line connection is cut off. Is. Here, it is a case where the frame decoration member is not connected after the transmission cutoff situation in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off occurs, and the door frame 3 The case where the door frame 3 is closed after the command line is reconnected after opening the door and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved will be described. Further, although the case where the door frame 3 is closed after the command line is reconnected after the door frame 3 is opened and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the command line is displayed after the main body frame 4 is opened. The same applies to the case where the main body frame 4 is closed after the connection is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved.

As shown in FIG. 280, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the normal state is controlled and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, the variable display of the special symbol can be started when there is a start prize, and the big hit game is started when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the winning symbol. You can play a normal game that you can do.

In this example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at the time of the timing ty. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to a frame decoration member such as the staging operation unit 300 or the staging operation unit 300, but after a transmission cutoff situation occurs at the timing ty, At the time of timing tx, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected. When the frame decoration member is not connected, the frame decoration non-connection notification is executed, but the frame decoration non-connection notification is not executed, and the frame decoration member is not connected. There is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed, such as causing a transmission interruption status before.

Further, as the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, the LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member such as the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300. ), LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as members that are not frame decoration members (LEDs outside the frame decoration 1), and LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 as members that are not frame decoration members (frame decorations). There are external LEDs 2), speakers, etc., but these members are designed to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts. Regarding such a normal operation, even if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at the time of timing ty, the normal operation is continued after the transmission cutoff situation occurs.

Then, when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing tx after the transmission cutoff condition occurs at the timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 excludes a part of the members instructing the operation. The normal operation is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is executed. For example, when it is determined in the peripheral control board 1510 that the frame decoration member is not connected, the LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member and the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are used. Except for the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the screen, the effect display device 1600 executes the display of "Error of not connecting the frame decoration member" on the screen as the display for not connecting the frame decoration. In the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3, the LED is turned on and blinks with a single color and strong brightness as the light emission for not connecting the frame decoration, and the LED is emitted from the speaker. , As a notification sound for not connecting the frame decoration, a notification sound "A non-connection error of the frame decoration member has occurred" is output.

Specifically, if it is determined by the peripheral control board 1510 that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing tx after the transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. Among the members, the effect display device 1600, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker are operated to end the normal operation and correspond to the frame decoration non-connection notification. Is running. In this way, even if the connection of the command line is cut off before the frame decoration member is disconnected, when the frame decoration member is not connected, the frame decoration non-connection notification is supported. By executing the operation, it is not possible to overlook the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member, and the fraudulent board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 after the frame decoration member is not connected. You can be sure that you are in a state where you should be wary of whether or not you have been damaged.

The LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 continues the normal operation without executing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification. In this way, even if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected in the peripheral control board 1510 at the time of timing tx, the LED (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 is mounted. ), By continuing the normal operation, it is possible to grasp that the game can be started even though the frame decoration member is not connected. The LED (LED in the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member is described as "off" in the figure because the frame decoration member is not connected.

Then, at the time of timing t1, when the ON signal of the door frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 receives a door frame opening command for transmitting the opening of the door frame 3. , Is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. However, even if the ON signal of the door frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff state occurs at the time of timing t1, the main control board 1310 has the door. The frame opening command cannot be output to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 cannot grasp whether or not the door frame 3 is open. Therefore, if a transmission cutoff situation occurs at the timing t1, even after the door frame 3 is opened, the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate corresponds to the door frame opening notification. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification executed at the timings ty to t1 is continued without executing the operation to be performed. As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification before the timing t1, even if the door frame 3 is opened at the time of the timing t1, the frame decoration is not yet connected. By continuing the operation corresponding to the connection notification, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the unauthorized board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 after the frame decoration member is not connected. , It is possible to surely grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be cautious about whether or not cheating is being carried out. The LED (LED1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 as a member that does not execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t1 is the timing t1. At this point, even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal operation is continued.

In this example, when the door frame 3 is opened at the timing t1, a transmission cutoff state is occurring, and the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification. However, while the door frame 3 is open, the command line is reconnected to eliminate the transmission cutoff situation. Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the door frame 3 is closed at the time of timing t2. Even if the door frame 3 is opened during the transmission cutoff situation, the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued, but the fraudster expects that the frame decoration non-connection notification will end. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts have been carried out, such as resolving the transmission cutoff situation and closing the door frame 3.

Then, when a transmission cutoff situation occurs, after the door frame 3 is opened, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is notified of the frame decoration not connected, which is executed from the timing ty. Although the corresponding operation is continued, even if the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification is not executed. , The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued. As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification after the door frame 3 is opened, the frame decoration is not displayed even when the transmission cutoff status is resolved while the door frame 3 is opened. By continuing the operation corresponding to the connection notification, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the unauthorized board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 after the frame decoration member is not connected. , It is possible to surely grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be cautious about whether or not cheating is being carried out.

Then, when the OFF signal of the door frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t2 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the main control board 1310 closes the door frame 3. A door frame closing command for communication is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using a command line. However, even if the OFF signal of the door frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff status is resolved during the opening of the door frame 3, the door frame 3 is closed after the door frame 3 is closed. For the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification executed from the timing ty is continued without executing the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification. ing. On the other hand, as described in detail above, when the transmission cutoff condition does not occur during the opening of the door frame 3, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate after the door frame 3 is closed is described. Based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the door frame closing command, the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification after the door frame 3 is opened, the door frame is closed even when the door frame 3 is closed after the transmission cutoff status is resolved. By continuing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification without executing the operation corresponding to the notification, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the frame decoration member is not connected. In addition, it is possible to surely grasp that the state should be watched for fraudulent acts such as the unauthorized board being connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, in the situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if the transmission cutoff state is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, then when magnetism is detected at the timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 For the member instructed to operate, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the magnetic anomaly notification command, and gives priority to the frame decoration unconnected notification to execute the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification. There is. For example, when magnetism is detected, an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LED inside the frame decoration) or an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). Except for, in the effect display device 1600, as a display for magnetic abnormality, "a magnetic error has occurred" is displayed on the screen, and LEDs (frames) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are mounted. In the non-decorative LED 2), the LED is turned on and off with a single color and strong brightness as the light emission for magnetic abnormality, and the speaker says "A magnetic error has occurred" as a notification sound for magnetic abnormality. The notification sound is output.

Specifically, in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if magnetism is detected at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff state is resolved while the door frame 3 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 Among the members that instruct the operation, the LEDs (frames) mounted on the various decorative boards of the effect display device 1600 and the door frame 3 are the members that execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3. Regarding the non-decorative LED 2) and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed with priority given to the frame decoration non-connection notification. As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3, the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration non-connection notification. So, for example, when magnetism is detected by fraudulent activity, that fact cannot be overlooked. The LED (LED1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 as a member that does not execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3 is the timing t1. At that point, even if magnetism is detected, normal operation is continued.

The operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is set to end when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t3. Then, after the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is completed, the normal operation is executed for the effect display device 1600, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted without doing so. As a result, an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member occurs, and in a situation where the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the magnet is brought closer so that magnetism is detected. Even if an attempt is made to end the operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification, the frame decoration member is not connected because the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the magnetism was detected. Traces will remain, and it will be possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the period in which the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the frame is used. The operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification is never terminated. On the other hand, when the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the door frame 3 is opened and closed so as to eliminate the transmission cutoff state while the door frame 3 is open. Even if it does, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued, and even if magnetism or vibration is detected, the frame decoration non-connection notification is supported after the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is completed. Although the operation is restarted, a specific operation unit is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates the specific operation unit, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is terminated. , The normal operation may be executed. As a result, some players cannot erase the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected, and only the hall manager can erase the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected, so that fraudulent acts are performed. The hall manager can surely confirm whether or not there is any.

Further, when it is determined in the peripheral control board 1510 that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing tx, no signal regarding the non-connection of the frame decoration member is output from the external terminal board 558. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open in the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t1, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened with respect to the output from the external terminal board 558. Is outputting a signal related to. Similarly, when it is determined that magnetism or vibration is detected by the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t3, a signal related to magnetism or vibration detection is output from the output from the external terminal board 558. .. As a result, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp whether or not the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open, and whether or not magnetism or vibration is detected, whereas the frame. It is not possible to know whether or not the decorative member is not connected, but if the frame decorative member is not connected, the transmission cutoff status should be resolved while the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open. Even when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened or closed, or even after magnetism or vibration is detected, the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification as much as possible. It is necessary to be careful not to overlook the occurrence of abnormalities related to the non-connection of the decorative member, and to be careful of any fraudulent acts such as connecting the fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after disconnecting the frame decorative member. It is possible to surely grasp that it is in a state. As described above, the external device (hole computer) does not know whether or not the frame decoration member is not connected, but in this example, the frame decoration member is not connected in an attempt to connect an unauthorized board. By performing a special operation when the command line is cut off (transmission cutoff status) or when it is reconnected before it is set to, "illegal abuse of unconnected frame decoration member" is prevented. can do.

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, for a member that is performing a normal operation, the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. For members that can adjust the amount of light and perform operations that correspond to frame decoration unconnected notification, door frame opening notification, door frame closing notification, and magnetic anomaly notification. Even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted. That is, at the time of timing tx, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the member performing the normal operation (LED (outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5). Except for LED1)), it is impossible to adjust the volume and amount of light. In this example, the member performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is described. Although the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 is not accepted, the volume and light amount are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, but they are reflected in the running volume and light amount. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

FIG. 281 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line is reconnected before the main body frame 4 is opened in the situation where the frame decoration member is not connected after the command line connection is cut off. It is a time chart showing. Here, it is a case where the frame decoration member is not connected after the transmission cutoff situation in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off occurs, and the main body frame 4 The case where the main body frame 4 is opened after the command line is reconnected before opening and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved is described. Further, although the case where the main body frame 4 is opened after the command line is reconnected before the main body frame 4 is opened and the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the case where the main body frame 4 is opened is described, but after the door frame 3 is opened. The same applies to the case where the door frame 3 is closed after the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved.

In this example, after a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off at the time of timing ty, the frame decoration member is at the time of timing tx. Since it is the same as FIG. 280 in that it is not connected, the description of these points will be omitted.

First, at the time of timing tx, when the frame decoration member is not connected while the transmission cutoff status is occurring, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 performs an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification. It is being executed, but after that, the command line is reconnected to eliminate the transmission cutoff status. Then, after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the main body frame 4 is opened at the time of timing t1. Even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued, but the fraudster expects that the frame decoration non-connection notification will end, and the transmission cutoff status is resolved and the main unit is used. There is a possibility that cheating has been carried out, such as opening the frame 4.

Specifically, when the frame decoration member is not connected during the occurrence of the transmission cutoff state at the time of timing tx, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate is executed from the timing ty. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued, but after that, even if the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is performed. I try to continue. In this way, for the member that is executing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the frame decoration non-connection notification can be continued by continuing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification. It is necessary to be careful not to overlook the occurrence of abnormalities related to the non-connection of the decorative member, and to be careful of any fraudulent acts such as connecting the fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after disconnecting the frame decorative member. It is possible to surely grasp that it is in a state.

Then, when the ON signal of the main body frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t2 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, the main control board 1310 opens the main body frame 4. The main body frame opening command for transmission is output to the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. However, even if the ON signal of the main body frame open sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff status is resolved before the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame 4 is opened. After that, for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification executed from the timing ty is continued without executing the operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification. I try to do it. On the other hand, as described in detail above, if the transmission cutoff status does not occur before the main body frame 4 is opened, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate after the main body frame 4 is opened. The peripheral control board 1510 is configured to execute an operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification based on the reception of the main body frame opening command. In this way, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification is executed even when the main body frame 4 is opened. By continuing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification without doing so, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the unauthorized board controls the periphery after the frame decoration member is not connected. It is possible to surely grasp that the state should be watched for fraudulent acts such as being connected to the board 1510.

Then, after the main body frame 4 is opened at the timing t1, when the OFF signal of the main body frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at the time of the timing t2, the main control board 1310 is the main body frame. The main body frame closing command for notifying the closing of 4 is output toward the peripheral control board 1510 using the command line. However, even if the OFF signal of the main body frame opening sensor is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the transmission cutoff status is resolved before the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame 4 is closed. After that, for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification executed from the timing ty is continued without executing the operation corresponding to the main body frame closing notification. I try to do it. On the other hand, as described in detail above, if the transmission cutoff condition does not occur before the main body frame 4 is opened, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate after the main body frame 4 is closed. With respect to the above, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the main body frame closing command, the operation corresponding to the main body frame closing notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, the main body frame is closed even when the main body frame 4 is closed after the main body frame 4 is opened. By continuing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification without executing the operation corresponding to the notification, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member is not overlooked, and the frame decoration member is not connected. In addition, it is possible to surely grasp that the state should be watched for fraudulent acts such as the unauthorized board being connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this example, when the main body frame 4 is opened after the transmission cutoff status is cleared before the main body frame 4 is opened, the frame is not executed without performing the operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification. The operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification is continued, but the door frame 3 is opened while the transmission cutoff status is occurring, and the frame decoration is performed only when the main body frame 4 is opened while the door frame 3 is open. The operation corresponding to the unconnected notification may be continued. That is, when the door frame 3 is opened while the transmission cutoff situation is occurring, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the door frame opening command, and the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate the member. , The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is continued, but when the main body frame 4 is opened after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved under such a situation, the operation corresponding to the main body frame opening notification is performed. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification may be continued without being executed.

Then, in the situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if the transmission cutoff state is resolved before the main body frame 4 is opened, then, when magnetism is detected at the timing t3, peripheral control is performed. For the member whose operation is instructed by the board 1510, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the magnetic anomaly notification command, the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration unconnected notification. I am doing it. For example, when magnetism is detected, an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member (LED inside the frame decoration) or an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). Except for, in the effect display device 1600, as a display for magnetic abnormality, "a magnetic error has occurred" is displayed on the screen, and LEDs (frames) mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are mounted. In the non-decorative LED 2), the LED is turned on and off with a single color and strong brightness as the light emission for magnetic abnormality, and the speaker says "A magnetic error has occurred" as a notification sound for magnetic abnormality. The notification sound is output.

Specifically, in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, if magnetism is detected at the timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is cleared before the main body frame 4 is opened, peripheral control is performed. Among the members instructed to operate by the board 1510, the members that execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3 are mounted on various decorative boards of the effect display device 1600 and the door frame 3. As for the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration non-connection notification. As described above, for the member that executes the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3, the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is executed with priority over the frame decoration non-connection notification. So, for example, when magnetism is detected by fraudulent activity, that fact cannot be overlooked. The LED (LED1 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 as a member that does not execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification before the timing t3 is the timing t1. At that point, even if magnetism is detected, normal operation is continued.

The operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is set to end when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t3. Then, after the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is completed, the normal operation is executed for the effect display device 1600, the LED (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the speaker. The operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted without doing so. As a result, an abnormality related to the non-connection of the frame decoration member occurs, and in a situation where the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the magnet is brought closer so that magnetism is detected. Even if an attempt is made to end the operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification, the frame decoration member is not connected because the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is restarted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the magnetism was detected. Traces will remain, and it will be possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Even if the operation unit (button) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the period in which the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the frame is used. The operation corresponding to the decoration non-connection notification is never terminated. On the other hand, when the member instructing the operation of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing an operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the frame decoration is not connected even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed after the transmission cutoff status is resolved. The operation corresponding to the notification is continued, and even if magnetism or vibration is detected, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration unconnected notification is resumed after the operation corresponding to the magnetic anomaly notification is completed. A specific operation unit is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the hall manager operates the specific operation unit, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is terminated and the normal operation is executed. You may do so. As a result, some players cannot erase the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected, and only the hall manager can erase the trace that the frame decoration member is not connected, so that fraudulent acts are performed. The hall manager can surely confirm whether or not there is any.

Further, when it is determined in the peripheral control board 1510 that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing tx, no signal regarding the non-connection of the frame decoration member is output from the external terminal board 558. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open in the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t1, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened with respect to the output from the external terminal board 558. Is outputting a signal related to. Similarly, when it is determined that magnetism or vibration is detected by the main control board 1310 at the time of timing t3, a signal related to magnetism or vibration detection is output from the output from the external terminal board 558. .. As a result, on the external device (hall computer) side, it is possible to grasp whether or not the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open, and whether or not magnetism or vibration is detected, whereas the frame. It is not possible to know whether or not the decorative member is not connected, but if the frame decorative member is not connected, when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened or closed after the transmission cutoff status is resolved, or Even after detecting magnetism or vibration, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continues the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification as much as possible, so that the occurrence of an abnormality related to the frame decoration non-connection is overlooked. It is possible to surely grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be cautious about whether or not fraudulent acts have been performed, such as connecting the fraudulent board to the peripheral control board 1510 after disconnecting the frame decoration member. .. As described above, the external device (hole computer) does not know whether or not the frame decoration member is not connected, but in this example, the frame decoration member is not connected in an attempt to connect an unauthorized board. By performing a special operation when the command line is cut off (transmission cutoff status) or when it is reconnected before it is set to, "illegal abuse of unconnected frame decoration member" is prevented. can do.

Further, although not shown, as a member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate, for a member that is performing a normal operation, the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. For members that can adjust the amount of light and perform operations that correspond to frame decoration unconnected notification, door frame opening notification, door frame closing notification, and magnetic anomaly notification. Even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted. That is, at the time of timing tx, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the member performing the normal operation (LED (outside the frame decoration) mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5). Except for LED1)), it is impossible to adjust the volume and amount of light. In this example, the member performing the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame opening notification, the operation corresponding to the door frame closing notification, and the operation corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification is described. Although the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 is not accepted, the volume and light amount are adjusted by accepting the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, but they are reflected in the running volume and light amount. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

(Regarding the relationship between the setting confirmation notification and the frame decoration unconnected notification when the command line between the main control board and the peripheral control board is cut off)
FIG. 282 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the command line connection is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the frame decoration member is not connected after the command line is reconnected after the setting confirmation state ends. It is a time chart showing. Here, a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the command line is after the setting confirmation state is completed. Is reconnected and the frame decoration member is not connected after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved.

As described in detail above, this is the case when a transmission cutoff situation occurs in which the connection of the command line between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state ends. When the detection unit A detects an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration before the detection unit B detects winning of various start ports after the command line is reconnected and the transmission cutoff status is resolved later. Is described with reference to FIG. 273. Specifically, if a transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing t1 during the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx. For the members that are in use, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, and even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2 after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the periphery For the members to which the control board 1510 is instructed to operate, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued. Then, when the detection unit A detects magnetism or vibration after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame 3 among the members instructed to operate. For the LED (frame lamp), the LED (board lamp) mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the speaker, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is given priority over the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, for the effect display device 1600, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued. That is, under such a situation, when the detection unit A detects magnetism or vibration, the setting confirmation notification (operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state) and the abnormality notification (operation corresponding to the abnormality notification) are performed at the same time. It can be carried out without overlooking the occurrence of abnormalities related to magnetism and vibration.

In this example, if a transmission cutoff status occurs at the timing t1 during the setting confirmation state of the timing ts to tx, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx. For the members, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, and even if the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2 after the setting confirmation state is completed at the timing tx, the peripheral control is performed. Since the member to which the board 1510 is instructed to operate is the same as FIG. 273 in that the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, the description of these points will be omitted. In FIG. 273, the detection unit A detects magnetism and vibration after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, whereas in FIG. 282, the frame decoration is performed after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2. The member is not connected.

First, if the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2 after the setting confirmation status is completed at the timing tx, the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate corresponds to the setting confirmation status. However, even if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing t3 after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. With respect to the member, the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state is continued, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is not executed. That is, under such a situation, when the frame decoration member is not connected, the setting confirmation notification (operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state) and the frame decoration non-connection notification (operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification) are performed. ) And not executed at the same time. As described with reference to FIG. 279, when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected in a situation where the transmission cutoff condition does not occur, a part of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is excluded. Therefore, the normal operation is terminated, and the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is executed.

In the above, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the time of timing t3 after the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2, the member to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate is referred to. , The operation corresponding to the setting confirmation status is continued. As a result, it is possible to leave a trace that the connection of the command line is cut off, and it is possible to grasp that it is in a state to be wary of whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. That is, even if the frame decoration member is intentionally unconnected after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, a trace of the command line connection being cut off remains, so that it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities. .. Further, since the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification, the trace that the command line connection is cut off is disturbed by other notifications. You can check without having to.

If the frame decoration member is not connected during the transmission cutoff status of timings tx to t2 (before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at timing t2), the peripheral control board 1510 gives an operation instruction. For the member, the operation corresponding to the frame decoration non-connection notification is not executed without ending the operation corresponding to the setting confirmation state. In this way, even if the frame decoration member is not connected before the transmission cutoff status is resolved at the timing t2, at least the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 is in the setting confirmation state. By not terminating the corresponding operation, it is not possible to erase the trace that the command line connection is cut off, and it is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it is necessary to be wary of any fraudulent activity. In other words, even if the frame decoration member is intentionally unconnected during the transmission cutoff status after the setting confirmation state is completed, traces of the command line connection being cut off remain, so deterrence against fraudulent activity is provided. Can be demonstrated.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine as the game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is a combination of a pachinko machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied to the machine, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B, and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is produced at an eccentric position with respect to the center of the set plate 1650. A display device 1600 may be attached. Further, although one effect display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2555 Center right front plate (holding plate)
2555a First containment section (containment section)
2555b Second containment section (containment section)
2555c Peeling hole 2555d In front of the ridge (protrusion)
2700 Specific obstacle nail group 2701 Braided nail part 2710 Lead area 2711 First lead area 2712 Second lead area N Obstacle nail

Claims (1)

A game board is provided in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed, and a game ball enters a starting port provided in the game area to execute a symbol-variable game, and a big hit in the symbol-variable game. In a gaming machine in which a jackpot game can be executed by deriving the result, and the symbol variation game can be executed by setting a predetermined set value for the game when the power is turned on.
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game, an effect control means for controlling the progress of the effect, and
A transmission means for transmitting information from the main control means to the staging control means, and
Equipped with
The main control means starts a specific state in which the set value can be determined or confirmed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and ends the specific state when the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
When starting the specific state, information regarding the start of the specific state is transmitted from the main control means to the staging control means through the transmission means.
When the specific state is terminated, information regarding the termination of the specific state is transmitted from the main control means to the staging control means through the transmission means.
Upon receiving the information regarding the start of the specific state, the staging control means executes the first notification to the outside to notify the outside of the specific state by using the predetermined notification member, and receives the information regarding the end of the specific state. The first notification is terminated, and a second notification different from the first notification is executed using a predetermined notification member.
When the staging control means cannot receive the information regarding the end of the specific state due to a transmission cutoff situation in which the information transmission by the transmission means is disabled, the first notification is performed even after the specific state is completed. Is to continue,
The game machine characterized in that the continuous first notification is continued even after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved, and is terminated based on the entry of the ball into the start port after the transmission cutoff situation is resolved.

Images